System Manual SIMOCODE Pro en

Motor Management and
Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro
System Manual
05/2011
Industrial Controls
Answers for industry.

Safety guidelines
Table of contents
Important information
System description
1
Short instructions for configuring
a reversing starter 2
Motor protection
3
Motor control
4
Monitoring functions
5
Outputs
6
Inputs
7
Analog value recording
8
3UF50 compatibility mode 9
Standard functions
10
Logic modules
11
Communication
12
Mounting, wiring, interfaces 13
Commissioning and servicing 14
Alarms, faults and system events 15
Tables
A
Data formats and data records B
Dimension drawings
C
Technical data D
Example circuits
E
Safety and commissioning
information for EEx areas
F
Index
List of abbreviations
Glossary
Feedback form
System manual
Edition 05/2011
Order number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODEpro
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions..
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account.
Warning
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY
631 6050-22 DS 03
10/2005
Copyright Siemens AG 2011
Subject to change
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB631 6050-22 DS 03 i
Table of contents
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
1 System description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.3 Application example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.4 Check list for selecting a device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5 Overview of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5.1 Protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5.2 Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5.3 Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.5.4 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.5.5 Standard functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.5.6 Additional signal processing with freely-programmable logic modules . . . 1-21
1.5.7 Operating, service and diagnostic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.6 Overview of system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.7 Description of system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1.7.1 Basic units (BU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1.7.2 Operator panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.7.3 Operator panel with display (OPD) for SIMOCODE pro V. . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1.7.4 Current measuring module (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C and
SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
1.7.5 Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
1.7.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for current/voltage measuring modules,
SIMOCODE pro V device series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
1.7.7 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . 1-99
1.7.8 Configuration information for using an operator panel with display
and/or a decoupling module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106
1.7.9 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
1.7.10 Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
1.8 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
1.8.1 Function blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
1.9 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
2 Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Introduction and objective of the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4 Extending the reversing starter with a control station via PROFIBUS DP . 2-10
Table of contents
SIMOCODE pro
ii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3 Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3 Unbalance protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.4 Stalled rotor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.5 Thermistor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
4 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.2 Operating modes and mode selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.1.3 Releases and enabled control command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.1.4 Control station settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2 Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.2 General settings and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.2.3 "Overload relay" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.2.4 "Direct starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.2.5 "Reversing starter" control function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.2.6 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.2.7 "Star-delta starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.2.8 "Star delta reversing starter" control function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.2.9 "Dahlander" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.2.10 "Dahlander reversing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.2.11 "Pole changing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.2.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.2.13 "Solenoid valve" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.2.14 "Positioner" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.2.15 "Soft starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.2.16 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.3 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
5 Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Earth-fault monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.2 Internal earth-fault monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.1.3 External earth-fault monitoring (with summation current transformer) . . . 5-4
5.2 Current limit monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.2 I> (upper limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.3 I< (lower limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3 Voltage monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4 Cos phi monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.5 Active power monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.6 0/4-20 mA monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.7 Operation monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.7.2 Operating hours monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Table of contents
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 iii
5.7.3 Motor stop time monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.7.4 Monitoring the number of starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.8 Temperature monitoring (analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.10 Hysteresis for monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
6 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Basic unit outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3 Operator panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.4 Digital module outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.5 Analog module output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.6 Cyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.7 Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
7 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Basic unit inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.3 Operator panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.4 Digital module inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.5 Temperature module inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.6 Analog module inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.7 Cyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.8 Acyclic Receive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
8 Analog value recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
9 3UF50 compatibility mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
10 Standard functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2 Test/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.3 Test position feedback (TPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.4 External fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.5 Operational protection OFF (OPO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.5.1 Response for positioner control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.5.2 Response to other control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.7 Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.8 Safety-oriented tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.9 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.10 Timestamping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
11 Logic modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2 Truth table 3I/1O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.3 Truth table 2I/1O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.4 Truth table 5I/2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.5 Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Table of contents
SIMOCODE pro
iv GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11.6 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.7 Signal conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11.8 Non-volatile elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
11.9 Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
11.10 Flickering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
11.11 Limit monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
11.12 Calculators (calculation modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
12 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.3 Failsafe data transfer via PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.4 Telegram description and data access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.4.1 Cyclic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.4.2 Diagnostics data and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12.4.3 Configuration of the slave diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.5.1 Slave operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.5.2 Preparing the data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.5.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the
configuration software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
12.5.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave
via GSD) in STEP7 HW Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.5.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro . . . . 12-20
12.6 Evaluating diagnostics data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.6.1 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.6.2 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES . 12-22
12.7 Data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
12.8 Parameterization via PROFIBUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.8.1 SIMOCODE ES Premium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.8.2 SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12.8.3 Parameter data during startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
12.9 Timestamping/time synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
13 Mounting, wiring, interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1 General information about mounting and wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.2.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module. . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.2.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.2.3 Current measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.2.4 Current/voltage measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.2.5 Operator panel and operator panel with display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.2.6 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel . . . . . 13-10
13.3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.3.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module. . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.3.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
13.3.3 Current measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
13.3.4 Current/voltage measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
13.3.5 Measuring current with an external current transformer
(interposing transformer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
Table of contents
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 v
13.4 System interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
13.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
13.4.2 System interfaces on basic units, expansion modules, decoupling
module, current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
13.4.3 System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local or
DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
13.4.4 System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
13.5 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
13.6 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
14 Commissioning and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 General information about commissioning and service . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.2 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.2.1 Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.2.3 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel . 14-6
14.2.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the digital modules DM-F Local or
DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.3 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.3.1 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.3.2 Securing and saving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
14.3.4 Resetting the factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
14.4 Error buffer/reading out error protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14.5 Event buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
15 Alarms, faults and system events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
A Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status information
for the control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Abbreviations and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Socket assignment table - digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.4 Socket assignment table - analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A.5 Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
B Data formats and data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.1 Handling data records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.1.1 Writing/reading data records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.1.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.1.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.2 Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B.3 Data record 63 - Analog value recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.4 Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.5 Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
B.6 Data record 72 - Error buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
B.7 Data record 73 - Event memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
B.8 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Table of contents
SIMOCODE pro
vi GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.9 Data record 94 - Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
B.10 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
B.11 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
B.12 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
B.13 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30
B.14 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2
(plug ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-37
B.15 Data record 139 - Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-40
B.16 Data Record 160 - Communication parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41
B.17 Data record 165 - Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41
B.18 Data record 202 - Acyclic receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42
B.19 Data record 203 - Acyclic send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43
B.20 Data record 224 - Password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44
B.21 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-45
B.21.1 Overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45
B.21.2 Direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-46
B.21.3 Reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-47
B.21.4 Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48
B.21.5 Star-delta starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-49
B.21.6 Star-delta reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50
B.21.7 Dahlander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-51
B.21.8 Dahlander reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52
B.21.9 Pole changing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
B.21.10 Pole-changing reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-54
B.21.11 Solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-55
B.21.12 Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-56
B.21.13 Soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-57
B.21.14 Soft starter with reversing contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-58
C Dimension drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.1 3UF70 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.2 3UF710 current measuring module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C.2.1 Current measuring module (through-hole converter)
3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C.2.4 Current measuring module (bus connection)
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C.3 Current/voltage measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.3.1 Current/voltage measuring module (through-hole converter)
3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Table of contents
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 vii
3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C.3.4 Current/voltage measuring module (bus connection)
3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C.4 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.4.1 3UF7200 operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.4.2 3UF7210 operator panel with display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.5 Expansion modules/decoupling module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.6 Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C.7 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C.7.1 Door adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C.7.2 Operator panel adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
D Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.1 Common technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.2 Technical data of the basic units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D.3 Technical data of the current measuring modules or current/voltage
measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D.4 Technical data of the decoupling module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D.5 Technical data of the expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D.5.1 Technical data of the digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D.5.2 Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules. . D-12
D.5.3 Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
D.5.4 Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module. . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
D.5.5 Technical data of the analog module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19
D.5.6 Technical data of the earth-fault module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
D.5.7 Technical data of the temperature module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21
D.6 Technical data of the operator panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22
D.6.1 Technical data of the operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22
D.6.2 Technical data of the operator panel with display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23
D.7 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit
currents up to 100 kA and 690 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24
D.8 Typical reaction times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27
E Example circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E.2 "Overload relay" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E.2.1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
E.2.2 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
E.3 "Direct starter" example circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
E.3.1 "Direct starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
E.3.2 "Direct starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
E.4 "Direct starter" example circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
E.4.1 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
E.4.2 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
Table of contents
SIMOCODE pro
viii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.5 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" example circuit . . . . . . . . . E-10
E.5.1 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . E-10
E.5.2 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" function circuit diagram . . . . E-11
E.6 "Star-delta starter" circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
E.6.1 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta) . . . . . . . E-12
E.6.2 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta). . E-13
E.6.3 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable). . . E-14
E.6.4 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply
cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
E.7 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
E.7.1 "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
E.7.2 "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
E.8 "Dahlander" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
E.8.1 "Dahlander" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
E.8.2 "Dahlander" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-19
E.9 "Dahlander reversing starter" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20
E.9.1 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20
E.9.2 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21
E.10 "Pole-changing starter" example circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-23
E.10.1 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24
E.10.2 "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
E.11 "Pole-changing reversing starter" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-26
E.11.1 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-26
E.11.2 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . E-27
E.12 "Solenoid valve" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
E.12.1 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
E.12.2 "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31
E.13 "Positioner" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32
E.13.1 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32
E.13.2 "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33
E.14 "Soft starter" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42
E.14.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) . . . E-42
E.14.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
E.14.3 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) . . . . . . . . . E-44
E.14.4 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) . . . . E-45
E.15 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . E-46
E.15.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402,
3RW403, 3RW404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-46
E.15.2 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor"
(3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-47
(3RW405, 3RW407) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-48
Table of contents
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 ix
(3RW405, 3RW407) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-49
E.16 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50
E.16.1 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-50
E.16.2 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit example . . . . . . . . . . E-51
F Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas. . . . . . . . . . . F-1
F.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
F.2 Set-up and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
F.2.1 Setting the rated motor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
F.2.2 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
F.2.3 Sensor circuit wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F.2.4 Short-circuit protection for type of assignment 2 according to
IEC 60947-4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F.2.5 Cable protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F.2.6 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7
F.2.7 Further safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
F.2.8 Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
F.2.9 Safety data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
F.3 Maintenance and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
F.4 Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
F.5 Further information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Table of contents
SIMOCODE pro
x GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 xi
Purpose of this manual
The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor
management system and its functions. It contains information about
configuring, commissioning, service and maintenance. The user is
introduced to the system quickly and practically using a typical reversing
starter application as an example.
In addition to providing assistance for troubleshooting and fault elimination,
this manual also contains information of special importance to service and
maintenance personnel.
To assist in configuration, this manual also contains circuit diagrams,
dimension drawings and technical data of system components.
Required basic knowledge
To understand this manual you will require basic knowledge of low-voltage
controls and distribution, digital circuit engineering and automation
technology.
Topics
This manual consists of instructional chapters for reference purposes. The
following table lists the most relevant topics. Topics with a gray background
correspond largely with the contents of the "SIMOCODE ES"
parameterization and service software:
Topic Target group
System description Configurators, planners
Short instructions for commissioning a
reversing starter
Configurators, planners, technicians,
commissioners
Motor protection Configurators, commissioners
Motor control Configurators, PLC programmers
Monitoring functions Configurators, programmers,
commissioners, service personnel
Outputs Configurators, planners, programmers
Inputs Configurators, planners, programmers
Analog value recording Configurators, programmers,
commissioners, service personnel
3UF50 compatibility mode Configurators, PLC programmers
Standard functions Configurators, programmers
Logic modules Configurators, programmers
Communication Configurators, PLC programmers
Mounting, wiring, interfaces Mechanics, electricians, maintenance and
service personnel
Commissioning and servicing Commissioners, electricians, maintenance
and service personnel
Alarm, faults and system events Commissioners, maintenance and service
personnel, configurators, PLC
programmers
SIMOCODE pro
xii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Scope of application
This manual is applicable to the listed SIMOCODE pro system components.
It contains a description of the components applicable at the time of printing
the manual. We reserve the right to include updated information about new
components or new versions of components in a product information.
Definitions
When "SIMOCODE pro" is referred to, both the "SIMOCODE pro C" and the
"SIMOCODE pro V" series are meant.
SIMOCODE pro response tables
Specific responses (deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping) can be
parameterized for various SIMOCODE pro functions, such as overload.
These are always displayed in tabular form:
"X" = Applicable
"-" = Not applicable
Preset values are underlined.
Short description of the responses:
Tripping: The contactor controls QE* are tripped. A fault message is
generated which is available as a diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP. The fault
message and the device-internal signal remain on until the appropriate
amount of time has elapsed or the cause of the fault has been eliminated and
acknowledged.
Warning: In addition to the device-internal signal, a warning signal is
generated that is available as a diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.
Signaling: Only a device-internal signal is generated, which can be further
processed as required.
Deactivated: The appropriate function is switched off, no signals are
generated.
A delay time can also be set for specific responses.
Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3
Tripping - X X
Warning X X -
Signaling X X -
Deactivated X X X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s - -
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 xiii
Further information
Please read the operating instructions of the respective components.
You can find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals.
In addition to this system manual, you will need the following manuals:
"Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" manual
The appropriate manual for the DP master
You will find further information on the Internet:
Internet:
www.siemens.com/simocode
Information and Download Center:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/infomaterial
Product Information System (ProdIS):
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/support
ATEX:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/atex.
Certificates:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/approvals.
Further support (Service and Support)
Technical assistance:
Telephone:+49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8 a.m. - 5 p.m. CET)
Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907
E-mail:technical-assistance@siemens.com
Internet: www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance.
Correction sheet
A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to
enter suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections and send it
back to us. This will help us to improve the next edition.
Disclaimer of liability
The products described here have been developed to carry out safety-
oriented functions as part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a
complete safety system consists of sensors, evaluation units, signaling
devices and methods for safe tripping. The manufacturer is responsible for
ensuring safe functioning of the complete plant or machine.
Siemens AG, its subsidiaries and associated companies (herein referred to
as "Siemens") are not in a position to guarantee every characteristic of a
complete plant or machine not designed by Siemens.
Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are
made or implied in the following description. No new guarantee, warranty or
liability above those standard to Siemens can be derived from the following
description.
SIMOCODE pro
xiv GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-1
System description 1
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about
the SIMOCODE pro system including e.g.
Characteristics of both the SIMOCODE pro C and the SIMOCODE pro V
device series
Simplification of SIMOCODE pro circuits
Overview of functions
An overview of system components.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
Planners and configurators
People who are now using SIMOCODE DP but wish to use SIMOCODE pro
as a replacement or additional system in the future
Optional for commissioners, maintenance and service personnel as additional
information "about SIMOCODE pro"
System integrators/process technology.
Necessary knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
Basic knowledge about load feeders
Basic knowledge about motor protection
Basic knowledge of control engineering
Basic knowledge of industrial bus technology.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1.1 Introduction
Overview
SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Devices) is a
flexible and modular motor management system for motors with constant
speeds in low-voltage applications. It optimizes the link between the control
system and the motor feeder, increases plant availability, and also allows
considerable savings to be made during installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance.
SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low voltage switchgear system and links
the higher-level automation system and the motor feeder (via
PROFIBUS DP) intelligently. It comprises the following functions:
Multifunctional and electronic full motor protection, independently of the
automation system
Integrated control functions for motor control (instead of hardware)
Detailed operating, service and diagnostic data
Open communication via PROFIBUS DP the standard for fieldbus systems.
Parameterization with the SIMOCODE ES software package.
Only the switching and short-circuit protection mechanisms of the main
circuit (contactors, circuit breakers, fuses) are additionally needed.
Benefits
Wiring effort between the motor feeder and the PLC is reduced significantly
by connecting the entire motor feeder to the process control system via the
bus (see Figure 1-1 "SIMOCODE pro integrated in the main circuit, control
circuit and at automation level (PLC)").
Automated processes are decentralized by means of configurable control and
monitoring functions in the feeder. This saves automation system resources
and ensures that the feeder is fully functional and protected even if the
control system or bus system fails.
By recording and monitoring operating, service and diagnostic data in the
feeder and process control system, plant availability is increased, and the
feeder is easier to service and maintain.
The user can implement plant-specific requirements for every motor feeder
thanks to the high degree of modularity.
SIMOCODE pro provides compact solutions and different levels of functions
for every customer application.
By replacing the control circuit hardware with an integrated control function,
the quantity of required hardware components with wiring is reduced. This
drives down storage costs and limits potential wiring errors.
Using electronic full motor protection allows the motors to be used more
efficiently and ensures that the tripping characteristic remains stable and the
tripping response stays the same, even after many years.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-3
Fig. 1-1: SIMOCODE pro integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and at automation level (PLC)
Control circuit Automation level Main circuit
Connecting cable
Current measuring module
Basic unit
Operator panel
Remote
Protection + Monitoring
(overload, thermistor, earth-fault )
Control circuit
(including monitoring + interlocks)
Communication
(operating, service and diagnostics data
+ control commands)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Features
Multifunctional and electronic full motor protection for nominal motor
currents up to 820 A:
SIMOCODE pro provides comprehensive protection of the motor feeder by
means of a combination of delayable multi-level protection and monitoring
functions:
Current-dependent electronic overload protection (CLASS 5 to 40)
(see Chapter 3.2 "Overload protection")
Thermistor motor protection (see Chapter 3.5 "Thermistor protection")
Phase failure/phase unbalance protection (see Chapter 3.3 "Unbalance
protection")
Stalled rotor protection (see Chapter 3.4 "Stalled rotor protection")
Monitoring of adjustable limits for the motor current
(see Chapter 5.2 "Current limit monitoring")
Voltage monitoring (see Chapter 5.3 "Voltage monitoring")
Power monitoring (see Chapter 5.5 "Active power monitoring")
Monitoring of cos phi (non-load operation/load shedding)
(see Chapter 5.4 "Cos phi monitoring")
Earth-fault monitoring (see Chapter 5.1 "Earth-fault monitoring")
Temperature monitoring e.g. Pt100/Pt1000 (see Chapter 5.8 "Temperature
monitoring (analog)")
Monitoring of operating hours (see Chapter 5.7.2 "Operating hours
monitoring")
Motor stop time monitoring (see Chapter 5.7.3)
Monitoring the number of starts within a specific period of time (see
Chapter 5.7.4).
Safety-oriented tripping of motor feeders, e.g. failsafe tripping in the process
industry, locally or via PROFIBUS DP (see "Failsafe Digital Module
SIMOCODE pro Safety").
Recording of measured curves:
SIMOCODE pro is able to record measured curves and can, for example,
illustrate the flow of the motor current during motor startup. See Chapter 8
"Analog value recording"
Flexible motor control with integrated control functions
(instead of extensive hardware interlocks):
SIMOCODE pro has many pre-defined, integrated motor control functions,
including all necessary connections and interlocks:
Overload relay (see Chapter 4.2.3)
Direct starter (see Chapter 4.2.4)
Reverse starter (see Chapter 4.2.5)
Star-delta starter, also with reversing starter (see Chapter 4.2.7 and
Chapter 4.2.8)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-5
Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), also
with reversing starter (see Chapter 4.2.11 and Chapter 4.2.12)
Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, also with reversing
starter (see Chapter 4.2.9 and Chapter 4.2.10)
Positioner control (see Chapter 4.2.14)
Solenoid valve control (see Chapter 4.2.13)
Circuit breaker control (see Chapter 4.2.6)
Soft starter control, also soft starter with reversing contactor (see
Chapter 4.2.15 and Chapter 4.2.16).
These control functions are pre-defined in SIMOCODE pro and can be
assigned freely to device inputs and outputs (including PROFIBUS DP).
These pre-defined control functions can also be adjusted flexibly to meet
customer requirements of the motor feeder, without requiring additional
auxiliary relays in the control circuit. This is achieved by means of freely-
parameterizable logic modules (truth tables, counters, timers, edge
evaluation, etc., see Chapter 11 "Logic modules") and standard functions
(external power failure monitoring, emergency start, external fault
monitoring etc., see Chapter 10 "Standard functions").
Detailed operating service and diagnostic data:
SIMOCODE pro provides a range of operating, service and diagnostic data
and helps to detect impending faults in good time and stop these occurring
with preventative measures. If a fault occurs, it can be diagnosed, traced
and resolved within a short period of time. Plant downtime is thus reduced
to a minimum or does not occur at all.
See Chapter 1.5.7.
Communication:
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or
terminal connection). This replaces all individual wiring and distribution
boxes (normally required to exchange data with a higher-level automation
system) with a single two-wire cable.
SIMOCODE pro supports:
Baud rates up to 12 Mbit/s
Automatic baud rate recognition
Communication with up to 3 masters
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS (SIMATIC S7)
Time stamping with high temporal precision (SIMATIC S7)
Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1)
DPV1 communication downstream from the Y-link.
See Chapter 12 "Communication".
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Areas of application
SIMOCODE pro is usually deployed in automated processes that would
incur great expense during downtime (e. g. steel or cement industry), where
it is essential to prevent plant downtime by utilizing detailed operating,
service and diagnostic data and ensure that faults can be detected rapidly if
they occur.
SIMOCODE pro is modular, compact and specifically designed to be
deployed in motor control centers (MCC) in the process industry, and power
plant engineering.
Protection and control of motors:
In potentially explosive areas for type of protection EEx e/d according to
ATEX directive 94/9/EC (see Chapter F "Safety and commissioning
information for EEx areas")
Heavy-starting motors (paper, cement and metal industries; water
management)
In high-availability plants (chemical, oil, and raw material processing
industry, power plants)
SIMOCODE pro is especially designed for the chemical industry (including
oil and gas), the steel industry, water management, and the paper,
pharmaceutical, cement and glass industries. Further applications include
power plant engineering and diamond, gold and platinum mines.
SIMOCODE pro has been designed to meet the requirements of these
industries even more accurately, based on experiences with the previous
system (SIMOCODE DP). The availability of motors and thus the entire
process plays an important role in these industries. Downtime caused by
faults often leads to high costs. This is why it is even more important to
detect impending faults and introduce targeted, preventative measures.
Today, SIMOCODE pro provides the user with a motor management system
based on years of experience and the latest technology.

System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-7
Device series
SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into two device series:
SIMOCODE pro C a compact system for direct and reversing starters
and/or for controlling a circuit breaker (MCCB)
SIMOCODE pro V a variable system, which offers numerous functions in
addition to all of the SIMOCODE pro C functions.
For each feeder, every system comprises a basic unit and a separate current
measuring module. Both modules are connected to each other electronically
via the system interface, by means of a connecting cable, and can be
installed together as a unit (behind one another) or separately (side-by-side).
An operator panel can also be connected optionally via the second system
interface on the basic unit, and installed in the switchgear cabinet door. The
current measuring module and the operator panel are connected to the
basic unit via connecting cables, which also supply the power.
Besides the existing inputs and outputs present, additional inputs, outputs,
and functions can be added to basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) by means of
optional expansion modules.
All modules can be connected to each other via connecting cables.
Connecting cables are available in various lengths. The maximum distance
between modules (e.g. between basic unit and current measuring module)
is 2.5 m.
Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V for star-delta
starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing starters, soft starters each also possible
in combination with reversing starter solenoid valves and positioners.
SIMOCODE pro V is also particularly versatile. Its functionality can be extended,
if required, for example:
The number and type of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages
and adapted.
A current/voltage measuring module can be used for additional voltage
measurement and for monitoring power-related measured values (power
management).
A temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature
sensors.
An earth-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation
current transformer.
An analog module extends the system by additional analog inputs and
outputs, for example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring.
In addition to the standard operator panel (OP), an operator panel with display
(OPD) is optionally available (basic unit 2 from version *E03*).
SIMOCODE pro C is upwards-compatible with SIMOCODE pro V. This
means both series can be used simultaneously in your plant, according to
requirements.
Both systems can be used simultaneously in a low voltage switchgear
system according to requirements without additional outlay.
The parameterization of SIMICODE pro C can be transferred without
problems. Removable terminals and terminal markings are identical for both
systems.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder
independently of the automation system. Even if the automation system
(PLC) fails, or if communication is disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully
protected and controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being
connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can easily be connected later, if required.
Typical configuration
The following schematic shows a typical SIMOCODE pro C and
SIMOCODE pro V hardware configuration:
Fig. 1-2: Typical SIMOCODE pro hardware configurations
System components: See Chapter 1.7 "Description of system components".
U
F
-
0
1
1
2
9
Current measuring
module (IM)
Basic unit (BU1)
Operator panel (OP)
SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
Basic unit (BU2)
Current/voltage
measuring module (UM)
Operator panel (OPD)
Digital module (DM)
Analog module (AM)
Additional optional expansions are possible
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-9
1.2 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro
Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro
Individual components are used for control, monitoring and signal pre-
processing. The following components are to be used and the following
wiring is to be carried out:
Insertion and wiring of overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current
transformers and analog/digital converters
Wiring of the control circuit
Connection of start/stop control devices
The contactor must be brought into locking mode via the auxiliary switches
Wiring of the interlocks.
The following figure illustrates the conventional configuration of a direct
starter:
Fig. 1-3: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)
PLC
Start/stop
Thermistor
evaluation
Local start
Local stop
Auto Manual
-Q11
1
-X3
-Q1
-Q1 S2
S1
-X2
-X1
-F3
-F2-
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Q1
- Q1
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
- F2
1 3 5
2 4 6
M
3~
1
PE
2
4 A - 20 mA
1N
2
D
A
-Q1 -Q1 -F2 -F3
Switchgear
O
N
O
F
F
O
v
e
r
l
o
a
d
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
Automation level / I/O module
-F3
W V U
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
-
Q
1

o
p
e
n
-Q1
N
-Q11 -Q12
Feedback Control commands
M
a
n
u
a
l
/
O
N
/
O
F
F

-F4
1L1
-Q1
-Q12
a
u
t
o
m
a
t
i
c

System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Configuration with SIMOCODE pro
Only SIMOCODE pro is used for control, monitoring and signal pre-
processing.
This has the following advantages:
Additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current
transformers and analog/digital convertors are not necessary
The wiring of the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified
The start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit
The contactor coil is activated via the output of the basic unit. An auxiliary
contact for locking is not required.
The following figure illustrates configuration with SIMOCODE pro:
Fig. 1-4: Configuration of a load feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Q1
- Q1
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
M
3~
J
PE
W V U
2 4 6
Current measuring
module (IM)
L1/L+
F11
Q1
N/L
S0 S1
A2 A1
T1 T2
T1
T2
L+
PROFIBUS DP
Thermistor
Control station
Local control station [LC]
Basic unit (BU)
IN1 IN2 24 V
OUT 1 1
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-11
1.3 Application example
Description
The fill level of a liquid container is being monitored. A pump keeps the
liquid level (reference value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into
the container. The fill level (actual value) is measured by the fill level
indicator and output as an analog signal. When the fill level sinks below a
specific level, the pump is switched on by SIMOCODE pro. Liquid is
pumped in until the reference value is re-attained. The pump is then
switched off.
Controlling the pump
The pump can be controlled as follows:
Locally: Local control station [LC] for manual switching on and off (by visual
contact)
LC in the switchgear cabinet door: Control station operator panel [OP] for
switching on and off manually
At automation level: Control station PLC/PCS [DP] for remote-controlled
switching on and off (automatic operation) via PROFIBUS DP
Via SIMOCODE pro: Via local mode fill-level monitoring and/or limit value
monitoring.
Schematic
Fig. 1-5: Schematic of a typical application example
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Q1
- Q1
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
M
3~
PE
W V U
2 4 6
System
interface
Current measuring
module (IM)
Pump
L1/L+
F11
Q1
N/L
Connecting cable
S0 S1
A2 A1
T1 T2
Analog module
In+ In
Out+ Out
Fill-level indicator
T1
T2
PLC/PCS
PROFIBUS DP
Thermistor
Liquid container
Control station
PLC/PCS [DP]
Control station
Operator panel
Optional:
Laptop with
SIMOCODE ES
Display
Basic unit (BU 2)
Motor current
IN1 IN2 24 V
OUT 1 1
L+
L
(AM)
(Unit: % of I
s
)
Control station
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Recording, displaying and evaluating measured values
The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:
The pump motor current, which is measured by the current measuring
module.
The analog value of the fill-level indicator, which is measured by the analog
module.
The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro and/or
transferred via PROFIBUS DP to the PLC/PCS.
Any measured value can be output via the analog module, e.g. the effective
motor current on a connected pointer instrument.
Optionally, a laptop with the SIMOCODE ES software, for example, can be
connected to the operator panel so that further process data can be locally
evaluated.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-13
1.4 Check list for selecting a device series
The following check list should help you decide upon the optimum device
series for your requirements:

SIMOCODE
Requirements pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Footnote
Standard motor feeders (4 inputs, 3 outputs)
with control functions for direct starters,
reversing starters, intelligent overload relays

1)
Monitoring of stalled rotor, unbalance, phase
failure
1)
Current measuring, current limit monitoring,
overload protection
1)
Earth-fault monitoring via the current
measuring module (internal)
1)
Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary)

Motor feeder with control function:
Star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing
starters, soft starters each also possible in
combination with reversing starter , solenoid
valves, positioners

1)
Measuring, processing and outputting analog
values e.g. flow rate, fill level, etc.
(if necessary via an analog module)

2)
Current measuring and voltage measurement

3)
Voltage monitoring for undervoltage

3)
Power management, implementing power
considerations (power, cos phi), power
monitoring

3)
More than 4 binary inputs required
(maximum 12)
2)
Table 1-1: Check list for selecting a device series
1) Via current measuring module
2) With expansion modules
3) Via current/voltage measuring modules
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
More than 3 relay outputs required
(maximum 7)
2)
Earth-fault monitoring with external
summation current transformer via the earth-
fault module

2)
Binary inputs for 110 - 240 V AC/DC
(max. 8)
2)
Bistable relay outputs (max. 4)

2)
Analog temperature monitoring with NTC,
PT100, PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor types
2)
Safety-oriented tripping with EMERGENCY
OFF buttons (local or decentralized via
PROFIBUS DP)

SIMOCODE
Requirements pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Footnote
Table 1-1: Check list for selecting a device series (Cont.)
1) Via current measuring module
2) With expansion modules
3) Via current/voltage measuring modules
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-15
1.5 Overview of functions
1.5.1 Protection functions
Detailed description: See Chapter 3 "Motor protection".
Overload protection
Current-dependent electronic protection of three-phase and AC motors with
adjustable tripping characteristics (class times) according to IEC 60947-4-1
requirements.
Unbalance protection
Protects motors from excessive temperatures caused by excessive phase
unbalance.
Stalled rotor protection
Immediate trip after the motor current overshoots an adjustable threshold.
Thermistor protection
The basic units (BU1 and BU2) enable connection of thermistor sensors
(binary PTC) for monitoring motor temperature.
1.5.2 Monitoring functions
Detailed description: See Chapter 5 "Monitoring functions" and Chapter 11
"Logic modules"
Earth-fault monitoring
Basic units have
Internal earth-fault monitoring:
For motors with a 3-wire connection, the basic unit calculates a possible fault
current/earth-fault current from the total current via a current measuring
module or a current/voltage measuring module. Internal earth-fault
monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks
that are either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance.
External earth-fault monitoring for SIMOCODE pro V
1)

5)
:
In the case of networks that are grounded with a higher impedance it may be
necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents
using a summation current transformer, instead of carrying out internal earth-
fault monitoring via a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module. A maximum of one earth-fault module can be used to create an
additional input on basic unit 2 to connect a 3UL22 summation current
transformer. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A/ 0.5 A/ 1 A can be evaluated with
the summation current transformer.
Current limit monitoring
Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring. Thus, impending
irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: If a current limit is
exceeded but still below the overload limit, it can, for example, indicate a
dirty filter on a pump, or an increasingly sluggish motor bearing. If the
current limit is undershot, it can be the first sign of a worn-out drive motor
belt.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Voltage monitoring
2)
SIMOCODE pro V allows voltage monitoring of a three-phase current
network or a one-phase network for undervoltage or further availability:
Monitoring for undervoltage:
Two-phase monitoring for freely-selectable limits. The SIMOCODE pro V
response can be freely parameterized upon reaching a particular pre-warning
or trip level.
Monitoring for further availability:
Even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can display the further
availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit
breaker or fuses.
Temperature monitoring
1)

3)
The SIMOCODE pro V temperature module allows analog temperature
monitoring of, for example, the motor windings or the bearings of up to 3
sensor measuring circuits.
SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of overtemperature for
freely-selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-
warning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Temperature monitoring takes into account the highest temperature of all
the sensor measuring circuits in use.
Active power monitoring
2)
The active power curve of a motor reflects its actual load. Excess load
results in increased wear of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature
motor failure. Insufficient active power can, for example, be a sign of non-
load motor operation.
SIMOCODE pro V allows two-phase active power monitoring for freely-
selectable upper and lower limits. The SIMOCODE pro V response can be
freely parameterized and delayed upon reaching a pre-warning or trip level.
Cos phi monitoring
2)
The power factor fluctuates more than either the motor current or the active
power does, particularly in the low-end performance area of a motor.
Therefore, power factor monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing
between non-load operation and faults, e.g. a broken drive belt or drive
shaft.
SIMOCODE pro V enables two-phase monitoring of cos phi undershooting
for freely-selectable limits. The SIMOCODE pro V response can be freely
parameterized and delayed upon reaching a pre-warning or trip level.
Monitoring operating hours, motor stop time and number of starts
In order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors that were either
running too long (wear) or stopped for too long, both SIMOCODE pro C and
SIMOCODE pro V can monitor operating hours and motor stop times.
For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal indicating that
the relevant motor requires maintenance or replacement can be generated.
After replacing the motor, the operating hours and motor stop times can be
reset.
In order to avoid excessive thermal strain and premature aging of a motor,
the number of motor starts in a selected time frame can be limited. The
limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-17
Monitoring additional process variables via the analog module
1)

4)
SIMOCODE pro V allows measuring and monitoring of any other process
variables via the analog module.
For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a pump against dry
operation, or a differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the
degree of pollution in a filter. If the fill level undershoots a specified level,
the pump can be switched off and, if a specific differential pressure value is
exceeded, the filter is to be cleaned.
SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of the corresponding
process variables for freely-selectable upper and lower limits. The
SIMOCODE pro V response can be freely parameterized and delayed upon
reaching a pre-warning or trip level.
Phase sequence identification
2)
SIMOCODE pro allows the direction of rotation of a motor to be determined
by identification of the phase sequence. If the direction of rotation is wrong,
a signal can be generated or the motor switched off.
See "Menu of the operator panel with display" and "Navigating the menu of
the operator panel with display".
Monitoring any measured values using unrestricted limit monitors
1)
SIMOCODE pro can monitor every measured value in the system for
undershooting or overshooting a set threshold value by means of
unrestricted limit monitors.
See Chapter 11.11 "Limit monitor".
1) When using basic unit 2
2) When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module
3) Additional temperature module required
4) Additional analog module required
5) Additional earth-fault module and summation current transformer required.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Safety-oriented tripping
The SIMOCODE pro V motor management system has been extended by 2
modules/safety relays for the safety-oriented tripping of motors:
Failsafe digital module DM-F Local:
For applications that require the safety-oriented tripping of a motor feeder via
a hardware signal that is detected and analyzed by the module.
Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:
For applications that require the safety-oriented tripping of a motor feeder by
a failsafe control (F-CPU) via PROFIBUS with the failsafe PROFIsafe profile.
These modules fulfill the general requirements for EMERGENCY STOP
mechanisms or safety circuits, as described in the standards EN 418 and
EN 60204-1 (06/2006).
Depending on the external circuit, the following Performance Level/Safety
Integrity Level can be achieved:
PL e Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 or
SIL 3 according to IEC 61508/62061.
Safety technology and safety-oriented functions:
Are limited exclusively to failsafe digital modules.
Do not directly affect existing SIMOCODE pro components and concepts.
A more detailed description is provided in the documentation listed below:
System manuals and operating manuals are available at:
Caution
Use a power supply unit compliant with IEC 60536, Class III (SELV or PELV)!
A suitable safety circuit is required for capacitive and inductive loads!
Documentation
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY " (German)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (English)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (French)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (Spanish)
Operating manual failsafe digital module DM-F Local
Operating manual failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-19
1.5.3 Control functions
Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control
functions are available:
All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available
and can be flexibly adapted and expanded.
For a detailed description of the individual control functions: See
Chapter 4 "Motor control".
SIMOCODE
Control function pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Overload relay
1)
Direct starter
1)
Reversing starter
1)
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
1)
Star-delta starter,
star-delta reversing starter

Dahlander,
Dahlander reversing starter

Pole-changing starter,
Pole-changing reversing starter

Solenoid valve
Positioner
Soft starter,
Soft starter with reversing contactor

Table 1-2: Control functions
1) Due to additional requirements (e.g. power measuring), it may be necessary
to select the BU2 device version.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1.5.4 Communication
PROFIBUS DP
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or
terminal connection on the basic units).
SIMOCODE pro supports, for example, the following services:
Detailed description: See Chapter 12 "Communication".
1.5.5 Standard functions
Standard functions are pre-defined functions that can be easily activated,
e.g. time-staggered restart of the drives after a power failure.
SIMOCODE pro has the following standard functions:
Table 1-4: Standard functions
Detailed description: See Chapter 10 "Standard functions".
SIMOCODE
Service pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s
Automatic baud rate recognition
Cyclic services (DPV0) and
acyclic services (DPV1)

Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the
Y link

Alarms according to DPV1
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP
3UF50 compatibility mode
Safety-oriented tripping "PROFIsafe"
Table 1-3: PROFIBUS DP services
SIMOCODE
Standard function pro C (BU1)
Number
pro V (BU2)
Number
Test 2 2
Reset 3 3
Test Position Feedback (TPF) 1 1
External fault 4 6
Operational Protection OFF (OPO) 1
Power Failure Monitoring (UVO) 1
Emergency Start 1 1
Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring) 1 1
Timestamping 1
Safety-oriented Tripping "Local" 1
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-21
1.5.6 Additional signal processing with freely-programmable logic modules
If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use
the freely-programmable logic modules. These can be used, for example, to
implement logical operations, time relay functions and counter functions.
Furthermore, limit monitors can monitor any value in SIMOCODE pro for
undershooting or overshooting of a freely selected limit.
Depending on the device series, the system offers several, freely-
parameterizable logic modules:
1) Only for basic unit 2 from version *E03*
Detailed description: See Chapter 11 "Logic modules".
SIMOCODE
Logic module pro C (BU1)
Number
pro V (BU2)
Number
Truth Tables 3 Inputs/1 Output 3 6
Truth Tables 2 Inputs/1 Output 2
Truth Tables 5 Inputs/2 Outputs 1
Timer 2 4
Counters 2 4
Signal Conditioners 2 4
Non-volatile Elements 2 4
Flashing 3 3
Flickering 3 3
Limit Monitor 4
Calculation modules (Calculator)
1)
2
Table 1-5: Freely-programmable logic modules
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1.5.7 Operating, service and diagnostic data
SIMOCODE pro supplies a large amount of detailed operating, service and
diagnostic data.
Operating data
Motor switching state (ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT, SLOW, FAST), derived from the
current flow in the main circuit; thus, feedback via auxiliary contacts of circuit
breakers and contactors is not necessary
Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 and maximum current in % of set current
Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 in V
2)
Active power in W
2)
Apparent power in VA
2)
Power factor in %
2)
Phase unbalance in %
Phase sequence
2)
Temperature in the sensor measuring circuits 1, 2 and 3, and maximum
temperature in K
1) 4)
Actual analog signal values
1) 5)
Time to trip in s
Thermal motor model in %
Remaining cooling down period of the motor in s, etc.
It is possible to adapt the units via the device-internal conversion of
individual measured values with the help of the logic modules (calculators)
provided by SIMOCODE pro V. For example, the temperature recorded by
SIMOCODE pro can be calculated in either F or C and transmitted to the
automation system via PROFIBUS.
Service data
Among other things, SIMOCODE pro provides the following relevant data
for maintenance:
Number of motor operating hours, also resettable
Motor stop times, also resettable
Number of motor starts, also resettable
Number of permissible starts remaining
Number of overload trips, also resettable
Feeder power consumption in kWh, also resettable
3)
Internal feeder comments stored in the device, e.g. information regarding
maintenance events, etc.
Safety-oriented tripping monitoring in h, also resettable
1) When using basic unit 2
2) When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module
3) When using basic unit 2 (from version *E03*) with
current/voltage measuring module
4) Additional temperature module required
5) Additional analog module required
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-23
Diagnostic data
Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages, also for further
processing in the device or in the control system
Device-internal error protocolling with time stamp
Value of the last trip current
Feedback faults (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit after switch-on
command), etc.
Diagnostic message "Local" und PROFIsafe
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1.6 Overview of system components
Devices
SIMOCODE
Connectable
system components
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Application
Operator panel (OP) Installation in the
switchgear cabinet
door. Additional control
station and display.
With system interface
for connecting a PC
Operator panel with display (OPD)
Installation in the
switchgear cabinet
door. Additional control
station and display.
With system interface
for PC connection
Current measuring modules (IM)
0.3 A - 3 A
2.4 A - 25 A
Current measuring
with through-hole
technology. Basic unit
can be snapped on
Current measuring module (IM)
10 A - 100 A
20 A - 200 A
Current measuring
with through-hole
technology or bus
connection system
63 A - 630 A
Current measuring via
bus connection system
Current/voltage measuring modules
(UM)
1)
0.3 A - 3 A
2.4 A - 25 A
Can only be mounted

next to the basic unit,
otherwise like current
measuring modules,
also:
- Voltage measurement
- Power measurement
- Cos phi measurement
- Phase sequence
Table 1-6: System components, devices
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-25
(UM)
1)
10 A - 100 A
Can only be mounted

next to the basic unit,
otherwise like current
measuring modules,
also:
- Voltage measurement
- Power measurement
- Cos phi measurement
- Phase sequence
Current/voltage measuring module
(UM)
1)
20 A - 200 A

(UM)
1)
63 A - 630 A
Decoupling module (DCM)
For connection in
series upstream from a
current/voltage
measuring module at
the system interface
when used in
ungrounded networks.
Digital modules (DM)
24 V DC monostable
110 V - 240 V AC/DC monostable
24 V DC bistable
110 V - 240 V AC/DC bistable
Additional binary inputs
and outputs. Max.
2 DM possible
Failsafe digital module
DM-F Local (DM-F Local)
For failsafe tripping via
hardware signal
- 2 relay enabling
circuits, wired in
parallel
- 2 relay outputs,
common ground
failsafe shutdown
- Inputs:
- 2 sensor circuits
- Start signal
- Cascade input
- Feedback circuit
- Safety function
configurable via
DIP switch
SIMOCODE
Connectable
system components
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Application
Table 1-6: System components, devices (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1) Depending on the type of network (main current) in ungrounded networks,
combinable with decoupling module (DCM)
For a detailed description of the system components: See Chapter 1.7
"Description of system components".
Dimension drawings: See Chapter C "Dimension drawings".
Installation instructions: See Chapter 13 "Mounting, wiring, interfaces".
Failsafe digital module
DM-F PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe)
For failsafe shutdown
via
PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe
- 2 relay enabling
circuits, wired in
parallel
- 2 relay outputs,
common ground
(failsafe shutdown)
- Inputs 24 V DC
- Feedback circuit
- 3 binary inputs
Analog module (AM)
Additional analog value

inputs and outputs,
and analog monitoring.
Max. 1 AM possible.
Earth-fault module (EM)
For connecting a
3UL22 external
summation current
transformer for earth-
fault monitoring.
Max. 1 EM possible
Temperature module (TM)
For temperature
monitoring via
additional sensors
(PT100, PT1000,
KTY83/KTY84, NTC).
Max. 1 TM possible.
SIMOCODE
Connectable
system components
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Application
Table 1-6: System components, devices (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-27
Accessories
SIMOCODE basic unit
Connectable
system components
pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application
Connecting cable in various
lengths, ranging from 0.025 m up
to 2.5 m
For connecting
system components
via system interfaces
System interface cover For covering unused
system interfaces
Memory module Saving device
parameters. If a
device is replaced,
parameter transfer
without PC
Addressing plug Configuring the
PROFIBUS DP
address without a PC
PC cable Connecting
SIMOCODE pro to
a PC
USB to serial adapter For connecting a RS-
232 cable to the USB
interface of a PC.
Door adapter Only for leading out
the system interface,
e.g. from a switchgear
cabinet
Operator panel adapter Enables the use of the
smaller 3UF720
operator panel in the
front panel cut-out of
the 3UF52 operator
panel or the 3UF721
operator panel with
display.
Table 1-7: System components, accessories
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Software
For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing
SIMOCODE basic unit
Software components pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application
SIMOCODE ES Access via the system
interface on
device/PROFIBUS DP/
SIMATIC S7 routing,
depending which
software version is
deployed
PCS 7 function block library
SIMOCODE pro:
AS blocks and faceplates for
integrating SIMOCODE pro in
the SIMATIC PCS 7 process
control system
Table 1-8: Software components
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-29
1.7 Description of system components
1.7.1 Basic units (BU)
The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro
system. Basic units are always necessary when using SIMOCODE pro.
They have a standard enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with
detachable terminals:
Fig. 1-6: Basic units
Basic units can be installed on a standard mounting rail or fixed to a
mounting plate (with additional push-in lugs).
Basic units are available in two versions for the following supply voltages:
24 V DC or
110 to 240 V AC/DC.
Basic unit 1 (BU1)
Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C device
series and is used in combination with a current measuring module and
optional operator panels. The following motor control functions are
supported:
Overload relay
Direct starters and reversing starters
Circuit breaker control (MCCB).
LEDs for device diagnostics (Device, Bus, Gen.Fault):
These LEDs on the front of the device are used for device and fault
diagnostics, and indicate the basic status
Of the device itself via the Device LED
About PROFIBUS communication via the Bus LED
About any motor feeder faults via the Gen. Fault LED
For more information see Chapter 14.2.3.
Basic unit 1 (BU1) Basic unit 2 (BU2)
SIMOCODE pro C device series SIMOCODE pro V device series
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Test/Reset button:
Enables the device to be reset after tripping or after a fault has occurred and
makes it possible to test the device/motor feeder with or without tripping
the contactor control. If a memory module or addressing plug is plugged in,
the PROFIBUS address can be parameterized or adopted via the Test/Reset
button.
For more information see Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset", Chapter 14.2.2 and
Chapter 14.3.2.
System interfaces:
2 system interfaces for connecting
A current measuring module
An operator panel.
Basic unit 2 (BU2).
Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device
series and is used in combination with a current measuring module or
current/voltage measuring module and optional operator panels.
The following motor control functions are supported:
Overload relay
Direct and reversing starters
Star-delta starter, also with reversing starter
Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), also
with reversing starter
2 speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, also with reversing
starter
Positioner control
Solenoid valve control
Circuit breaker control (MCCB)
Soft starter control, also with reversing starter.
In contrast to basic unit 1, basic unit 2 offers the following expansion
options:
Increased device functionality via various expansion modules according to
need
Implementation of a current/voltage measuring module in place of a current
measuring module
Additional inputs and outputs, as required.
Use of an operator panel with display in place of a standard operator panel.
LEDs for device diagnostics (Device, Bus, Gen.Fault):
These LEDs on the front of the device are used for device and fault
diagnostics, and indicate the basic status:
Of the device itself via the Device LED
About PROFIBUS communication via the Bus LED
About any motor feeder faults via the Gen. Fault LED
For more information see Chapter 14.2.3.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-31
Test/Reset button:
Enables the device to be reset after tripping or after a fault has occurred and
makes it possible to test the device/motor feeder with or without tripping
the contactor control. If a memory module or addressing plug is plugged in,
the PROFIBUS address can be parameterized or adopted via the Test/Reset
button.
For more information see Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset", Chapter 14.2.2 and
Chapter 14.3.2.
System interfaces:
2 system interfaces for connecting
A current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module
Expansion modules and
An operator panel.
Supplying the inputs
See Chapter 13 "Mounting, wiring, interfaces".
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1.7.2 Operator panel (OP)
The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the switchgear cabinet. It
has an external system interface on the front to allow easier
parameterization or diagnostics via a PC/PD. A PC (via PC cable with the
SIMOCODE ES software), a memory module or the addressing plug can be
connected to the front system interface (with cover for IP54).
The operator panel can be connected to the basic unit or an expansion
module via the rear system interface using a connecting cable. The basic
unit supplies power to the operator panel.
The operator panel is often installed in the front panels of motor control
centers. It can be used with both the SIMOCODE pro C device series and
the SIMOCODE pro V device series. It also contains all the status LEDs
available on the basic unit and the Test/Reset button, and facilitates access
to the system interface from outside the switchgear cabinet.
The following are available:
5 buttons, of which 4 are freely-parameterizable
10 LEDs, of which 7 are freely-parameterizable
The following figure shows an operator panel:
Fig. 1-7: Operator panel
Labeling strips:
Labeling strips are enclosed for designating buttons 1 to 4 and the yellow
LEDs 1 to 3:
Buttons 1 to 4:
6 pre-assigned labeling strips and 1 individually inscribable labeling strip
LEDs 1 to 3:
1 individually inscribable labeling strip.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-33
Fig. 1-8: Labeling strips for operator panel buttons and LEDs
Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel:
Fig. 1-9: Storage clips for labeling strips
0
DEVICE BUS GEN. FAULT
Button 1 Button 2 Button 3
TEST/
RESET
Button 4
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3
0
0
0
I
CLOSE OPEN
STOP
CLOSE OPEN
Storage clips
Labeling strips
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Memory module "park position":
The memory module can be protected from unauthorized use by "parking" it
on the rear of the operator panel inside the switchgear cabinet.
In this case, the storage clips for the labeling strips cannot be used.
Fig. 1-10: Memory module "park position"
1.7.3 Operator panel with display (OPD) for SIMOCODE pro V
Apart from the standard operator panel (OP), an optional operator panel with
display (OPD) is also available for SIMOCODE pro V. This operator panel can
display current measured values, operating data, diagnostic data or status
information of the motor feeder on the switchgear cabinet. The operator
panel can only be used with basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from version
*E03*. It also contains all the status LEDs that are present on the basic unit
and facilitates access to the system interface from outside the switchgear
cabinet. The motor can be controlled via the buttons on the operator panel.
Current measured values, status information, fault messages or the device-
internal error protocol are simultaneously shown on the display.
Notice:
The operator panel can only be used with a basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
from version *E03*.
Overall, the following are available:
4 freely parameterizable buttons for controlling the motor feeder
4 buttons for display menu navigation, 2 of these are softkeys with various
functions (e.g. Test/Reset)
2 system interfaces (front and rear)
7 LEDs, 4 of which are freely-parameterizable (4 green LEDs integrated in the
motor control, primarily for feedback regarding the switching state, e.g. ON,
OFF, LEFT, RIGHT, etc.)
Memory module in the "park position"
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-35
The following figure shows an operator panel with display:
Fig. 1-11: Operator panel with display
The operator panel with display can be connected directly to basic unit 2 or
an expansion module via the rear system interface. Voltage is supplied by
the basic unit. A PC (via a PC cable with SIMOCODE ES software), the
memory module or the addressing plug can be connected to the front
system interface (with a cover for IP54).
Caution
The operator panel with display may not be removed or plugged in during
operation!
Note
When using an operator panel with display, the type and number of
expansion modules that can be connected to a basic unit are limited! See
Chapter 1.7.8.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Labeling strips:
Labeling strips for labeling buttons 1 to 4 are included:
6 pre-assigned labeling strips and 1 individually inscribable labeling strip
Fig. 1-12: Labeling strips for the buttons of the operator panel with display
0
I
0
0
0
CLOSE
OPEN
STOP
OPEN
CLOSE
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-37
Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel with
display:
Fig. 1-13: Storage clips for labeling strips
"Park position" for memory module:
The memory module can be "parked" on the front of the operator panel with
display beneath the system interface:
Fig. 1-14: Memory module "park position"
Labeling strips
Storage clips
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Displays of the operator panel with display
The display shows current measured values, operating data and diagnostic
data as well as the status information of the motor feeder in plain text or
with the aid of symbols.
Fig. 1-15: Displays
1
Shows the set current I
s
/ nominal motor current in A.
The corresponding set current I
s
1 or I
s
2 is always
shown for motors with two speeds, depending whether the current speed
is slow or fast, e.g. 8.00 A.
For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey can be used when the
motor is stopped to alternate between the display of the two set currents.
When running, the set current for the active motor speed is always
displayed.
2
Shows the set class time of the overload protection, e.g. 10 = Class 10
(class = trip class)
3
Indicates that temperature monitoring is active, e.g. the temperature
monitoring of the motor via thermistors or analog temperature sensors
(Pt100, Pt1000, KTY, NTC). T = Temperature monitoring is active.
4
The main display enables customized depiction of different measured
values when running. This is the standard display at the topmost menu
level. Predefined profiles in the display settings can be selected for this
purpose. When the "Menu" softkey on the right is pressed, the submenus of
the main display can be navigated (see "Read and adapt main display").
1 23
IL1
Menu 8.00A/5/T
IL2
IL3
2.80 A
2.16 A
2.00 A
4
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-39
Operator controls of the operator panel with display
Fig. 1-16: Operator controls of the operator panel with display
1
Four freely-parameterizable control buttons.
These control buttons are used to control the motor with integrated status
LEDs for any status feedback. The functions can be user-defined. Labeling
can be either as desired or via the labeling strips included in the scope of
supply (see also Chapter 7.3 "Operator panel buttons" and Chapter 6.3
"Operator panel LEDs").
2
Two softkeys.
These softkeys can have different functions, depending upon the menu
depicted (e.g. Open Menu, Leave Menu, Test/Reset). The currently assigned
functions are shown on the lower left or right edge of the display.
3
Two arrow keys (up and down).
These arrow keys can be used for menu navigation or for changing the display
settings, e.g. contrast adjustment or selection of the main display profile.
1
3
2
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Menu of the operator panel with display
Navigating the menu of the operator panel with display
Main menu (OPD)
For details see "Displays of the operator panel with display"
Fig. 1-17: Main menu (OPD)
Main display
Measured values display
Status display
Statistics/maintenance
Communication (PROFIBUS)
Device I/Os
Display settings
Commands
Status information
Warnings
Faults
Error buffer
Event memory
Identification
Motor protection/motor control
About SIMOCODE
1
3
2
4
5
7
6
8
9
11
10
12
13
14
(OPD above *E04* and BU2 above *E07*)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-41
1 Main display (OPD)
For details see "Read and adapt main display".
Fig. 1-18: Main display (OPD)
IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]
I_max [A]
IL1, IL2, IL3 [%]
I_max [%]
I_max, Cos
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, S
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, S
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, P
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, P
In 1[mA] / Out [mA]
In 2[mA] / Out [mA]
In 1[mA] / In 2 [mA]
Max. temp. C
Temperatures C
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N
Max. temp. F
Temperatures F
UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1
I_max, UL1-N, Cos
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos
I_max, UL1-N, C
I_max, UL1-L2, C
Calculator 1
Calculator 2
Energy consumed [kWh]
I_max, UL1-N, F
I_max, UL1-L2, F
(OPD above *E04*)
(OPD above *E04*)
(OPD above *E04*)
(OPD above *E04*)
(OPD above *E04*)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2 Measured values display (OPD)
For details see "Display of measured values in the measured values display".
Fig. 1-19: Measured values display (OPD)
I_max [A]
IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]
Phase unbalance [%]
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N [V]
UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 [V]
Cos phi, P [kW], S [kVA]
I1, I2, O [mA]
Max. temp. [C]
T1, T2, T3 [C]
Thermal motor model [%]
Time to trip [s]
Cooling down period [s]
Max. temp. [F]
T1, T2, T3 [F]
Last trip current [A]
(OPD above *E04*)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-43
3 Status display motor protection/motor control (OPD)
For details see "Motor protection and motor control status".
Fig. 1-20: Status display motor protection/motor control (OPD)
General fault
General warning
Current flowing
Device ok
Bus ok
PLC/PCS in Run
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
Start active
Interlocking time active/
Change-over pause act.
OPO
Remote
TPF
FC
TC
FO
TO
Positioner...
Closes
Opens
Non-maintained
Cooling down period act.
Pause time active
Emergency start executed
Device test
Active
Phase sequence
1-2-3 3-2-1
Enabling circuit
Switch-off
Safety o.k.
Safety
1
2
3
DIP Safety
Enabling circuit
Switch-off
PROFIsafe o.k.
Safety
4
5
6
7
8
DM-F Local
DM-F Local
DM-F PROFIsafe
command mode
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4 Statistics/maintenance (OPD)
For details see "Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information
on the statistics/maintenance display".
Fig. 1-21: Statistics/maintenance (OPD)
Operating hours
Motor >
One more only
No start
Number of overload trips
Motor operating hours [h]
Number of starts
Permissible starts -
Motor stop time [h]
Motor stop time >
Number of
Operating hours basic unit [h]
Timer
Timer 2 - Actual value [s]
Timer 1 (2,3,4) - Output
Output
Counters
Counter 1(2,3,4) -
Calculators
Calculator 1
Counter 1
Output
Calculator 2
Safety: Time until
Test required [weeks]
Actual value
Actual value
parameterizations
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-45
5 PROFIBUS communication (OPD)
For details:See "Status display for PROFIBUS communication".
Fig. 1-22: PROFIBUS communication (OPD)
Compatibility mode 1
3UF50 mode
PROFIBUS address
PROFIsafe address
Bus
o.k.
Monitoring
Baud rate
PLC/PCS
in Run
Monitoring
Bus/PLC fault - Reset
Manual
Auto
Start-up parameter block
Timestamping
Active
Compatibility mode
3UF50 - Operating mode
DPV0
DPV1
3UF50 basic type
Diagnostics
Device fault
Event
Diagnostics
Warning
Fault
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6 Device I/Os (OPD)
For details see "Displays the current status of all device I/Os".
Fig. 1-23: Device I/Os (OPD)
PTC
High resistance/not present
IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]
UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 [V]
Output [%]
Max. temp. [C]
Outputs
1
3
2
Inputs
1
3
2
4
PTC
ok
Short circuit
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N [V]
Inputs
1
3
2
4
DM 1.2
Monostable outputs
1
2
DM 1.2
Bistable outputs
1
2
DM 1.2
IN
Feedback circuit
Cascaded
Inputs Start
DM1 = DM-F Local
DM-F Local
1
Enabling circuit
Outputs
Sensor channels
1
2
DM1 = DM-F Local
DM1 = DM-F Local
2
DM1 = DM-F PROFIsafe
3
Feedback circuit
Inputs 1 2
DM-F PROFIsafe
1
Enabling circuit
Outputs
2
Input 1 (I1) [%]
Input 2 (I2) [%]
Inputs
Open circuit
T1, T2, T3 [C]
Pt 100
NTC
KTY84
Sensor type Pt1000
KTY83
Sensor
Fault
Out of range
AM
AM
AM
TM
TM
TM
TM
(OPD above *E04*)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-47
7 Display settings (OPD)
For details see "Adapt display settings".
Fig. 1-24: Display settings (OPD)
Languages
Contrast [%]
Factory settings
Illumination [Off, 3 s,
10 s, 1 min, 5 min]
Profiles
Voltage display
Phase voltages
Line-to-line voltages
Warnings
1 Do not display
2 Display
Voltage display
Phase voltages
Voltage display
Faults
1 Do not display
2 Display
Return to main
display [Manual, 3 s, 10 s,
1 min, 5 min]
Display
Restore
display settings
1
(OPD above *E04*)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
8 Commands (OPD)
For details see "Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands".
Fig. 1-25: Commands (OPD)
9 Messages (OPD)
For details see "Display of all pending status information".
Fig. 1-26: Messages (OPD)
10 Warnings (OPD)
For details: See "Display of all pending warnings".
Fig. 1-27: Warnings (OPD)
Execute Test/Reset
Adopt address
Clear
Program
Read
Restart
Factory settings
Thermistor trip
Warning T>
Thermistor trip
Warning T>
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-49
11 Faults (OPD)
For details: See "Display of all pending faults".
Fig. 1-28: Faults (OPD)
12 Error buffer (OPD)
For details: See "Reading out the device-internal error buffer".
Fig. 1-29: Error buffer (OPD)
13 Event memory, OPD (OPD above *E04* and BU2 above *E07*)
For details see "Reading out the device-internal event memory".
Fig. 1-30: Event memory, OPD
Trip T>
Overload + phase failure
Fault - 1
Fault - 21
8
Enabling circuit 0 ->1
Event memory
DM1 = DM-F Local
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PROFIsafe Address:
Enabling circuit 0 -> 1
...
DM1 = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
Enabling circuit 1 -> 0
DM1 = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14 Identification (OPD)
For details see "Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro
components".
Fig. 1-31: Identification (OPD)
Short code
SIMOCODE pro V
Comment
MLFB
Time stamp
MLFB Plant identifier
Location designation
Date
Manufacturer
SIEMENS
Device family
Load feeder
Device subfamily
Motor management
Device class
SIMOCODE pro V
System
SIMOCODE pro
ID number
HW version
FW version
HW version
FW version
Display
Display
Display
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-51
Displays of the operator panel with display
Navigation is possible by means of the arrow buttons and softkeys. Each
menu item may have one or more submenus. The menu structure and
display are, in part, directly dependent upon device parameterization (e.g.
selected control function) and hardware configuration (e.g. type and number
of expansion modules used).
Main display The "Main display" is the default SIMOCODE pro display. It displays
the current measured values, which can be selected via predefined
profiles according to user requirements.
For detailed information, see: "Read and adapt main display").
Measured values display The "Measured Values Display" provides an overview of all values
measured by SIMOCODE pro.
For example, all phase currents, phase voltages, power-related
measured values or temperatures. For detailed information, see
"Display of measured values in the measured values display".
Status display The "Status Display" shows all higher-level status information, i.e.
all status information relevant to protecting and controlling the
motor.
For detailed information, see: "Motor protection and motor control
status".
Statistics/Maintenance The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item provides an overview of all
SIMOCODE pro information that is primarily relevant to
maintenance.
For detailed information, see: "Display of statistical and
maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/maintenance
display".
Communication The "Communication" menu item displays all important information
concerning PROFIBUS communication.
For detailed information, see: "Status display for PROFIBUS
communication".
Table 1-9: Menu of the operator panel with display and menu navigation
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Device I/Os The "Device I/Os" menu item provides a complete overview of the
current status of all inputs and outputs of the basic unit as well as
any connected expansion modules.
For detailed information, see: "Displays the current status of all
device I/Os".
Display settings All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be
carried out via "Display Settings". In addition to selecting the
language and adjusting the contrast or illumination, it is also
possible to select the profiles here which are relevant for adjusting
the main display.
For detailed information, see: "Adapt display settings".
Commands The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to
SIMOCODE pro e.g. for testing the feeder, resetting after tripping
and/or adopting parameters into the memory module or into
SIMOCODE pro.
For detailed information, see "Resetting, testing and parameterizing
via commands".
Status information The "Status Information" menu item provides an overview of all
pending status information.
For detailed information, see "Display of all pending status
information".
Warnings The "Warnings" menu item provides an overview of all pending
warnings.
For detailed information: See "Display of all pending warnings".
Table 1-9: Menu of the operator panel with display and menu navigation (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-53
Faults The "Faults" menu item provides an overview of all pending faults.
For detailed information: See "Display of all pending faults".
Error buffer The "Error buffer" menu item displays the SIMOCODE pro device-
internal error buffer.
For detailed information, see "Reading out the device-internal error
buffer".
Event memory The "Event Memory" menu item enables access to the
SIMOCODE pro device-internal event memory.
For detailed information, see "Reading out the device-internal event
memory".
Note
This is only displayed for OPD versions above *E04*and BU2 above
*E07* with a DM-F present.
Identification In the "Identification" menu item you will find detailed information/
labeling regarding SIMOCODE pro hardware components (basic
unit, operator panel with display).
For detailed information, see: "Identification of the motor feeder and
the SIMOCODE pro components".
About SIMOCODE The "About SIMOCODE" menu item displays further information
about SIMOCODE pro.
Table 1-9: Menu of the operator panel with display and menu navigation (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Read and adapt main display
To enable users speedy viewing of the measured values typically shown on
their switchgear, various profiles are deposited in the operator panel with
display that enable user-specific adaption of the standard measured values
displayed in the SIMOCODE pro main display. The profile can be selected in
"Display settings" -> "Profile"
(see Section "Adapt display settings" on Page 1-81).
If available, the effective set current, the set class time for overload
protection and the use of temperature monitoring with the help of
thermistors or analog temperature sensors are displayed in the lower left of
the main display. The submenus of the main display can be navigated with
the right-hand softkey. For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey
can be used when the motor is stopped to alternate between the display of
the two set currents.
IL1, IL2, IL3 [A] (example) Displays the currents in all three phases in A.
Note
Only possible if a current measuring module or current/voltage
measuring module is used.
IL1, IL2, IL3 [%] (example) Displays the currents of all three phases in % of set current.
Note
I_max [A] (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A.
Note
I_max [%] (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in % of set
current.
Note
Table 1-10: Read and adapt main display
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-55
I_max, Cos (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A and the
power factor.
Note
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used.
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, S Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase
voltage UL1-N in V, the power factor, and the apparent power
in kVA.
Note
If an OPD above version *E04* is used: Values will only be
displayed if phase voltage is set/configured.
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, S Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-
line voltage UL1-L2 in V, the power factor, and the apparent power
in kVA.
Note
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used,
line-to-line voltage is set/configured and the OPD is above version
*E04*.
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, P Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase
voltage UL1-N in V, the power factor, and the apparent power
in kVA.
Note
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, P Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-
line voltage UL1-L2 in V, the power factor, and the apparent power
in W.
Note
line-to-line voltage is set/configured and the OPD used is above
version *E04*.
Table 1-10: Read and adapt main display (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-56 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
[mA] In 1/Output (example) Displays the current value at input 1 of the analog module and at the
output of the analog module in mA.
Note
Only possible if the analog module is used.
[mA] In 2/Output (example) Displays the current value at input 2 of the analog module and at the
output of the analog module in mA.
Note
[mA] Inputs (example) Displays the current value at both inputs of the analog module
in mA.
Note
Max. temp. C (example) Displays the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module in C.
Note
Only possible if a temperature module is used.
Temperatures C (example) Displays the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module in C.
Note
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-57
Max. temp. F (example) Displays the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module in F.
Note
Temperatures F (example) Displays the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module in F.
Note
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N Displays phase voltages UL1-N, UL2-N and UL3-N in V.
Note
UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 Shows line-to-line voltages UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 in V.
Note
*E04*.
I_max, UL1-N, Cos Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase
voltage UL1-N in V and the power factor.
Note
displayed if phase voltage is set/
configured.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-58 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-
line voltage UL1-L2 in V and the power factor.
Note
*E04*.
I_max, UL1-N, C Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase
voltage UL1-N in V, and the maximum temperature of all used
sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in C.
Note
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module and
temperature module are being used. If an OPD above version
*E04* is used: Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is set/
configured.
I_max, UL1-N, F Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase
voltage UL1-N in V, and the maximum temperature of all used
sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in F.
Note
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module and
temperature module are being used. If an OPD above version
*E04* is used: Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is set/
configured.
I_max, UL1-L2, C Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-
line voltage UL1-L2 in V, and the maximum temperature of all used
sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in C.
Note
version *E04*.
I_max, UL1-L2, F Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-
line voltage UL1-L2 in V, and the maximum temperature of all used
sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in F.
Note
version *E04*.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-59
Note
If measured values are not depicted on the main display for a sustained
period of time, a profile has been selected in the display settings that is no
longer supported, due, for example, to a changed system expansion or
changed hardware configuration. The profile must be reselected.
Calculator 1 (example) Displays the calculated result that the function block Calculator 1
provides, unitless in the range of 0 to 65535.
Note
Enables, for example, the depiction on the switchgear display of a
2-byte value sent directly from the automation system, i.e. the
unitless depiction of all 2-byte values available in SIMOCODE pro.
Calculator 2 (example) Displays the calculated result that the function block Calculator 2
provides, unitless in the range of 0 to 65535.
Note
Enables, for example, the depiction on the switchgear display of a
2-byte or 4-byte value sent directly from the automation system, i.e.
the unitless depiction of all 2 or 4-byte values available in
SIMOCODE pro.
Energy consumed (example)
Note
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used
and the OPD is above version *E04*.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-60 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Display of measured values in the measured values display
The "Measured Values" menu item displays all current SIMOCODE pro
measured values. Depending upon the type of expansion modules used, all
or only some of the values listed here will be available.
Here are the most important menus:
I max (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases, switchable
between A and % of I
s
.
Note
IL1, IL2, IL3 (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases, switchable
between A and % of I
s
.
Note
Phase unbalance (example) Displays current phase unbalance in %.
Note
Only available if a current measuring module or current
/voltage measuring module is used.
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N (example) Displays all phase voltages in V.
Note
U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1 Displays all line-to-line voltages in V.
Note
version *E04*.
Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value display
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-61
Cos phi, P, S (example) Displays the power factor (0 to 100 %, or absolute, switchable via
the right-hand softkey), the active power in kW and the apparent
power in kVA.
Note
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
Analog output (example)
Displays the current values at both inputs and the current value at
the output of the analog module, switchable between mA and %.
Note
This is only available if an analog module is being used.
Max. temperature (example) Displays the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module in C (switchable to F).
Note
Only possible if a temperature module is being used.
T1, T2, T3 (example) Displays the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module in C (switchable to F).
Note
Thermal motor model (example) Displays current internal thermal motor model in %.
Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value display (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-62 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Time to trip Displays the estimated time to trip.
Cooling down period (example) Displays the cooling down period remaining before the motor can
be switched on again after an overload trip.
Last trip current (example) Displays the strength of the current that was measured at the
moment of the overload trip, switchable between A and % of I
s
.
Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value display (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-63
Motor protection and motor control status
The status display shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all status
information relevant to the protection and controlling of the motor. The type
of status information depicted is, therefore, in part directly dependent upon
the parameterized control function and the hardware configuration of
SIMOCODE pro, and may vary.
General
General fault, general warning
Current flowing, device ok
Bus ok, PLC/PCS in Run
Control: The display of the status information can vary according to the control function.
ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>,
Start active
Table 1-12: Motor protection and motor control status
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-64 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Interlocking time active
Change-over pause active
OPO, Remote, TPF
FC, FO, TC, TO Only for "Positioner" control functions, can vary according to the
actual positioner function.
Positioner closes
Positioner opens
Only for "Positioner" control functions.
Non-maintained command mode
Table 1-12: Motor protection and motor control status (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-65
Protection
Cooling down period active,
Pause time active
Emergency start executed
Other
Device test active
Phase sequence 1-2-3,
Phase sequence 3-2-1
Note
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-66 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Safety
Safety DM-F Local Enabling circuit status, switch-off "Safety", "Safety OK."
Note
This is only displayed if the OPD version is above *E04* and if the
BU2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F Local present.
DIP switches, DM-F Local Status of DIP switch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
Note
BU2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F Local present.
Safety DM-F PROFIsafe Enabling circuit status, switch-off "Safety", PROFIsafe active
Note
BU 2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F PROFIsafe present.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-67
Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/
maintenance display
The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item gives an overview of all
SIMOCODE pro information that is primarily relevant to maintenance. The
statuses of the timer and counter, etc. are displayed, as well as operating
hours, motor stop times and the number of starts.
General
Number of overload trips
Motor operating hours
Operating hours > Displays overshooting of the set limit for operating hours
monitoring.
Number of starts - Actual value
(example)
Table 1-13: Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the
statistics/maintenance display
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-68 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Permissible starts - Actual value
(example)
One more only, No start
Motor stop time (example)
Motor stop time > Displays overshooting of the stipulated limit for motor stop time
monitoring.
Energy consumed (example)
Note
statistics/maintenance display (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-69
Number of parameterizations
(example)
Operating hours BU (example)
Timer
Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) - Actual value
(example)
Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) - Output
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-70 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Counters
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) - Actual value
(example)
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) - Output
Calculators
Calculator 1
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-71
Calculator 2
Safety: Time until test required Remaining time until next test is required in weeks.
Note
BU 2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F present.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-72 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Status display for PROFIBUS communication
The "Communication" menu item displays all important information
concerning PROFIBUS communication. In addition to the current PROFIBUS
device address, the baud rate or PROFIBUS-relevant settings concerning
process alarms and diagnostic alarms for the automation system are also
displayed.
PROFIBUS address (example)
PROFIsafe address Displays the PROFIsafe address.
Note
BU 2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F PROFIsafe present.
Baud rate
Bus o.k.
Bus monitoring
Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-73
SPS/PCS in Run
PLC/PCS monitoring
Start-up parameter block
Timestamping active
Compatibility mode
Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-74 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Compatibility mode 1
3UF50 mode
3UF50 mode
DPVO, DPV1
3UF50 basic type
Diagnostic device fault/status info Displays which type of diagnostic information "device fault" or
"status information" is sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level
Diagnostic warning
Diagnostic fault
Displays which type of diagnostic information "warning" or "fault" is
sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level automation system via
PROFIBUS.
Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-75
Displays the current status of all device I/Os
The "Device I/Os" menu item gives a complete overview of the current
status of all inputs and outputs of the basic unit and any connected
expansion modules (except for the earth-fault module) The type of status
information displayed is, therefore, directly dependent upon the
SIMOCODE pro hardware configuration.
Basic unit
Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4
Outputs 1, 2, 3
PTC high resistance/not present
PTC ok, PTC short circuit
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-76 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Current measuring
I L1, I L2, I L3 Displays the currents in all three phases in A.
Note
Only available if a current measuring module or current/voltage
Voltage measurement
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N (example) Displays all phase voltages in V.
Note
U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1 Displays all line-to-line voltages in V.
Note
version *E04*.
Table 1-15: Displays the current status of all device I/Os
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-77
Digital module 1, digital module 2
Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4 Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4 "monostable" or "bistable".
Note
Only possible if digital module 1 is being used as monostable or
bistable.
Monostable outputs Outputs 1, 2 "monostable".
Note
Only possible if digital module 1 is being used as monostable.
For OPDs up to version *E03*: The display is different.
Bistable outputs Bistable outputs 1, 2.
Note
Only possible if digital module 1 is being used as monostable.
For OPDs up to version *E03*: The display is different.
Table 1-15: Displays the current status of all device I/Os (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-78 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Digital module 1 as DM-F Local
Inputs DM-F Local Inputs "IN", "Start", "Feedback circuit", "Cascaded".
Note
Only possible if digital module 1 is "Local", an OPD above version
*E04* and BU2 above *E07* is being used.
Sensor channels DM-F Local Sensor channels 1,2
Note
Outputs DM-F Local Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit".
Note
Digital module 1 is DM-F PROFIsafe
Inputs DM-F PROFIsafe Inputs 1, 2, 3, "Feedback circuit".
Note
Only available if digital module 1 is "PROFIsafe" and if an OPD above
version *E04* and BU2 above *E07* is being used.
Outputs DM-F PROFIsafe Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit".
Note
Only available if digital module 1 is "PROFIsafe" and if an OPD above
version *E04* and BU2 above *E07* is being used.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-79
Analog module
Input 1, input 2 (example)
Note
Output (example)
Note
Open circuit
Note
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-80 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Temperature module
Max. temperature (example)
Note
T1, T2, T3 (example)
Note
Sensor type
Pt100
Pt1000
NTC
KTY83
KTY85
Note
Sensor fault
Sensor out of range
Note
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-81
Adapt display settings
All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be carried out via
the display settings. In addition to selecting the language and adjusting the
contrast or illumination, it is also possible to select the profiles here which
are relevant for adjusting the main display. The display settings can be
completely reset to the factory settings via the corresponding menu item.
Languages
Example: English
German
French
Polish
Spanish
Portuguese
Italian
Finnish
Contrast
Example: 10 %
15 %
20 %
25 %
30 %
35 %
40 %
45 %
50 %
55 %
60 %
65 %
70 %
75 %
80 %
85 %
90 %
Illumination
Example: Stipulates how long the background illumination remains on after a
button has been pushed on the operator panel with display, and it
enables the illumination to be switched off permanently:
Off
3_s
10_s
1_min
5_min
Table 1-16: Adapt display settings
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-82 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Profiles
See "Menu of the operator
panel with display", main
display
Enables selection of the display profiles for the main display. If a
defined profile is no longer supported by SIMOCODE pro, for
example, due to a changed hardware configuration, the start display
is shown instead of the default main display.
IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]
I_max [A]
IL1, IL2, IL3 [%]
I_max [%]
I_max, Cos
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, S
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, S
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, P
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, P
In1/Output [mA]
In2/Output [mA]
Inputs [mA]
Max. temp. C
Temperatures C
Max. temp. F
Temperatures F
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N
UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1
I_max, UL1-N, Cos
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos
I_max, UL1-N, C (max. temp.)
I_max, UL1-L2, C (max. temp.)
I_max, UL1-N, F (max. temp.)
I_max, UL1-L2, F (max. temp.)
Calculator 1
Calculator 2
Table 1-16: Adapt display settings (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-83
Voltage display
Switch voltage display
Note
Only available for OPDs above version *E04* and BU2 above
version *E06*.
From BU2 product version *E07, configuration is carried out in the
BU.
Determines whether "phase voltages" or "line-to-line voltages" are
displayed.
Phase voltages
Warnings
Determines whether, in the case of a pending general warning, the
display is switched over to the menu item "Warnings" so that details
are displayed (not switched on as standard).
Do not display
Display
Faults
Determines whether, in the case of a pending general fault, the
display is switched over to the menu item "Faults" so that details are
displayed (switched on as standard, higher priority than pending
warnings).
Do not display
Display
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-84 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Return to main display
Determines whether and when to return from the current menu to
the main display.
Manual
3 s
10 s
1 min
5 min
Factory settings display
Enables resetting of the the display settings (not to the factory
settings of SIMOCODE pro!)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-85
Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands
The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to
SIMOCODE pro e.g. for testing the feeder, resetting after tripping and/or
adopting parameters into the memory module or into SIMOCODE pro. By
safeguarding the device-internal parameterization against external access,
e.g. via a password stipulated in SIMOCODE pro, individual commands and/
or even the entire "Commands" menu item can be blocked.
Table 1-17: Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands
Test/Reset Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked.
Adopt address Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked and a password
has not been stipulated.
Program Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked.
Clear Always possible.
Read Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked and a password
has not been stipulated.
Restart Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked.
Factory settings Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-86 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Display of all pending status information
This menu item provides an overview of all pending status information. A
detailed description of pending status information can be found in
Chapter 15 "Alarms, faults and system events".
Fig. 1-32: Display of all pending status information
Display of all pending warnings
This menu item provides an overview of all pending warnings. In the case of
a newly pending general warning, it is possible to switch to this menu item
automatically (this must be set via the display settings) so that the exact
cause of the general warning can be displayed.
A detailed description of pending warnings can be found in
Fig. 1-33: Display of all pending warnings
Display of all pending faults
This menu item provides an overview of all pending faults. In the case of a
newly pending general fault, it is possible to switch to this menu item
automatically (this must be set via the display settings) so that the exact
cause of the general fault can be displayed.
A detailed description of pending faults can be found in
h
Fig. 1-34: Display of all pending faults
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-87
Reading out the device-internal error buffer
The "Error buffer" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro device-
internal error buffer. The time and cause of the last 21 faults are displayed
here. See also Chapter 14.3 "Error buffer/reading out error protocol".
A detailed description of faults can be found in
Fig. 1-35: Reading out the device-internal error buffer
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-88 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Reading out the device-internal event memory
The "Event Memory" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro
device-internal event memory. The two most recent events "DM-F enabling
circuit closed" and "DM-F enabling circuit open" are displayed, together with
the time, for both digital modules "DM-F Local" and "DM-F PROFIsafe".
Table 1-18: Reading out the device-internal event memory
Switch to event memory display.
Last event "Enabling circuit closed",
DM-F Local,
The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed", the
time and the related DIP switch configuration.
Note
Only available if digital module 1 is DM-F Local.
DM-F PROFIsafe
The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed", the
time and the related PROFIsafe address.
Note
Only possible if digital module 1 is DM-F PROFIsafe.
Last event "Enabling circuit opened" The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit open" and
the corresponding time.
Note
Only available if digital module 1 is DM-F Local or
DM-F PROFIsafe.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-89
Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components
In the "Identification" menu item you will find detailed information about
SIMOCODE pro hardware components, e.g. hardware and firmware
versions. Furthermore, this dialog enables the identification of the motor
feeder via a plant identifier stored in SIMOCODE pro, as well as a request
for the location designation and display of the device-internal comment.
Identification
Plant identifier
Location designation
Date
Comment
Table 1-19: Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-90 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Basic unit
MLFB (order number)(example)
Short code
Manufacturer
Device family (example)
Device subfamily (example)
Table 1-19: Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components (Cont.)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-91
Device class
System
Identification number (example)
HW version (example)
FW version (example)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-92 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Time stamp
Display
MLFB (order number)
HW version (example)
FW version (example)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-93
1.7.4 Current measuring module (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C and
SIMOCODE pro V device series
Current measuring modules are used together with the basic units of the
SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series.
For each feeder, the current measuring module must be selected according
to the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor).
The current measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and
630 A, with interposing transformers up to 820 A.
Current measuring modules are available for the following current ranges
(see figure below):
0.3 ... 3 A with through-hole technology.
2.4 ... 25 A with through-hole technology.
10 ... 100 A with through-hole technology
20 ... 200 A with through-hole or bus connection technology
63 ... 630 A with bus connection technology.
Fig. 1-36: Current measuring module variants
The current measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a
connecting cable, which also supplies the power. Current measuring
modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed
directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. Basic units can
be snapped directly onto the current measuring modules. Current
measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard
mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate
with the screw attachments that are integrated in the enclosure. The current
0.3 A - 3 A
2.4 A - 25 A
10 A - 100 A
20 A - 200 A 63 A - 630 A
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-94 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated
screw attachments.
Note:
Current measuring modules with a set current of up to 100 A can be
connected to the basic unit mechanically and be installed as a unit (behind
one another). Larger current measuring modules can only be mounted
separately.
1.7.5 Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V device
series
The SIMOCODE pro V device allows use of a current/voltage measuring
module instead of a current measuring module. In addition to measuring the
motor current, current/voltage measuring modules also enable:
Measuring voltages up to 690 V
Calculation and monitoring power and cos phi
Monitoring of the phase sequence.
The following figure shows the various current/voltage measuring modules:
Fig. 1-37: Current/voltage measuring modules
The current/voltage measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a
connecting cable, which also supplies the power.
0.3 A - 3 A
2.4 A - 25 A
10 A - 100 A
20 A - 200 A 63 A - 630 A
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-95
Current/voltage measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail
mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional
push-in lugs. The current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A can also
be mounted on the standard mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed
directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments that are
integrated in the enclosure. The current/voltage measuring module up to
630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw attachments. Basic
units can only be mounted separately next to current/voltage measuring
modules.
For calculating or monitoring performance variables, current/voltage
measuring modules have additional, removable terminals that can be fed
with all three phase voltages of the main circuit. An additional 3-core cable
can be used, for example, to connect the main circuit directly from the bus
connections of the current/voltage measuring module with the connection
terminals of the voltage measurement module.
Note
The current/voltage measuring module requires basic unit 2, version *E02*
(from 04/2005) or later.
Using a decoupling module
A decoupling module may be required when using a voltage measuring
module.
See Chapter 1.7.6.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-96 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1.7.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for current/voltage measuring modules,
SIMOCODE pro V device series.
When measuring voltage and power with SIMOCODE pro in ungrounded
networks, each current/voltage measuring module must have a decoupling
module connected upstream in series at the system interface. When
measuring voltage and power with SIMOCODE pro in networks with
additional insulation measurement or insulation monitoring each current/
voltage measuring module must also have a decoupling module connected
upstream in series. If using the 3UF710 current measuring module in these
networks, it is imperative that an additional decoupling module is not used.
1 decoupling module for connection in series upstream from a current/
voltage measuring module at the system interface
Fig. 1-38: Decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro V device series
Note
When using a decoupling module, the type and number of expansion
modules that can be connected to a basic device are limited! See
Chapter 1.7.8 "Configuration information for using an operator panel with
display and/or a decoupling module".
Using the decoupling module in different networks
A decoupling module may be required when using a voltage measuring
module, especially for the following networks:
Insulated networks
High-resistance networks
Asymmetrically grounded networks
Single-phase networks.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-97
The table below shows decoupling module requirements for different
network forms and configurations (star networks, delta networks and
single-phase networks):
Star networks:
Table 1-20: Decoupling module requirements for star networks
Star network Network configuration Decoupling
module
required
Note
4-wire, star
grounded with low
impedance
No TN-S system
according to
IEC 60364
4-wire, star
grounded with high
impedance
Yes -
3-wire, star
grounded with low
impedance
No TN-C system
according to
IEC 60364
3-wire, star
grounded with high
impedance
Yes -
3-wire, star
insulated
Yes IT system according
to IEC 60364
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
R
L1
L2
L3
PE
L1
L2
L3
PE
R
L1
L2
L3
PE
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-98 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Delta networks:
1
)
Table 1-21: Decoupling module requirements for delta networks
Single-phase networks:
Table 1-22: Decoupling module requirements for single-phase networks
1) Mainly in North America
Delta networks Network configuration Decoupling
module
required
Note
3-wire, delta
single-phase grounded
Yes Parameter
"Voltage display
-> Line to line
voltage" must be
activated.
3-wire, delta
insulated
Yes Parameter
"Voltage display
-> Line to line
voltage" must be
activated.
Center tap grounded Yes Parameter
"Voltage display
-> Line to line
voltage" must be
activated.
Single-phase networks Yes Parameter "Voltage
display -> phase
voltages" must be
active.
The applied voltage
can be calculated as
follows
U_L1N + U_L2N.
L1
L2
L3
PE
L1
L2
L3
PE
L1
L2
L3
PE
N
N
L
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-99
1.7.7 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series
Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are
available:
Digital modules (DM)
Failsafe digital module Failsafe Local (DM-F Local)
Failsafe digital module Failsafe PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe)
Analog module (AM)
Temperature module (TM).
All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of
22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing)
and removable terminals. The expansion module is connected via a
connecting cable to the first system interface of basic unit 2. Further
expansion modules or the operator panel can be connected via the second
system interface. The expansion modules draw power from basic unit 2 via
the connecting cables.
All expansion modules are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed
to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs.
Fig. 1-39: Expansion modules, SIMOCODE pro V device series
Notice:
Expansion modules can only be used in conjunction with basic unit 2!
Up to 5 expansion modules can be connected to a basic unit in any order.
When using an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module,
ensure that additional limitations governing the number of expansion
modules that can be connected per basic unit are observed!
See Chapter 1.7.8 "Configuration information for using an operator panel
with display and/or a decoupling module".
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-100 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Digital module (DM)
Digital modules allow the type and number of binary inputs and relay
outputs on basic unit 2 to be further increased, if required.
The following digital modules are available for basic unit 2:
Table 1-23: Versions of digital modules
A maximum of 2 digital modules can be connected to one basic unit 2. A
further 4 additional binary inputs and 2 additional binary outputs are
available. All versions can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro V
can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and
7 relay outputs.
In the case of the monostable version, the relay outputs open
after switching off/failure/interruption of the supply voltage. With the
bistable version, the switching state of the relay outputs remains intact
even after switching off/failure/interruption of the supply voltage.
If required, you can set a delay time for the digital module inputs (see
Chapter 7.4 "Digital module inputs").
Supplying the inputs: See Chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
Note
To implement some motor control functions, a further digital module is
required in addition to the relay outputs on basic unit 2.
Note
If two digital modules are being used, the digital module connected the
closest to the basic unit via the system interface will be identified as digital
module 1. The digital module that follows behind will be identified as digital
module 2. If one digital module is connected to the front side and another to
the lower system interface of the basic unit, the digital module on the front
system interface of the basic unit will always be identified as digital
module 1.
Inputs Supply Outputs
4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 monostable relay
outputs
4 inputs 110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relay
outputs
4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
4 inputs 110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-101
Failsafe digital module DM-F
The failsafe digital module DM-F extends the SIMOCODE pro motor
management system with failsafe functions for switching off motors:
Failsafe digital module DM-F Local
Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe.
These modules fulfill the general requirements for EMERGENCY STOP
mechanisms or safety circuits, as described in the standards EN 418 and
EN 60204-1 (06/2006).
Depending on the external circuit, the following Performance Level/Safety
Integrity Level can be achieved:
PL e Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 or
SIL 3 according to IEC 61508/62061.
Safety technology and safety-oriented functions
Are limited exclusively to failsafe digital modules.
Do not directly affect existing SIMOCODE pro components and concepts.
LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics:
See Chapter D.5.2 "Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
digital modules" system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules
SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (table below).
Test/Reset button DM-F:
See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY"
(table below).
Configuring the DM-F DIP switch:
See Chapter 10.8 "Safety-oriented tripping" system manual "Failsafe digital
module SIMOCODE pro Safety" (table below).
DM-F system interfaces:
(table below).
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-102 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Documentation for safety-oriented functions and failsafe digital
modules
Safety-oriented functions and additional information on failsafe digital
modules can be found in the following documentation:
System manuals and operating manuals are available at:
The failsafe digital module DM-F Local provides safety-oriented tripping of
a motor feeder via a hardware signal that is detected and evaluated by the
module.
From a non-safety-oriented perspective, the DMF comprises:
Table 1-24: Inputs, outputs and voltage supply of the digital module
Failsafe Local (DM-F Local)
The failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe provides safety-oriented
tripping of a motor feeder by a failsafe control (F-CPU) via PROFIBUS with
the failsafe PROFIsafe profile.
From a non-safety-oriented perspective, the DM-PROFIsafe comprises:
Documentation
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY " (German)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (English)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (French)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (Spanish)
Operating manual "Failsafe digital module DM-F Local"
Operating manual "Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe"
Inputs Supply
1
) Outputs
4 digital inputs (non-safety-oriented):
- Input 1: Sensor circuit
- Input 2: Start input
- Input 3: Feedback circuit
- Input 4: Cascade input
24 V DC 2 monostable relay outputs
inputs (non-safety-oriented)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-103
Table 1-25: Inputs, outputs and voltage supply of the digital module
Failsafe PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe)
1)
Warning
Dangerous voltage
Use a power supply unit compliant with IEC 60536, Class III (SELV or PELV)!
Overvoltage limiters are required for inductive loads.
Inputs Supply
1
) Outputs
4 digital inputs (non-safety-oriented) 24 V DC 2 monostable relay outputs
inputs (non-safety-oriented)
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-104 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Analog module (AM)
By means of the analog module, basic unit 2 can be optionally expanded by
analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA - 20 mA). As a result, it is possible to
measure and monitor any process variable that can be mapped on to a 0/4
mA - 20-mA signal.
Typical applications would be, for example, fill-level monitoring for
protecting pumps from dry operation, or the monitoring of pollution in a
filter using a differential pressure transducer. The automation system has
free access to the measured process variables. The analog output can, for
example, be used for the visualization of any process variables on a pointer
instrument. The automation system can also freely access the output via
PROFIBUS.
1 analog module can be connected to BU2
2 analog inputs (passive) for measuring 0/4mA - 20 mA signals.
Both inputs are either set to 0 - 20 mA or 4 mA - 20 mA
1 output for outputting a 0/4 mA - 20 mA signal.
Notice
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs that have to be supplied
by an external, isolated current source (e.g. isolating transducer). If the
output of the analog module is not being utilized, it can be used as current
source for an input.
Note
The use of an analog module requires basic unit 2, version *E02*
(from 04/2005).
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-105
For networks grounded with a higher impedance it may be necessary to set
up earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents using a 3UL22
summation current transformer, instead of carrying out earth-fault
monitoring via a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A, and 1 A can be evaluated with
the summation current transformer.
In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring supported by both device
series, SIMOCODE pro V can thus be expanded by a more precise,
additional external earth-fault monitoring system.
The earth-fault module adds an additional input for connecting a summation
current transformer to basic unit 2.
1 earth-fault module connectable to BU2.
Note
The use of an earth-fault module requires basic unit 2, above at least version
*E02* (from 04/2005).
The temperature module allows expansion of the SIMOCODE pro V device
series with an analog temperature monitoring system. In addition to
monitoring thermistors of the basic units, up to 3 analog sensor measuring
circuits (in two or three-wire systems) can be connected, the temperatures
in the 3 sensor measuring circuits can be measured, and the highest
temperature in all sensor measuring circuits can be determined. The
measured temperatures can be fully integrated into the process, and they
can be further monitored and also made available for a higher- level
This makes it possible, for example, to implement analog temperature
monitoring of the motor windings, bearings, the coolant temperature and
the gear oil temperature.
SIMOCODE pro V supports different sensor types (NTC,
KTY83/84, Pt100/Pt1000) for use in hard, fluid or gaseous media.
Notice
The same sensor type must be used in all sensor measuring circuits.
1 temperature module connectable to BU2
3 sensor measuring circuits in 2 or 3-wire systems
Note
The use of an analog module requires basic unit 2, above at least version
*E02* (from 04/2005).
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-106 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1.7.8 Configuration information for using an operator panel with display and/or
a decoupling module
If a decoupling module and/or an operator panel with display is to be used in
the SIMOCODE pro system, the following configuration information
regarding the type and number of expansion modules must be observed.
The following tables show the maximum expansion with expansion modules
for the various combinations
(x = possible, = not possible):
Maximum expansion with expansion modules
1) No bistable relay outputs and a maximum of 5 of the 7 relay outputs are simultaneously
active (> 3 s)
2) No bistable relay outputs and a maximum of 3 of the 5 relay outputs are simultaneously
active (> 3 s)
3) Analog module output is not being used
Table 1-26: Maximum expansion with expansion modules when using an operator panel with display, a current/
voltage measuring module and a decoupling module for SIMOCODE pro V basic units with 24 V DC or
110-240 V AC/DC
SIMOCODE pro basic unit
U
s
= 24 V DC
SIMOCODE pro basic unit
U
s
= 110-240 V AC/DC
O
p
e
r
a
t
o
r

p
a
n
e
l
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
D
e
c
o
u
p
l
i
n
g

m
o
d
u
l
e
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

m
o
d
u
l
e
/
D
M
-
F
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

m
o
d
u
l
e
A
n
a
l
o
g

m
o
d
u
l
e
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
E
a
r
t
h
-
f
a
u
l
t

m
o
d
u
l
e
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

m
o
d
u
l
e
/
D
M
-
F
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

m
o
d
u
l
e
A
n
a
l
o
g

m
o
d
u
l
e
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
E
a
r
t
h
-
f
a
u
l
t

m
o
d
u
l
e
N
o
n
e
/
O
p
e
r
a
t
o
r

p
a
n
e
l
I -
U/I -
U/I X
1)

1)
-

1)

1)
-
- -
- -
O
p
e
r
a
t
o
r

p
a
n
e
l
w
i
t
h

d
i
s
p
l
a
y
I - Max. 4 modules Max. 4 modules
U/I - Max. 4 modules Max. 3 modules
- - -
U/I X -
2)
-
- - - -

1)

1)

3)
- -
- -
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-107
1.7.9 Accessories
The following figure shows accessories that are independent of the device
series:
Fig. 1-40: Accessories
PC cable
For device parameterization, for connecting a PC to the system interface of
a basic unit via the serial interface of the PC.
USB to serial adapter
For connecting a RS-232 cable to the USB interface of a PC.
Memory module
Allows system parameterization to be backed up completely and be
transferred to a new system without additional resources or specialist
expertise, for example if the device is replaced (see Chapter 14.3.3)
Addressing plug
For the hardware-related allocation of the PROFIBUS DP address to
SIMOCODE pro without a PC/PD via the system interface.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with an addressing plug:
See Chapter 14.2.2.
PC cable
Memory module
Addressing plug
Connecting cable
Door adapter Adapter for System interface
cover
USB to serial adapter
Operator panel
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-108 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Connecting cable
In various designs and lengths. These are required to connect the basic unit
to its current measuring module and, if applicable, to its expansion modules
or the operator panel.
Notice:
The total length of all cables connecting modules and basic units must not
exceed 3 m per system interface of the basic unit!
Door adapter
Facilitates access to the SIMOCODE pro system interface, for example via
the front panel, to ensure fast parameterization.
System interface cover
To protect and/or seal the system interfaces against soiling. In normal
operation, unused system interfaces must be closed.
Operator panel adapter
Enables the use of the SIMOCODE pro 3UF720 operator panel in a front
panel cut-out, in which a SIMOCODE DP 3UF52 operator panel (IP54 degree
of protection) was previously used, e.g. after a system change. Can also be
used when replacing a 3UF721 operator panel with display with a 3UF720
standard operator panel.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-109
1.7.10 Software
For communication-capable switching devices, device functions, hardware
configuration, user-friendliness of parameterization software and suitable
system integration (i.e. optimum and fast integration in various plant
configurations and process automation systems) play a key role.
SIMOCODE pro offers various software tools for thorough, time-saving
parameterization and configuration and diagnostics for:
SIMOCODE ES for "totally integrated" commissioning and service
Object manager OM SIMOCODE pro for "totally integrated" in SIMATIC S7
PCS 7 SIMOCODE pro function block library "totally integrated" in PCS 7
SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for
SIMOCODE pro, and runs on a PC/PD with Windows XP or Windows 7
Ultimate and Professional.
SIMOCODE ES is a user-friendly and clear user interface for the
SIMOCODE pro motor management system for parameterizing, operating,
monitoring and testing SIMOCODE in the field or from a centralized
location.
SIMOCODE ES provides detailed information for maintenance and service
by displaying operating, service and diagnostic data and helps to prevent,
localize and resolve faults.
Online parameterization during operation avoids unnecessary plant
downtime.
The integrated print function in SIMOCODE ES makes it possible to
document all parameters according to DIN EN ISO 7200.
Additionally, the graphics editor allows very ergonomic and user-friendly
parameterization per "drag and drop": Inputs and outputs of function blocks
can be linked graphically and the parameters set. Configured functions can
be described in detail and device parameterization can be documented
graphically using comments. This speeds up commissioning and simplifies
plant documentation. The optimized user interface and integrated graphic
editor are used for parameterization. Inputs and outputs of function blocks
can be linked graphically and the parameters set. The device
parameterization can be documented graphically. See also Chapter 1.9
"Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)".
Further functions: Operation, diagnostics, testing, S7 routing, Teleservice
via MPI, STEP 7 object manager.
You will find a demo and latest updates on the Internet at
http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software Downloads
Note
SIMOCODE ES is subject to continual maintenance and improvement.
Current Service Packs and Hotfixes can be downloaded at
http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software Downloads.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-110 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro Object Manager OM is part of SIMOCODE ES. When
SIMOCODE ES and SIMOCODE OM pro are installed on a PC/PD,
SIMOCODE ES can be called up directly from STEP 7 HW Config. This
enables simple and complete SIMATIC S7 configuration.
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 Library
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library is used to simply and
conveniently connect SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process
control system. The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library contains
the diagnostic and driver blocks that correspond to the diagnostic and driver
concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 and the elements (symbols and faceplates)
necessary for operating and monitoring. Integration is carried out graphically
with the CFC editor.
Signal processing and technological functions of the SIMOCODE pro PC7
function block library are oriented towards the SIMATIC PCS 7 standard
libraries (Driver Blocks, Technological Blocks) and are optimized for
SIMOCODE pro. Users that have previously configured motor feeders
conventionally via Signal Blocks or Motor/Solenoid Valve Blocks can easily
switch to the SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library.
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library supplied on CD-ROM
enables the user to use the required engineering software on one
engineering station (single license) including the runtime software to run AS
blocks in one automation system (single license). If the AS blocks are used
in additional automation systems, an appropriate number of runtime
licenses is required (these are delivered without CD).
Note
The PCS 7 libraries are subject to continual maintenance and improvement.
Current Service Packs and Hotfixes can be downloaded at
http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software Downloads.
Notice
Observe the respective system versions!
GSD File
For integration into SIMATIC S7 or any standard DP master system
(automation system). The latest version can be found on the internet
at http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd.
Further information on integrating DP slaves can be found in the automation
system documentation.
Win SIMOCODE DP converter
This is a software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter
files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for
SIMOCODE pro.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-111
1.8 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro
1.8.1 Function blocks
See also Chapter 1.9 "Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)".
Properties
Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for
the administration of various control stations, for the set control function, or
for motor protection. Every function block has a name and may be equipped
with inputs and outputs. The inputs and outputs are used for the internal
connection of the various function blocks and, thus, the setup of a device-
internal logic instead of an externally wired logic in the control circuit.
The following table shows the possible input types of the internal function
blocks of SIMOCODE pro:
Table 1-27: Input types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro
The following table shows the possible output types of the internal function
blocks of SIMOCODE pro:
Input Symbol Example
Plugs
(binary)
Function blocks in the basic unit may have binary
plugs. These are connected to binary sockets via
software. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES.
Plugs
(analog)
Function blocks in the basic unit may have analog
plugs. These are connected via software to analog
sockets. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES. Example: 2-byte word for cyclic
send data.
Screw
terminals
Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Input" function
block. Control devices and auxiliary switches are
normally connected there.
Receive data
from
PROFIBUS DP
From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro, e.g. "Cyclic
Receive" function block.
Output Symbol Example
Sockets
(binary)
Function blocks in the basic units may have binary
sockets. These are assigned via software to binary
plugs.
They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with
SIMOCODE ES.
DP
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-112 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Sockets
(analog)
Function blocks in the basic units may have analog
sockets. Sockets are assigned via software to analog
plugs.
They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with
SIMOCODE ES.
Example: 2-byte word max. current I_max.
Screw
terminals
Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Output"
function block. The contactors, for example, are
connected here.
Send data to
PROFIBUS DP
From SIMOCODE pro to the DP-Master, e.g."Cyclic
Send" function block.
Binary terminal
block
Internal binary signals (binary sockets) that are not
assigned to a function block (fault, status, other),
e.g. "Status - Device OK." (in the graphic editor).
Analog terminal
block
Internal analog signals (analog sockets) that are not
assigned to a function block, e.g. "Phase Unbalance"
(in the graphic editor).
DP
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-113
Schematic of principle structural configuration
The following function block diagram shows the principal configuration of
SIMOCODE pro with its external inputs and outputs and internally stored
function blocks:
Fig. 1-41: Principal configuration of SIMOCODE pro
Connecting plugs with sockets
Note
The function block plugs and sockets have not already been connected at
the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic unit.
The internal wiring (connecting the plugs and sockets) is determined by the
selected application.
1)
Note
If external wiring has already been carried out, but SIMOCODE pro has not
yet been parameterized:
If you now press a button, the contactors will not be activated!
1)
1) If you select and load a preset application (e.g. the reversing starter) in
SIMOCODE ES, all links and interlocks for the reversing starter are created in
the basic unit.
1
2
3
1
2
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
4
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
BU Inputs
Cyclic
Send
Cyclic
Receive
BU Outputs
3
DP
DP
From DP
Master
To DP
Master
PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP
Function Block A
Function Block C
Function Block B
Inputs
(terminals)
Sockets Plugs Sockets
4
Outputs
(terminals) Plugs
SIMOCODE pro (external) SIMOCODE pro (internal)
Standard function
Control Function
Logic Function
Standard function
Function Block D
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-114 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1.9 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)
Analog Value Recording (Record)
Fig. 1-42: Analog Value Recording
See Chapter 8.
AM Output
Fig. 1-43: AM Output
See Chapter 6.5.
AM Inputs
Fig. 1-44: AM Inputs
See Chapter 7.6.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-115
Acyclic Send Byte 0 (1)
Fig. 1-45: Acyclic Receive Byte 0
See Chapter 6.7.
Acyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3)
Fig. 1-46: Acyclic Receive
See Chapter 7.8.
OP LED
Fig. 1-47: OP LED
See Chapter 6.3.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-116 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
OP Buttons
Fig. 1-48: OP Buttons
See Chapter 7.3
Operation Monitoring
Fig. 1-49: Operation Monitoring
See Chapter 5.7.
Flashing 1 (2, 3)
Fig. 1-50: Flashing 1
See Chapter 11.9.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-117
OPO
Fig. 1-51: OPO
See Chapter 10.5.
Calculator 1
Fig. 1-52: Calculator 1
See Chapter 11.12
Calculator 2
Fig. 1-53: Calculator 2
See Chapter 11.12.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-118 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
DM1(2) Outputs
Fig. 1-54: DM1(2) Outputs
See Chapter 6.4.
DM1(2) Inputs
Fig. 1-55: DM1(2) Inputs
See Chapter 7.4.
DM1(2) Inputs, DM-F = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
Fig. 1-56: DM1(2) Inputs, DM1 = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
See Chapter 7.4.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-119
Extended Protection
Fig. 1-57: Extended protection
See Chapter 3.1.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-120 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Extended Control
Fig. 1-58: Extended Control
See Chapter 4.2.1.
External Fault 1 (and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)
Fig. 1-59: External Fault 1
See Chapter 10.4.
Flickering 1 (2, 3)
Fig. 1-60: Flickering 1
See Chapter 11.10.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-121
BU Outputs
Fig. 1-61: BU Outputs
See Chapter 6.2.
BU Inputs
Fig. 1-62: BU Inputs
See Chapter 7.2.
Limit Monitor 1 (2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-63: Limit Monitor 1
See Chapter 11.11.
Emergency Start
Fig. 1-64: Emergency Start
See Chapter 10.7.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-122 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Non-Volatile Element 1 (2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-65: Non-Volatile Element 1
See Chapter 11.8.
TPF
Fig. 1-66: TPF
See Chapter 10.3.
Protection/Control
Fig. 1-67: Protection/Control
See Chapter 4.2.1.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-123
Signal Conditioner 1 (and 2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-68: Signal Conditioner 1
See Chapter 11.7.
Safe Tripping, DM-F Local
Fig. 1-69: Safe Tripping, DM-F Local
See Chapter 10.8 "Safety-oriented tripping".
Safe Tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe
Fig. 1-70: Safe Tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-124 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Control Stations
Fig. 1-71: Control Stations
See Chapter 4.1.
Current Limits
Fig. 1-72: Current Limits
See Chapter 5.2.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-125
Test 1 (2) and Reset 1 (2, 3)
Fig. 1-73: Test 1, Reset 1
See Chapter 10.2.
Thermistor
Fig. 1-74: Thermistor
See Chapter 3.5.
Timer 1 (2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-75: Timer 1
See Chapter 11.6.
TM Inputs
Fig. 1-76: TM Inputs
See Chapter 7.2.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-126 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Monitor 0/4-20 mA
Fig. 1-77: Monitor 0/4-20 mA
See Chapter 5.6.
Monitor Cos Phi
Fig. 1-78: Monitor cos phi
See Chapter 5.4.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-127
Monitor Earth Fault
Fig. 1-79: Monitor Earth Fault
See Chapter 5.1.
Monitor Power
Fig. 1-80: Monitor Power
See Chapter 5.5.
Monitoring interval for testing
Fig. 1-81: Monitoring interval for testing
See Chapter 5.9.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-128 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Monitor Voltage
Fig. 1-82: Monitor voltage
See Chapter 5.3.
Monitor Temperature
Fig. 1-83: Monitor temperature
See Chapter 5.8.
UVO
Fig. 1-84: UVO
See Chapter 10.6.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-129
Truth Table TT 1 3I/1O (TT 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 3I/1O)
Fig. 1-85: Truth Table TT 1 3I/1O
See Chapter 11.2.
Truth Table TT 7 2I/1O (TT 8 2I/1O)
See Chapter 11.3.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-130 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Truth Table TT 9 5I/2O
See Chapter 11.4.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 1-131
Watchdog
Fig. 1-88: Watchdog
See Chapter 10.9.
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-89: Counter 1
See Chapter 11.5.
Timestamping
Fig. 1-90: Timestamping
See Chapter 10.10.
System description
SIMOCODE pro
1-132 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Cyclic Send Byte 0 (1, 2/9)
Fig. 1-91: Cyclic Send
See Chapter 6.6.
Cyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3)
Fig. 1-92: Cyclic Receive
See Chapter 7.7.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 2-1
Short instructions for configuring
a reversing starter 2
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing
starter, with the aid of a practical example. The majority of the parameters
have been appropriately preset at the factory for most applications.
You only need to set a few parameters.
Target groups
Planners
Configurators
Technicians
Electricians
Commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter 1 "System description")
Basic knowledge of SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
SIMOCODE pro
2-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2.1 Introduction and objective of the example
Introduction
The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-by-
step how to commission SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing
starter will be equipped with:
Initially, a local control station - Local Control
Followed by a second control station with PROFIBUS DP.
SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization.
The PC/programming device is connected to the basic unit via PC cable.
Objective of the example
This example is intended to:
1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation with a reversing
starter using
SIMOCODE pro in just a few steps.
2. Help you modify this example for your respective application
3. Help you implement other applications easily.
Fundamental steps
The two fundamental SIMOCODE pro steps are always:
Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main current
switching devices and control and signaling devices)
Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions (function
blocks), with control and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs
(internal SIMOCODE pro wiring).
Prerequisites
Load feeder/motor is present
PLC/PCS with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
The main circuit of the reversing circuit, including the current measuring
module, has already been wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the
motor must be led through the through-hole openings of the current
measuring module.
PC/programming device is present
SIMOCODE ES software is installed
The basic unit has the factory settings. You can find out how to implement
the basic factory settings in Chapter 14.3.4 "Resetting the factory settings".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 2-3
2.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control
station
Necessary components
The following table lists the components required for this example:
Item Ordering data Order number
1 Basic unit SIMOCODE pro C
(SIMOCODE pro V also possible)
3UF7000-1AU00-0
(3UF7010-1AU00-0)
2 Current measuring module 0.3 A up to 3 A 3UF7100-1AA00-0
3 Connecting cable for connecting the basic unit to
the current measuring module, depending on
length
3UF793.-1AA00-0
4 "SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic" software for
parameterization via the system interface
or
"SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard" software for
parameterization via the system interface
or
"SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium" software for
parameterization via PROFIBUS DP and the system
interface with the graphic editor, includes STEP 7
Object Manager
3ZS1 312-4CC10-0YA5
3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YA5,
3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YD5,
3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YE5,
3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YA5,
3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YD5,
3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YE5
5 PC cable for connecting the basic unit to a PC/
programming device
3UF7940-0AA00-0
Table 2-1: Components required for this example
SIMOCODE pro
2-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Reversing starter circuitry with SIMOCODE pro
The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the
control circuit:
Fig. 2-1: Wiring of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro
Main circuit Control circuit
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Q1
- Q1
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
M
3~
J
PE
W V U
2 4 6
Current measuring
module (IM)
L1/L+
F11
Q1
N/L
S0 S1
A2 A1
Motor, motor rated current e.g. 3 A
Basic unit (BU)
3 through-hole
openings
System
interface
Connecting cable
System
interface
S2
Q2
CLASS 10
Optional: Thermistor
1 3 5
2 4 6
- Q2
IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V
OUT1 OUT2 1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 2-5
Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit
The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with
a local control station for the commands:
LEFT
OFF
RIGHT.
Displays, messages, etc. have not been taken into account.
Fig. 2-2: Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit
The necessary interlocks and connections are carried out in the basic unit
via software.
Standard reversing starter Reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro
Necessary interlocks
and connections
S0: "LEFT" button
S1: "OFF" button
S2: "RIGHT" button
Q1: Contactor clockwise rotation
Q2: Contactor counterclockwise rotation
L1/L+
F11
Q1
N/L
S0 S1
A2 A1
Basic unit (BU)
Q2
S2
L1/L+
N/L
Q2
Q2
Q1
S2
S1
Q1
Q2
S0
Q1
IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V
OUT1 OUT2 1
SIMOCODE pro
2-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2.3 Parameterization
The basics of parameterization
After the external wiring has been carried out (contactor coils connected,
current measuring module integrated in the main circuit), SIMOCODE pro is
then parameterized.
For this you need to know the following points:
Point Description
1 Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for
control stations, control functions and motor protection.
2 Function blocks have names.
3 Function blocks may have set values, e.g. the type of control function and the
set current for overload protection.
4 Function blocks are equipped with plugs and sockets. These are clearly
designated.
5 To achieve the desired functionality, proceed as follows:
Connect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific
sockets (i.e "plug the plugs into the sockets")
If required, set values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current, type of
control function.
6 The inputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as plugs
and labeled accordingly:
7 The outputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as sockets
and labeled accordingly:
8 The plugs and sockets of the device inputs and outputs are not connected as
factory defaults. If you press a button now, the contactors will not be
activated.
Table 2-2: Schematic of the various SIMOCODE pro function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 2-7
General procedure for parameterizing a reversing starter
Parameterization means:
1. Setting values
2. Connecting function blocks
Where this example is concerned, this means:
Select the control function "Reversing Starter". This establishes all the
interlocks and connections for the reversing starter in the basic unit.
Determine the set current I
s
for motor protection. In this case, the set current
corresponds to the motor rated current, i.e. 3 A.
The "BU Outputs" function block must be connected to the sockets of the
"Protection/Control" function block via the software, i.e:
"BU Output 1" plug to "Contactor Control QE1" socket (right)
"BU Output 2" plug to "Contactor Control QE2" socket (left).
The plugs on the "Protection/Control" function block must be connected via
software to the sockets on the "BU Inputs" function block, i.e.
Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON< to "BU Input 1" socket
Control station plug - Local Control [LC] OFF to "BU Input 2" socket
Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON> to "BU Input 3" socket.
Fig. 2-3: Schematic of a parameterization example
The assignment of the contactor controls QE depends on the parameterized
control function. See Chapter 4.3 "Active control stations, contactor
controls, lamp controls and status information for the control functions".
SIMOCODE pro
Connect
relay outputs
1
2
1
2
3
BU Inputs
Control station - Local Control [LC] Contactor controls
Select reversing starter
Set I
s
Connect
digital inputs
BU Outputs
QE1
QE2
ON<
OFF
ON>
Protection/Control
I
s
= 3 A
Right
Left
SIMOCODE pro
2-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Proceed as follows:
Table 2-3: Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Step Description
1 Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC/programming device.
2 Select the control function "Reversing Starter" as application. When you
select this application, a range of presets will be automatically carried out
that you will have to check later.
3 In the "Device Configuration" menu item, select SIMOCODE pro C or
SIMOCODE pro V. Deactivate the operator panel if this is not available.
4 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Motor Protection > Overload/
Unbalance/Stalled Rotor. Set the set current I
s
1 to 3 A.
5 Open the dialog Further Function Blocks > Outputs > Basic Unit and check
the following settings:
BU Output 1 > Contactor Control QE1
BU Output 2 > Contactor Control QE2
6 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Motor Control > Control Stations
and check the following settings:
Local Control [LC] ON<: BU Input 1
Local Control [LC] OFF: BU Input 2
Local Control [LC] ON>: BU Input 3
Check whether the releases for "ON" and "OFF" for operating mode "Local2"
are set.
7 Parameterization is complete. Save the parameter file on your PC/
programming device using Device > Save.
The relay outputs are connected
to the contactor controls. QE1
QE2
1
2
BU Outputs
Protection/
Note
By choosing a preset application (Step 2), other presets might be made
when assigning the BU outputs to the contactor controls.
Control
The control station "Local Control"
is now connected with the binary
inputs of the basic unit. 1
2
3
BU Inputs
ON<
OFF
ON>
Protection/
Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 2-9
Transferring parameters to the basic unit and commissioning
After creating the parameter file, you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and
commission the reversing starter.
Proceed as follows:
Table 2-4: Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning
Notice
Switching between "RIGHT" and "LEFT" is only possible via "OFF" after the
preset, 5-second interlocking time has expired.
Configuration with local control station completed
The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a
functional reversing starter with a local control station.
If the wiring and parameterization are correct, the contactors for clockwise
and counterclockwise rotation will be activated when the corresponding
buttons are pushed.
Step Description
1 Switch on the voltage supply of the basic unit.
2 Connect the serial interface of the PC/programming device and the system
interface of the basic unit using the PC cable.
3 Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up
green. SIMOCODE pro can be started up.
4 Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu, e.g. using Target
System > Download to Device. Select the RS232 interface with which
SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable.
5 After transferring the data to the basic unit, you will receive the message
"Download to device successfully accomplished".
SIMOCODE pro
2-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2.4 Extending the reversing starter with a control station
via PROFIBUS DP
In this section
In this section you will find out how the previously configured example can
be extended by one control station via PROFIBUS DP. You can switch
between the local control station (local) and PLC/PCS (remote). Thus,
SIMOCODE pro can be controlled locally via the buttons, as well as via
PLC/PCS.
The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in
SIMOCODE pro. Therefore, you only have to set the PROFIBUS DP address
for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as a DP slave on
the PROFIBUS DP.
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
The motor is switched off
The supply voltage for the basic unit is switched on. The "Device" LED lights
up green
You have connected the basic unit to the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP
interface is on the front side (9-pole SUB-D socket)
SIMOCODE pro is integrated with your automation system.
Further information on integrating DP slaves can be found in the automation
system documentation.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address
First, set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit.
The following options are available:
Via the addressing plug
Via SIMOCODE ES.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 2-11
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Proceed as follows:
Table 2-5: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Proceed as follows:
Table 2-6: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Open the menu Device > Open Online.
4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Confirm with OK.
5 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Bus Parameters.
6 Select the DP address.
7 Save the data in the basic unit with Target System > Download to Device.
The address is set. Confirm the change of address.
Step Description
1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.
The switches are numbered.
For example, address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.
2 If necessary, remove the PC cable from the system interface.
3 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface.
The "Device" LED lights up yellow.
4 Briefly press the Test/Reset button. The set address is accepted. The
"Device" LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
5 Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.
SIMOCODE pro
2-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Additional, internal components of the basic unit
The local control [LC] station is already wired, the external components are
connected and the necessary internal connections have been made.
The following additional internal components, which have already been
connected as factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized, are now
required:
PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT", "OFF" and
"RIGHT"
PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for switching between the local control station [LC]
and PLC/PCS [DP] (remote)
Bit 0.5 = 0: Local control station [LC] active
Bit 0.5 = 1: PLC/PCS [DP] control station active.
The PLC/PCS [DP] control station and the change-over (plug S1) have
already been connected as factory default with the bits (sockets) of
PROFIBUS DP Cyclic Send Data. The assignment can be found in
SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters > Motor Control > Control
Stations.
Fig. 2-4: Schematic of basic unit internal components for this example
Not all pre-assigned Cyclic Send Data is shown here.
Assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Further Function
Modules > Outputs > Cyclic Send Data.
Configuration with PLC/PCS [DP] control station is complete
The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a
reversing starter with an additional control station via PROFIBUS DP.
The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled
by setting the corresponding bits.
SIMOCODE pro
1
2
3
1
2
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0.5
LEFT
OFF
RIGHT
LEFT
OFF
RIGHT
Status -
ON<
OFF
ON>
QE1
QE2
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
BU Inputs BU Outputs
Bit 0.0
DP
Cyclic
DP
Cyclic
Send
Control Stations
RIGHT
LEFT
S1
Receive
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 3-1
Motor protection 3
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about motor protection.
Motor protection includes
Overload protection
Thermistor protection.
Motor protection operates alongside motor control "at a higher level in the
background". All motor protection parameters are explained here. They can
be active or not, according to the control function selected.
Target groups
Configurators
Commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
Good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro
The principle of connecting plugs to sockets
Knowledge of electrical drive engineering.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device Parameters > Motor Protection.
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3.1 Introduction
Description
The motor protection functions "Overload Protection", "Unbalance
Protection" "Stalled Rotor Protection" and "Thermistor Protection" are
described in Chapters 3.2 to 3.4.
Schematic
The following schematic diagram shows the "Ext. Protection" function block
("Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection")
with optional parameter settings and events.
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 3-3
Fig. 3-1: "Ext. Protection" function block ("Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and
"Stalled Rotor Protection")
1) Adjustable transformation ratio when using interposing current transformers
with SIMOCODE pro V for basic unit 2 above version *E03*
Overload Protection
Set current I
s
2
Class 5,10, ... 40
Response at pre-warning level
Reset (manual, auto)
Type of load (3-ph., 1-ph.)
Pause time
Cooling down period
Unbalance Protection
Stalled Rotor Protection
Extended parameters:
Unbalance protection level
Stalled rotor protection level
Protection/Control
Event/Warning/Fault:
- Cooling down period active
- Pause time active
- Time to trip (analog)
- Thermal motor model (analog)
- Remaining cooling down period
- Last trip current (analog)
- Pre-warning overload
- Overload + phase failure
- Overload
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Tripping

- Unbalance
- Stalled rotor
Current from
Response at trip level
See
Table 3-1
See
Table 3-1
See
Table 3-1
See
Table 3-1
current measuring
Transformation ratio -
secondary
1)
primary
1)
active
1)
Set current I
s
1
secondary
1)
primary
1)
active
1)
(analog)
module
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Adjustable responses "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled
Rotor Protection"
Table 3-1: Responses for "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection"
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
Chapter "Important information".
Notice
Deactivate Unbalance Protection in SIMOCODE ES when the load type is
set to single-phase!
Response At prewarning
level
At trip level level
"Unbalance"
"Stalled Rotor
Protection" level
Deactivated X X X X
Signaling X X X X
Warning X X X X
Tripping - X X X
Delay 0-25.5 s (0.5 s) - 0-25.5 s (0.5 s) 0-25.5 s (0.5 s)
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 3-5
3.2 Overload protection
Description
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with
IEC 60947-4-1. The trip class can be set to 8 different settings, ranging from
Class 5 to Class 40. Thus, the tripping time can be adapted precisely to the
power-up behavior of the motor, improving performance. Additionally, the
"Thermal motor model" and time to overload trip are calculated and made
available to the control system. After an overload trip, the remaining cooling
down period is displayed (see Class). The motor current is saved in the case
of an overload trip.
Depending on the control function, the set current I
s
is separately
parameterizable for one or two speeds (I
s
1 and I
s
2).
The motor rated current is usually set with set current I
s
1. This value can be
found on the type plate of the motor. It is the basis for calculating the
overload trip characteristic curve.
Set current I
s
2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds so that adequate
overload protection for the higher speed is also ensured. Generally, I
s
2
should be set higher than I
s
1.
Set current I
s
1
Range: Depends upon the selected current measuring module or
current/voltage measuring module.
Transformation ratio - active
When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped
several times through the current measuring module or the current/voltage
measuring module, you can enter the transformation ratio of the interposing
transformer.
Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option.
The parameterized set current thus continues to correspond to the actual
nominal motor current and does not have to be converted.
The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between nominal motor
current [A] and measuring current [A] or any multiple of this ratio.
Note
This parameter is only available when using basic unit 2 above version
*E03*.
Set current I
s
1: 0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A
10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A
63 A up to 630 A
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Transformation ratio - primary
Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active"
checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 8191,875.
Transformation ratio - secondary
Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active"
checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 15.
Set current I
s
2
Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current/
voltage measuring module.
Transformation ratio - active
When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped
several times through the current measuring module or the current/voltage
measuring module, you can enter the transformation ratio of the interposing
transformer.
Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option.
The parameterized set current thus continues to correspond to the actual
nominal motor current and does not have to be converted.
The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between nominal motor
current [A] and measuring current [A] or any multiple of this ratio.
Note
This parameter is only available when using basic unit 2 above version
*E03*.
Transformation ratio - primary
Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active"
checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 8191,875.
Set current I
s
2: 0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A
10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A
63 A up to 630 A
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 3-7
Transformation ratio - secondary
Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active"
checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 15.
Note
In the case of motors with two speeds, the same or different transformation
ratios can be set for each speed, depending upon whether the same or two
different interposing transformers is/are used for each speed.
Application examples
Example 1:
Rated motor current: 700 A.
A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing
transformer (transformation ratio 820:1), the secondary side is looped once
through a current measuring module (0.3 up to 3 A): Transformation ratio for
l
s
= 820:1; l
s
= 700 A
Settings (primary and secondary):
Set current

I
s
1: 700 A
Transformation ratio - primary: 820
Transformation ratio - secondary: 1
Example 2:
Rated motor current: 225 A.
A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing
transformer (transformation ratio 820:1), the secondary side is looped twice
through a current measuring module (0.3 up to 3 A): Transformation ratio for
l
s
= 820 : 2, l
s
= 225 A
Settings (primary and secondary):
Set current I
s
1: 225 A
Transformation ratio - secondary: 2.
Example 3:
The motor cable is looped twice through a current measuring module (0.3
up to 3 A, for a motor with a rated current of 0.25 A): Transformation ratio
for I
s
= 1: 2; I
s
= 0.25 A
Settings (primary and secondary)
Set current I
s
1: 0.25 A
Transformation ratio - secondary: 2
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Class
The class (trip class) indicates the maximum tripping time within which
SIMOCODE pro must trip cold at 7.2 times the set current I
s
(motor
protection according to IEC 60947). With regard to tripping time precision,
SIMOCODE pro fulfills the extended requirements of tolerance band E
according to IEC/EN 60947-4-1. Please take into account that with start-ups
> "Class 10", the admissible AC3 current of the contactor may have to be
reduced (derating), i.e. a larger contactor selected.
The following figure shows trip classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for 3-
pole symmetrical loads:
Fig. 3-2: Trip classes for 3-pole symmetrical loads
1,15
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 3-9
The following figure shows trip classes 5, 10,15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for 2-
pole loads:
Fig. 3-3: Trip classes for 2-pole loads
0,85
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Response to overload
In the case of overload, the SIMOCODE pro response can be additionally
adjusted here.
Further information: See "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter
"Important information" and the "Responses" table in Chapter 3.1
"Introduction".
Notice
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to
"Tripping!"
Cooling down period
The cooling down period is the amount of time that must elapse before an
overload trip can be reset. This is usually five minutes. The thermal memory
(motor model see below) is deleted after the cooling down period elapses.
SIMOCODE pro supply voltage failures during this time extend the specified
time accordingly.
Range:
Thermal motor model (thermal memory)
When the motor rated current (I
s
) is at 100%, the "Thermal motor model" is
87% (1/1,15 x 100%) in a steady state and 100% at the moment of an
overload trip.
Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor
when tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an
overload trip). After this interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is
deleted and a new cold start is possible. This makes frequent start-ups
possible within a short period of time.
Cooling down
period:
60 to 6553.5 seconds
Default: 300 s
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 3-11
The following schematic shows the cooling off response with and without
pause time:
Fig. 3-4: Cooling down response with and without pause time
Notice
Both the motor and the switching devices must be dimensioned specifically
for this load!
Type of load
You can select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase
load.
For a single-phase type of load, Monitor Earth Fault and Unbalance
Protection must be deactivated.
Phase Failure Monitoring is deactivated automatically.
See Table 1-20: Decoupling module requirements for star networks on Page
1-97.
Pause time: 0 to 6553.5 seconds
Type of load: 1-phase, 3-phase
Pause time
Thermal memory will be deleted after the pause time
elapses
With pause time
Trip level
ON
t
t
Overload trip
Without pause time
Motor
OFF
No overload trip
Trip level
100 %
100 %
Thermal memory (motor model)
t
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Pre-alarm delay
The "Delay" parameter (default: 0.5s) determines the amount of time that
the pre-warning level (1.15 x I
s
) must be constantly exceeded before
SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there will be no
reaction.
In the case of phase failure or unbalance > 50 %, this pre-warning will
already be issued at approx. 0.85 x I
s
.
Reset
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the "Overload", "Overload +
Unbalance" and "Thermistor" faults will be acknowledged automatically:
If the cooling down period has expired
If the thermistor value has dropped back down to the specified resetting
value.
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Manual", the faults must be acknowledged
by a reset signal:
"Reset" button on the basic unit
"Reset" button on the operator panel.
Standard functions "Reset"
For this, the "Reset - Input" (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding
sockets, e.g. using reset via bus.
Warning
The "Auto-Reset" mode must not be used for applications where an
unexpected motor restart may cause personal injury or damage to property.
Reset: Manual, Auto
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 3-13
3.3 Unbalance protection
Description
The extent of phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the
control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an
adjustable limit has been overshot. If phase unbalance is greater than 50%,
a reduction in the tripping time according to the overload characteristic
curve takes place automatically, as the heat development in motors
increases under asymmetrical conditions.
Level
The level of unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro should react when overshot
is set here.
Response
Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of phase
unbalance:
See "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important
information" and the "Responses" table in Chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Delay
The unbalance level must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time
before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there will
be no reaction.
Adjustment range: 0 - 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).
Level: 0 to 100 %
Default: 40 %
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3.4 Stalled rotor protection
Description
After the motor current exceeds an adjustable stalled rotor level (current
limit), a definable and delayable response can be parameterized in
SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor can quickly be set to trip,
independently of the overload protection.
Stalled Rotor Protection is only active after the parameterized class time has
elapsed (e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds), and prevents unnecessarily high
thermal and mechanical loads, as well as premature aging of the motor.
Level
Upon exceeding the stalled rotor level, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to
the selected response.
Range:
Response
Here you can determine the response when the stalled rotor level is
exceeded:
See "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important
information" and the "Responses" table in Chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Delay
The "Delay" parameter determines the amount of time that the stalled rotor
level must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the
desired response. Otherwise there will be no reaction.
Adjustment range: 0 - 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).
Level: 0 to 1020% of I
s
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 3-15
3.5 Thermistor protection
Description
Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the
motor via binary PTC thermistors which can be connected to either basic
unit 1 (BU1) or basic unit 2 (BU2).
Thermistor protection is used for:
Motors with high switching frequencies
Converter operation
Motors with heavy starting
Intermittent and/or braking operation
Restricted air supply
Speeds below the rated speed.
In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or bearings of the
motor.
Schematic and characteristic curve
The resistance of the thermistors increases rapidly (erratically) when the
temperature limit is reached.
Fig. 3-5: Thermistor (Thermistor Protection) function block
Response
Overtemperature:
Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response if the temperature exceeds
the trip level.
Notice
For motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "Tripping"!
Response to sensor fault
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Event
- Thermistor short circuit
Thermistor
input
BU
Tripping

R
See
Table 3-2
See
Table 3-2
- Thermistor trip level
- Thermistor open circuit
Thermistor
T1
T2
Motor protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Sensor fault (sensor circuit error):
Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response in the case of a short
circuit or an open circuit in the thermistor sensor cable.
Table 3-2: "Thermistor Protection, Binary" response
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important
information".
Response Trip level Sensor fault
Deactivated - X
Signaling X X
Warning X X
Tripping X X
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-1
Motor control 4
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on:
Control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The
following related topics are explained:
How control stations, operating modes and releases work together,
How control commands, e.g. "ON", "OFF", are switched through to the
control function.
Control functions you can select according to need. The following related
topics are explained:
How control commands, e.g. "ON", "OFF", are switched through from
the control stations to the contactor controls/relay outputs
Which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen.
Target groups
Configurators
PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
Electrical drive engineering
Motor protection.
Device parameter > Motor control.
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4.1 Control stations
4.1.1 Description
Control stations are places from which control commands can be given to
the motor. The "Control Stations" function block is used for administration,
switching and prioritization of these different control stations.
SIMOCODE pro allows the parallel administration of up to four different
control stations. Dependent on the specified control function, up to 5
different control commands can be transmitted from every control station to
SIMOCODE pro.
Local in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands via pushbuttons.
PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system
(remote).
PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via
PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.
Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator
panel in the switchgear cabinet door.
Examples of control commands:
Motor ON (ON>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
Motor LEFT (ON<), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON>) for a reversing
starter
Motor SLOW (ON>), Motor FAST (ON>>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander
circuit.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to
arbitrary sockets (e.g. binary inputs on the basic unit, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control commands to take effect.
Up to 5 different control commands can be sent from each control station.
Up to 5 plugs (plug ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>) are available on the
function block for each control station. The number of active plugs depends
on the chosen control function. With a direct starter, for example, only the
plugs "ON>" and "OFF" are active.
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-3
Control stations
Control station - local control
In this case, the control devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor
and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of the "Control
Stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally the
function blocks for the basic units or the digital module inputs BU Inputs,
DM Inputs) for the control commands to take effect.
Notice
The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro
switches off the motor safely e.g. if a wire break occurs in the supply cable.
The precondition is that the control station is active.
Fig. 4-1: Control station - local control
Control station - PLC/PCS
This control station is primarily intended for control commands from the
automation system (PLC/PCS) via the Cyclic Receive telegram from
PROFIBUS DP.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to
arbitrary sockets, normally the function blocks for the cyclic PROFIBUS DP
bits (Cyclic Receive) for the control commands to take effect.
Fig. 4-2: Control station - PLC/PCS
Pushbutton BU Inputs
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
1
2
3
4
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
ON <<
ON
PLC/PCS [DP]
ON
OFF
Releases
Releases
PLC
Cyclic Receive
DP
ON >>
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
PLC/PCS [DP]
ON <<
PC [DPV1]
ON
OFF
Releases
Releases
Number: 16
Bit 0.0
Bit 1.7
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Control station - PC
This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on an
arbitrary PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second
master on the PROFIBUS DP. The control commands are sent via the
Acyclic Receive telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1.
Note
If the SIMOCODE ES or SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automatically take
effect via the PC [DPV1] control station. In this case connection is not required!
Fig. 4-3: Control station - PC
Control station - operator panel
This control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the
buttons on the 3UF72 operator panel, which can be mounted in a switchgear
cabinet door, for example. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block
must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally to the function block for the
buttons of the operator panel - OP buttons) for the control commands to take
effect.
Notice
Since the operator panel only has four buttons for controlling the motor
feeder, one button must be used as a speed switch button for control
functions with two rotational speeds and two directions of rotation.
For this purpose, the button must be assigned to the internal control
command "[OP]<>/ <<>>".
Notice
If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a programming device is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, the control commands
automatically take effect via the operator panel [OP] control station and
must also be enabled here as applicable.
<>/<<>>
Op. panel [OP]
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
PC [DPV1]
Releases
ON
OFF
R l
PC
Acyclic Receive
DP
Bit 0.0
Bit 1.7
Number: 16
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-5
Fig. 4-4: Control station - operator panel
4.1.2 Operating modes and mode selectors
Operating modes
You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There
are four different operating modes you can switch between:
Local 1
Local 2
Local 3
Remote/Automatic: In this operating mode, the communication must be
carried out via PLC.
Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control
station (e.g local and PLC/PCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also
mandatory to operate the control stations selectively. Four operating modes
are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two control signals
(mode selectors). For each individual control station in every operating
mode, it can be stipulated if "ON commands" and/or "OFF commands" are to
be used. The operating modes are so controlled that only one operating
mode is active at any one time.
Example: There are three operating modes in a system:
Table 4-1: Operating modes
The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these
operating modes. The remote switching operation should be controlled via
the bus. The key-operated switch operation has priority over all other
operating modes.
Operating mode Description
Key-operated switch
operation,
e.g. Local 1
Only local control entries are admissible!
All other control stations are locked.
Manual operation
e.g. Local 3
Only operator panel control commands and local control
commands can be issued.
Remote operation,
(e.g. Remote/Automatic)
Only PLC/PCS control commands are permitted; locally, only
OFF commands are permitted.
<>/<<>>
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
Op. panel [OP]
Releases
ON
OFF
Operator
panel
OP buttons
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Mode selector
The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the operating modes
"Local 1", "Local 2", "Local 3" and "Remote/Automatic". The S1 and S2 plugs
must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for this.
The following table shows the operating modes, depending on the signal
status of the S1 and S2 mode selectors:
Table 4-2: Operating modes depending on S1 and S2
The different operating modes for enabling the control stations can be used
to specify the switch authorizations for the individual control stations
PLC/PCS [DP]
PC [DPV1]
Operator panel (OP)

Only the following are active:
The operating mode set by the plugs S1 and S2 of the "Control Stations"
function block
The releases selected on "Control Stations".
Example for a dynamic operating mode switching in relationship to time:
Fig. 4-5: Example - operating mode switching
Input
Operating mode
Local 1 Local 2 Local 3
Remote/
Automatic
S1 0 0 1 1
S2 0 1 0 1
0
0
Local 1 Remote Local 3 Remote Local 1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
Key-operated
Time t
Remote operation Manual operation Remote operation Key-operated
S1
S2
0
switch switch
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-7
4.1.3 Releases and enabled control command
Releases
Releases for the control commands "ON" and "OFF", which must be
activated, are assigned to each operating mode for each control station. This
means that depending on the operating mode, it can be specified for each
control station whether the motor may only be switched on, off or both on
and off. The corresponding checkbox is activated in the "Control stations"
dialog in SIMOCODE ES.
Releases and enabled control command schematic
The following schematic shows the "Control Stations" function block and the
operating modes:
Fig. 4-6: Function block "Control Stations"
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
Local control
<>/<<>>
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
Op. panel
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
PLC/PCS [DP]
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
PC [DPV1]
Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Remote
S1
S2
Mode selector
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Enabled
ON
OFF

Control
command
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
To the control function
ON
OFF
Releases
ON
OFF
Releases
ON
OFF
"Protection/Control"
Control stations
Enabled
Disabled
Activation of releases for
control commands "ON" and
"OFF" in SIMOCODE ES
Releases
Releases
station [LC]
[OP]
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Example:
Enabled commands
The following diagram shows an example of enabled commands for the
"Local 2" operating mode, "Dahlander reversing starter" control function:
Fig. 4-7: Example for enabled commands
In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "Local 2"
operating mode via the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the basic
unit and the digital module.
Control command "OFF" enabled
Control commands "ON" (ON<<, ON<, ON>, ON>>)"
enabled
To the control function
"Protection/Control"
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-9
4.1.4 Control station settings
Control stations Description
LC Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
but usually device inputs).
The "OFF" plug is 0-active on the control station [LC].
ON<<
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
PLC/PCS [DP] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal
but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DP)
ON<<
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
PC [DPV1] Activates the control stations via an arbitrary signal
but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DPV1)
ON<<
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
Operator panel [OP] Activates the control stations via an arbitrary signal
but usually operator panel buttons)
<>/<<>>
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
Mode selector For switching between the 4 operating modes Local 1,
Local 2, Local 3 and remote with arbitrary signals
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits
from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
S1
S1
Table 4-3: Control station settings
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4.2 Control functions
4.2.1 Description
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for
controlling load feeders.
They have the following important features:
Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process
Monitoring the ON/OFF status
Tripping if a fault occurs.
For monitoring these statuses, SIMOCODE pro uses the auxiliary control
input "Feedback ON", which is usually derived directly from the current flow
in the main circuit via the current measuring modules.
All necessary interlocks and connections for the corresponding applications
are already implemented in the control functions.
Control functions contain:
Plugs for
control commands (ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually
connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Auxiliary control inputs (plug ), e.g. Feedback ON
Sockets for
Contactor controls QE1 to QE5.
Displays (lamp controls) QL, QLS.
Statuses, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>".
Faults, e.g. "Fault - Feedback (FB) ON",
"Fault - Antivalence".
Settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc.
A logic component with all necessary interlockings and connections for the
control function.
Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is
active "at a higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor
protection are independent functions that switch off the motor when
activated via the control functions. Detailed description: See Chapter 3
"Motor protection".
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-11
Control function schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the control
function ("Protection/Control", "Extended Control" and "Extended Protection"
function blocks):
Fig. 4-8: General representation of the control function ("Protection/Control" function block)
Pos. closing
Pos. opening
ON <<
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
QE1
QE3
QE5
QE2
QE4
Control commands Contactor controls
Displays (lamp
QLE <<
QLA
QLE >>
QLE <
QLE >
QLS
(ON <<)
(ON <)
(OFF)
(ON >)
(ON >>)
(Fault)
Aux. control inputs *)
Plugs of the control commands are usually
connected with the "Enabled control
command" sockets.
*) Abbreviations
**) See also Chapter 3 "Motor
protection"
FB ON Feedback ON
FC Feedback CLOSED
FO Feedback OPEN
TC Torque CLOSED
TO Torque OPEN
FB ON
FC
FO
TC
TO
Status information,
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
Protection/Control
Control function
(Motor protection **)
e.g. PROFIBUS DP
control)
Control stations
Enabled

Control
command
Settings:
Control commands
Auxiliary control inputs
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
General representation of the control function ("Extended Control" function block)
Fig. 4-9: General representation of the control function ("Extended Control" function block)
Contactor controls:
The QE contactor controls are switched dependent on the incoming control
commands and taking the specified control function into consideration
including all corresponding interlocks, feedbacks, corresponding parameters
and the higher-level motor protection. In general, the QE contactor controls
are directly connected to the outputs of the basic unit or the digital modules
and switch the connected contactors using relays. The number of usable QE
contactor controls is directly dependent on the specified control function.
Lamp controls and status information:
The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status information or the QL
lamp controls. They are all directly dependent on the status of the auxiliary
control input "FB ON". The number of usable lamp controls and status
information is directly dependent on the specified control function.
Feeder status feedback:
Status information, e.g. "Status ON<": These are transmitted, for example, via
PROFIBUS DP to the automation system and signal the status of the feeder
there.
Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE<": These can, for example, activate a
signal lamp or a pushbutton lamp for status display.
Note
If the motor is running in test operation, the QLE.../QLA lamp outputs show
a different response (e.g. flashing).
Trip - Antivalence
Trip - End position
Trip - Double 1
Status - Change-over pause active
Trip - Double 0
Trip - Stalled positioner
Fault - FB OFF
Fault - Execution ON command
Fault - FB ON
Fault - Execution STOP command
TQ OPEN
Status - Start active
FB CLOSED
TQ CLOSED
Status - interlocking time active
FB OPEN
Extended Control
Settings:
Timings
Operating mode
Star-delta
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-13
In addition to the status signals, the "QL..." lamp controls additionally
indicate the following:
Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
Saving change-over command (QLE lamp outputs are flickering)
Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
Additional status information:
Start active: If "Motor" is selected as the load type, this signal is present
during the start process of the motor for the duration of the specified
class time (e.g. 10 s for Class 10). Exceptions are the "Overload relay"
and "Solenoid valve" control functions.
Interlocking time active: For control functions with a change in the
direction of rotation, the signal remains present until the specified
interlocking time has elapsed.
Change-over pause active: For the "Dahlander", "Pole-changing starter"
and "Star-delta" control functions the signal is present until the specified
time has elapsed.
Additional status information for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control
function:
Feedback CLOSED (FC)
Feedback OPEN (FO)
Torque CLOSED (TC)
Torque OPEN (TO).
These feedback signals specify the present status of the corresponding limit
switch and/or torque switch. The amount of usable status information is
directly dependent on the selected control function.
Additional fault messages for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control
function:
Stalled positioner: The torque switch has been activated before the
corresponding limit switch. The positioner may have stalled.
Double 0: Both torque switches have been activated
Double 1: Both limit switches have been activated
End position: Positioner has left the end position without receiving a
control command
Antivalence: The change-over contacts of the limit switch do not issue
an antivalent signal (only for the "Positioner 5" control function)
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Extent and application
Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control
functions:
SIMOCODE
Control function pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Overload relay
Direct starter
Reversing starter
Circuit breaker
Star-delta starter
Star-delta reversing starter
Dahlander
Dahlander reversing Starter
Pole-changing starter
Solenoid valve
Positioner 1 to Positioner 5
Soft starter
Table 4-4: Control functions
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-15
4.2.2 General settings and definitions
Application selection
Selection of the control functions to be carried out by SIMOCODE pro:
Fig. 4-10: Application selection
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Parameter
Parameter Description
ON <<, ON <, OFF,
ON >, ON >>
Are usually connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets
of the "Control Station" function block. From there, the control
commands come from the different control stations. The number of
active inputs depends on the control function chosen. For example,
with a direct starter, only the inputs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.
Default: Connected
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - Motor current flowing" socket) as
factory default. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not
required for signaling. Depending on the control function chosen,
this state is signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the
"Status - ON <<, - ON <, - ON >, - ON >>" signals. "No current
flowing" means: the motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact
from the contactor is not required for signaling. This state is
signaled by the QLA display and the "Status - OFF" signal.
Default: Status - Motor current flowing
FC, FO, TC, TO Auxiliary control inputs for the "Positioner" and "Solenoid valve"
control function that are normally connected with the inputs of the
basic unit or the digital module are used to query the present
status of the torque switch and the limit switches that are wired to
the inputs.
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated:
The control command on the corresponding plug of the control
stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >,ON >>" is saved. It can only be
revoked by an "OFF" control command from the corresponding
control station. The auxiliary contact for locking the
contactor is no longer necessary. Motor feeders are usually
operated in locking mode. Locking is preset.
Activated:
Depending on the control function chosen, the non-maintained
command mode affects the plugs of all control stations "ON <,
ON <<, ON >, ON >>". A control command is only effective as
long as there is a "high signal".
Saving change-over
command
Deactivated:
Change-over commands for switching from one direction of
rotation/rotational speed to the other are only implemented with
a previous "OFF" and after the interlocking time/change-over
pause has elapsed. This setting is usually used and is preset.
Activated:
Change-over commands for switching from one direction of
rotation/rotational speed to the other are implemented without a
previous "OFF" and after the interlocking time/change-over pause
has elapsed.
If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately
due to a parameterized interlocking time/change-over pause, the
selection is signalized by flickering QLE displays. Your selection
can be cancelled at any time with "OFF".
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-17
Safety/PROFIsafe -
separate function
from control
function
Deactivated:
Safety-oriented tripping via the DM-F module also affects the
SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control is
always tripped, too.
This setting is selected for applications where safety-oriented
tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Activated:
Safety-oriented tripping via the DM-F module does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control is
not tripped.
tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type You can choose between:
Motor
Resistive load (e.g. heating):
Because generally no overcurrent flows in a resistive load during
switching on, the "Start active" status is not signaled. In this
case, the start-up override does not occur for the "Signaling",
"Warning" and "Tripping" functions.
Feedback time SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via
FB ON.
If the status of FB ON changes without a corresponding switching
command, "Fault - Feedback (FB)" switches off the feeder.
Default: 0.5 s.
The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults"
for a defined period of time, e.g. in the case of network
switches.When the motor is switched off,
SIMOCODE pro continuously checks if FB ON = 0. If the current
flows longer than the set feedback time without the "ON" control
command being issued, a fault message "Trip - Feedback (FB) ON"
is issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after the
fault has been rectified.
When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously
controls if FB ON = 1. If no current flows for longer than the set
feedback time without the "OFF" control command being issued, a
fault message "Trip - Feedback (FB) OFF" is issued. The contactor
controls are deactivated.
Execution time SIMOCODE pro monitors switching on/switching off. Switching on/
switching off must be completed within this time period.
Default: 1.0 s.
After the "ON" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must be
able to detect current in the main circuit within the execution time.
Otherwise, the fault message "Trip - Execution ON command" will
be issued. SIMOCODE pro deactivates the contactor controls.
After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must
not be able to detect any current in the main circuit after the
execution time has elapsed. Otherwise, the fault message "Trip -
Execution STOP command" will be issued. The contactor controls
can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions (Cont.)
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Interlocking time SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters,
both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
interlocking time.
Default: 0 s.
Change-over pause In the "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing starter" control functions,
switching from FAST to SLOW can be delayed by the time
configured.
In the "Star-delta starter" control function, the change-over pause
time extends the time between switching off the star contactor and
switching on the delta contactor by the time configured.
Default: 0.00 s.
Max. star time For the "Star-delta starter" or the "Star-delta reversing starter"
control function:
Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Max. star time: 0 - 255 s (default: 20 s)
Current measuring
module installed
For the "Star-delta starter" or the "Star-delta reversing starter"
control function:
The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching
depend on the mounting place of the current measuring module.
Delta: Set current I
s
is reduced to In x 1/
In supply cable: Set current
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions (Cont.)
3
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-19
Fig. 4-11: Execution time (ET) and feedback time (FT) in relation to FB ON
Faults
The contactor controls are deactivated.
The following is also issued:
A flashing signal on the QLS lamp control
A flashing signal on the "GEN. FAULT" LED
The "Status - General fault" signal
The corresponding signaling bit of the fault.
1
0
OFF
Switch ON ON
OFF
1
0
OFF
Tripping
QE
FB ON
ET FT ET FT
Voltage failure,
e.g. pulsating current
ET: Execution time
FT: Feedback time
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4.2.3 "Overload relay" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like a solid-state
overload relay. Control commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the
load. Control stations and inputs of the control function (e.g. ON >, OFF), do
not have any function in the case of overload relays.
When applying the control voltage, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the
QE3 contactor control; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault
message of a protection or monitoring system.
The QE3 contactor control must be connected to an arbitrary relay output
that switches off the contactor coil of the motor contactor in case of
overload.
Schematic
Fig. 4-12: Schematic of the "Overload relay" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in:
Chapter 4.2.2 "General settings and definitions".
Overload relay Description
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - Motor current flowing" socket) as
factory default.
Motor
Resistive load (see Chapter 4.2.2 "General settings and
definitions")
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional fault
messages are avoided.
Activated:
SIMOCODE pro control function.
Table 4-6: Overload relay settings
Contactor controls
Displays
QE3
FB ON* QLS
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
Protection/Control
Load type
Overload relay
Motor protection
Separate failsafe
control function
function from
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-21
Note
In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset after an
overload trip (=0).
This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.
Note
Monitoring of the number of starts is not possible for this control function.
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4.2.4 "Direct starter" control function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.
Control commands
Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from arbitrary
control stations (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably
to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.
Schematic
Fig. 4-13: Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Control commands
Contactor controls
Displays (lamps)
Status
QE1
FB ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON>
(ON)
(OFF)
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
OFF
ON >
Protection/Control
Feedback time
Execution time
Non-maintained
Load type
Direct starter
Motor protection
ON
Separate failsafe
control function
function from
command mode
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-23
Settings
Direct starter Description
OFF OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON control command
usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON"
usually with "Status - Motor current flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Motor
definitions")
Feedback time Range 0 - 25.5 seconds (0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1.0 s)
Table 4-7: Direct starter settings
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4.2.5 "Reversing starter" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of
rotation of the motor (forwards and backwards).
Control commands
Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise, i.e.
forwards)
Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control (counter-clockwise, i.e.
backwards)
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 and QE2 internal contactor controls.
Every fault message causes the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal
"Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" has expired (motor switched off) AND
after the interlocking time has elapsed:
Via the OFF control command.
Directly, when the "Saving change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the interlocking time.
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-25
Schematic
Fig. 4-14: Schematic of the "Reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Control commands
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
FB ON*
QLE<
QLA
QLE>
QLS
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON <
OFF
ON >
Protection/Control
Feedback time
Execution time
Interlocking time
Non-maintained
Change-over
Load type
command Saving
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
(ON <)
*Feedback ON
Reversing starter
Motor protection
RIGHT
LEFT
Interlocking time
active
Extended control
Separate failsafe
control function
command mode
function from
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Settings
Reversing starter Description
ON < ON < control command, counter-clockwise
usually with "Enabled control command - ON <" socket)
ON > ON > control command, clockwise
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Saving change-over
command
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Motor
definitions")
Interlocking time Range 0 - 255 seconds (0 s)
Table 4-8: Reversing starter settings
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-27
4.2.6 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can mainly switch circuit breakers (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and
OFF with this control function. The circuit breakers are connected to
PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro.
Control commands
Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.
Stop with "OFF" activates the QE3 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.
With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for a pulse of 400 ms
when the circuit breaker is tripped (alarm switch = ON).
The pulse of a control command is always fully executed before the "counter
pulse" is set.
Making internal assignments
You have to make the following assignments:
1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
"ON Connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
2) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
"OFF Connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
3) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input which is connected to the auxiliary switch
(AS) of the circuit breaker to the auxiliary control input "Feedback ON".
4) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input which is connected to the alarm switch (AS)
of the circuit breaker to the input (socket) of the "External fault 1" standard
function.
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Schematic
Fig. 4-15: Schematic of the "circuit breaker" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Separate failsafe
control function
Control commands
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE3
FB ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
400 ms
400 ms
OFF
ON >
Protection/Control
Feedback time
Execution time
Non-maintained
Load type
(ON)
(OFF)
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
Circuit breaker
Motor protection
ON
OFF
Auxiliary switch (AS)
command mode
function from
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-29
Settings
Circuit breaker Description
(Connection always with socket , (input), which the auxiliary
switch of the circuit breaker is connected to).
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Motor
definitions")
Feedback time A repeated ON pulse is only output by the QE1 contactor control
once the set feedback time has elapsed. Therefore, the feedback
time should be greater than the motor stop time of the motor drive
of the circuit breaker. Range 0 - 25.5 seconds (0.5 s)
Table 4-9: Circuit breaker settings
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4.2.7 "Star-delta starter" control function
Description
Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid
overloading the network. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro initially
starts the motor with a star-switched stator winding and then switches it to
delta.
Control commands
Start with "ON" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and
then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor)
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
to the "Enabled control command" sockets. Every fault message causes the
QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta
For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:
- Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % I
s
- Transformer installed in supply line: I < 90 % I
s
Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Maximum star time" when
the current in the star operation does not sink below this threshold.
Safety guidelines
Notice
It is recommended to wire the QE contactor controls to the relay outputs of
the basic unit.
Notice
If you use internal earth-fault detection for star-delta circuits, this can lead to
false trippings. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero
due to harmonics.
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-31
Notice
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a
current which is 1/ 3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter
control function.
Example: I
n
= 100 A I
s
= I
n
x 1/ 3
I
s
= 100 A x 1/ 3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set I
s
= 57.7 A
Change-over pause
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over
pause.
Reason: For motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated
current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta
starting current if the change-over pause is too short. The motor EMF
decreases if the pause is longer.
Schematic
Fig. 4-16: Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Control commands
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
FB ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >
Protection/Control
Feedback time
Execution time
Non-maintained
Load type
(ON)
(OFF)
(Fault)
QE3
Change-over pause
Max.
star time
Transformer
mounted
*Feedback ON
Star-delta starter
Motor protection
Change-over pause
active
Star contactor
Delta contactor
Network contactor
Extended control
Separate failsafe
function from

command mode
control function
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Settings
1)Notice
If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be
connected to the supply cable!
Star-delta starter Description
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Motor
definitions")
Execution time Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms increments) (0.00 s)
Max.
star time
Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Range 0 - 255 seconds (20 s)
Current measuring
module installed
1)
depend on the mounting place of the current measuring module.
In delta: Set current I
s
is reduced to I
n
x 1/3 (default)
In supply cable: Set current I
s
= I
n
(rated current of the motor)
Table 4-10: Star-delta starter settings
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-33
4.2.8 "Star delta reversing starter" control function
Description
With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of
rotation in star-delta operation.
Control commands
Clockwise rotation: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE1 contactor
control (star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor
control (network contactor, clockwise rotation)
Counter-clockwise rotation: Start with "ON <" first activates the QE1
contactor control (star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE4
contactor control (network contactor, counter-clockwise rotation)
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls.
Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls
to be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta
For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:
- Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % I
s
- Transformer installed in supply line: I < 90 % I
s
Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Maximum star time" when
the current in the star operation does not sink below this threshold.
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal
"Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" has expired (motor switched off) AND
after the interlocking time has elapsed:
time.
Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
"interlocking time".
Start-up is always in star mode.
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Safety guidelines
Note
It is recommended to wire the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to the relay
outputs of the basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control
function.
Notice
If you use internal earth-fault detection for star-delta circuits, this can lead to
false trippings. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero
due to harmonics.
Notice
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a
current which is 1/ smaller than normal must be set for the star-delta
starter control function.
Example: I
n
= 100 A I
s
= I
n
x 1/
I
s
= 100 A x 1/ = 57.7 A
Current to be set I
s
= 57.7 A
Change-over pause
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over
pause.
Reason: For motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated
current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta
starting current if the change-over pause is too short. The motor EMF
decreases if the pause is longer.
3
3
3
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-35
Schematic
Fig. 4-17: Schematic of the "Star-delta reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control"
function block
Settings
Star-delta
reversing starter
Description
ON > ON> control command
ON < ON< control command
Table 4-11: Star-delta reversing starter settings
Control commands
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
FB ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
QE3
ON <
Protection/Control
Feedback time
Execution time
Non-maintained
Load type
Change-over pause
Max.
star time
Transformer
mounted
Change-over
command Saving
Interlocking time
*Feedback ON
QLE<
(ON <)
QE4
ON <
Star-delta
reversing starter
Motor protection
Star contactor
Delta contactor
RIGHT - Network contactor
LEFT - Network contactor
Change-over pause
active
Interlocking time
active
Extended control
Separate failsafe
function from

command mode
control function
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1) Notice
If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be
connected to the supply cable!
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Saving change-over
command
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Motor
definitions")
Execution time Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms increments) (0 s)
Max. star time Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Range 0 - 255 seconds (20 s)
Current measuring
module installed
1)
depend on the mounting place of the current transformer/current
measuring module.
In delta: Set current I
s
is reduced to I
n
x 1/ 3
In supply cable: Set current I
s
= In (rated current of the motor)
Star-delta
reversing starter
Description
Table 4-11: Star-delta reversing starter settings (Cont.)
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-37
4.2.9 "Dahlander" control function
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator
winding at two speeds (FAST and SLOW). SIMOCODE pro wires the stator
winding via the contactors so that there is a high pole number at low speed
and a low pole number at high speed.
Control commands
SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 contactor control (SLOW).
FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star
contactor, FAST) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control
(network contactor, FAST)
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching the speed
The speed can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired
(motor is switched off) AND when changing from "FAST" => "SLOW" after
the change-over pause has elapsed:
Directly when "Saving change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the "FAST" speed from being
switched on at the same time as the contactor for the "SLOW" speed.
Change-over pause
The "Change-over pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from
"FAST" to "SLOW" to give the motor enough time to run down.
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Notice
Two set currents must be set for this control function:
I
s
1 for the slow speed
I
s
2 for the fast speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can in many cases be directly
measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you
will need two external current converters according to the corresponding
speed (e.g. 3UF18 with a 1 A secondary transformer rated current), whose
secondary cables must lead through the current measuring module with the
range 0.3 - 3 A. The set current I
s
1 or I
s
2 must be converted according to
the secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information,
see Chapter 3.2 "Overload protection".
Schematic
Fig. 4-18: Schematic of the "Dahlander" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Control commands
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
FB ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
QE3
*Feedback ON
ON >>
ON >>
QLE>>
(ON >>)
Protection/Control
Non-maintained
Change-over
command Saving
Dahlander
Motor protection
Change-over pause
active
FAST
SLOW
Star contactor FAST
Extended control
Feedback time
Execution time
Load type
Change-over pause
Separate failsafe
function from

command mode
control function
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-39
Settings
Dahlander Description
ON > ON control command > (SLOW)
ON >> ON >> control command (FAST)
usually with "Enabled control command - ON >>" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Saving change-over
command
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Motor
definitions")
Table 4-12: Dahlander settings
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4.2.10 "Dahlander reversing starter" control function
Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a
motor at both speeds.
Control commands
RIGHT - SLOW: Start with "ON >" activates the QE2 contactor control (RIGHT-
SLOW)
RIGHT - FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates the QE3 contactor control
(star contactor FAST) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor
control (RIGHT-FAST)
LEFT - SLOW: Start with "ON <" activates the QE4 contactor control
(LEFT-SLOW)
LEFT - FAST: Start with "ON <<" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star
contactor FAST) and then immediately activates the QE5 contactor control
(LEFT-FAST)
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.
The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status
- ON <" signal has expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time
has elapsed:
via the "interlocking time".
Switching the speed
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-41
Change-over pause
Safety guidelines
Note
You need at least one digital module for this control function. This control
function cannot be implemented with bistable relay outputs.
Notice
I
s
I
s
s
1 or I
s
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Schematic
Fig. 4-19: Schematic of the "Dahlander reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control"
function block
Control commands
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
FB ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
QE3
ON <
*Feedback ON
QLE<
(ON <)
QE4
Contactor controls
QE5
QLE<<
(ON <<)
QLE>>
(ON >>)
OFF
ON >
ON <
ON <<
ON >>
ON >>
ON <<
Protection/Control
Feedback time
Execution time
Non-maintained
Load type
Change-over pause
Change-over
command Saving
Interlocking time
Dahlander
reversing starter
Motor protection
RIGHT - FAST
RIGHT - SLOW
Star contactor FAST
LEFT - SLOW
LEFT - FAST
Change-over pause
active
Interlocking time
active
Extended control
Separate failsafe
function from

command mode
control function
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-43
Settings
Dahlander
reversing starter
Description
ON << ON << control command (LEFT, FAST)
usually with "Enabled control command - ON <<" socket)
ON < ON < control command (LEFT, SLOW)
ON > ON > control command (RIGHT, SLOW)
ON >> ON >> control command (RIGHT, SLOW)
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Saving change-over
command
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Motor
definitions")
Table 4-13: Control function settings for Dahlander reversing starter
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4.2.11 "Pole changing starter" control function
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator
windings at two speeds (FAST and SLOW).
Control commands
SLOW: Start with "ON >" activates the QE2 contactor control (SLOW).
FAST: Start with "ON >>" activates the QE1 contactor control (FAST).
Switching the speed
Change-over pause
Notice
I
s
I
s
s
1 or I
s
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-45
Schematic
Fig. 4-20: Schematic of the "Pole-changing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function
block
Control commands
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
FB ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
ON >>
ON >>
QLE>>
(ON >>)
Protection/Control
Feedback time
Execution time
Non-maintained
Load type
Change-over pause
Change-over
command Saving
Motor protection
Change-over pause
active
FAST
SLOW
Extended control
Separate failsafe
function from

command mode
control function
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Settings
Chapter 4.2.2 "General settings and definitions"
Pole-changing
starter
Description
ON > ON control command > (SLOW)
ON >> ON >> control command (FAST)
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Saving change-over
command
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Motor
definitions")
Table 4-14: Pole-changing starter settings
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-47
4.2.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function
Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a
motor at both speeds.
Control commands
RIGHT - SLOW: Start with ON > activates the QE2 contactor control
(RIGHT-SLOW)
RIGHT - FAST: Start with ON >> activates the QE1 contactor control
(RIGHT-FAST)
LEFT - SLOW: Start with ON < activates the QE4 contactor control
(LEFT-SLOW)
LEFT - FAST: Start with ON << activates the QE5 contactor control
(LEFT-FAST)
Stop with OFF deactivates the contactor controls.
control stations. Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command"
sockets.
has elapsed:
time.
Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
"interlocking time".
Switching the speed
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Change-over pause
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for "FAST" and "SLOW" from being
switched on simultaneously. The "Change-over pause" can be used to delay
switching from "FAST" to "SLOW" to give the motor enough time to run
down.
Safety guidelines
Note
At least one additional digital module is required for this control function.
Notice
I
s
I
s
s
1 or I
s
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-49
Schematic
Fig. 4-21: Schematic of the "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function,
"Protection/Control" function block
Change-over pause active
Control commands
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
FB ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
ON <
*Feedback ON
QLE<
(ON <)
QE4
Contactor controls
QE5
QLE<<
(ON <<)
QLE>>
(ON >>)
OFF
ON >
ON <
ON <<
ON >>
ON >>
ON <<
Protection/Control
Feedback time
Execution time
Non-maintained
Load type
Change-over pause
Change-over
command Saving
Interlocking time
Pole-changing
reversing starter
Motor protection
RIGHT - FAST
RIGHT - SLOW
LEFT - SLOW
LEFT - FAST
Extended control
Separate failsafe
function from

command mode
control function
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Settings
Pole-changing
reversing starter
Description
ON << ON << control command (LEFT, FAST)
usually with "Enabled control command - ON <<" socket)
ON < ON < control command (LEFT, SLOW)
ON > ON > control command (RIGHT, SLOW)
ON >> ON >> control command (RIGHT, SLOW)
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Saving change-over
command
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Motor
definitions")
Table 4-15: Settings for pole-changing reversing starters
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-51
4.2.13 "Solenoid valve" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate a solenoid valve.
The solenoid valve is brought into the corresponding end position using the
control commands "OPEN" and "CLOSE". SIMOCODE pro must be informed
via corresponding limit switches (OPEN, CLOSED) when the end position
has been reached.
Control commands
OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control.
CLOSE: Start with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 contactor control.
Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated
and puts the solenoid valve into the "CLOSED" position.
Safety guidelines
Notice
The motor protection functions are not active. A current measuring module
is not necessary.
Notice
If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the
solenoid valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message "Trip -
Double 1" (= "CLOSED")
If the end position feedback is different to the control command, the
solenoid valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message "Trip - End
position" (= "CLOSED")
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Schematic
Fig. 4-22: Schematic of the "Solenoid valve" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
FB ON
Control commands
Auxiliary control inputs*
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
(OPEN)
(CLOSE)
(Fault)
OFF
ON >
FC
FO
Protection/Control
Execution time
* Abbreviations
FC Feedback CLOSED
FO Feedback OPEN
Non-maintained
Solenoid valve
OPEN
FC
FO
Extended control
Separate failsafe
function from

command mode
control function
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-53
Settings
Solenoid valve Description
OFF OFF control command (CLOSE)
ON > ON control command (OPEN)
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Execution time Time required to reach end position.
Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (default: 1.0 s)
Table 4-16: Solenoid valve control function settings
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4.2.14 "Positioner" control function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can control positioners/actuators with this control function.
The positioner is moved into the corresponding end position with the
"OPEN" and "CLOSE" control commands and is deactivated via its limit
switches (1-active) or torque switches (0-active).
The response of the limit/torque switches must be passed to
SIMOCODE pro via its inputs.
Control commands
OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control until "End
position OPEN" is reached (Feedback OPEN)
CLOSE: Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control until "End
position CLOSED" is reached (Feedback CLOSED)
The drive remains in the present position.
Function schematic
Fig. 4-23: Function schematic of the torque and limit switches when controlling positioners
Switching the direction of travel
The direction of travel can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has
expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time has elapsed:
time. Switching from one direction of travel to the other can be delayed
via the "interlocking time".

TO
Torque switch
TC
Motor shaft with springs
at the beginning and end
FO
FC
Limit switch
Positioner
Gear
OPEN CLOSED
OPEN CLOSED
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-55
Notice
The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated
limit switch when the torque switch TO (OPEN) and/or TC (CLOSED) is
connected. In this case, the positioner is switched off immediately with the
fault message "Trip - Blocked positioner".
If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the
positioner is immediately switched off via the fault message
"Trip - Double 1".
If both torque switches respond at the same time (TO=0 and TC=0), the
positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message "Trip - Double
0".
If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command,
the positioner is switched off with the fault message "Trip - End position
fault".
Schematic
Fig. 4-24: Schematic of the "Positioner" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Control commands Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
QLE<
QLA
QLE>
QLS
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON <
OFF
ON >
OPEN
Stop
(Fault)
CLOSED
* Abbreviations
FB ON Feedback ON
FC Feedback CLOSED
FO Feedback OPEN
TC Torque CLOSED
TO Torque OPEN
Auxiliary control inputs*
FB ON
FC
FO
TC
TO
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
STOP
CLOSED
Protection/Control
Feedback time
Execution time
Interlocking time
Non-maintained
Load type
Positioner
Motor protection
Positioner closes
Positioner opens
FC
FO
TC
TO
Extended control
Separate failsafe
function from

command mode
control function
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-56 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Types of positioner control
The following table shows the five types of positioner control:

Table 4-17: Types of positioner control
Notice
The signals of the torque switches and the limit switches must be wired to
the inputs of the basic unit. Torque switches must be 0-active, whereas the
limit switches must be 1-active.
Type
Tripping
TC
Torque
CLOSED
FC
Limit
CLOSED
FO
Limit
OPEN
TO
Torque OPEN
Positioner 1
After reaching the end position FO
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSED).
X X
Positioner 2
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSED) AND
response of the associated torque
switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSED)
X X X X
Positioner 3
(OPEN). After reaching the end
position 'CLOSED', the respective
torque switch TC must also respond
after the limit switch FC has
responded.
X X X
Positioner 4
After reaching the end position FC
(CLOSED). After reaching the end
position FO (OPEN), the respective
torque switch TO must also
respond after the limit switch FO
has responded.
X X X
Positioner 5
After reaching the end position or the
torque. The actuator is monitored by
either the limit switches or by the
torque switches. The switches are
implemented as change-over
contacts and are checked for
antivalence. In the case of non-
antivalent feedback (e.g. FC=0 and
TC=0), SIMOCODE pro recognizes a
wire break and deactivates the
positioner with the fault message
"Trip - Antivalence"
Antivalent active Antivalent active
CLOSED OPEN
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-57
Settings
Positioner Description
ON < ON < control command (CLOSED)
OFF Control command STOP
ON > Control command ON > (OPEN)
FC Auxiliary control input "Feedback CLOSED"
usually with the socket of an input to which the limit switch is
connected)
FO Auxiliary control input "Feedback OPEN"
usually with the socket of an input to which the limit switch is
connected)
TC Auxiliary control input "Torque CLOSED"
usually with the socket of an input to which the torque switch is
connected)
TO Auxiliary control input "Torque OPEN"
usually with the socket of an input to which the torque switch is
connected)
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Motor
definitions")
Table 4-18: Positioner control function settings
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-58 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Execution time Time until the end position is reached.
Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1.0 s)
Positioner Description
Table 4-18: Positioner control function settings (Cont.)
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-59
4.2.15 "Soft starter" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft
starter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected via SIMOCODE pro to
the PROFIBUS DP.
Control commands
Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 contactor controls
Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the signal
"Feedback ON" has expired, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later
in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter.
With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the
soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil
of the network contactor.
2) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output from which the
"ON input" of the soft starter should be controlled.
3) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms
acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
4) Assign the "ON >" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control
commands.
5) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft
starter is connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External
fault 1".
6) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
inputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Notice
In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the "Execution time"
parameter in SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the smooth running
down time of the soft starter.
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-60 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Schematic
Fig. 4-25: Schematic of "Soft starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Settings
Soft starter Description
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Table 4-19: Soft Starter settings
Control commands
Contactor controls
Status
QE1
FB ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >
Protection/Control
Feedback time
Execution time
Non-maintained
Load type
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
QE3
Displays
20 ms
QE4
ON
Soft starter
Motor protection
Network contactor
Separate failsafe
function from

command mode
control function
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-61
Motor
definitions")
Execution time At least > smooth running down time.
Soft starter Description
Table 4-19: Soft Starter settings (Cont.)
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-62 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4.2.16 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter
including an additional reversing contactor. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are
connected via SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP. With this control
function, SIMOCODE pro can also control the direction of rotation of the
motor (forwards and backwards).
Control commands
Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 contactor controls (clockwise,
i.e. forwards)
Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 and QE4 contactor controls (counter-
clockwise, i.e. backwards)
Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the
"Feedback ON" signal is no longer issued, the QE1 / QE2 contactor control is
deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft
starter.
With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the
soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
has elapsed:
via the interlocking time.
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-63
of the network contactor (right).
of the network contactor (left).
3) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output from which the
"ON input" of the soft starter should be controlled.
4) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms
acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
5) Assign the "ON >", "ON <" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled
control commands.
6) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft
starter is connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External
fault 1".
7) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
inputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Note
An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function.
Schematic
Fig. 4-26: Schematic of the "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function, "Protection/
Control" function block
Interlocking time
active
QE4
Control commands
Feedback
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE2
FB ON*
QLE<
QLA
QLE>
QLS
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON <
OFF
ON >
Protection/Control
Feedback time
Execution time
Interlocking time
Non-maintained
Change-over
Load type
command Saving
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
(ON <)
*Feedback ON
QE1
QE3
RIGHT
LEFT
Soft starter with
Motor protection
20 ms
ON
reversing contactor
Extended control
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
command mode
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-64 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Settings
Soft starter with
reversing
contactor
Description
ON < ON < control command, counter-clockwise
ON > ON > control command, clockwise
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Saving change-over
command
Deactivated
Activated
Motor
definitions")
Execution time Execution time > Smooth running down time
Table 4-20: Soft starter with reversing contactor settings
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 4-65
4.3 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp
controls and status information for the control
functions
Table 4-21: Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for
control functions
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
/
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
t
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
L
a
m
p

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
Q
L
E
<
<
(
O
N
<
<
)
Q
L
E
<
(
O
N
<
)
Q
L
A
(
O
F
F
)
Q
L
E
>
(
O
N
>
)
Q
L
E
>
>
(
O
N
>
>
)
S
t
a
t
u
s

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
O
N
<
<
O
N
<
O
F
F
O
N
>
O
N
>
>
Q
E
1
Q
E
2
Q
E
3
Q
E
4
Q
E
5
O
N
<
<
O
N
<
O
F
F
O
N
>
O
N
>
>
O
v
e
r
l
o
a
d

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
c
t
i
v
e
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
D
i
r
e
c
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
-
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
R
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
L
E
F
T
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
R
i
g
h
t
L
E
F
T
-
-
-
L
E
F
T
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

b
r
e
a
k
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
p
u
l
s
e
-
O
F
F
p
u
l
s
e
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
-
d
e
l
t
a
s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
l
t
a
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
N
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
-
d
e
l
t
a

r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
2
)
L
E
F
T
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
S
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
l
t
a
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
R
i
g
h
t
N
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
N
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
L
E
F
T
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
D
a
h
l
a
n
d
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
F
a
s
t
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
s
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
D
a
h
l
a
n
d
e
r
r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
s
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
P
o
l
e
-
c
h
a
n
g
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
F
a
s
t
S
l
o
w
-
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
P
o
l
e
-
c
h
a
n
g
i
n
g
r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
-
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

v
a
l
v
e

2
)
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
-
-
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
O
P
E
N
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

1

2
)
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

2

2
)
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

3

2
)
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

4

2
)
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

5

2
)
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
N
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
R
e
s
e
t
O
N
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
w
i
t
h

r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

2
)
-
L
E
F
T
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
R
i
g
h
t
N
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
N
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
R
e
s
e
t
O
N
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
-
L
E
F
T
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
1
)

B
a
s
i
c

u
n
i
t

1
,

S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
C
2
)

B
a
s
i
c

u
n
i
t

2
,

S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-66 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 5-1
Monitoring functions 5
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the monitoring functions
Voltage monitoring
Cos phi monitoring
0/4 A - 20 mA monitoring
Operation monitoring
Temperature monitoring (analog)
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
As is the case with motor protection and motor control, the monitoring
functions work "in the background". All monitoring function parameters are
explained.
Target groups
Configurators
Programmers
Commissioners
Service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
SIMOCODE pro
Motor protection, motor control
Device parameters > Monitoring functions.
SIMOCODE pro
5-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.1 Earth-fault monitoring
5.1.1 Description
SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase currents. By
evaluating the summation current of the three current values, the motor
feeder can be monitored for a possible fault current or earth fault.
Internal earth-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current/
voltage measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase
connection in networks that are either grounded directly or with low
impedance.
Internal earth-fault-monitoring can be activated by means of
parameterization. It covers two different operating conditions.
The normal operating condition up to 2 x I
s
. The effective operating current
must be smaller than twice the set current I
s
. Fault currents of > 30% of the
set current I
s
will be detected.
Start-up or overload operation from 2 x I
s
. The effective operating current is
more than twice the set current I
s
. Fault currents of > 15% of the effective
motor current will be detected.
Note
If you use internal earth-fault monitoring for star-delta circuits, false tripping
may occur. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to
harmonics.
External earth-fault monitoring via a summation current transformer and
an earth-fault module is normally used for networks that are grounded with
high impedance.
Rated fault currents of 0.3 A/ 0.5 A/ 1 A can be evaluated with the 3UL22
summation current transformer. The response delay of the summation
current transformer is 300 ms - 500 ms. This response delay can be further
delayed by parameterizing SIMOCODE pro accordingly.
A definable and delayable response can be parameterized when an earth
fault is detected.
An event is generated if the earth-fault limit is exceeded. You can set
additional trippings via parameterization.
If the rated fault currents are exceeded, SIMOCODE pro V reacts by either:
Turning off the contactor controls QE, or
By issuing a warning,
depending upon the configuration you have set.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-3
5.1.2 Internal earth-fault monitoring
Response
Here you can set the SIMOCODE pro response to an internal earth fault:
information".
Fig. 5-1: "Earth-fault Monitoring" function block
Table 5-1: "Internal earth-fault monitoring" response
Activity
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether
the motor is running or not (operating state "ON").
Response Internal earth fault
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Response/delay
See Table 5-1
Event "Internal
Tripping

QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Internal earth fault
External earth fault
Current from
Current measuring
module or
Current/voltage
measuring module
earth fault"
Event "Warning
external earth fault"
SIMOCODE pro
5-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.1.3 External earth-fault monitoring (with summation current transformer)
Response
Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro to an external earth fault:
information".
Fig. 5-2: "Earth-fault Monitoring" function block
Table 5-2: "External earth-fault monitoring" response
1) Further delay of the summation current transformer delay
If the response is set to "Signaling" the "External earth fault" event will be
generated in the case of an earth fault.
If the response is set to "Warning", the "Warning external earth fault" event
will be generated in the case of an earth fault.
Activity
Response External earth fault
Deactivated -
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
1)
Event "External
Tripping

QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Current from
Summation current
transformer/
Earth-fault module
Internal earth fault
External earth fault
Response/delay
See Table 5-2
earth fault"
Event "Warning
external earth fault"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-5
5.2 Current limit monitoring
5.2.1 Description
Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring, independent of
overload protection.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for
freely-selectable upper and lower current limits. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level has been reached can be
freely parameterized and delayed.
Motor current measurement is carried out via current measuring modules or
current/voltage measuring modules.
Fig. 5-3: "Current Limits" function block
Trip level: I>
1)
Response when I>
Delay when I>
Warning level: I>
Response when I>
Delay when I>
Trip level: I<
2)
Response when I<
Delay when I<
Warning level: I<
Response when I<
Delay when I<
Hysteresis
Event
Event
Event
See
Table 5-3
See
Table 5-4
See
Table 5-5
See
Table 5-6
Current limits
- Trip level I>
Event
- Warning level I>
- Trip level I<
- Warning level I<
Tripping

QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Current I_max from
Current measuring
(Current or
module or
Current/voltage
measuring module)
1)

Upper limit
2)

Lower limit
SIMOCODE pro
5-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.2.2 I> (upper limit)
Trip level, warning level
When monitoring current limits I> (upper limit), two different response levels
I> (upper limit) trip level, I> (upper limit) warning level can be parameterized
and monitored.
If the current of one or more phases exceeds the response level, current limit
monitoring responds.
Trip level and warning level activity
The trip level/warning level is only effective when the motor is running, the
start-up procedure has been completed and there is no test position
feedback (TPF) (run+).
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is
overshot.
information".
Table 5-3: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I>
Response at warning level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is overshot:
information".
Table 5-4: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I>
Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I> (upper limit):
Trip level: 0 to 1020% of I
s
in 4% increments
Warning level: 0 to 1020% of I
s
in 4% increments
Response Trip level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Response Warning level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments
Default: 5 %
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-7
5.2.3 I< (lower limit)
When monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), two different response
levels (trip level/warning level) can be parameterized and monitored. If the
current of the phases (I_max) drops below the response level, current limit
monitoring responds.
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is
undershot:
information".
Table 5-5: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I<
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level is
undershot:
information".
Table 5-6: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I<
Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I< (lower limit):
Trip level: 0 to 1020% of I
s
in 4% increments
Warning level: 0 to 1020% of I
s
in 4% increments
Response Trip level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments
Default: 5 %
SIMOCODE pro
5-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.3 Voltage monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a
three-phase network or a one-phase network for freely selectable limits.
The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning level or trip level
can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage is measured by current/voltage measuring modules. This is based
on the minimal voltage of all voltages U
min
.
Note
Please note that only phase voltage is available with SIMOCODE pro V basic
units up to version *E06*. If required, the line-to-line voltage can be
calculated from the phase voltage using the logic module "Calculator 1/2" as
follows: Line-to-line voltage = phase voltage
*
1.73.
From version *E07* onwards, either phase voltage or line-to-line voltage can
be used.
Fig. 5-4: "Voltage Monitoring" function block
Furthermore, even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can
determine and signal the further availability of the feeder by measuring the
voltage directly at the circuit breaker or at the fuses in the main circuit.
Event
- Warning level U<
Voltage U
min
Trip level: U<
Trip level activity
Trip delay
Hysteresis
1)
Event
See
Table 5-7
Voltage monitoring
- Trip level U<
Tripping

QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
via
Current/voltage
measuring module
Warning level: U<
Warning level activity
Warning delay
See
Table 5-8
1)

Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-9
You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level).
If the voltage of one or more phases falls below the response level or
warning level, voltage monitoring responds.
Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning
level is to take effect:
1) When using basic unit 2 (from version *E03*) with a current/voltage
measuring module
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is
undershot:
information".
Table 5-7: "Trip level" response for voltage monitoring
Trip level: 0 - 2040 V in 8 V increments
Warning level: 0 - 2040 V in 8 V increments
Always (on)
1)
Trip level/warning level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or at
a standstill
Always, except TPF (on+) Trip level/warning level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or at
a standstill.
Exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test
position
If motor is running, except TPF (run) Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the
motor is ON and not in the test position
Response Trip level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
SIMOCODE pro
5-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
undershot:
information".
Table 5-8: "Warning level" response for voltage monitoring
Here you can set the hysteresis for voltage, cos phi and power.
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power 0 to 15% of the threshold value
in 1% increments (5%)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-11
5.4 Cos phi monitoring
Description
Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main
field of application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase
networks with loads that fluctuate significantly. The power factor fluctuates
more than either the motor current or the active power does, particularly in
the low-end performance area of a motor. Therefore, power factor
monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing between non-load
operation and faults, e.g. a broken drive belt or drive shaft. If the set trip
level or warning level is undershot, a signal is generated or the motor is
switched off, depending upon the setting.
Fig. 5-5: "Cos Phi Monitoring" function block
You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level)
for cos phi monitoring.
0 % = cos phi = 0.00
50 % = cos phi = 0.50
100 % = cos phi = 1.00
Trip level: 0 - 100 %
Warning level: 0 - 100 %
Trip level
Response
Delay
Warning level
Response
Delay
Event
See
Table 5-9
See
Table 5-10
Cos phi monitoring
- Trip level cos phi <
Event
- Warning level cos phi <
Tripping

QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Cos phi from
Current/voltage
measuring module
Hysteresis
1)
1)
(see "Voltage Monitoring" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
5-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set trip level is
undershot:
information".
Table 5-9: "Trip level" response for cos phi monitoring
undershot:
information".
Table 5-10: "Warning level" response for cos phi monitoring
Response Trip level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-13
5.5 Active power monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via
the active power. For example, by monitoring the active power of a pump
motor, conclusions can be drawn from the active power level about the flow
rate or fluid fill levels. The active power curve of a motor is a precise
reflection of its actual load across the entire range. Excess load results in
increased wear of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature motor failure.
Insufficient active power can, for example, be a sign of non-load motor
operation.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the active power for
freely-selectable upper and lower current limits. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level has been reached can be
freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage is measured by current/voltage measuring modules.
Fig. 5-6: "Power Monitoring" function block
Event
Event
Event
- Trip level P>
Event
- Warning level P>
- Trip level P<
- Warning level P<
Trip level: P>
1)
Response when P>
Delay when P>
Warning level: P>
Response when P>
Delay when P>
Trip level: P<
2)
Response when P<
Delay when P<
Warning level: P<
Response when P<
Delay when P<
See
Table 5-11
See
Table 5-12
See
Table 5-11
See
Table 5-12
Power monitoring
Tripping

QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Active power from
Current/voltage
measuring module
Hysteresis
3
)
1) Upper limit
2) Lower limit
3) Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power
(see "Voltage Monitoring" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
5-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
With active power monitoring, you can parameterize two different response
levels (trip level/warning level) for the upper and lower limit.
Response when trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)
either undershot or overshot:
information".
Table 5-11: "Trip level" response for active power monitoring
Response when warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set warning
level is either undershot or overshot:
information".
Table 5-12: "Warning level" response for active power monitoring
Trip level
P> (upper limit)
P< (lower limit)
0.000 - 4294967.295 kW
Warning level
P> (upper limit)
P< (lower limit)
0.000 - 4294967.295 kW
Response Trip level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-15
5.6 0/4-20 mA monitoring
Description
With the aid of an analog module, SIMOCODE pro is capable of measuring
and monitoring further process variables as desired.
For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a pump against dry
operation, or a differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the
degree of pollution in a filter. If the fill level undershoots a specified level,
the pump can be switched off and, if a specific differential pressure value is
exceeded, the filter must be cleaned.
Fig. 5-7: "Monitoring 0/4-20 mA" function block
Trip level 0/4-20 mA >
Trip level activity
Trip delay
Event
See
Table 5-13
Monitor 0/4-20 mA
- Trip level
Tripping

QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Analog input 1 of the
Marking trip level
Warning level 0/4-20 mA >
Warning delay
See
Table 5-14
Marking warning level
0/4-20 mA >
Event
- Warning level
0/4-20 mA >
Trip level 0/4-20 mA <
Trip level activity
Trip delay
Event
See
Table 5-13
- Trip level
Marking trip level
Warning level 0/4-20 mA <
Warning delay
See
Table 5-14
Marking warning level
0/4-20 mA <
Event
- Warning level
0/4-20 mA <
analog module
(AM Input 1)
Hysteresis
SIMOCODE pro
5-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a
transducer (standard 0/4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed
to the "0/4-20 mA" function block via the analog module.
With 0/4-20 mA monitoring, you can parameterize two different response
levels (trip level/warning level) for the upper and lower limit.
Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning
level is to take effect:
Response when trip level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit),
0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)
either undershot or overshot:
information".
Table 5-13: "Trip level" response for 0/4-20 mA monitoring
Trip level
0/4-20> (upper limit)
0/4-20< (lower limit)
0.0 - 23.6 mA 8 (0.0 mA)
Warning level
0/4-20> (upper limit)
0/4-20< (lower limit)
0.0 - 23.6 mA (0.0 mA)
Always (on) Trip level/warning level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or
at a standstill
Always, except TPF (on+) Trip level/warning level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or
at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e.
motor feeder is in the test position.
If motor is running, except TPF (run) Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the
motor is ON and not in the test position
If motor is running, except TPF,
with start-up override (run+)
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if
the motor is running and the start-up
procedure has been completed, and there is
no test position feedback (TPF)
Response Trip level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-17
Response when warning level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit), 0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set warning
level is either undershot or overshot:
information".
Table 5-14: "Warning level" response for 0/4-20 mA monitoring
Marking
The marking is stored in the device and allocated and displayed in the Faults/
Warnings online dialog. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g. "0/
4-20>". Range: Up to 10 characters.
Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA
Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:
Note
Monitoring of a second process variable via input 2 of the analog module
can be done, for example, by free limit monitors.
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Hysteresis for the analog signal 0 to 15% in 1% increments (5 %)
SIMOCODE pro
5-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.7 Operation monitoring
5.7.1 Description
To avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors caused by excessive run or
stop times, SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times
of a motor and limit the number of motor starts in a defined time frame.
If an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal or warning can be
generated that indicates maintenance or replacement of the motor in
question is required.
After replacing the motor, the operating hours and motor stop times can be
reset.
To avoid excessive thermal strain and premature aging of a motor, the
number of motor starts in a selectable time frame can be limited. The
number of starts still possible is available for further processing in
SIMOCODE pro.
A low number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.
Note
Operating hours, motor stop times and the number of motor starts can be
monitored completely in the device and/or transmitted to the automation
system via PROFIBUS.
Fig. 5-8: "Operation Monitoring" function block
Operating hours level
Response
Event
Control
functions
Operating hours
Motor stop time level
Response
Event - Motor stop time >
Motor stop time
Number of starts
Permissible starts
Time range for starts
Response at overshoot
Response at pre-warning
Interlocking time
Event
- Operating hours >
- Number of starts >
- Just one start possible
See
Table 5-15
See
Table 5-15
See
Table 5-15
See
Table 5-15
- No start possible
Tripping

QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Permissible starts
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-19
Response
Table 5-15: "Operation monitoring" response
5.7.2 Operating hours monitoring
The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours
(service life) of a motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts
can be generated in good time as applicable.
Level
If the operating hours exceed the set response level, the monitoring
function responds.
Activity
Response
You can set the response for overshoot here.
information" and Table 5-15.
5.7.3 Motor stop time monitoring
System parts for important processes often have dual drives (A and B
drives). Ensure that these are always operated alternately. This prevents
long motor stop times and reduces the risk of non-availability. The motor
stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to generate an
alarm, thus initiating connection of the motor.
Level
The length of the permissible motor stop time is stipulated here; if
exceeded, the monitoring function responds.
Activity
Response Motor operating
hours
monitoring level
Motor stop time
monitoring level
Number of
starts -
overshoot
Number of
starts -
pre-warning
Deactivated X X X X
Signaling X X X X
Warning X X X X
Tripping - - X -
Level: 0 to 1193046 hours (0 h)
Level: 0 to 65535 hours (0 h)
SIMOCODE pro
5-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Response
Here you can determine the response for when the permissible motor stop
time is exceeded:
5.7.4 Monitoring the number of starts
Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts (motors and
switching devices such as soft starters and converters) from too many start
processes within a parameterizable time frame and, thus, prevent damage.
This is particularly useful for commissioning or manual control.
The following schematic illustrates the principle of monitoring the number of
starts.
Fig. 5-9: Monitoring the number of starts
Permissible starts
The maximum number of starts is set here. The time interval "Time range
for starts" commences to run after the first start. After the second to last
permissible start has been executed, the "Just one start possible" pre-
warning is generated.
Time range for starts
The time range for permissible start processes is set here. The maximum
number of starts is only available again after the parameterized time range
for starts has elapsed. The number of available starts is shown by the analog
value "Permissible starts - Actual value".
Activity
Response at overshoot
Here you can set the response for when the number of starts within the
time range for starts has been overshot:
Permissible starts: 1 to 255
Time range for starts: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss
Time frame
1. Start within the time frame
t
Example:
3 starts allowed
Pre-warning Overshot
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-21
Response at pre-warning
Here you can set the response required after the second to last start:
Interlocking time
If a new start command is issued within the time range for starts after the
last permissible start, this new start command will no longer be executed if
the setting "Response at overshoot - Tripping" has been set. "Trip - No. of
starts >" will be displayed and the set interlocking time activated.
Interlocking time: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss
SIMOCODE pro
5-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.8 Temperature monitoring (analog)
Schematic and characteristic curve
Temperature monitoring of, for example, motor windings, motor bearings,
coolant and gearbox temperature, can be carried out via up to three analog
temperature sensors such as NTC, KTY 83/84, PT100, PT1000.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring for overtemperature:
Separate levels can be set for the warning temperature and the switch-off
temperature.
Temperature monitoring is based upon the highest temperature in all sensor
measuring circuits of the temperature module.
Fig. 5-10: "Temperature Monitoring" function block
Settings
Temperature Description
Trip level T> - 273 C - 65262 C
Response at trip
level T >
Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the
following table and Chapter "Important information")
Marking trip level T > No parameters. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g.
"Temperature>". Range: Up to 10 characters.
Warning level T > - 273 C - 65262 C
Response warning
level T >
Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the
following table and Chapter "Important information")
Marking warning
level T >
No parameters. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g.
"Temperature>"; Range: Up to 10 characters.
Hysteresis 0 - 255 C in 1 C increments
Default: 5 C
Table 5-16: "Temperature monitoring" settings
Trip level
Warning level
Hysteresis
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
- Temperature module
Tripping

See
Table
(Marking)
(Marking)
Event
Trip level T>
- Temperature module
Warning level T>
Max. temperature of all
sensor measuring circuits
of the temperature module
"Response"
See
Table
"Response"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-23
The trip level/warning level always takes effect, independent of whether the
motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Response
information".
Overtemperature: Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond
when the temperature has overshot the warning level/trip level.
Table 5-17: "Overtemperature" response
Notice
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "Tripping"!
Note
The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response
to a sensor fault must be set in the "Temperature Module Inputs (TM
Inputs)" function block if temperature monitoring is being used.
Note
To monitor several sensor measuring circuits individually and independently,
a suitable number of free limit monitors can be linked to the "Temperature
Module Inputs (TM Inputs)" function block and differing limits set for the
individual temperature sensors, instead of the "Temperature Monitoring"
function block.
Response Warning level T> Trip level T>
Deactivated X -
Signaling X X
Warning X -
Tripping - X
SIMOCODE pro
5-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
Description
Function for monitoring the interval between the connection and the
tripping of the enabling circuit (actuator tripping). The monitoring time starts
anew, every time the enabling circuit closes. This function supports you in
complying with test intervals that require verification.
In the enabling circuit of the DM-F Local and the DM-F PROFIsafe, relay
contacts carry out safety-oriented tripping. Whether the relay contacts of
the enabling circuit really open or not, can only be established via a change
in the switching state of the contacts.
The "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" function supports the
system operator in the monitoring of the time that has elapsed since the
last connection of the enabling circuit.
When the adjustable limit has been reached, the set reaction follows
(deactivated, signaling, warning; see response). This is logged in the event
memory.
This monitoring function is an organizational measure that supports the
system operator in detecting faults by carrying out regular tests, see
information in the operating instructions on regularly testing the function of
a safety device. The monitoring function itself need not be safety-oriented.
Note:
The function "Time until test" is not safety-oriented.
Fig. 5-11: "Monitoring Interval for Mandatory Testing" function block
Response
You can set the response here.
information".
Table 5-18: "Safe tripping" response
Test interval
Adjustable limit value for interval for mandatory testing:
Response
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Test interval: 0 to 255 weeks
Response
Interval for mandatory testing Test required
Time until test
Monitoring interval
for mandatory testing
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03 5-25
5.10 Hysteresis for monitoring functions
The following diagram illustrates the function of the hysteresis for
monitoring functions:
Fig. 5-12: The hysteresis operating principle for monitoring functions
TL = Trip level (tripping)
WL = Warning level (warning)
Time
Trip level >
Warning level >
Trip level <
Warning level <
Hysteresis *)
Hysteresis *)
Hysteresis *)
Hysteresis *)
0
1
Time
0
1
**)
Time
0
1
**)
Time
0
1
Time
**)
Signaling
Trip level >
Signaling
Warning level <
Signaling
Trip level <
Signaling
Warning level >
**) The trip and warning level events can also be delayed individually.
Measured
value
**)
*)The hystereses are always based on the respectively set response level
(exception: temperature monitoring)
SIMOCODE pro
5-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 6-1
Outputs 6
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the outputs of
SIMOCODE pro:
Relay outputs on the basic unit and the digital modules
Analog module output
Operator panel LEDs
Send Data on the PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
Programmers.
Necessary knowledge
PROFIBUS DP.
Further Function Blocks > Outputs.
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6.1 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has various outputs. These are represented by different
function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. They are the outgoing SIMOCODE pro
interfaces. Within SIMOCODE pro, the outputs are represented as plugs on
the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned to any functions or
events via connections.
Outputs can be:
Output terminals on the exterior of the basic unit, digital modules and the
analog module
LED on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state or different
statuses
Outputs to PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the various
output types:
Fig. 6-1: General representation of the various output types
SIMOCODE pro
DP PROFIBUS DP
LED operator panel
Output
Output
Output
Output terminals
SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs
Plugs
Plugs
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 6-3
Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, status display or
signaling via PROFIBUS DP. The system provides different types of outputs
depending on the device series and the expansion modules in use:
Table 6-1: Outputs
SIMOCODE
Outputs pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Basic unit outputs (BU Outputs)
Operator panel LED (OP LED)
Digital module 1 outputs (DM1 Outputs)
Digital module 2 outputs (DM2 Outputs)
Analog module output (AM Output)
Acyclic Send Data (Acyclic Send)
Cyclic Send Data (Cyclic Send)
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6.2 Basic unit outputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Outputs" function block with three relay outputs.
You can switch contactors or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the
inputs (plugs) of the function block must be connected to the respective
sockets (usually the QE contactor controls of the control function). The "BU
Outputs" function block consists of:
Three plugs corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3
Three relays
Output terminals.
Overall, there is one "BU Outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU Outputs" function block:
Fig. 6-2: "BU Outputs" function block
Control of the main contactor in the motor feeder:
You can, e.g., define which relay output is used for controlling the motor
contactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output to
the respective "QE." contactor control of the control function.
Lamp control for displaying operating states:
You can define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the
lamps/LEDs that display the operating states of the motor (Fault, ON,
OFF, Fast, Slow...).
To do this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE..."
contactor control of the control function. The following are specifically
intended for controlling lamps and LEDs:
In addition to the status displays, the "QL..." lamp controls automatically
signal via a 2Hz flash frequency:
Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)
Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults
etc. to the relay outputs
1
2
BU Outputs
3
1
2
3
6
7
Out1
Out2
Out3
Output terminals
Terminal numbers
SIMOCODE pro
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 6-5
Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
In most cases, the outputs of the basic unit will be connected to the QE or
QL outputs. By referring to Table 4-21 on page 4-65 you can determine
which QE outputs are required for which control functions.
Settings
Defaults depend on the selected application (template): See Chapter E
"Example circuits".
BU Outputs Description
Outputs 1 to 3 Control of the "BU Outputs" function block via any signal
(any sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.
usually from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-2: Basic unit output settings
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6.3 Operator panel LEDs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "OP LED" function block for controlling the seven
freely-assignable LEDs. The LEDs are in the operator panel and can be used
to display any status. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the "OP LED" function
block must be connected to the respective sockets (e.g. to the sockets for
the status information of the control function).
Note
The "OP LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is
connected and configured in the device configuration!
The "OP LED" function block consists of:
Four plugs, "OP LED Green 1" to "OP LED Green 4", corresponding to the
green LEDs. The green LEDs are optically/constructionally allocated to the
buttons on the operator panel. They normally display feedback concerning the
motor operating state.
Three plugs, "OP LED Yellow 1" to "OP LED Yellow 3", corresponding to the
yellow LEDs.
Four green LEDs
Three yellow LEDs (not for the operator panel with display).
Overall, there is one "OP LED" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Operator panel LEDs
The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel and the
LEDs:
Fig. 6-3: Operator panel LEDs
TEST/
RESET
Green 1 Green 2 Green 3 Green 4
Yellow 1 Yellow 2 Yellow 3
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 6-7
LEDs of the operator panel with display
The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with
display with LEDs:
Fig. 6-4: LEDs of the operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP LED" function block:
Fig. 6-5: Schematic of the "OP LED" function block
Note
The three yellow LEDs mentioned in this section are not available for the
operator panel with display. Status information can be read out here directly
via the display. The corresponding three plugs can also be connected via the
software. Nevertheless, they remain ineffective.
Green 1
Green 2
Green 3
Green 4
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Yellow 3
Green 1
Green 2
Green 3
Green 4
OP LED
LED
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Display of operating states:
You can define which LEDs are to be used for displaying the operating states
(Fault, ON, OFF, Fast, Slow...).
For this, connect the desired LED to the respective "QL." lamp control of the
control function.
In many cases, the LEDs are connected to the QL outputs. By referring to
Table 4-21 on page 4-65 you can determine which QL outputs are required
for which control functions.
Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to
the yellow LEDs.
Settings
*) No function when using the operator panel with display
"Example circuits".
OP LED Description
Green 1 to Green 4 Control of the "OP LED" function block
with any signal
(any sockets ,
e.g. feedback concerning the "Motor" operating state)
Yellow 1 to Yellow 3* Control of the "OP LED" function block
with any signal
(any sockets
e.g. displays for status, events, faults)
Table 6-3: Operator panel LED settings
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 6-9
6.4 Digital module outputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks,
which are each equipped with two relay outputs. You can switch contactors
or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs of the "DM
Outputs" function blocks) must be connected to the respective sockets (e.g.
of the control function).
Note
"DM Outputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital
modules (DM) are connected and configured in the device configuration!
Each function block has
Two plugs, corresponding to relay outputs Out1, Out2
Two relays
Output terminals.
Overall, there is
one "DM1 Outputs" function block on BU2, and
one "DM2 Outputs" function block on BU2.
Note:
In addition to the two jointly-switched failsafe enabling circuits, the failsafe
DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules are equipped with two
standard relay outputs, the common ground of which is switched off for
safety reasons via an enabling circuit.
For the logical wiring, the standard relay outputs are always switched. The
state of the failsafe enabling circuits is not affected by the logical wiring.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM Outputs" function blocks:
Fig. 6-6: Schematic of the "DM1 Outputs"/"DM2 Outputs" function blocks
1
2
DM1 Outputs
Out1
Out2
1
2
DM2 Outputs
Out1
Out2
Output terminals Output terminals
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder
You can define which relay output is to be used for controlling the main
contactor in the motor feeder.
For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE" contactor
control of the control function.
Controlling lamps for displaying operating states:
You can define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps/
LEDs that display the operating states of the motor (Fault, ON, OFF, Fast,
Slow...).
For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QL..." lamp
control of the control function.
Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to
the relay outputs.
In many cases, the outputs of the digital module will be connected to the
QE outputs. By referring to Table 4-21 on page 4-65 you can determine
which QE outputs are required for which control functions.
Settings
"Example circuits".
"DM1/DM2
Outputs"
Description
Outputs 1 to 2 Control of the "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks
with any signal
(any sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.
usually from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-4: "DM1/DM2 Outputs" settings
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 6-11
6.5 Analog module output
Description
You can expand basic unit 2 with an analog output using the analog module.
The corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 byte/1 word)
in SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0/4 A - 20 mA signal, for example, on a
connected pointer instrument. By activating the function block via the
"Assigned analog output value" plug with any integer value between 0 and
65535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA will be sent
to the output terminals of the analog module.
Note
The "AM Output" function block can only be used if the analog module (AM)
is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM Output" function block:
Fig. 6-7: Schematic of the "AM Output" function block
Settings
Table 6-5: "Analog module output" settings
Signal/value Range
Assigned analog output value Any value (1 word/2 bytes) in
SIMOCODE pro
Output signal 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA
Start value of value range 0 - 65535
End value of value range 0 - 65535
OUT+
AM Output
OUT-
Assigned
Start value of value range
End value of value range
Output signal
analog output value
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Note
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an
analog input circuit, each input will require an additional, isolated external
current source connected in series. If the output of the analog module is not
being used by another application, it can also be used as a current source
for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and the
"End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to
65535 for this. Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available
via the analog module output.
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 6-13
1) Output of the effective motor current - across the entire motor
current range
The motor current of a motor ranges from 0 to 8 A.
The rated current I
N
of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.
The parameterized set current I
s
in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the rated
current I
N
(2 A). In SIMOCODE pro, representation of the effective phase
currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current
I_max) corresponds to the selected range as a percentage of the
parameterized set current I
s
:
0 A motor current corresponds to 0 % of I
s
8 A motor current corresponds to 400% of I
s
The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is
1% (see measured values data record 94)
Fig. 6-8: Application example: Motor current output - entire range
As a result,
The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0
The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 400.
Fig. 6-9: Application example: Motor current output - output values to function block
AM Output
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:
0 % motor current corresponds to: 0 mA at the analog module output
400% motor current corresponds to: 20 mA at the analog module output.
8 A / 400
t [s]
motor curent lmax
[lmax / % of le])
2 A (lN) / 100
0
entire range
motor current (0 ... 400 % of le)
lN = le = 2 A
Max. current I_max
OUT+
AM Output
OUT-
Output signal
0
400
0-20 mA
Assigned
analog output value
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2) Output of the effective motor current - only part of the motor current
range (overload range)
The motor current of a motor ranges from 0 to 8 A.
The rated current I
N
of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.
The parameterized set current I
s
in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the rated
current I
N
(2 A). However, only the overload range (2 A - 8 A) is to be
displayed on a pointer instrument via the analog module output.
In SIMOCODE pro, representation of the effective phase currents or the
maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) corresponds
to the selected range as a percentage of the parameterized set current I
s
:
2 A motor current corresponds to 100 % of I
s
8 A motor current corresponds to 400% of I
s
The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1%
(see measured values data record 94).
Fig. 6-10: Application example: Motor current output - Overload range
As a result,
Fig. 6-11: Application example: Motor current output - Output values to function block
AM Output
8 A / 400
t [s]
motor current lmax
[lmax / % of le])
2 A (lN) / 100
0
Partial range of the motor current
Overload range (100 ... 400 % of le)
lN = le = 2 A
Max. current I_max
OUT+
AM Output
OUT-
Output signal
100
400
0-20 mA
Assigned
analog output value
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 6-15
Note (concerning examples 1 and 2):
In SIMOCODE pro, phase currents are available as a percentage of the set
current I
s
. When using the analog module output to display the effective
motor current on a connected pointer instrument, the effective motor
current is always indicated as a percentage of the set current. If the
selected control function is for a motor with only one speed, the pointer
instrument can be in percent (% of I
s
) as well as absolute (e.g. in A).
In the case of motors/control functions with two speeds and, thus, two set
currents (e.g. pole-changing starters or Dahlanders), the motor current is
only shown on the pointer instrument as a percentage of the effective set
current I
s
1 or I
s
2, depending upon which of the two speeds (slow or fast) is
prevalent.
3) Output of any analog value from the automation system (cyclically
via PROFIBUS)
One word (2 bytes) can be transmitted cyclically from the automation
system to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS. Any value can be output as a 0/4
to 20 mA signal by directly connecting this cyclic control word from
PROFIBUS to the analog module output. If the transmitted value is in S7
Format (0 to 27648) it must be taken into consideration when
parameterizing:
Fig. 6-12: Output of an analog value from the automation system
As a result,
0: 0 mA at the analog module output
27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.
0: 4 mA at the analog module output
27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.
Cyclic Receive 2/3
Assigned
analog output value
(1 word, cycl. from the PLC)
OUT+
AM Output
OUT-
Output signal
0
27648
0-20 mA
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6.6 Cyclic Send
Description
The "Cyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be
transferred cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
"Cyclic Send" function blocks consist of:
Eight bits each (two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
Four words (= eight bytes, byte 2 to 9 for four analog values, freely
parameterizable)
One output to PROFIBUS DP each.
Overall there are three "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/9).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Send" function blocks:
Fig. 6-13: Schematic of the "Cyclic Send" function blocks
Cyclic Send 2/9
DP
Byte 4/5
Byte 6/7
Byte 8/9
Byte 2/3
to
PROFIBUS DP
Basic type 1 (for BU 2)
Cyclic Send 2/9 with four words (eight bytes)
for up to four analog values
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Cyclic Send 0
DP to PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Byte 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Cyclic Send 1
DP to PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Byte 1
Cyclic Send 2/9
DP
to
PROFIBUS DP
Byte 2/3
Basic type 2 (for BU1 and BU2)
Cyclic Send 0 with eight bits
Cyclic Send 1 with eight bits
for binary information
for binary information
Cyclic Send 2/3 with one word (two bytes)
for one analog value
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 6-17
Cyclic services
Cyclic Send Data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between the DP
master and the DP slave. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data to
SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to
the DP master.
Settings
Cyclic Send Data Description
Byte 0 to 1
Bit 0 to bit 7
Basic types 1*, 2
Control of bits with any signals
(any sockets
e.g. device inputs, Send Data, etc.)
Byte 2/3
Basic types 1*, 2
Control of one word (two bytes) with any analog values
(any sockets
e.g. maximum current I_max, remaining cooling down period,
actual value of timers, etc.)
Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9
Basic type 1*
Control of three words (six bytes) with any analog values
(any sockets )
Table 6-6: Cyclic Send Data settings
*) For basic unit 2 only
Byte 0 of the Send Data is already preset. Byte 2/3 is preset with the max.
current I_max!
See also Chapter 12.4 "Telegram description and data access".
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6.7 Acyclic Send
Description
In addition to "Cyclic Send" it is also possible to transfer a further 16 bits of
binary information to the PLC/PC via acyclic services.
The "Acyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be
transferred acyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. The
inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the respective
sockets.
The "Acyclic Send" function blocks consists of:
Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
One output to PROFIBUS DP each.
Overall, there is one "Acyclic Send" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic Send" function blocks:
Fig. 6-14: Schematic of the "Acyclic Send" function blocks
Acyclic services
Acyclic Send Data will only be transferred on request.
The information (two bytes) can be found in data record 203.
This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the
acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.
Settings
Acyclic Send Data Description
Byte 0 to 1
Bit 0 to bit 7
Control of bits with any signals
(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, Send Data, status information,
events, etc.)
Table 6-7: Acyclic Send Data settings
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Acyclic Send 0
DP to PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Byte 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Acyclic Send 1
DP to PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Byte 1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 7-1
Inputs 7
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
The inputs are:
Binary inputs on the basic units and digital modules
Operator panel buttons
Temperature module inputs
Analog module inputs
Receive data from PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
Planners.
Necessary knowledge
The principle of connecting plugs to sockets.
Device parameters > Inputs.
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7.1 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has various inputs. These are represented by the different
function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. These function blocks are the ingoing
SIMOCODE pro interfaces. Within SIMOCODE pro, these inputs are
represented as sockets on the corresponding function blocks and can be
assigned via connections to any functions. Inputs can be:
Input terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital
modules
Buttons on the operator panel (one Test/Reset button, four freely-
parameterizable buttons), and basic units (one Test/Reset button)
Analog module inputs
Inputs from PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the input types:
Fig. 7-1: General representation of the input types
SIMOCODE pro
DP PROFIBUS DP
Input
Input
Input
Input terminals
SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
Buttons
- Control commands
- Test/Reset
Sockets
Sockets
Sockets
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 7-3
Inputs are used, for example, to input external signals e.g. via pushbuttons,
key-operated switches, etc. These external signals are processed further
internally via appropriate connections. The system has different inputs
depending upon the device series:
SIMOCODE
Inputs pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Basic unit inputs (BU Inputs)
Operator panel buttons (OP Buttons)
Digital module 1 inputs (DM1 Inputs)
Digital module 2 inputs (DM2 Inputs)
Temperature module inputs (TM Inputs)
Analog module inputs (AM Inputs)
Acyclic Receive (Acycl. Receive)
Cyclic Receive (Cycl. Receive)
Table 7-1: Inputs
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7.2 Basic unit inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Inputs" function block with four binary inputs with
common ground potential. You can connect the buttons for a local control
station to the inputs. These signals can be further processed in
SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the "BU Inputs"
function block.
The "BU Inputs" function block consists of:
Input terminals located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding to
the sockets "BU Input 1" to "BU Input 4"
Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the
"Control Stations" function block
A socket for the "Test/Reset" button:
The function of the "Test/Reset" button is generally dependent upon the
operating status of the device:
- Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
- Test function for carrying out device tests.
In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "Test/Reset" button (e.g.
operation of the memory module and the addressing plug).
For this, see also Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset".
Overall, there is one "BU Inputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU Inputs" function block:
Fig. 7-2: Schematic of the "BU Inputs" function block
Basic unit (BU)
9
10
4
5
BU Inputs
1
2
3
4
Terminal
numbers
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
BU Test/Reset button
8
Button
Test/Reset
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 7-5
The inputs can be used, for example, for connecting the start and stop
buttons of the local control station, which can then be assigned to the "Local
Control Station" function block.
If assigned accordingly, the input signals can also be used to activate
function blocks such as "Reset" or "External Fault".
See Chapter 13.2.1 "Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling
module".
Settings
Basic unit Description
Delay time
Inputs
You can set a delay time for the inputs, if required.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms
Table 7-2: "Basic unit inputs" settings
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7.3 Operator panel buttons
Description
The operator panel contains buttons 1 to 4 and the
"Test/Reset" button. Correspondingly, the "OP Buttons" function block is
available in SIMOCODE pro with five sockets.
Note
The "OP Buttons" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP)
is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Note
The operator panel with display does not have a Test/Reset button. The
allocated functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via
softkeys. Similarly, the corresponding status signal will then be available at
the "OP Test/Reset Button" socket.
Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4:
Buttons 1 to 4 are usually used to input control commands for the motor
feeder. Control commands can be, for example:
- Motor ON (ON >), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
Motor LEFT (ON<), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON >) for a reversing
starter.
- Motor SLOW (ON >), Motor FAST (ON >>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander
circuit.
However, the buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentioned
control commands, and can be assigned to other functions via different
internal connection of the respective function block socket in
SIMOCODE pro.
Operator panel, "Test/Reset" button:
The function of the "Test/Reset" button is generally assigned to fixed
functions:
- Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
- Test function for carrying out device tests.
- Operation of the memory module or the addressing plug
Nevertheless, the status of the "Test/Reset" button can be read from the
corresponding socket of the function block and can be assigned to further
functions in SIMOCODE pro.
See also Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset", Chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP
address". and Chapter 14.3.2 "Securing and saving parameters"..
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 7-7
Operator panel buttons
The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel and
buttons:
Fig. 7-3: Operator panel buttons
Buttons on the operator panel with display
The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with
display and buttons:
Fig. 7-4: Buttons on the operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V
Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 Button
TEST/
RESET
"Test/Reset"
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP Buttons" function block:
Fig. 7-5: Schematic of the "OP Buttons" function block
1) Operable via the menu on the operator panel with display
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
Button
Test/Reset
1)

OP Button 1
OP Button 2
OP Button 3
OP Button 4
OP - Test/Reset button
OP Buttons
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 7-9
7.4 Digital module inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM Inputs" function blocks, each with 4 grouped
binary inputs with common ground potential. You can connect the buttons
for a local control station to the inputs. These signals can be further
processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the
"DM Inputs" function blocks.
Note
The "DM Inputs" function blocks can only be used if the respective digital
module (DM) is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Note
When using the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe failsafe digital modules,
the input signals can be used as non-safety-oriented information.
Each "DM Inputs" function block consists of:
Input terminals located on the outside of the digital module,
corresponding to the sockets "DM Input 1" to "DM Input 4"
Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the
"Control Stations" function block.
Overall, one function block "DM1 - Inputs" and "DM2 - Inputs" for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM1/DM2 Inputs" function blocks:
Fig. 7-6: Schematic of the "DM1/DM2 Inputs" function blocks
Digital module (DM)
23
24
26
27
DM1 Inputs
1
2
3
4
Terminal
numbers
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
Digital module (DM)
23
24
26
27
DM2 Inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
25 25
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe
digital module DM-F Local:
Fig. 7-7: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module
DM-F Local:
Table 7-3: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module
DM-F Local:
The following schematic shows the "DM1 inputs" function block as failsafe
digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:
Fig. 7-8: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module
DM-F Local:
Table 7-4: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module
DM-F PROFIsafe
Input Description
Input 1 - "tripped" state
Start Start: Start input state (Y33)
Feedback Feedback: Feedback circuit state (Y34): 1 - closed; 0 - open
Cascade Cascade input state (1)
Sensor 1 Sensor circuit 1 state (Y12)
Sensor 2 Sensor circuit 2 state (Y22).
Input Description
Input 1 IN1 (83) state
Feedback FBC feedback circuit state (91): 1 - closed; 0 - open
Sensor 1 -
Sensor 2 -
Digital module (DM)
23
24
26
27
DM1 Inputs
Terminal
numbers
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
Input
Start
Feedback
Cascade
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Digital module (DM)
23
24
26
27
DM1 Inputs
Terminal
numbers
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Feedback
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 7-11
Digital modules allow the number of binary inputs and binary outputs on
basic unit 2 to be increased in increments.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of twelve binary
inputs and seven binary outputs. If assigned accordingly, the input signals
can be also used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or
"External Fault". An external fault can be, for example, the binary signal of an
external speed monitor, signaling that the nominal speed of a motor has
been undershot.
See Chapter 1.7.7 "Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device
series".
Settings
Notice
The delay times of the digital module inputs can only be set and/or are only
relevant when "monostable" or "bistable" is set for digital module 1. The
delay time can not be set if digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe. If digital
module 1 is a DM-F Local, the delay times can be set using the DIP
switches on the front of the DM-F Local.
Non-safety functions (failsafe digital modules)
If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the DM-F Local is a digital module
with non-safety inputs, relay outputs and diagnostics in a SIMOCODE pro
system.
If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, the DM-F PROFIsafe is a digital
module with non-safety inputs, relay outputs and diagnostics in a
SIMOCODE pro system.
Detailed information on failsafe digital modules:
See Chapter 1.7.7 "Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device
series".
Basic unit Description
Delay time
inputs
If required, you can set a delay time for the inputs.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms
These values are valid for digital modules with a 24 V DC input
supply.
For digital modules with a 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply, the
values are approx. 40 ms higher.
Table 7-5: "DM1/DM2 inputs" settings
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7.5 Temperature module inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "TM Inputs" function block with three analog sockets
corresponding to the three sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module. The temperature (in K) of the three measuring circuits can be read
from these sockets and processed internally. An additional analog socket
always supplies the maximum temperature of all three measured
temperatures. Furthermore, the two binary sockets of the function block
represent the status of the sensor measuring circuits. The temperatures can
be processed internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation
system via the "Cyclic Send" function blocks.
Note
The "TM Inputs" function block can only be used if the temperature module
(TM) is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "TM Inputs" function block:
Fig. 7-9: Schematic of the "TM Inputs" function block
Notes on wiring
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors. You will
find further information in Chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
TM Inputs
Max. temperature
Temperature 1
Temperature 2
Temperature 3
Event
- Sensor fault
u
R
1 2
PT/KTY
u
R
1 2
NTC
- Out of range
1T3
2T3
3T3
1T2
2T2
3T2
50
51
52
53
54
55
Inputs:
T1 56
T1 57
Sensor type
Response at sensor fault/
Out of range
Number of active sensors
Terminal
numbers
Range:
0 ... 65535 K
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 7-13
Among other things, you can monitor the following motor components:
Motor windings
Motor bearings
Motor coolant temperature
Motor gearbox oil temperature.
The individual temperatures of the three sensor measuring circuits can be
monitored independently of each other by connecting free limit monitors.
Settings
Table 7-6: Temperature module input settings
1)
Table 7-7: "Sensor fault/Out of range" response
information".
Temperature module Description
Sensor type PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC
Response
1)
at sensor fault/
Out of range
Deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping
Number of active sensors 1 sensor, 2 sensors, 3 sensors
Response Sensor fault/Out of range
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping X
Delay -
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7.6 Analog module inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "AM Inputs" function block with two analog sockets,
corresponding to the two analog inputs of the analog module. The effective
analog value of each input can be read from these sockets and processed
internally. An additional binary socket of the function block represents the
status of the analog measuring circuits. The analog values can be processed
internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the
"Cyclic Send" function blocks.
Note
The "AM Inputs" function block can only be used if the respective analog
module (AM) has been connected and configured in the device
configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM Inputs" function block:
Fig. 7-10: Schematic of the "AM Inputs" function block
Open circuit
AM Inputs
IN1+ 30
31
33
34
Inputs:
IN2+
IN1-
IN2-
Input 1
Input 2
Event
Input signal
Response at
Open circuit
Active inputs
Terminal
numbers
Range:
0 ... 27648
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 7-15
Typical applications are:
Fill-level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps
Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.
Settings
Table 7-8: Analog module input settings
Note
Note
The value of the analog module inputs is in S7 format.
Notice
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an
analog input circuit, each input will require an additional, isolated external
current source connected in series. If the output of the analog module is not
being used by another application, it can also be used as a current source
for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and the
"End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to
65535 for this. Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available
via the analog module output.
Analog module Description
Input signal 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Response at open circuit Signaling, warning, tripping
Active inputs 1 input, 2 inputs
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7.7 Cyclic Receive
Description
With the "Cyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic data
from the automation system will be further processed via PROFIBUS DP in
SIMOCODE pro. These will normally be PLC/PCS binary control commands.
Connection with the "Control Stations" function block in SIMOCODE pro will
allow the motor to be controlled via PROFIBUS DP. Direct connection of the
analog value with the "AM Output" function block will result in, for example,
the cyclic output of the value sent via PROFIBUS at the output of the analog
module.
The "Cyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:
One word (= two bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely
programmable) for basic type 1
One input each from PROFIBUS DP.
Overall there are three "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3)
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks:
Fig. 7-11: Schematic of the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks
Cyclic services
The Cyclic Data is exchanged between DP master and DP slave once every
DP cycle. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data (Cyclic Receive) to
SIMOCODE pro each time. SIMOCODE pro responds by sending the cyclic
send data (Cyclic Send) to the DP master.
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Byte 0
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Cyclic Receive 0
DP From PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Byte 1
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Cyclic Receive 1
DP From PROFIBUS DP
Byte 2/3
Cyclic Receive 2/3
1
)
Analog value
DP
1)

BU2 with basic type 1 only
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 7-17
7.8 Acyclic Receive
Description
In addition to "Cyclic Receive", it is possible to transfer further data
acyclically to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP.
With the "Acyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which acyclic
information from PROFIBUS DP will be further processed in
SIMOCODE pro. For this, simply connect the sockets of the "Acyclic
Receive" function block to any other function blocks in SIMOCODE pro.
The "Acyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:
One word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely
parameterizable)
One input each from PROFIBUS DP.
Overall there are three "Acyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3)
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic Receive" function blocks:
Fig. 7-12: Schematic of the "Acyclic Receive" function blocks
Acyclic services
Acyclic data is only transferred on request.
The information (4 bytes) can be found in data record 202.
This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the
acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1. Connection monitoring is activated
every time the data set is received. The content of the data set is deleted
after a 5-second time-out has elapsed.
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Byte 0
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Acyclic Receive 0
DP From PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Byte 1
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Acyclic Receive 1
DP From PROFIBUS DP
Byte 2/3
Acyclic Receive 2/3
1
)
Analog value
DP
1)

BU2 with basic type 1 only
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 8-1
Analog value recording 8
In this chapter
This chapter provides information regarding the possibility of recording the
measured curves of different measured values, e.g. the motor current when
the motor is started, using SIMOCODE pro V.
The increasing wear on the motor and the equipment driven by the motor all
cause the motor current to change over time. By recording the motor
current at different points in time and making direct comparisons,
conclusions can be drawn regarding the condition of the motor and the
equipment.
Target groups
Configurators
Programmers
Commissioners
Service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
SIMOCODE pro
Motor protection, motor control
Device parameters > Analog value recording.
SIMOCODE pro
8-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Description
The "Analog Value Recording" function block can be used to record various
analog values (2 bytes/1word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time.
For example, you can use this function block to record the characteristic
curve of the motor current when the motor is started.
Recording is carried out directly in SIMOCODE pro on the basis of the motor
feeder and independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system. Every
analog value present at the "Allocated analog value" analog socket is
recorded and saved. The recording starts on the basis of the edge (positive/
negative) via any binary signal at the trigger input of the function block. Up
to 60 values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the
recording is indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:
Sampling time = sampling rate[s]
*
60 values.
The pre-trigger can be used to specify how far in advance the recording
should commence before the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set
as a percentage of the entire sampling time. In addition, with
SIMOCODE ES you can also export the measured curve into a *.csv file for
further processing, for example, in MS Excel.
Functional principle
Fig. 8-1: Functional principle of analog value recording
The old measured curve will be overwritten in SIMOCODE pro each time a
new trigger signal is sent to the trigger input.
Sampling time = Sampling rate [s] * 60
Pre-trigger [%]
time
Sampling rate [s]
Allocated analog value
(e.g. motor current lmax [%])
0
1
Trigger input
time
Trigger edge = "positive"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 8-3
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Analog Value Recording" function block:
Fig. 8-2: Schematic of the "Analog Value Recording" function block
Settings
Table 8-1: "Analog value recording" settings
Application example
Record the motor current when the motor starts/sampling time = 12 s/pre-
trigger = 25% (3 s):
Fig. 8-3: Application example of the analog value recording
Signal/value Range
Trigger input Activate the analog value recording with
any signal
(any sockets ,
z. B. device inputs, current flowing)
Allocated analog value Any value (1 word/2 bytes) in
SIMOCODE pro
Trigger edge Positive/negative
Sampling rate 0.1 to 50 s in 0.1 s increments
Pre-trigger 0 to 100% in 5% increments
Assigned
Trigger input
Trigger edge
Sampling rate
Pre-trigger
analog value
0.2 s
25 %
Motor current flowing
Trigger edge
Sampling rate
Pre-trigger
Max. current I_max
Positive
SIMOCODE pro
8-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 9-1
3UF50 compatibility mode 9
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Target groups
Configurators
PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
Knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
Device parameters > 3UF50 compatibility mode.
SIMOCODE pro
9-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Description
The 3UF50 compatibility mode is applied when a SIMOCODE-DP device is
to be replaced by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the
configuration.
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode you can operate a SIMOCODE pro V basic
unit 2 with a 3UF50 configuration.
In this case, the communication using SIMOCODE pro behaves the same as
communication using SIMOCODE-DP from the point of view of the PLC
(class 1 master).
Cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnostics and the DPV1 data
records (DR 130, DR 131, DR 133) of SIMOCODE DP are supported.
In order for the technical functions (parameterization) of SIMOCODE DP to
be integrated into the technical functions of SIMOCODE pro V, the device
parameters must be adjusted accordingly. The "Win SIMOCODE-DP
Converter" software supports you in this process. This software enables you
to convert the parameter files (smc files) created with Win SIMOCODE-DP
into SIMOCODE ES parameter files (sdp files).
Safety guidelines
Notice
Communication with a DP master (class 2 master), e.g. with the Win
SIMOCODE-DP Professional software via PROFIBUS DP, is not covered by
the 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Notice
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, the start-up parameter block is always set,
i.e. the transmission of the device parameters
created using SIMOCODE-DP-GSD or the SIMOCODE-DP object manager
cannot be integrated into SIMOCODE pro V.
Notice
The 3UF50 compatibility mode supports SIMOCODE-DP projects in which
SIMCODE-DP is integrated via GSD SIEM8031.gs?, SIEM8069.gs? or via the
SIMOCODE-DP object manager (OM).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 9-3
Diagram of send and receive data
The following table shows the send and receive data in compatibility mode:
Table 9-1: "Receive" configuration
Table 9-2: "Send" configuration
Receive
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE-
DP
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE-
DP
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE-
DP
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE
pro V
0
Receive data
Cyclic Receive -
Bit 0. . 1.7
0
Receive data
Cyclic Receive -
Bit 0. . 1.7
0
Receive data
Cyclic Receive -
Bit 0. . 1.7
1 1 1
2 Not supported 2 Not supported 2 Not supported
3 3 3
Send
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE-
DP
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE-
DP
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE-
DP
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE
pro V
0
Send Data
Cyclic Send
Bit 0.0 .. 1.7
0
Send Data
Cyclic Send
Bit 0.0 .. 1.7
0
Send Data
Cyclic Send
Bit 0.0 .. 1.7
1 1 1
2
Motor current
Specified: Max.
current I_max
2
Motor current
Specified: Max.
current I_max
2 Acyclic Send
Bit 0.0 .. 1.7
3 3 3
4 Number of
starts
Number of starts
(Bytes 0 - 3)
5
6
7 Value
Counter 1
Counter 1
Actual value
8
9 Value
Counter 2
Counter 2
Actual value
10
11 Value sensor TM - Max.
temperature
SIMOCODE pro
9-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Diagram of diagnostics data
The following table shows the diagnostics data in the 3UF50-compatibility
mode:
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 - device-specific
diagnostics acc. to DP
standard SIMOCODE-DP
Byte
Bit
diagnostics acc. to
SIMOCODE-DP DPV1 standard
Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V
6 0x0B
Same as 3UF50 diagnostics
7 0x81
8 0x04
6 0x0E 9 0x00
7.0 Free 10.0 Free
7.1 Event: DP block 10.1 Event: DP block Event - Start-up parameter
block active
7.2 Event: Emergency start 10.2 Event: Emergency start Status - Emergency start executed
7.3 Event: HW test OK 10.3 Event: HW test OK No fault - HW fault basic unit
No fault - Module fault
No fault - Temporary components
7.4 Free 10.4 Free -
7.5 Event: Ext. event 1 10.5 Event: Ext. event 1 Event - Ext. fault 5
7.6 Event: Ext. event 2 10.6 Event: Ext. event 2 Event - Ext. fault 6
7.7 Event: Ext. event 3 10.7 Event: Ext. event 3 -
8.0 Warning: Ext. Warning 11.0 Warning: Ext. warning Warning - Ext. fault 3
8.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% 11.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% Warning - Unbalance
8.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU 11.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU Status - PLC/PCS (inverted)
8.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit 11.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit Warning - Thermistor short circuit
8.4 Event: Cooling down period
active
11.4 Event: Cooling down period
active
Status - Cooling down period active
8.5 Status: TPF 11.5 Status: TPF Status - Test position (TPF)
9.0 Warning: Earth fault 12.0 Warning: Earth fault Warning - Int. earth fault
or
Warning - Ext. earth fault
9.1 Warning: Overload 12.1 Warning: Overload Warning - Overload
9.2 Warning: Overload + unbalance 12.2 Warning: Overload + unbalance Warning - Overload + phase failure
9.3 Warning: I1 response level
overshot
overshot
Warning - Warning level I>
undershot
undershot
Warning - Warning level I<
overshot
overshot
-
undershot
undershot
-
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 9-5
9.7 Warning: Thermistor 12.7 Warning: Thermistor Warning - Thermistor overload
Warning - Thermistor open circuit
Warning - TM warning T>
Warning - TM sensor fault
Warning - TM out of range
10.0 Trip: Earth fault 13.0 Trip: Earth fault Trip - Int. earth fault
or
Trip - Ext. earth fault
10.1 Trip: Overload 13.1 Trip: Overload Trip - Overload
10.2 Trip: Overload + unbalance 13.2 Trip: Overload + unbalance Trip - Overload + phase failure
10.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot 13.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot Trip - Trip level I>
10.4 Trip: I1 response level undershot 13.4 Trip: I1 response level undershot Trip - Trip level I<
10.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot 13.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot -
10.6 Trip: I2 response level undershot 13.6 Trip: I2 response level undershot -
10.7 Trip: Thermistor 13.7 Trip: Thermistor Trip - Thermistor overload
Trip - Thermistor short circuit
Trip - Thermistor open circuit
Trip - TM trip T>
Trip - TM sensor fault
Trip - TM out of range
11.0 Trip: FB ON 14.0 Trip: FB ON Trip - Feedback ON
11.1 Trip: FB OFF 14.1 Trip: FB OFF Trip - Feedback OFF
11.2 Trip: Motor blocked 14.2 Trip: Motor blocked Trip - Stalled rotor
11.3 Trip: Positioner blocked 14.3 Trip: Positioner blocked Trip - Stalled positioner
11.4 Trip: Double 0 14.4 Trip: Double 0 Trip - Double 0
11.5 Trip: Double 1 14.5 Trip: Double 1 Trip - Double 1
11.6 Trip: End position 14.6 Trip: End position Trip - End position
11.7 Trip: Antivalence 14.7 Trip: Antivalence Trip - Antivalence
12.0 Trip: ESB 15.0 Trip: ESB Trip - Ext. fault 4
12.1 Trip: OPO 15.1 Trip: OPO Trip - Operational protection OFF (OPO)
12.2 Trip: UVO 15.2 Trip: OPO Trip - Undervoltage (UVO)
12.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 15.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 Trip - Ext. fault 1
12.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 15.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 Trip - Ext. fault 2
12.5 Trip: TPF fault 15.5 Trip: TPF fault Trip - Cold starting (TPF) fault
12.6 Trip: Runtime ON 15.6 Trip: Runtime ON Trip - Execution ON command
12.7 Trip: Runtime OFF 15.7 Trip: Runtime OFF Trip - Execution STOP command
13.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 16.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 Trip - Parameterization
13.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 16.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 -
13.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 16.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 Trip - Configuration fault
13.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 16.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 Trip - HW fault basic unit
Byte
Bit
Byte
Bit
diagnostics acc. to
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
9-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14 -
15
Number of overload trips Number of overload trips
16 -
17
I of the overload trip [%/IE)] Last trip current
18 -
19
Operating hours [10h] Motor operating hours
Byte
Bit
Byte
Bit
diagnostics acc. to
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-1
Standard functions 10
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the standard functions stored
as function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. Standard functions are typical motor
functions that can be activated according to need and, as applicable,
individually set for each motor feeder.
Target groups
Configurators
Programmers of application programs for reference purposes.
Necessary knowledge
Motor protection
Control functions, control stations.
Further function blocks > Standard functions.
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10.1 Introduction
Description
So-called "Standard functions" in the form of function blocks are also stored
in SIMOCODE pro, and can be used as required. These function blocks may
contain:
Plugs ( )
Sockets ( ) in the form of status information
Setting values, e.g. the response when external faults occur ("Signaling",
"Warning" or "Tripping").
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the function
block of a standard function:
Fig. 10-1: General representation of the function block of a standard function
These function blocks work independently of the selected control function
and can be used as optional supplements. They are ready to be used and
only require activating by connecting the plug(s) of the respective function
block.
Depending on the device series, the system offers several different function
blocks for such standard functions:
SIMOCODE
Function block pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Test 2 2
Reset 3 3
Test Position Feedback (TPF) 1 1
External Fault 4 6
Operational Protection OFF (OPO) 1
Power Failure Monitoring (UVO) 1
Emergency Start 1 1
Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring) 1 1
Table 10-1: Function blocks
Socket 1 - n
Plug 1
Plug n
Standard Function
Setting value
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-3
Timestamping 1
Safe Tripping 1
SIMOCODE
Function block pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Table 10-1: Function blocks (Cont.)
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10.2 Test/Reset
Test/Reset description
The function of the "Test/Reset" button on the basic unit or on the operator
panel is generally dependent upon the operating status of the device:
Reset function: If a fault occurs
Test function: In other operating states.
In addition to the Test/Reset button, SIMOCODE pro allows internal Test/
Reset tripping via the "Test" function blocks. The "Test" function block
consists of one plug.
Two function blocks, "Test 1" and "Test 2", for BU1 and BU2, whereby each
function block has a slightly different function:
Test 1: Test/trips the output relays
Test 2: Does not trip the output relays (normally for testing via the bus).
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the "Test/Reset"
function blocks:
Fig. 10-2: "Test/Reset" function blocks
*) The operator panel with display does not have a Test/Reset button. The
respective functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via
softkeys.
Reset 3
Test 1
Test/Reset buttons blocked
Test 2
Reset 1
Reset 2
BU "TEST/RESET" button
Control functions
"Test/Reset" function blocks
OP "TEST/RESET" button*
Test 1
Test 2
Reset 1
Reset 2
Reset 3
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-5
Testing
Testing can be carried out as follows:
Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can
be deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" or "Test 2" function blocks
Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu
item).
Testing can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the thermal
motor model of the overload function, i.e. after switching off via test, the
system can be reset immediately.
Tripping only occurs for Test 1 when the operating mode is set to "Remote".
Reset function
Resetting can be carried out as follows:
Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can
be deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
Using the "Reset input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of
the internal function blocks "Reset 1", "Reset 2" and "Reset 3".
Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu
item).
The "Reset" function block consists of one plug.
Overall, three function blocks, "Reset 1" through to "Reset 3" are available for
BU1 and BU2.
All reset inputs (sockets) are equal (OR function).
Test function
A SIMOCODE pro function test can also be initialized via the test function.
The test function comprises the following steps:
Lamp/LED test (test function < 2 s activated)
Testing the device functionality (test function activated for 2 s - 5 s )
For the "Test 1" function block only: Switching off the QE (test function
activated for > 5 s).
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Test phases
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the "TEST/
RESET" button is pressed for the required length of time:
Test settings
Test
phase
Status Without main current With main current
O.K. Fault
1)
O.K. Fault
Hardware test/lamp test
< 2s
"DEVICE" LED Orange Green Orange Green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL
Results of the hardware test/lamp test
2s - 5s
"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay test
> 5s
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED OFF
1) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s
Table 10-2: The states of the status LEDs/contactor controls during testing
Test 1 to 2 - Description
Input Control of the "Test" function block from any signal (any sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Test/Reset
buttons blocked
The blue Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator
panel are usually intended for acknowledging faults and for carrying
out a device test.
The buttons can be blocked via "Test/Reset buttons blocked". These
can then be used for other purposes. On the operator panel with
display, blocking is carried out via the corresponding menu function.
(Default: Unblocked)
Table 10-3: Test settings
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-7
Acknowledgement of faults
Generally, the following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:
Faults can only be acknowledged
If the cause of the fault has been eliminated
If there is no "ON" control command pending.
A reset will not be possible if the cause of the fault has not been eliminated
and/or if an "ON" control command is pending. The reset will be saved
depending on the type of fault. Saving a reset is indicated by the "GEN.
FAULT" LED on the basic unit and on the control panel. The LED changes from
flashing to continuous signal.
Automatic acknowledgement of faults
Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:
A reset has been saved and the cause of the fault is no longer present (user
has previously acknowledged the fault)
Auto-reset of overload tripping or thermistor tripping if motor protection
reset = auto (acknowledgement is automatic after the cooling down period
elapses). The motor cannot start immediately since resetting is not possible if
an ON command is pending.
If a configured module fails, all related faults will be acknowledged
automatically. However, a configuration fault will be generated (exception:
operator panel, if parameterized accordingly). This ensures that a module fault
does not cause the general fault to be acknowledged automatically.
If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via
parameterization), all related faults are acknowledged automatically (the
motor cannot start immediately since parameters cannot be entered if an ON
command is pending).
If a parameter of a function is changed from "Tripping" to "Warning", or to
"Signaling" or "Deactivated", all related faults will be acknowledged
automatically.
For an external fault: With its own parameter: "Auto-Reset".
Reset settings
Reset 1 to 3 - Description
Input Control of the "Reset" function block from any signal (any
sockets ,
Test/Reset buttons
blocked
The blue Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and on the operator
panel are intended for acknowledging faults and carrying out device
tests.
The buttons can be blocked via "Test/Reset buttons blocked". These
can then be used for other purposes. On the operator panel with
display, blocking is carried out via the menu (default: Unblocked).
Table 10-4: Reset settings
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10.3 Test position feedback (TPF)
Description
You can carry out the "Cold starting" function test using the "Test Position
Feedback (TPF)" function block. For this purpose, the function block input
(plug) must be connected to the respective socket. The activated test
position will be indicated by the flashing QL of the control function.
The "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block consists of:
One plug
One "Status - Test position" socket.
This is set when a signal is pending at the input.
One "Trip - Test position feedback" socket.
This is set when:
"TPF" is activated although current is flowing in the main circuit
"TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the main circuit.
Overall, there is one "Test Position Feedback" function block for BU1 and
BU2.
Note
When the test position is enabled, the QLE/QLA sockets of the control
function are activated, to indicate test operation of the motor feeder via a
blinking button LED, for example.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Test Position Feedback" function block:
Fig. 10-3: "Test Position Feedback" function block
Input
Trip -
Test position feedback fault
Status -
Test position
TPF
Type
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-9
Cold starting
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the
network. However, the control voltage is connected.
The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this state. Cold starting
means the motor feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.
To differentiate this function from normal operation, it must be enabled via
the socket on the function block.
Feedback stating that the motor feeder is isolated from the mains voltage
on the main current side can occur, for example, via an auxiliary contact of
the main switch in the motor feeder that is connected to any device input
(terminal). This is then internally connected to the "Test position feedback
(TPF) - Input" plug of the function block. When using current/voltage
measuring modules, this type of auxiliary contact is entirely unnecessary.
The "TPF" function block can be activated by monitoring for undervoltage
("Voltage Monitoring" function block).
Thereafter, the contactor outputs can be set via the control stations (see
Chapter 4.1 "Control stations"), enabling the current-free status to be tested.
If current flows erroneously during test operation, the contactor outputs are
switched off by "Trip - Test position feedback".
"Trip - Test position feedback (TPF)" fault message and acknowledgement
Notice
"Trip - Test position feedback (TPF)" will be generated if:
"TPF" is activated, although current is flowing in the motor feeder
"TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the motor feeder.
Acknowledge with "Reset".
Settings
Test position
feedback (TPF)
Description
Input Activate the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block with any
signal (any sockets ,
e. g. device input)
Type Specification of the input logic
NO contact (1-active)
NC contact (0-active)
Table 10-5: Test position feedback (TPF) settings
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10.4 External fault
Description
The "External Faults 1-6" function blocks can be used to monitor any
statuses and/or external devices, to generate fault messages and, if
necessary, to switch off the motor. To do this, the inputs (plugs) of the
"External Fault" function blocks must be connected to any sockets (e.g.
device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.). External faults can also
be "marked" in SIMOCODE pro. This facilitates their allocation to the actual
malfunction. Example: Monitoring the rotational speed of the motor using
an external speed monitor.
The "External Fault" function block consists of:
Two plugs (1 plug for setting, 1 plug for resetting)
One "Event - External fault" socket. This is set when a signal is pending at the
input.
Four "External Faults 1 to 4" function blocks for BU1
Six "External Faults 1 to 6" function blocks for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "External Fault" function blocks:
Fig. 10-4: "External Fault" function blocks
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External Fault 1
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 1
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External Fault 2
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 2
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External Fault 3
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 3
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External Fault 4
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 4
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External Fault 5
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 5
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External Fault 6
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 6
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-11
Special reset options:
A special reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options
(remote reset, Test/Reset button, OFF command-reset). Furthermore, Auto-
Reset can also be activated.
See below.
Settings
"External fault" response
Table 10-7: "External fault" response
External fault
1 to 6 -
Description
Input Control of the "External Fault" function block using the monitored
signal (arbitrary sockets ,
Type Specification of the input logic:
Activity Specify in which motor operating state the external fault is to be
evaluated:
Always:
Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at
a standstill.
Only when the motor is ON:
Evaluation only when the motor is switched ON.
Response Specification of the response to an external fault when activated via
the input (see the following table and Chapter "Important
information").
Reset Acknowledgment of the "External fault" using an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset also by Specification of further (common) acknowledgement options using
additional reset types:
Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and on the operator panel or,
in the case of the operator panel with display, via the menu (panel
reset)
Remote reset: Acknowledgement via Reset 1-3, DPV1, "Reset"
command
Auto-Reset: The fault is reset after the cause has been eliminated
(after removal of the activation signal)
OFF command-reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault.
Marking No parameters. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g.
"Rotational speed >", e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Range: Up to 10 characters.
Table 10-6: External fault settings
Response External fault
Fault/tripping X
Warning X
Event X
Deactivated -
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10.5 Operational protection OFF (OPO)
10.5.1 Response for positioner control function
Description
The "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block returns the positioner
to a safe position. In order to do this, the input (plug) must be connected to
the respective socket (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP,
etc.).
The "Operational Protection OFF" function block consists of:
One plug
One "Status - OPO" socket. This is set when a signal is pending at the input.
One "Trip - OPO fault" socket. This is set when the respective, safe end
position has been reached.
Overall, there is one Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block
available for BU2.
The following table shows the general functionality:
Table 10-8: General functionality of Operational protection OFF(OPO) for the "Positioner" control
function
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)"
function block:
Fig. 10-5: "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block
OPO Initial position when OPO is pending
Positioner
is open
Positioner
opens
Positioner
stop/OFF
Positioner
closes
Positioner
is closed
Reaction to OPO
Parameterized
response
"Positioner
closes"
Fault
Reset:
With close
command
Positioner
closes
Fault
Reset:
With close
command
Positioner
closes
Fault
Reset:
With close
command
Positioner
closes
-
Positioner
closes
-
Parameterized
"Positioner
opens"
response
- -
Positioner
opens
Fault
Reset:
With open
command
Positioner
opens
Fault
Reset:
With open
command
Positioner
opens
Fault
Reset:
With open
command
Positioner
opens
Input
Trip -
Operational protection OFF (OPO)
Status -
Operational Protection OFF
Positioner response
Type
Operational protection OFF (OPO)
(OPO)
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-13
Settings
Safety guidelines
Note
A "Trip - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" fault message is not generated if
the "OPO" command attempts to run the positioner to the end position in
which it is already in, or to which it is heading.
Note
No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried
out while "Operational protection OFF (OPO)" is active.
Note
The "Trip - Operation protection OFF (OPO)" fault message must be
acknowledged using the open or closed control command, depending on
the present "OPO" end position.
Note
Acknowledgement is carried out even if the desired end position has not yet
been reached.
Note
The fault message is available as diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.
Operational
protection OFF
(OPO)
Description
Input Control of the "Operational Protection OFF" function block using the
monitored signal (any sockets ,
e. g. device inputs etc.)
Positioner
response
Specification of the response for the "Positioner" control function
when activated via the input:
CLOSED: Positioner moves to the "Closed"end position.
OPEN: Positioner moves to the "Open" end position.
Type Specification of the input logic
Table 10-9: Operational protection OFF settings
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10.5.2 Response to other control functions
Description
For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated
between for OPO:
Motor in operation: The motor is switched off with a "Trip - Operational
protection OFF (OPO)" fault.
The motor is off. Initially no fault. The "Trip - Operational protection OFF
(OPO)" fault only occurs when an "ON command" is issued.
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-15
10.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO)
Description
The "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block is activated via the
plug. This is carried out via an external voltage relay that is connected to the
function block via the binary inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
Process (see process diagram below).
1) All contactors (QE) are immediately deactivated after response by the
monitoring relay/activation of the input (UVO).
2) The motor will be switched back to its previous status if the voltage returns
within the "power failure time". This can either take place immediately or can
be additionally delayed (restart time delay).
3) If the "power failure time" expires before the voltage returns, the device
signals a fault (UVO fault):
Prerequisite: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and not
interrupted.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)"
function block
Fig. 10-6: Schematic of the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block
Fig. 10-7: Power failure monitoring (UVO) process diagram
Input*
Trip -
Power failure (UVO)
UVO
Type
Power failure time
*Activation
External power failure monitoring
Restart time delay
QE
t
Power failure
time
Power failure
time
UVO
t
Fault
t
Fault
1)
2)
3)
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Settings
Power failure
monitoring (UVO) -
Description
Input Control of the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block
using the monitored signal (any socket ,
Type Specification of the type of power failure monitoring:
Deactivated
Device supply is not interrupted.
The control voltage from SIMOCODE pro remains constant.
The interruption of the mains voltage must be measured, for
example, by a separate voltage relay.
Power failure time Start time after power failure.
If the mains voltage returns within the power failure time, all the
drives that were connected before the power failure are
automatically reconnected.
If the mains voltage does not return within this time period, the
drives remain disconnected and the "Trip - Power failure (UVO)" fault
message is generated.
Once the mains voltage has returned, the fault message can be
acknowledged using "Reset".
Range:
0 to 25.5 s in 0.1 s increments
26 to 255 s in 1 s increments
256 to 2550 s in 10 s increments
Restart time delay
(staggered)
The restart time delay can be set so that not all motors restart
simultaneously (the mains voltage would otherwise fail again).
Range: 0 to 255 seconds.
Table 10-10: Power failure monitoring settings
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-17
10.7 Emergency start
Description
Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each
time it is activated. This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after
an overload trip. This function can be used to:
Enable a reset and start up the motor again immediately after an overload trip
Delete the thermal memory (motor model) during operation, if required.
Caution
If emergency starts are carried out too frequently this may lead to thermal
overloading of the motor!
Since emergency start is
edge-triggered, this function cannot permanently affect the thermal motor
model. An emergency start is carried out as follows:
Via the plug of the function block. To do this, the input (plug) of the function
block must be connected to an arbitrary socket (e.g. device inputs, control
bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.).
The "Emergency Start" function block consists of:
One plug
One "Status - Emergency start executed" socket. This is set when the
emergency start is carried out.
Overall, there is one "Emergency Start" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Emergency Start" function block:
Fig. 10-8: Function block "Emergency Start"
Settings
Emergency start Description
Input Activate the "Emergency Start" function block from any signal (any
sockets ,
Table 10-11: Emergency start settings
Input
Status -
Emergency start
Emergency start
executed
1)
1) The "Emergency start executed" signal is triggered by the edge (input) and reset
when the current flows.
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10.8 Safety-oriented tripping
Description
Note:
Please note that the information made available for further processing is in
the form of non-safety-oriented signals.
Note:
Please note that the "Safe Tripping" function block is not a safety-oriented
tripping function.
The DM-F Local safety function is determined by the DIP switch setting on
the module only.
The DM-F PROFIsafe safety function is performed by the failsafe program in
the F-CPU.
The "DM-F Local Safe Tripping" function block consists of 3 sockets:
Event - DM-F LOCAL ok: The DM-F Local is ready for operation.
Event - Safe tripping: A safety-oriented tripping has been carried out.
Status - Enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.
The "DM-F PROFIsafe Safe Tripping" function block consists of 3 sockets:
Event - PROFIsafe active: Failsafe communication between the F-CPU and the
DM-F PROFIsafe is active.
Event - Safe tripping: A safety-oriented tripping has been carried out.
Status - Enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.
Overall one "Safe Tripping" function block is available for SAFETY (Local) or
PROFIsafe.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Safe Tripping" function block:
Fig. 10-9: "Safe Tripping" function block
Safe Tripping
Response
DM-F Local o.k.
DIP switch *) PROFIsafe active
Safe tripping
Enabling circuit
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-19
Function of the SET/RESET button on DM-F Local
Fig. 10-10: SET/RESET button
See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY".
DM-F Local - Automatic starting after power failure
Danger
Automatic starting after power failure. Risk of death or serious injury.
In the case of automatic starting after a power failure, the enabling circuits are
connected without pressing the Start button.
Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)
Fig. 10-11: Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)
*) Notice:
The set DIP switch position in the SIMOCODE ES user interface (which can
be set using the mouse pointer) is transferred to the basic unit as part of the
download. However, it does not affect the function of the DM-F Local digital
module.
This way, the desired function is already set during parameterization.
The effective parameterization must be set using the DIP switches on the
front of the DM-F Local (see table below and/or "Failsafe digital module
SET/RESET button
*)
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual).
The basic unit compares the set position (from the download) with the
actual position at the DM-F Local. If these differ "Configuration deviation" is
output!
DIP switches (DM-F Local) Description
With/without cross-circuit detection Cross-circuit detection is only possible with
potential-free sensors. In this case, the
sensors must be connected between T1 - Y12,
Y33 and T2 Y22, Y34. The device anticipates
the T1 terminal test signal on terminals Y12
and Y33. Likewise, the T2 terminal test signal
is anticipated on terminals Y22 and Y34. In the
event of the signals on Y12, Y33 or Y22 , Y34
not corresponding to the T1 and T2 test
signals, the device detects a sensor fault.
When electronic sensors such as light arrays or
laser scanners are connected, cross-circuit
detection must be disabled. The DM-F Local no
longer monitors the sensor inputs for cross
circuiting. Usually, the outputs of safety
sensors (OSSD) are monitored for cross
circuiting in the sensor itself.
When the device has been parameterized as
"without cross-circuit detection", the T1 and T2
test outputs are switched off and must not be
reconnected. The DM-F Local anticipates a
+24 V DC signal from the same current source
from which the device is powered on inputs
Y12, Y22, Y33 and Y34 (DM-F Local-*1AB00
only) or from T3 (static +24 V DC).
With the DM-F Local-*1AU00 device version,
terminal T3 must be connected to the
potential-free sensor contacts, due to the
galvanic isolation of the input circuit and the
sensor supply.
1 NC contact + 1 NO contact
evaluation/2 NC contact evaluation
In addition to the 2-channel connection of
aligned sensor contacts (NC/NC), sensors with
opposing contacts (NC/NO often used for
magnetically-operated switches) can also be
evaluated. In this case, please ensure that the
NC contact is connected to Y12 and the NO
contact is connected to Y22.
2x 1-channel/1x 2-channel 2 sensors, each with one contact (2x 1-
channel) (NC/NC). Here, the sensors are
"AND"-connected with one another.
Simultaneity is not monitored.
1 sensor with 2 contacts (1x 2-channel) (NC/
NC). Here, it is expected that both contacts
open simultaneously.
Table 10-12: Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-21
Delay time for
Sensor inputs 50 ms/10 ms
During the delay time, sensor signal changes
are not evaluated.
Delay time 50ms: Changes in the switching
position of strongly bouncing contacts are
hidden (e.g. position switch on heavy
protective doors).
Delay time 10ms: The shorter delay time
allows for a quicker tripping of bounce-free
sensors (e.g. light arrays).
Sensor input automatic start/monitored
start
Automatic start: The enabling circuits are
switched to the operative position, as soon
as the starting condition on sensor inputs
Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 have been fulfilled. The
start button connection terminal Y33 is not
queried.
Monitored start: The enabling circuits are
as the starting condition on sensor inputs
Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 have been fulfilled and
the start button on terminal Y33 has
subsequently been actuated (start with the
falling edge).
Cascade input automatic start/
monitored start
Automatic start: The enabling circuits are
as the starting condition on cascade input 1
has been fulfilled, i.e. as soon as a static +24
V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3).
Monitored start: The enabling circuits are
as the starting condition on cascade input 1
has been fulfilled, i.e. as soon as a static +24
V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3) and the
start button on terminal Y33 has
subsequently been actuated (start with the
falling edge).
With/without start-up testing After a voltage failure, start-up testing requires
that the sensors at Y12 and Y22 are actuated
once by the system operator.
With automatic starting/without
automatic starting after power failure
The DM-F Local can be parameterized, so that
the enabling circuits automatically switch to
the operative position after a power failure i.e.
without pressing the start button Y33.
Prerequisites:
Y12, Y22 or cascade input 1 are
parameterized for "monitored start".
The starting condition on the sensor inputs
and on the cascade input has been fulfilled.
Valid actuation of the start button prior to the
power failure i.e. the enabling circuits were in
the operative position.
DIP switches (DM-F Local) Description
Table 10-12: Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local) (Cont.)
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Before commissioning the DM-F PROFIsafe set the PROFIsafe address as
follows:
Table 10-13: DIP switch settings (DM-F PROFIsafe)
When one DIP switch is set to ON, the respective value is active.
When more than one DIP switch is set to ON, the respective values must be added
up.
Briefly press the SET/RESET button.
LEDs from 1 to 10 show the current PROFIsafe address.
Setting the PROFIsafe address:
Switch off the supply voltage
Set the DIP switch configuration
Switch on the supply voltage.
Fig. 10-12: SET/RESET button
Switch position Value
1 = 2
0
1
2 = 2
1
2
3 = 2
2
4
4 = 2
3
8
5 = 2
4
16
6 = 2
5
32
7 = 2
6
64
8 = 2
7
128
9 = 2
8
256
10 = 2
9
512
SET/RESET button
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-23
"Safe tripping" response 1)
Here, you set the SIMOCODE pro response to a safety-oriented tripping via
DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe.
Note:
The module response is not affected by this setting. In the event of the
conditions for safety-oriented tripping being fulfilled, the enabling circuits
are always opened!
Table 10-14: "Safe tripping" response
1) Note:
In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL/PROFIsafe - separate function
from control function has been activated under "Motor control > Control
function > Operating mode", "Tripping" can no longer be set as response;
"Deactivated", "Signaling" or "Warning" are the only remaining options.
"Safe tripping" reset
Here, you can select manual or automatic acknowledging of SIMOCODE pro
faults caused by safety-oriented tripping (default: manual).
Response Safe tripping
Tripping X
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Reset: Manual, Auto
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10.9 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)
Description
The "Watchdog" function block monitors communication with the PLC via
PROFIBUS DP, as well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote"
operating mode.
Schematic
Bus monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, the "Trip - Bus" fault is generated if
"Bus monitoring" is active
When, in the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1), the
Cyclic Data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted, e.g.
by the PROFIBUS DP connection being interrupted.
"Status - Bus o.k." can always be evaluated. If SIMOCODE pro is cyclically
exchanging data with the PLC,
"Status - Bus o.k." is set to "1".
PLC/PCS monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, "Trip - PLC/PCS" is generated if
"PLC/PCS monitoring" is activated.
The PROFIBUS DP switches to the "CLEAR" status when in the "Remote"
operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).
The "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP
is in the "CLEAR" status, the "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" is set to "0".
If the "PLC/PCS monitoring - Input" is connected primarily to the "Cyclic
Receive - Bit 0.7" bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit only.
Fig. 10-13: "Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring)" function block
Notice
"Bus monitoring" and "PLC/PCS monitoring" can only be effective if the DP
slave address monitoring is activated in the DP master system.
PLC/PCS monitoring - Input
Trip - PLC/PCS
Watchdog (PLC/PCS monitoring)
Bus monitoring
Cyclic communication
Status - PLC/PCS in Run
(level sensitive)
PLC/PCS monitoring
Status - Bus o.k. (Bus is active)
Trip - Bus
Bus response
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 10-25
Settings
"Bus fault"/"PLC/PCS fault" response
Table 10-16: "Bus fault"/"PLC/PCS fault" response
Watchdog - Description
PLC/PCS
monitoring - Input
Activates the "Watchdog" function block using the monitored signal
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Bus monitoring Activated:
If a bus fault occurs, the "Trip - Bus" fault message is generated
and must be acknowledged
Deactivated:
No fault message; however, the "Status - Bus o.k." information
can be evaluated at anytime.
PLC/PCS
monitoring
Activated:
If an PLC fault occurs, the "Trip - PLC/PCS" fault message is
generated and must be acknowledged
Deactivated:
No fault message; however, the "Status - PLC/PCS in Run"
information can be evaluated at anytime.
Bus/PLC fault -
Reset
You can select whether faults are to be acknowledged
automatically or manually.
Range: Manual/Automatic
Table 10-15: Watchdog settings
Response Bus fault PLC/PCS fault
Fault X X
Warning - -
Event - -
Deactivated X X
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10.10 Timestamping
Description
SIMOCODE pro V can timestamp up to eight digital signals with high
temporal precision (10 ms). In the process, every change in the state of the
digital signal will be recorded.
Possible areas of application are:
Precise chronological recording of faults in a procedural system
Analysis of system interrelationships
Recording and signaling of time-critical signal changes
Prerequisite:
To use SIMOCODE pro V timestamping, the DP master being used must
support time synchronization functions via PROFIBUS (e.g. DP master
connections for SIMATIC S7 400), or a master clock must be used (e.g.
SICLOCK).
Process in STEP 7
Activation of the time synchronization for SIMOCODE pro V occurs
in STEP 7 HW Config in the slave properties under "Time Synchronization".
Notice
The set synchronization interval must correspond to the configuration of the
clock master.
For SIMOCODE pro, transmission of time-stamped information is analogous
to transmission with SIMATIC S7 IM 153-2.
Therefore, the "FB 62 TIMESTMP" function block can be used for further
processing of time-stamped information in the CPU, to transmit time-
stamped messages from the "Standard Library > Miscellaneous Blocks"
library.
Note
The "LADDR" parameter contains the diagnostic address of the DP slave
from STEP 7 HW Config.
LADDR2 contains the diagnostic address of slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro in the
DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master (integrated via OM SIMOCODE pro). For
all other configurations, LADDR2 will contain the same address as LADDR.
In contrast to the STEP7 FB62 online help, when integrating via GSD, the
slot number of the module is transmitted with Slot 1 for signal messages,
and with Slot 0 for special messages.
You will find further information about FB 62 in the STEP7 online help.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-1
Logic modules 11
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the SIMOCODE pro logic
modules. Logic modules are function blocks which are modeled not only on
standard logic functions, e.g. truth tables (AND, OR,...), but also on counters
and timers. In addition to the predefined control functions, you can use this,
for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and
counter functions without depending on external components (relays).
Target groups
Configurators
Programmers.
Necessary knowledge
The basics of digital signal processing, e.g. timers, counters, etc.
Further function blocks > Logic modules.
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11.1 Introduction
Description
Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input
signals and provide binary or analog output signals according to their
internal logic components. Logic modules can contain:
Plugs
An internal logic component
Sockets
Settings, e.g. the time for a timer.
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:
Fig. 11-1: General representation of a logic module
You can use the logic modules to carry out additional functions for your
application. These can be used, for example, to implement logical
operations, time relay functions and counter functions. Depending on the
device series, the system provides several logic modules:
SIMOCODE
Logic module pro C
BU1
Number
pro V
BU2
Number
Truth tables 3 inputs/1 output 3 6
Truth tables 2 inputs/1 output 2
Truth tables 5 inputs/2 outputs 1
Timer 2 4
Counter 2 4
Signal conditioners 2 4
Non-volatile elements 2 4
Flashing 3 3
Flickering 3 3
Limit Monitor 4
Calculation modules (Calculator)* 2
Table 11-1: Freely-programmable logic modules
*) Only for basic unit 2 for version *E03* onwards
Logic module
Plug 1
Plug n
Socket 1 - n
(Logic component)
Setting value
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-3
11.2 Truth table 3I/1O
Description
Truth table 3I/1O consists of:
Three plugs
One logic component
One socket.
You can choose from eight possible input conditions the ones with which to
generate an output signal.
Three truth tables, 1 to 3 for BU1
Six truth tables, 1 to 6 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 3I/1O" logic modules:
Fig. 11-2: "Truth Table for 3I/1O" logic modules
Truth Table 1 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Truth Table 3 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Truth Table 5 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Truth Table 2 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Truth Table 4 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Truth Table 6 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Fig. 11-3: Example of a truth table
Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:
S1=
Input 1
S2=
Input 2
S3=
Input 3
Q1=
Output
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
S1 S2
S3
Q1
Circuit:
Q1 switches with:
(S1 or S2) and S3
or
S1 and S2 and S3
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-5
Circuit and parameterization
Fig. 11-4: Example circuit and parameterization for truth table 3I/1O
Settings
Truth tables 1-6 3I/
1O -
Description
Input 1 to 3 Activate the truth table with any signal
(any sockets
Table 11-2: Settings for truth table 3I/1O
S2
S3
S1
Circuit:
1
2
Out1
3
Truth Table 1 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
1
2
3
4
L1
N
BU
Connect inputs, i.e.
Connecting plugs with sockets
Set bits for
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
output signals
Q1
BU Inputs BU Outputs
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Description
The truth table 2I/1O consists of:
2 plugs
One logic component
One socket.
You can choose from four possible input conditions the ones with which to
generate an output signal.
Overall, there are two truth tables (7 and 8) available for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 2I/1O" logic modules
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Fig. 11-6: Example of truth table 2I/1O
Truth Table 7 2I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Output
Truth Table 8 2I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Output
Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:
S1=
Input 1
S2=
Input 2
Q1=
Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
S1 S2
Q1
Circuit:
Q1 switches with:
S1 or S2
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-7
Description
The truth table 5I/2O consists of:
Five plugs
One logic component
Two sockets.
You can choose from 32 possible input conditions the ones with which to
generate up to 2 output signals.
Overall, one truth table (9) is available for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 5I/2O" logic modules
Settings
Truth table 9
5I/2O -
Description
Input 1 to 5 Activation by any signal
(any sockets
Table 11-3: Settings for truth table 5I/2O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output 1
Input 4
Input 5
Output 2
Truth Table 9 5I/2O
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11.5 Counter
Description
Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated
via the plugs "+" or "-".
The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The
counter is reset with "Reset".
The actual value is available as a socket for further processing and can also
be transmitted to the automation system.
Plug +: Increases the actual value by 1 (maximum: limit)
Plug : Decreases the actual value by 1 (minimum: 0).
Reset: Resets the actual value to 0.
The counter consists of:
3 plugs (input +, input and reset)
One logic component
One socket.
One "Actual value" analog socket with the current value in the range between
0 and the limit. It remains even if there is a voltage failure.
Two counters, 1 to 2 for BU1
Four counters, 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Counter" logic modules:
Fig. 11-8: "Counter" logic modules
Note
The time between the events to be counted depends on:
- The input delay
- The device cycle time.
Counter 1
Input +
Input
Reset
Output
Counter 2
Input +
Input
Reset
Output
Limit Limit
Counter 3
Input +
Input
Reset
Output
Counter 4
Input +
Input
Reset
Output
Limit Limit
Actual value Actual value
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-9
Note
The actual value remains the same
- During parameterization or failure of the supply voltage
- If there are simultaneous input signals at input + and input .
Note
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.
Settings
Counters 1 to 4 - Description
Input + Increases the actual value by 1.
Activation by any signal
(any sockets
Input Decreases the actual value by 1.
(any sockets
Reset Resets the counter to 0 (count value and output)
(any sockets
Limit The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where
the counter issues an output signal.
Range: 0 - 65535
Table 11-4: Counter settings
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11.6 Timer
Description
The timer consists of:
Two plugs (input and reset)
One socket.
One "Actual value" analog socket with the actual value.
The actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and
can also be transmitted to the automation system.
If an input signal is pending, the timer can issue an output signal according
to the chosen timer type:
With closing delay
With closing delay with memory
With opening delay
Fleeting closing.
Two timers, 1 to 2 for BU1
Four timers, 1 to 4 for BU2
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Timer" logic modules
Fig. 11-9: "Timer" logic modules
Note
Timer 1
Input
Reset
Output
Value
Type
Timer 2
Input
Reset
Output
Value
Type
Timer 3
Input
Reset
Output
Value
Type
Timer 4
Input
Reset
Output
Value
Type
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-11
Note
The response of the plugs of all timers (input, reset) has been completely
changed to level-active for basic unit 1 from version *E05* and higher and
basic unit 2 from version *E03* and higher. Use of an unchanged parameter
file utilizing integrated timers may thus result in a different response if such
basic units are used. For example, if "Fixed level - '1'" is set at the timer
input, the timer function is automatically restarted after the timer reset
occurs. However, in timers with the parameterized type = "Fleeting closing"
there is no change in the response.
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Output response of the timer
(Basic unit 1 before version *E05* and basic unit 2 before version *E03*)
Fig. 11-10: Output response of the timer (basic unit 1 before version *E05* and basic unit 2 before
version *E03*)
With closing delay:
Input
Reset
Time
Output
With closing delay with memory:
Input
Reset
Time
Output
With opening delay:
Fleeting closing:
t t
t t t
Input
Reset
Time
Output
t t t
Input
Reset
Time
Output
t
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-13
Output response of the timer
(Basic unit 1 from version *E05* onwards and basic unit 2 from version *E03* onwards)
Fig. 11-11: Output response of the timer (basic unit 1 from version *E05* onwards and basic unit 2
from version *E03* onwards)
With closing delay:
Input
Reset
Time
Output
With closing delay with memory:
Input
Reset
Time
Output
With opening delay:
Fleeting closing:
t
Input
Reset
Time
Output
t t t
Input
Reset
Time
Output
t t
t
t t t t
t t t
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Settings
Timers 1 to 4 - Description
Input Activation by any signal
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset Resets the actual value to 0.
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type Different output responses
Range: Closing delay, closing delay with memory,
opening delay, fleeting closing
Value Time during which the timer provides an output signal when
activated, depending on the output response (type)
Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms
Table 11-5: Timer settings
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-15
11.7 Signal conditioner
Description
If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioner can issue an output
signal according to the chosen signal conditioner type:
Non-inverting
Inverting
Edge rising with memory
Edge falling with memory.
You can set the output response.
The signal conditioner consists of:
One logic component
One socket.
Two signal conditioners for BU1 (signal conditioners 1 to 2)
Four signal conditioners for BU2 (signal conditioners 1 to 4).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Signal Conditioner" logic modules:
Fig. 11-12: "Signal Conditioner" logic modules
Note
Signal Conditioner 1
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Types of signals/output responses
Fig. 11-13: Types of signals/output responses of the signal conditioners
Level inverted
Edge falling with memory
Input
Output
Reset
Input
Output
Reset
Input
Output
Reset
Level not inverted
Input
Output
Reset
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-17
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "Level inverted" type of signal:
Table 11-6: NOR function
Settings
Input Reset Output Schematic
0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
1 1 0
Signal conditioner
1 to 4 -
Description
(any sockets ,
Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.
(any sockets ,
Range:
Level not inverted, level inverted,
edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory
Table 11-7: Signal conditioner settings
Input
Reset
Output
>
=
1
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11.8 Non-volatile elements
Description
Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners.
The output signals remain after failure of the supply voltage.
If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioner can issue an output
signal according to the chosen signal conditioner type:
Non-inverting
Inverting
Edge falling with memory.
You can set the output response.
The non-volatile element consists of:
One logic component
One socket.
Two non-volatile elements 1 to 2 for BU1
Four non-volatile elements 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile Element" logic modules
Fig. 11-14: "Non-volatile Element" logic modules
Note
Non-vol. Elem. 1
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Non-vol. Elem. 2
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Non-vol. Elem. 1
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Non-vol. Elem. 2
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-19
Types of signals/output responses
Fig. 11-15: Signal types/output responses of non-volatile elements
Level inverted
Edge falling with memory
Input
Output
Reset
Input
Output
Reset
Input
Output
Reset
Level not inverted
Input
Output
Reset
Voltage failure
Voltage failure
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "Level inverted" type of signal:
Table 11-8: NOR function
Settings
Input Reset Output Schematic
0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
1 1 0
Non-volatile
elements
1 to 4 -
Description
(any sockets
Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.
(any sockets
Range: Level not inverted, level inverted,
edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory
Table 11-9: Non-volatile element settings
Input
Reset
Output
>
=
1
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-21
11.9 Flashing
Description
If an input signal is pending at its plug, the "Flashing" logic module provides
a signal at its socket, which alternates between binary 0 and 1 with a fixed
frequency of 1 Hz. You can use this to make the LEDs on the operator panel
flash.
The logic module consists of:
One plug
One logic component
One socket.
Overall, three logic modules, "Flashing 1" through to "Flashing 3" are available
for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flashing" logic modules
Fig. 11-16: "Flashing" logic modules
Settings
Flashing 1 to 3 - Description
(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, status information, status, etc.)
Table 11-10: Flashing settings
Flashing 1
Input
Output
Flashing 2
Input
Output
Flashing 3
Input
Output
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11.10 Flickering
Description
You can use the "Flickering" logic modules to assign the "Flickering" function
to the operator panel LEDs (for example).
If an input signal is pending, the "Flickering" function block issues an output
signal with a frequency of 4 Hz.
The function block consists of:
One plug
One logic component
One socket.
Overall, three logic modules, "Flickering 1" through to "Flickering 3" are available
for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flickering" logic modules:
Fig. 11-17: "Flickering" logic modules
Settings
Flickering 1 to 3 - Description
(any sockets ,
e. g. status information etc.)
Table 11-11: Flickering settings
Flickering 1
Input
Output
Flickering 2
Input
Output
Flickering 3
Input
Output
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-23
11.11 Limit monitor
Description
Any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) can be monitored
for limit overshooting or limit undershooting. The limit monitor issues the
"Limit" signal at its socket. In addition, limit monitors can be "marked"
according to their function. Example: Monitoring the individual sensor
measuring circuits of the temperature module (Temperature 1 - 3) for
overtemperature.
The limit monitor consists of:
One analog plug
One logic component
One socket.
Overall, there are 4 limit monitors (1 to 4) available for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Limit Monitor" logic modules:
Fig. 11-18: "Limit Monitor" logic modules
Response
Table 11-12: Limit response
information".
Response Limit 1 to 4
Tripping -
Warning -
Signaling X
Disabled -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Limit Monitor 1
Event - Type
Limit
Activity
(Marking)
Limit value 1
Event -
Limit value 2
Limit Monitor 3
Event - Type
Limit
Activity
Limit value 3
Limit Monitor 4
Event - Type
Limit
Activity
Limit value 4
Response
(Marking)
Response
(Marking)
Response
Input Input
Input Input
Limit Monitor 2
Type
Limit
Activity
(Marking)
Response
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Functional principle
The limit signal issued depends on
The operating state of the motor
The TPF function
The parameterized "Activity":
ON
ON+
RUN
RUN+.
The following display shows a flow chart with the different "activity"
parameters.
Fig. 11-19: Limit monitor activity
OFF Start Motor is running OFF
"ON"
"ON+"
"RUN"
"RUN+"
Class time
Not with TPF
1)
Not with TPF
1)
Not with TPF
1)
Time
Activity
TPF: There is test position feedback, the motor feeder is in the test
position, i.e. its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the
control voltage is connected.
1)
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-25
Settings
Note
When using limit monitors, always ensure that the correct range and unit
are used for the analog values connected to the limit input. These always
have a direct influence on the unit of the limit value to be set. The units and
the ranges of all relevant analog values can be found in Chapter B.9 "Data
record 94 - Measured values" and Chapter B.10 "Data record 95 - Service
data/statistical data".
Limit Monitor Description
Input Analog plug of the limit monitor to be connected with the analog
value (2 bytes) which is to be monitored,
e.g. maximum current I_max, cooling down period, actual value of
timers, etc.)
Type Specifies if the limit has to be monitored for overshooting or
undershooting.
Activity Determines in which motor operating state the limit monitor is to
be evaluated:
ON, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is
running or not
ON+, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is
running or not
Exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position
RUN, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state and not in
the test position (TPF)
RUN+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the start-up
procedure is finished (i.e. the "Start active" message is no longer
pending) and there is no test position feedback (TPF); Example:
Cos phi monitoring.
Limit Monitor response value. The return value is always determined by
the "Limit monitor - Delay" parameter.
Range: 0 - 65535.
Delay Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly
overshot before the "Event - Limit" output is set.
Range: 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s).
Marking No parameters. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g.
"Limit>"; Range: Up to 10 characters.
Table 11-13: Limit monitor settings
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro:
Thus, for example, a limit of 473 (K) should be parameterized for a limit
monitor to monitor a maximum temperature of 200 C.
Unit Range
Temperatures (e.g. max. temperature) 1 K 0 - 65535
Operating hours 1 s 0 - 1193046
Motor stop time 1 h 0 - 65535
Active power 1 W 0 - 4294967295
Apparent power 1 VA 0 - 4294967295
Timer actual value 100 ms 0 - 65535
Currents (e.g. max. current I_max) 1% of I
s
0 - 66535
Analog module inputs - 0 - 27648 (S7 format)
Table 11-14: Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-27
11.12 Calculators (calculation modules)
Description
Both the "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" logic modules integrated in basic
unit 2 contain the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values
that occur in SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated and converted, e.g.
Conversion of the measured temperatures from K (Kelvin) to F or C
Conversion of the motor current from [%] to [A]
Conversion of the 0/4 - 20 mA signals of the analog module directly into fill
levels, pressures and flow rates.
The analog value (2 bytes/1 word) present at the analog sockets is
calculated using a defined formula and using freely-selectable parameters
(counters, denominators, operators, offsets). The result of the calculation is
output as an analog value at the analog socket of the logic module
(2 bytes/1 word) for further processing.
Each calculator consists of:
One analog plug (calculator 1) or two analog plugs (calculator 2)
One logic component
One analog socket.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Calculator" logic modules
Fig. 11-20: "Calculator" logic modules
Calculator 1
Counter
Denominator
Offset
Input
Input 1
Calculator 2
Operating mode
Counter 1
Denominator 1
Offset
Operator
Counter 2
Input 2
Denominator 2
Output
Output
Range: 0 - 65535
Range: 0 - 65535
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Operating modes for calculator 2
The mode of the "Calculator 2" logic module can be changed via the
"Operating mode" parameter:
Operating mode 1
The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value at input 2 via a
pre-defined formula, using the specified parameters (counters, denominators,
offsets, operators).
The result is available as an analog value at the output of the function block
for further processing (1 word/2 bytes).
Operating mode 2
The analog values at input 1 and input 2 are processed together as a double
word. Input 1 represents the high word and input 2 the low word. The result
is calculated using the formula defined for this operating mode and using the
specified parameters (counters, denominators, offsets) and is output from
the function block as 1 word/2 bytes. In operating mode 2 it is also possible
to process double words (e.g. active power, apparent power) and to generate
2 bytes/1 word.
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 11-29
Settings
Formulae
Fig. 11-21: Calculator formulae
Calculator Description
Calculator 1 - Input Any value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 1 - Output Calculated value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 1 - Counter Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 1
Calculation 1 - Denominator Range: 0 - 255, increment 1
Calculator 1 - Offset Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Input 1 Any value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Input 2 Any value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Output Any value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Counter 1 Range: -128 to +127, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Denominator 1 Range: 0 - 255, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Counter 2
1)
Range: 0 - 255, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Denominator 2
1)
Range: -128 to +127, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Offset Range: -2147483648 to +2147483647, increment 2
Calculator 2 - Operating mode 1 or 2
Calculator 2 - Operator
1)
+, -, *, /
1) Only relevant for operating mode = 1
Table 11-15: Calculator settings
Input 1
Input 2
Calculator 1
Counter
Denominator
Offset
Output Input
*
Input +
Calculator 2
Counter 1
Denominator 1
Operator
Output
Input 1
*
Input 1
Counter 2
Denominator 2
Offset
*
Input 2 +
Operating mode 1
Calculator 2
Counter 1
Denominator 1
Output
*
Input 1, input 2 Offset +
Operating mode 2
Input 2
(High)
(Low)
Logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Examples
Example 1
Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from
K to C
Fig. 11-22: Example 1
Example 2
Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from
K to F
Example 3
Conversion of the motor current I_max. from % to A (e.g. set current
I
s
= 3.36 A) (only possible for motors with one rotational speed)
TM Inputs
Max. temperature
Sensor type
0 ... 65535 C
Calculator 1
1
Out of range
1
-273
Unit = 1 K
* Input +
TM Inputs
Max. temperature
Sensor type
0 ... 65535 F
Calculator 1
9
Out of range
5
-460
Unit = 1 K
* Input +
Max. current I_max 0 ... 3427 (0 ... 34.72 A)
Calculator 1
336
100
0
Unit = 1 %
* Input +
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-1
Communication 12
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the options of SIMOCODE pro
communication, e.g. communication with a PLC. The default receive, send
and diagnostics data settings are sufficient for almost all applications and as
such, the parameterization only has to be changed to a small extent.
Otherwise, you can adapt the settings of the individual bits specifically for
your application.
Target groups
Configurators
PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You will find the following dialogs in SIMOCODE ES:
Device Parameters > Bus Parameters
Further function blocks > Outputs > Acyclic send data
Further function blocks >Outputs > Cyclic send data.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12.1 Definitions
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized peripherals). The
main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange between the central
DP master and the I/O devices.
PROFIBUS DPV1
PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. It enables acyclic data
exchange of parameter, diagnostic, receive and test data.
DP master
A master is designated as a DP master if it works with the DP protocol
according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Class 1 master
A class 1 master is an active station on the PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data
exchange with other stations is characteristic for this type of master. Typical
class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.
Class 2 master
A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP.
Typical class 2 masters are, for example:
PC/programming devices with the SIMOCODE ES software
SIMATIC PDM (PCS7)
PC with SIMATIC powercontrol software (power management).
DPV1 slave
A slave is designated as a DPV1 slave if it is operated on the PROFIBUS bus
with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170
standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
GSD
Device data (GSD) include DP slave descriptions in a uniform format. Using
GSD (device data) makes it easier to parameterize the DP slaves in a DP
master system.
OMSIMOCODE pro
OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD (device data)
to integrate SIMOCODE pro into STEP7.
OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES (if it is installed) for
parameterization within STEP7.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-3
SIMATIC PDM
Software package for the configuration, parameterization, commissioning
and maintenance of devices (e.g. transducers, controllers, SIMOCODE) and
for configuring networks and PCs.
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave
A SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into STEP7. It
is connected via OM SIMOCODE pro. It supports the S7 model (diagnostic
alarms, process alarms).
Writing data
Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system.
Reading data
Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro
system.
PROFIsafe
A safety profile developed and tested according to IEC 61508 for the widely-
used PROFIBUS and PROFINET fieldbus protocols.
The PROFIsafe profile determines how failsafe safety devices (e.g.
EMERGENCY-STOP buttons) are connected to programmable controllers via
PROFIBUS.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12.2 Data transfer
Options for data transfer
The following figure shows the options for data transfer:
Fig. 12-1: Options for data transfer
Communication principle
The following figure shows the communication principle and the way data is
transmitted depending on the master and slave operating modes:
Fig. 12-2: Communication principle
Data transfer to class 1 master,
depending on the slave operating
mode (see Chapter 12.5.1 "Slave
operating modes")
PROFIBUS DPV1 standard extension: Parameterization,
diagnostics, receiving, sending, testing via PROFIBUS DPV1
PC/programming devices with
SIMOCODE ES
Parameterizing, diagnostics, receiving,
sending, testing via system interface
Maximum of two class
2 masters possible
Class 1 master
SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP communication processor
Class 2 master
PC or programming device with
SIMOCODE ES
PLC
3UF7
Class 1 master Class 2 master (max. 2)
Cyclic I/O Acyclic
PLC CPU
Acyclic
Configuration
Communication processor
GSD
Cyclic send data
Cyclic receive data
Diagnostics Alarms
DPV0
DPV1
Parameter
SIMOCODE pro
Data records Data records
DPV1
Acyclic
PC or PCS
e.g. SIMOCODE ES
Startup
parameter
block
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-5
12.3 Failsafe data transfer via PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe
From version E07, SIMOCODE pro V supports safe tripping of motors by
means of data transfer via the PROFIsafe profile in connection with a
failsafe controller (F-CPU) and the SIMOCODE pro expansion module
DM-F PROFIsafe.
You can find further information on this function in the system manual "Failsafe
Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY".
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12.4 Telegram description and data access
12.4.1 Cyclic data
Cyclic data is exchanged between the PROFIBUS DP master and the DP
slave once every DP cycle. The PROFIBUS DP master module then sends
the receive data to SIMOCODE pro.
In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the send data to the master module.
Cyclic data is accessed via the inputs (send data) and outputs (receive data)
in the PLC program.
The length of the cyclic data which is to be transferred is already set when
SIMOCODE pro is integrated into the DP master system. This is achieved by
selecting the basic type which in turn determines the structure and the
length of the cyclic data.
The following basic types are available:
Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:
Table 12-1: Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro
Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:
Table 12-2: Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master
The cyclic data contents (digital/analog information) is set by
parameterization, e.g. with the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
The cyclic I/O data is already preset when the type of application (control
functions) is selected when the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization
software is started (see Chapter B.21 "Assignment of cyclic receive and
send data for predefined control functions").
Designation Length Designation Infor-
mation
Basic type 1 4 bytes of receive data Cyclic Receive -
Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU2
Cyclic Receive -
Analog value
Basic type 2 2 bytes of receive data Cyclic Receive -
Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU1
BU2
PROFIsafe 5 bytes of receive data 1 bit user data, assigned
permanently to the relay
enabling circuits
BU2
Designation Length Designation Infor-
mation
Basic type 1 10 bytes send data Cyclic Send -
Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU2
Cyclic Send -
Analog inputs 1 to 4
Basic type 2 4 bytes send data Cyclic Send -
Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU1
BU2
Cyclic Send -
Analog Input 1
PROFIsafe 4 byte inputs No user data BU2
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-7
12.4.2 Diagnostics data and alarms
Diagnostics data contains important information about the status of
SIMOCODE pro. This simplifies troubleshooting.
In contrast to cyclic data, the diagnostics data is only transmitted to the
master module if it changes.
PROFIBUS DP differentiates between:
Standard diagnostics
Status information
Channel-related diagnostics
Process and diagnostic alarms according to DPV1.
Configure diagnostic response
In SIMOCODE pro, you can set which diagnostic events trigger the
transmission of diagnostics data or the alarms to the PLC:
Diagnostics for device faults, e.g. parameterization errors, hardware faults
Diagnostics for process faults:
For events which are marked with "F" in the "DP Diagnostics" column in
Table B-9: Data record 92 - Diagnostics
diagnostics data or alarms are transferred to the PLC.
Diagnostics for process warnings:
For events which are marked with "W" in the "DP Diagnostics" column in
Diagnostics for process events:
For events which are marked with "E" in the "DP Diagnostics" column in
Set the response in the Device Parameters > Bus Parameters >
Diagnosis.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12.4.3 Configuration of the slave diagnostics
Fig. 12-3: Configuration of the slave diagnostics
The maximum length of the diagnostic telegram is 62 bytes.
.
.
.
Station status 1 to 3
Master PROFIBUS address
High byte
Low byte
Manufacturer's
Identification-related diagnostics
Status information
(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 8
Byte 27
Byte 28
Byte 29
Byte 30
Byte 6
Byte 7
Standard
diagnostics
(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)
Byte 31
Byte 32
Byte 33
Byte 28+n
Byte 48+n
Process alarm (temporary)
Byte 28+n
Byte 48+n
.
.
.
.
.
.
Diagnostic alarm (temporary)
Advanced
diagnostics
identification
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-9
Station status - definition
The station status provides an overview of the state of a DP slave.
Station status 1
Table 12-3: Configuration of station status 1 (byte 0)
Bit Meaning Cause/corrective measures
0 The DP slave cannot be
addressed by the DP master.
Check the following:
Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on
the DP slave?
Is the bus connection plug plugged in?
Is the DP slave connected to the power
supply?
Is the RS-485 repeater configured
correctly?
1 The DP slave is not yet ready for the
data transfer.
The DP slave is just starting up.
Wait until the startup is completed.
2 The configuration data sent from the
DP master to the DP slave does not
correspond to the configuration of
the DP slave.
Check whether the correct station type and
the correct configuration of the DP slave
has been entered in the configuration
software.
3 External diagnostics is available
(general diagnostics display)
Evaluate the identification-related
diagnostics, the status information and/or
the channel-related diagnostics.
Bit 3 is reset as soon as all errors are
rectified. The bit is reset if there is a new
diagnostic message in the bytes of the
above-mentioned diagnostic functions.
4 The required function is not
supported by the DP slave
Check the configuration.
5 The DP master cannot interpret the
response of the DP slave.
Check the bus configuration.
6 The DP slave type does not
correspond to the software
configuration.
Enter the correct station type in the
configuration software.
7 The DP slave has been
parameterized by another DP master
(not by the DP master which has
access to the DP slave at the
moment).
Bit is always 1 when you are accessing the
DP slave from the programming device or
from another DP master (for example).
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master
which parameterized the DP slave is in the
"Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic
byte.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Station status 2
Table 12-4: Configuration of station status 2 (byte 1)
Station status 3
Station status 3 is not relevant for the slave diagnostics.
Table 12-5: Configuration of station status 3
Master PROFIBUS address - definition
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the
"Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte which:
Parameterized the DP slave
Has read and write access to the DP slave.
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.
Manufacturer's identification - definition
A code is stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes the DP
slave type.
Table 12-6: Configuration of the manufacturer's identification
Bit Meaning
0 The DP slave must be parameterized again.
1 There is a diagnostic message. The DP slave will not function until the fault is
rectified (static diagnostic message).
2 The bit is always "1" when the DP slave with this PROFIBUS address is present.
3 Address monitoring is activated for this DP slave.
4 The DP slave received the "FREEZE" control command
1)
.
5 The DP slave received the "SYNC" control command
1)
.
6 0: Bit is always "0".
7 The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current
processing.
1) Bit is only updated if another diagnostic message also changes.
Bit Meaning
0 to 7 Bits are always "0".
Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer's identification for
80
H
FD
H
SIMOCODE pro
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-11
Identification-related diagnostics - definition
Identification-related diagnostics begins at byte 6 and is 2 bytes long.
Identification-related diagnostics - configuration
Fig. 12-4: Configuration of identification-related diagnostics
Status information - definition
The status information provides the detailed status of SIMOCODE pro.
If SIMOCODE pro is operated downstream from the Y-link (module for
connecting single-channel DP slaves to S7-400H), the so-called H_STATUS is
also signaled (see Fig. 12-6 "H_STATUS configuration").
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
7 6 5 0
Byte 6
Bit number
= 0x42
Length of identification-related diagnostics
including byte 6 (= 2 bytes)
Code for identification-related diagnostics
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x
7 6 5 0
Byte 7
Bit number
0: Identification-related diagnostics is not available
1: Identification-related diagnostics is available
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x
7 6 5 0
Byte 7
Bit number
0: Identification-related diagnostics is not available
1: Identification-related diagnostics is available
GSD
OMSIMOCODE pro
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Status information - configuration
The status information is configured as follows:
Fig. 12-5: Status information configuration
Detailed status information can be found in Chapter A.5 "Detailed messages
of the slave diagnostics".
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
7 6 5 0
Byte 8
Bit number
= 0x14
Length of the status information
including byte 8 (= 20 bytes)
7 6 5
Byte 12
Bit number
7 0
Byte 9
0x81
7 0
Byte 10
x
Byte 11
0x00
4 3 2 1 0
Slot number
Status information
GSD:
OMSIMOCODE pro: 0x04
0x01
Detailed status information
.
.
.
Byte 27
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-13
The H_STATUS is configured as follows:
Fig. 12-6: H_STATUS configuration
Length of H_STATUS including byte 8
Code for device-related diagnostics
7 0
0x00
Byte 8
Byte 9
Byte 10
Byte 11
7 6 5 0 Bit number
0x1E = Switching by DP master
0x1F = H_STATUS
7 0 Bit number
Always "0"
Not relevant
Not relevant Byte 12
Byte 13 H_STATUS
7 0 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 0
Deactivated
Activated
Hardware fault
Data exchange
Master - state - clear
Baud rate detected
0x04 Byte 14
Byte 15
Always "4"
Always "0" 0x00
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Channel-related diagnostics - definition
Channel-related diagnosis is a detailed version of the identification-related
diagnostics. It supplies information about the device faults of
SIMOCODE pro.
Channel-related diagnostics - configuration
The channel-related diagnostics is configured as follows:
Fig. 12-7: Configuration of the channel-related diagnostics
The block for the channel-related diagnostics, which has a length of 3 bytes,
is either missing (if there is no channel-related diagnostics) or is available
once or twice.
Error types
The diagnostic message is output on channel 0.
Table 12-7: Error types
No. Error type Meaning/cause
F9 01001:
Error
Internal fault/device fault
Error during self-test
Exact information: See
Chapter B.8 "Data record
92 - Device diagnostics".
F16 10000:
Parameterization
error
Incorrect parameter value
1 0 0 0 0 0 x x
7 6 5 0
Byte 28
Bit number
Code for channel-related diagnostics
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 5 0
Byte 29
Bit number
Input/output channel
7 6 5 0
Byte 30
Bit number
Channel type:
Error type 9 or 16 (table below)
000
B
: No special channel type
Byte 31 to Next channel-related diagnostic message
(Allocation as for byte 28 to 30) byte 33
0 0 0
0x80 GSD
0x83 OM SIMOCODE pro
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-15
Alarms - diagnostic alarm
Device errors or parameter errors are alarm sources for diagnostic alarms.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a diagnostic alarm, the OB 82 diagnostic
alarm is started in the SIMATIC S7.
Diagnostic alarm - configuration
The diagnostic alarm is configured as follows:
Fig. 12-8: Configuration of the diagnostic alarm
The first byte of the block for diagnostic alarms can be moved by 3 or 6
bytes depending on the number of blocks for channel-related diagnostics.
You will find a detailed description of the information contained in data
record 1 in Chapter B.2 "Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics".
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14
Length of the diagnostic alarm
including header byte (= 20 bytes)
7 0
0x01
7 0
x
0x00
Slot number
Diagnostic alarm
GSD:
OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
0x01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Byte 28+n
Byte 29+n
Byte 30+n
Byte 31+n
Byte 32+n
Byte 48+n
Contents of data record 1
n = 0; 3; 6
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Alarms - process alarm
Process faults, warnings and status information are alarm sources for
process alarms.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a process alarm, the OB 40 process alarm
is started in the SIMATIC S7.
Process alarm - configuration
The process alarm is configured as follows:
Fig. 12-9: Configuration of the process alarm
The first byte of the block for process alarms can be moved by 3 or 6 bytes
depending on the number of blocks for channel-related diagnostics.
Detailed status information can be found in Chapter A.5 "Detailed messages
of the slave diagnostics".
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14
Length of the process alarm
including header byte (= 20 bytes)
7 0
7 0
x
0x00
Slot number
Process alarm
GSD:
OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
0x01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Byte 28+n
Byte 29+n
Byte 30+n
Byte 31+n
Byte 32+n
Byte 48+n
Detailed status information
n = 0; 3; 6
7 6 5 0 Bit number
0x02
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-17
12.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems
12.5.1 Slave operating modes
The following table shows an overview of the slave operating modes which
SIMOCODE pro can be operated with on the class 1 master:
Table 12-8: Slave operating modes of SIMOCODE pro
12.5.2 Preparing the data transfer
In order to communicate with the class 1 master (PLC), a connection
according to Table 12-8: Slave operating modes of SIMOCODE pro must be
present and the PROFIBUS-DP address must be configured.
See Chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP address" for more
information about setting the address.
SIMOCODE pro
connected as:
Class 1 master
DP master
manufacturer-
independent,
without DPV1 alarms
DP master
manufacturer-
independent,
with DPV1 alarms
S7 master
DPV1 slave
via GSD
Cyclic data
exchange
Standard
diagnostics
Status information
Parameterization
during startup (only
BU1)
Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records (if
supported by the
master)
Cyclic data
exchange
Standard
diagnostics
Status information
Process and
diagnostic alarm
Parameterization
BU1)
Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
Cyclic data
exchange
Standard
diagnostics
Status information
Process and
diagnostic alarm
Parameterization
BU1)
Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
S7 slave via
OM
SIMOCODE pro
Cyclic data
exchange
Standard
diagnostics
Process and
diagnostic alarm
Parameterization
during startup
Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12.5.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the
configuration software
SIMOCODE pro is connected as a standard slave in your system via the
GSD file.
You can download the GSD file
From the internet at http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd (switchgears).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C:
SI0180FD.GSG (German)
SI0180FD.GSE (English).
SI0180FD.GSF (French).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V:
SI1280FD.GSG (German)
SI1280FD.GSE (English).
SI1280FD.GSF (French).
Notice
If you want to utilize the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro (e.g.
timestamping), your configuration tool must support GSD files - Rev. 5 such
as STEP7 V5.3 and higher.
The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7
and SIMOCODE pro from the hardware catalog.
Table 12-9: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuration software
Step STEP7 , V5.1+SP2 onwards
1 Start STEP7 and in the HW Config select the menu command
"Options > Install GSD file".
2 In the following dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm
with "OK" -->. The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the
"PROFIBUS DP" directory under "Other field devices > Switching devices
> SIMOCODE pro".
3 Enter "SIMOCODE pro C" or "SIMOCODE pro V" on the PROFIBUS.
4 Only for SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or
basic type 2). See Chapter 12.4.1 "Cyclic data". The default is basic type 2.
If you wish to use "basic type 1", delete the default "basic type 2" module
and insert "basic type 1" instead.
Only for the failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe: Insert the
"PROFIsafe" module into the second position (in addition to "basic type 1"
or "basic type 2").
You can find further information on using DM-F PROFIsafe in the system
manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY".
5 Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the release of
the DPV1 alarms in the properties of the DP slave.
These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostics data and alarms
(see Chapter 12.6 "Evaluating diagnostics data" and Chapter 10.10
"Timestamping").
6 Only for SIMOCODE pro C:
It is possible to set the device parameters which are automatically
transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during every startup in the object
properties under "Parameterization > Device-specific parameters" (see
Chapter 12.8.3 "Parameter data during startup").
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-19
12.5.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via
GSD) in STEP7 HWConfig
SIMOCODE pro can be integrated as a PDM object in the STEP7 HW Config
of the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) software from version 6.0 +
SP1 onwards. The PDM option "Integration in STEP7" is required for this.
The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro as a PDM
object in the STEP7 HW Config from the hardware catalog.
Table 12-10: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via GSD) in
STEP7 HW Config
Step STEP7 , V5.1+SP2 onwards
1 Start STEP7 and open the "HW Config".
2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object, navigate to the
"PROFIBUS DP > Devices" directory in the hardware catalog.
3 Enter
"SIMOCODE pro C (PDM)" or
"SIMOCODE pro V (PDM)" on the PROFIBUS.
Only for SIMOCODE pro V:
basic type 2). See Chapter 12.4.1 "Cyclic data". The default is basic type 2.
If you wish to use "basic type 1", delete the default "basic type 2" module
and insert "basic type 1" instead.
Only for the failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe: Insert the
"PROFIsafe" module into the second position (in addition to "basic type 1"
or "basic type 2".)
manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY ".
4 Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the release of
the DPV-1 alarms in the properties of the DP slave.
These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostics data and alarms
(see Chapter 12.6 "Evaluating diagnostics data" and Chapter 10.10
"Timestamping").
5 Start SIMATIC PDM to create the device parameters by double clicking on
the slave symbol (see Chapter 12.8.2 "SIMATIC PDM").
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12.5.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro
The "OM SIMOCODE pro" software must be installed to utilize the
advantages of SIMOCODE ES and parameterize SIMOCODE pro from the
STEP7 HW Config. OM SIMOCODE pro is included in the scope of supply
of the "SIMOCODE ES Premium" software.
Install the corresponding software.
The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro in
the STEP7 HW Config from the hardware catalog.
Table 12-11: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro
If SIMOCODE pro is integrated as an S7 slave you can use the routing
function in connection with SIMOCODE ES Premium. A prerequisite for
using this function is that a network connection (for example via Industrial
Ethernet) can be established between the PC with SIMOCODE ES installed
and the SIMATIC controller which supports routing.
In this manner, routing can be used to reach all SIMOCODE pro devices that
are connected to the controller.
Step STEP7
1 Start STEP7 and open the "HW Config".
2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave, navigate in the hardware
catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP > Devices > Motor Management System"
directory.
3 Enter
SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 1) or
SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 2) on the PROFIBUS.
Only for SIMOCODE pro V:
basic type 2). See Chapter 12.4.1 "Cyclic data".
Insert the desired basic type "basic type 1" or "basic type 2" as a module.
Only for the failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe: Insert the desired
basic type "Basic type 1 - PROFIsafe" or "Basic type 2 - PROFIsafe" as a
module.
manual "Failsafe Digital Modules
SIMOCODE pro SAFETY".
4 Start the "SIMOCODE ES" software to generate the device parameters
with the "Parameters" button under "Parameters" in the object properties
of slot 4 of this S7 slave. The created parameters are incorporated in
STEP7 and are automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during
startup
(see Chapter 12.8.3 "Parameter data during startup").
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-21
12.6 Evaluating diagnostics data
The way in which the diagnostics data is read out depends in which DP
master system you have integrated SIMOCODE pro and how the integration
was carried out (see Chapter 12.5 "Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP
master systems").
12.6.1 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD
DP master with DPV1 alarm support (DPV1 alarm mode)
(e.g. all newer SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
The diagnostics data is transmitted and evaluated via diagnostic alarms in
DP master systems with DPV1 alarm support.
A precondition is that the alarms in the PROFIBUS configuration tool
(diagnostic alarms, process alarms) are enabled.
You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been carried
out and whether the alarms are enabled using the configuration tool in the
properties of the DP slave. In SIMATIC STEP7 this is carried out in HW
Config via the properties of the DP slave.
Response and process in STEP7
A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new device fault,
whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for all new process faults,
warnings and status information. If OB 82 or OB 40 are not programmed, the
CPU goes into "STOP" mode.
Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP7
The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM".
The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO"
parameter contains the alarm information described in Section "Diagnostic
alarm - configuration" and Section "Process alarm - configuration". The first
byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.
Note
The interface of the SFB 54 "RALRM" is identical to the FB "RALRM" as
defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy
Function Blocks according to IEC 61131-3" standard.
You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.
DP master without DPV1 alarm support (DPV0 alarm mode)
(e.g. all older SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
SIMOCODE pro diagnostics data can be evaluated via device-specific
diagnostics (status information) and channel-related diagnostics (as part of
extended diagnostics, see Chapter 12.4.3 "Configuration of the slave
diagnostics") in DP master systems without DPV1 alarm support.
You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been carried
out using the configuration tool in the properties of the DP slave.
Device-specific diagnostics contain detailed information about faults,
warnings and status information which are recorded by the process via
SIMOCODE pro. Information concerning hardware faults is transmitted via
channel-related diagnostics.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Response and process in STEP7:
The OB 82 in the CPU is started for every new diagnostics (device or process
fault, warning or status information). If the OB 82 is not programmed, the
CPU switches to "STOP" mode.
Reading out slave diagnostics with STEP7
It can be ascertained which DP slave has transmitted diagnostics data by
evaluating the start information of OB 82 ("OB82_MDL_ADDR" variable).
OB82_MDL_ADDR corresponds to the configured diagnostic address of the
slave in the HW Config. The diagnostics data is then read, e.g. in the cyclic
part of the user program with the SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG".
The diagnostics data which is read with the SFC 13 corresponds to the
configuration described in Chapter 12.4.3 "Configuration of the slave
diagnostics".
You will find further information about SFC 13 in the STEP7 online help.
12.6.2 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES
The diagnostics data concerning diagnostic alarms and process alarms is
transmitted and evaluated during the integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7
slave.
DP masters which are operated in "DPV1" DP mode
(e.g. all newer SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new device
fault, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for all new process
faults, warnings and status information.
If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP"
mode.
Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP7:
The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM".
The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO"
parameter contains the alarm information described in Section "Diagnostic
alarm - configuration" and Section "Process alarm - configuration". The first
byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.
You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-23
DP masters which are operated in "S7 compatible" DP mode
(e.g. all older SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new device
fault, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every new process
fault, warning or status information.
If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP"
mode.
You will find more information about device faults in the start information of
OB 82 in the "OB82_MDL_DEFECT" variable.
The start information of the OB 40 contains the "OB40_POINT_ADDR"
variable, which in turn contains the data of the process alarm that is
described in bytes 32 to 35 (see Section "Process alarm - configuration").
The reading of the complete diagnostics can then be initiated from OB 40,
while (for example) the complete diagnostics data record 92 is read, e.g. in
the cyclic user program with the SFC 59 "RD_REC".
You will find further information about SFC 59 in the STEP7 online help.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12.7 Data records
Data records contain additional information about the DP slave which can
only be read or partly written.
These data records can be accessed for reading and writing via acyclic DPV1
functions. This makes it possible, for example, to operate, monitor and
parameterize SIMOCODE pro.
You can use these functions if they are supported by the DP master. You will
find an overview of the data records provided by SIMOCODE pro in
Chapter B "Data formats and data records".
Special function blocks must be started in the user program in the PLC for
access to the DPV1 data records unlike access to cyclic I/O data.
Access to data records in STEP7
Read and write access to data records is gained by starting the system
functions SFC 59 "RD_REC" and SFC 58 "WR_REC" or via system function
blocks SFB 52 "RDREC" and SFB 53 "WRREC" for CPUs that support the
"DPV1" DP mode.
Note
The interface of the SFB 52 "RDREC" and the SFB 53 "WRREC" is identical to
the FB "RDREC" and "WRREC" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline
PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC
61131-3" standard.
You will find further information about SFB and SFC in the STEP7 online
help.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-25
12.8 Parameterization via PROFIBUS
12.8.1 SIMOCODE ES Premium
With SIMOCODE ES Premium you can parameterize all the SIMOCODE pro
devices which are connected to the same PROFIBUS DP network from a
central location. Parameter data which has been previously created with the
software can therefore be transmitted directly to SIMOCODE pro via
PROFIBUS DP.
Note
A PC with a system connection for PROFIBUS (e.g. SIMATIC NET CP 5512
or CP 5611) is required to carry out online functions via PROFIBUS DP, e.g.
transfer of SIMOCODE pro parameters.
The above-mentioned system connections for PROFIBUS are operated
together with SIMOCODE ES Premium as a class 2 master and use acyclic
DPV1 communication functions for the communication with
SIMOCODE pro.
If SIMOCODE pro is integrated as an S7 slave you can use the routing
function in connection with SIMOCODE ES Premium. A prerequisite for
using this function is that a network connection (for example via Industrial
Ethernet) can be established between the PC with SIMOCODE ES installed
and the SIMATIC controller which supports routing.
In this manner, routing can be used to reach all SIMOCODE pro devices that
are connected to the controller.
Notice
The startup parameter block (Device Parameter > Bus Parameter) must
always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwriting the
device parameters with any existing parameter data during startup.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12.8.2 SIMATIC PDM
The standard version of SIMATIC PDM (PDM Basic) provides you with a
comparable functionality to SIMOCODE ES for parameterization of
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS:
The following additional functions are available with the PDM option
"Integration in STEP7":
"Offline saving" of SIMOCODE pro parameter data in the STEP7 project and
manual transmission (no automatic transfer of parameter data during
startup!)
"Routing via S7 stations".
Example: Parameterization of all SIMOCODE pro devices from a central
engineering station, together with hardware components which provide a
data record gateway (CP443-5 Extended, IE/PB link), also in connection with
different networks.
Notice
The startup parameter block (Device Parameter > Bus Parameter) must
always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwriting the
device parameters with any existing parameter data during startup.
You will find further information about SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC PDM
manual.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 12-27
12.8.3 Parameter data during startup
Parameters are transferred to the device during every startup of
SIMOCODE pro on PROFIBUS DP.
Depending on the master module and the type of integration used, either
standard parameters or standard parameters and device-specific
parameters (SIMOCODE pro parameters) are transferred. The parameters
are saved in the PLC or in the DP master and are transferred automatically
to the DP slave during the system startup.
You can set the device-specific parameters:
With the configuration tool when the GSD (BU1 only) is loaded, e.g. with
STEP7 HW Config. This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C. The
SIMOCODE pro parameters are created by configuring the device-specific
parameters in the slave properties.
In the "SIMOCODE ES" software during the integration of SIMOCODE pro in
STEP7 HW Config as an S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro.
This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V. You can
start the "SIMOCODE ES" software for easy configuration of the
parameterization from STEP7 HW Config using the button in the "Parameter"
tab in the object properties of slot 4.
Notice
In order to be able to carry out the device parameterization during startup,
the startup parameter block ("Device Parameter > Bus Parameter") must
remain unset.
SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized with the device-specific parameters
stored in the DP master, and any existing parameters in the device are
overwritten.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12.9 Timestamping/time synchronization
See Chapter 10.10 "Timestamping".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-1
Mounting, wiring, interfaces 13
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about mounting and wiring individual
SIMOCODE pro components.
Target groups
Technicians
Electricians
Maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.1 General information about mounting and wiring
Safety guidelines
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electric shock and
burning. Ensure the system and the device are disconnected from voltage
before beginning work.
Notice
Please also observe the following SIMOCODE pro operating instructions
(enclosed with the devices):
Device Order No.
Basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Operator panel 3ZX1012-0UF72-1AA1
Operator panel adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-2BA1
Operator panel with display 3ZX3012-0UF72-2AA1
Digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
Failsafe digital module DM-F Local 3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1
Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe 3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1
Expansion modules 3ZX1012-0UF75-1BA1
Current measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current/voltage measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Door adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-1AA1
Decoupling module 3ZX1012-0UF71-5BA1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-3
Mounting lugs for screw attachment
Notice
For technical reasons, there are two different mounting lugs for the screw
attachment:
For basic units, expansion modules,
and the decoupling module: Order no. 3RP1903
For current measuring modules,
and current/voltage measuring modules.
45 mm and 55 mm width: Order no. 3RP1900-0B
Removable terminals
Notice
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain
position!
SIMOCODE pro
13-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.2 Mounting
13.2.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module
You can attach these system components as follows:
Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail, without tools
Snap-on mounting of the basic units onto current measuring modules of
45 mm and 55 mm width (up to 100 A) with integrated standard mounting rail
without tools
Screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order no: 3RP1903) and screws for
mounting on a level surface.
These mounting lugs are only suitable for basic units, expansion modules and
the decoupling module!
Fig. 13-1: Mounting of basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module
SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V
with increased installation
Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails
Screw attachment
3RP1903
5 mm
Expansion module,
5 mm
3RP1903
Snap-on mounting onto a current measuring module
e.g. a 45 mm wide current measuring module with BU1
BU1 BU2
decoupling module
SIMOCODE pro V
DM-F,
DM-DO
depth
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-5
13.2.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY",
Chapter 5 "Mounting and connection".
SIMOCODE pro
13-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.2.3 Current measuring modules
Current measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or
screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RP1900-0B) and screws
for mounting on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for
current measuring modules (and current/voltage measuring modules)! For
current measuring modules up to 25 A you will require an additional 25 mm
spacer.
Current measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail or screw
attachment
Current measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.
Fig. 13-2: Mounting the current measuring modules
3RP1900-0B
3UF7100-1AA00-0
3UF7101-1AA00-0
25 mm spacer
3RP1900-0B
Snap-on mounting
3UF7102-1AA00-0
Screw attachment
45 mm width
55 mm width
3UF7103-1AA00-0 3UF7103-1BA00-0 3UF7104-1BA00-0
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 A
screw attachment
Snap-on mounting or
Screw attachment
Snap-on mounting or
screw attachment
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-7
13.2.4 Current/voltage measuring modules
Current/voltage measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail
mounting or screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RP1900-0B)
and screws for mounting on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only
suitable for current/voltage measuring modules (and current measuring
modules)! For current/voltage measuring modules up to 25 A you will require
an additional 25 mm spacer.
Current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail or
screw attachment.
Current/voltage measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.
Fig. 13-3: Mounting the current/voltage measuring modules
3UF7110-1AA00-0
3UF7111-1AA00-0
25 mm spacer
3RP1900-0B
Snap-on mounting
3UF7112-1AA00-0
Screw attachment
45 mm width
55 mm width
3UF7113-1AA00-0 3UF7113-1BA00-0 3UF7114-1BA00-0
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 A
screw attachment
Snap-on mounting or
screw attachment
Snap-on mounting or
screw attachment
3RP1900-0B
SIMOCODE pro
13-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.2.5 Operator panel and operator panel with display
Operator panels are designed to be installed e.g. in the front panels of
motor control centers or in switchgear cabinet doors.
Install as follows:
Table 13-1: Sequence for installing the operator panel/operator panel with display
Fig. 13-4: Mounting the operator panel
Step Description
1 Make a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or switchgear cabinet door. Dimensions
(see Fig. 13-4 and 13-5).
2 Position the operator panel or the operator panel with display in the cutout.
3 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel
4 Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four mounting bracket
screws.
Front panel
switchgear
etc.
4 x 0.15 + 0.05 Nm
90
+0.5
3
0
+
0
.
5
Cutout
Operator panel Mounting bracket
cabinet door
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-9
Fig. 13-5: Mounting the operator panel with display
Warning
To ensure IP54 tightness and the correct functionality of the operator panel,
the tightening torque of the screws provided must not be set too high when
mounting and the seal provided must be applied.
Note
Only a connecting cable is required for connecting the operator panel with
display to SIMOCODE pro (see Chapter 1.6 "Overview of system
components"). Additional wiring for the power supply or ground is not
required.
91.5
+0.5
5
4
.
5
+
0
.
5
Cutout
Front panel
switchgear cabinet door
etc.
Operator panel with display
4 x 0.15 + 0.05 Nm
Mounting bracket
SIMOCODE pro
13-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.2.6 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel
To exchange a 3UF52 operator panel for the smaller 3UF720 operator panel,
proceed as follows:
Table 13-2: Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel
Fig. 13-6: Mounting the operator panel adapter (1)
Step Description
1 Unscrew the four mounting bracket screws and remove the 3UF52 operator
panel from the front panel or switchgear cabinet door.
2 Ensure that the dimensions of the cutout in the front panel or switchgear
cabinet door measure 91.5
+0.5
mm (width) and 54.5
+0.5
mm (height)
(see Fig. 13-6)
3 Slide the seal provided onto the operator panel adapter (see Fig. 13-6).
4 Position the operator panel adapter in the cutout.
5 Position the operator panel in the adapter.
6 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel
7 Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four mounting bracket
screws (see Fig. 13-7 and safety guidelines!).
4x
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-11
Fig. 13-7: Mounting the operator panel adapter (2)
Warning
To ensure IP54 tightness and the correct functionality of the operator panel,
the tightening torque of the screws provided must not be set too high when
mounting and the seal provided must be applied.
Notice
A SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 system operator panel can not be used with
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5, and vice versa.
IP54
SIMOCODE pro
13-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.3 Wiring
13.3.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module
Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module have removable
terminals. You do not have to detach the wiring to exchange these devices!
Fig. 13-8: Removable terminals on basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module
Notice
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain
position!
Cables
The cable cross sections are the same for all devices. The following table
shows cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the
cables for the removable terminals:
Table 13-3: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables
Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 LB.IN - 10.3 LB.IN
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
Strip lengths Cable cross section
2 x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/
1 x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
2 x 0.5 mm
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/
1 x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14
Removable terminals
Basic units Expansion modules/
A
D
C
A, C, D: Coding
A
C
D
decoupling module
PZ2/
5 mm - 6 mm
10
Solid
10 Finely stranded
with/without
end sleeve
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-13
Supplying the inputs of the basic unit
There are three possibilities for supplying the inputs:
a): 24 V DC internal
b): 24 V DC external However, input 3 is the reference potential, i.e.
three inputs are available.
c): 24 V DC external Only possible for basic units with a supply voltage of
24 V DC!
Fig. 13-9: 24 V DC for supplying the inputs
All inputs work reactionless, i.e. the signal statuses on neighboring inputs
do not influence each other.
Basic unit (BU)
BU Inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
24 V DC internal, 4 inputs usable
Basic unit (BU)
BU Inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
24 V DC external, 3 inputs usable
Basic unit (BU)
BU Inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
24 V DC external, 4 inputs usable
A1
A2
a) b) c)
Only possible for the basic unit with 24 V DC
supply voltage!
24 V DC
(not usable)
SIMOCODE pro
13-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Basic unit pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Table 13-4: Pin assignment for the removable terminals of the basic unit
Sequence for wiring the removable terminals for basic units
Proceed as follows:
Table 13-5: Wiring the removable terminals of the basic unit
Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
1 Ground for relay outputs 1 and 2
2 Relay output OUT1
3 Relay output OUT2
4 Digital input IN3
5 Digital input IN4
T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
6 Relay output OUT3
7 Relay output OUT3
8 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4
9 Digital input IN1
10 Digital input IN2
T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
Lower terminals
A1 Pin 1 supply voltage
A2 Pin 2 supply voltage
A PROFIBUS DP pin A
B PROFIBUS DP pin B
SPE/PE System shielding
Step Description
1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2 If you wish to use the A/B terminals for PROFIBUS DP, connect the
PROFIBUS DP cable-shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.
Notice
The A/B terminals are an alternative to the 9-pole SUB-D connection! Baud
rates of up to 1.5 MBit/s are possible!
3 Connect the system shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.
1 OUT1 2 .2 3 4 IN3 IN4 5 T2
OUT3 7 8 9 IN1 IN210 T1 6
DEVICE
BUS
GEN. FAULT
TEST/
RESET
P
R
O
F
I
B
U
S

D
P
A1 A2 A B SPE/PE
24V
SIMOCODE PRO
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-15
Basic unit connection example
Fig. 13-10: Basic unit connection example
Supplying the inputs of the digital module
Digital module with 24 V DC input supply
Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply
Fig. 13-11: Supplying the inputs of the digital module
Device
Bus
Gen. Fault
9 10 4 5 8
1
2
3
6
7
PROFIBUS DP
SPE/PE A B
a)
b)
T1 T2
A1 A2
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 24 V
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
Max. 1.5 MBd
24 V DC external 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC external
Digital module (DM)
DM Inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
N/M
Digital module (DM)
DM Inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
N/M
~
SIMOCODE pro
13-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Digital module pin assignment
Table 13-6: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module
Upper terminals
20 Ground for relay outputs 1 and 2
21 Relay output OUT1
22 Relay output OUT2
25 N/M for IN1 to IN4
Lower terminals
PE System shielding
20 21 22 OUT1 .2
23 24 25 IN2
READY
26 27 PE IN3 IN4
IN1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-17
Digital module connection example
Fig. 13-12: Digital module connection example
Ready
23 24 26 27
20
21
22
PE
25
+
~
AC
DC
N/M IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
OUT1
OUT2
SIMOCODE pro
13-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Earth-fault module pin assignment
Table 13-7: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the earth fault module
Upper terminals
40 Input C1 summation current
transformer
43 Input C2 summation current
transformer
Lower terminals
PE System shielding
40
READY
C1
43 C2
EM
3UF7 5001AA000
G/YYMMDD
*
Exx
*
PE
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-19
Earth-fault module connection example
Fig. 13-13: Earth-fault module connection example
*) Cable shielding recommended
Ready
C1
PE
3UL22
Z1
C2
40 43
L1
L2
L3
N
Z2
*)
SIMOCODE pro
13-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Temperature module pin assignment
Table 13-8: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the temperature module
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors.
2-wire temperature sensors:
Bridge the T2 terminals with the T3 terminals.
3-wire temperature sensors.
Assign terminals 56 and 57 doubly when three sensors are used.
Upper terminals
50 Input T3, temperature sensor 1
Lower terminals
56 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
57 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
PE System shielding
READY
TM
3UF7 7001AA000
G/YYMMDD
*
Exx
*
50 1T3 51 2T3 52 3T3
53 1T2 54 2T2 55 3T2
56 T1 57 PE
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-21
Temperature module connection example
Fig. 13-14: Temperature module connection example
NTC type: B 57227-K333-A1
J
R Q 63022-K7182-S1
Ready
T1
PE
1T2
56 57
1T3
1)
3 x max.
53
1T2
T1
50
1T3
54
2T2
51
2T3
55
3T2
52
3T3
2)
3 x max.
T1
T1 2T2 2T3
T1 3T2 3T3
T1 1T2 1T3
T1 2T2 2T3
T1 3T2 3T3
*) *) *) Cable shielding recommended
NTC temperature sensor:
SIMOCODE pro
13-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Analog module pin assignment
Table 13-9: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the analog module
Upper terminals
30 Analog input IN1+
Lower terminals
36 Analog output OUT+
37 Analog output OUT+
PE System shielding
READY
AM
3UF7 4001AA000
G/YYMMDD
*
Exx
*
33 IN1- 34IN2-
36 +OUT- PE 37
30 IN1+ 31IN2+
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-23
Analog module connection example
Fig. 13-15: Analog module connection example
Ready
PE
36 37
30
IN1+
33
IN1-
31
IN2+
34
IN2-
L+
+
-
IN1+ IN1-
R
L
R
L
< 500 Ohm
+
-
I
IN
(0/4 mA - 20 mA)
OUT+ OUT-
I
OUT
(0/4 A - 20 mA)
IN2+ IN2-
2 x max.
*)
M
*)
*) Cable shielding recommended for up to 30 m
Cable shielding necessary for over 30 m
(potential-free current source, e.g. isolation amplifier)
and for outside of the switchgear cabinet.
SIMOCODE pro
13-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Decoupling module pin assignment
Table 13-10: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the decoupling module
Decoupling module connection example
Fig. 13-16: Decoupling module connection example
Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion modules and the decoupling
module
Connect the system shielding to the PE terminal.
Upper terminals
-
Lower terminals
PE System shielding
READY
DCM
3UF7 1501AA000
G/YYMMDD
*
Exx
*
PE
Ready
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-25
13.3.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
Wiring:
Warning
Loss of safety function possible.
For the 24 V DC power supply, always use a power supply according to IEC
60536 protection class III (SELV or PELV).
Note
Surge suppressors are required for inductive loads.
SIMOCODE pro
13-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Digital module DM-F Local pin assignment
Table 13-11: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module DM-F Local, 24 V DC
and 110-240 V UC version.
Upper terminals
60, 66 Digital module, relay outputs 1 (60)
and 2 (66)
61, 67 Relay enabling circuit 1, NO contact
Y12, Y22 Sensor input channel 1, channel 2
T1, T2 Supply for sensor inputs
(24 V DC, pulsed)
Y33 Start button (start after rising and
falling edge)
Y34 Feedback circuit
Lower terminals
A1(+) Voltage supply connection 110 to
240 V AC/DC or +24 V DC
A2(-) N or -24 V
M Ground (reference potential sensor
inputs, only 3UF7320-1AU00-0)
1 Cascade input
T3 Supplying the sensor inputs (24 V
DC, static)
PE Protective earth
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-27
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe pin assignment
Table 13-12: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module DM-F PROFIsafe,
24 V DC version and 110-240 V UC version
Upper terminals
80, 86 Digital module, relay outputs 1 (80)
and 2 (86)
83 (IN1)
85 (IN2)
89 (IN3)
Digital module inputs 1,2,3
84 Digital module supply
Inputs 1 to 3 24 V DC
90 (T) Feedback circuit supply (FBC)
24 V DC
91 (FBC) Feedback circuit
Lower terminals
A1(+) Voltage supply connection 110 to
240 V AC/DC or +24 V DC
A2(-) N or -24 V
M Ground (reference potential inputs,
only 3UF7320-1AU00-0)
PE Protective earth
SIMOCODE pro
13-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Digital module DM-F Local connection example
DM-F Local with cross circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels,
monitored start.
Warning
The protection stipulated must be observed!
This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.
Fig. 13-17: Connection example "DM-F Local with cross circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels,
monitored start"
Further connection examples:
-Q4
-Q1
START
Y22 T2 Y34 Y12 T1 Y33 T3 1 M
A1 A2
61 62
60 66 67 68
Q4 Q2 Q1
Safety logic
READY
DEVICE
OUT
IN
GF
CH1
CH2
+/L -/N
OUT1
OUT2
Digital module output
Q3
DIAZED 4 A, gLgG
PE
O
N
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-29
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe connection examples
Warning
The protection stipulated must be observed!
This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.
Fig. 13-18: Block diagram DM-F PROFIsafe
Connection examples:
-Q1
-Q4
83 85 89 91 90 M
PE A1 A2 80 86 87 88
Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2
+/L -/N
81 82
Safety logic
Digital module output
READY
DEVICE
OUT
GF
CH1
CH2
OUT1
OUT2
84
(24 V=) (FBC) (T) (IN3) (IN2) (IN1)
DIAZED 4 A, gLgG
SIMOCODE pro
13-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.3.3 Current measuring modules
Select a suitable current measuring module for measuring current,
depending on the motor current size:
Through-hole technology up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are
passed through the through-hole openings.
Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to
Siemens contactors.
The following table shows the various current measuring modules:
Notice
When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main
circuit, ensure correct assignment of the phases on the current measuring
module and correct routing direction!
Observe the information in the operating instructions!
Current measuring module Main circuit connection
3UF7100-1AA00-0
0.3 A - 3 A
through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
Through-hole
technology
3UF7101-1AA00-0
2.4 A - 25 A
through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7102-1AA00-0
10 A - 100 A
through-hole
openings: 14 mm
3UF7103-1AA00-0
20 A - 200 A
through-hole
openings: 25 mm
3UF7103-1BA00-0
20 A - 200 A
Conductor cross
section:
16 mm - 95 mm,
AWG 5 to 3/0
Bus connection
system
3UF7104-1BA00-0
63 A - 630 A
Conductor cross
section:
50 mm - 240 mm,
AWG 1/0 kcmil to
500 kcmil
Table 13-13: Current measuring modules
L1
L2
L3
N
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
M
~ 3
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-31
13.3.4 Current/voltage measuring modules
Select a suitable current/voltage measuring module for measuring current
and voltage, depending on the motor current size:
Through-hole technology up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are
passed through the through-hole openings.
Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to
Siemens contactors.
The following table shows the various current/voltage measuring modules:
Current/voltage measuring
modules
Main circuit
connection
3UF7110-1AA00-0
0.3 A - 3 A
through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
Through-hole
technology
3UF7111-1AA00-0
2.4 A - 25 A
through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7112-1AA00-0
10 A - 100 A
through-hole
openings: 14 mm
3UF7113-1AA00-0
20 A - 200 A
through-hole
openings: 25 mm
3UF7113-1BA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Conductor cross
section:
16 mm - 95 mm,
AWG 6 to 3/0
Bus connection
system
3UF7114-1BA00-0
63 A - 630 A
Conductor cross
section:
50 mm - 240 mm,
AWG 1/0 kcmil to
500 kcmil
Table 13-14: Current/voltage measuring modules
L1
L2
L3
N
M
~ 3
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
L1 L2 L3
SIMOCODE pro
13-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Safety guidelines
Note
Measuring voltage or power values:
For current/voltage measuring modules, connect the main circuit L1, L2, L3
with the connection terminals (L1, L2, L3) of the removable terminals via a
3-core cable. The supply cables may require additional cable protection, for
example, via short-circuit proof cable or fuses.
Notice
When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main
circuit, ensure correct assignment of the phases on the current/voltage
measuring modules and correct routing direction! Observe the information
in the operating instructions!
Removable terminals
The following table shows cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening
torques of the cables for the removable terminals:
Table 13-15: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables
The following is a representation of the pin assignment of the removable
terminals:
Fig. 13-19: Pin assignment of the terminals of the current/voltage measuring modules
Caution
The L1 and L3 phases are interchanged on the upper/lower terminals!
Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 LB.IN - 10.3 LB.IN
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
Strip lengths Cable cross section
2 x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/
1 x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14/1x AWG 20 to 12
2 x 0.5 mm
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/
1 x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14
PZ2/ 5 mm -
6 mm
10
Solid
10 Finely stranded
with/without
end sleeve
L1, L2, L3:
Terminals for connecting the 3-wire
cable of the main circuit
Bottom Upper
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-33
13.3.5 Measuring current with an external current transformer (interposing
transformer)
Description
SIMOCODE pro can be operated with external current transformers. The
secondary cables of the current transformer are looped through the three
through-hole openings of the current measuring module, and short-
circuited. The secondary current of the external current transformer is the
primary current of the SIMOCODE pro current measuring module.
Notice
If the main circuit is using rated current, the secondary current of the
current transformer must be within the setting range of the current
measuring module used!
Fig. 13-20: Measuring current with an external 3UF18 current transformer
Transformation ratio
The transformation ratio is calculated using the following formula:
Transformation ratio =
In the following examples, the displayed actual current flowing does not
need to be converted, even when an interposing transformer is used, since
SIMOCODE pro only outputs the proportional value, based upon the
parameterized set current I
s
.
M
3~
L1L2L3
K1
K2
K3
L
Main circuit
Current measuring
module 3UF 71
3UF18 current transformer
Basic unit
3UF 70
Secondary circuit
Primary current (external current transformer)
Secondary current x number of loops n
(ext. current transformer) (current measuring module)
SIMOCODE pro
13-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data of the current transformer
Secondary current: 1 A
Frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz
Transformer rating: Recommended > 2.5 VA, according to the secondary
current and cable length
Overcurrent factor: 5P10 or 10P10
Accuracy class: 1
Example 1:
3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
Primary current: 820 A at nominal load
Secondary current: 1 A
SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,
Set current 0.3 to 3 A
This means:
The secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A at the rated load
and is, therefore, within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current
measuring module used
The set current I
s
to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 1 A.
Fig. 13-21: Example (1 of 2) for current measuring with an 3UF18 external current transformer
M
3~
L1 L2 L3
K1
K2
K3
L
Main circuit
Current measuring
module 3UF 71
Basic unit
3UF 70
Secondary circuit
Primary current at
nominal load: 820 A
Secondary current: 1 A Set current I
s
: 1 A
Adjustment range:
0.3 A - 3 A
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-35
Example 2:
3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
Primary current: 205 A at nominal load
Secondary current: 0.25 A
SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,
Set current 0.3 to 3 A
This means:
The secondary current of the current transformer is 0.25 A at the rated
load and is, therefore, not within the 0.3 A to 3 A setting range of the
current measuring module used.
The secondary current must be boosted by multiple looping of the
secondary cables through the through-hole openings of the current
measuring module. Double-looping results in 2 x 0.25 A = 0.5 A.
The set current I
s
to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 0.5 A.
Fig. 13-22: Example (2 of 2) for measuring current with an 3UF18 external current transformer
Note
When using basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from version *E03* onwards,
the set current does not have to be converted. It will correspond to the
rated current flowing on the main current side.
Additional entry of the transformation ratio of the current transformer
(interposing transformer) will result in automatic conversion in the device.
M
3~
L1 L2 L3
K1
K2
K3
L
Main circuit
Basic unit
3UF 70
Secondary circuit
Primary current at
nominal load: 205 A
Secondary current: 2 x 0.25 A Set current I
s
: 0.5 A
Current measuring
module 3UF 71
Adjustment range:
0.3 A - 3 A
Double-looping through of the secondary cables
SIMOCODE pro
13-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.4 System interfaces
13.4.1 General
Please observe the following:
SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the
system interfaces.
Connecting cables of different lengths are available for connecting the system
components.
The system is always configured according to the basic unit. Basic units have
two system interfaces:
Bottom: For outgoing connecting cables that, in the case of BU1, always
lead to the current measuring module.
Front: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module
or operator panel, or for PC cables, memory modules or addressing
plugs.
Current measuring modules have one system interface:
Bottom or front: Incoming connecting cable from the basic unit.
Expansion modules have 2 interfaces on the front.
Left: For incoming connecting cables from the upstream expansion
module or basic unit BU2.
Right: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module
or operator panel, and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing
plugs.
Decoupling modules have 2 interfaces on the front:
Left: For incoming connecting cables from the upstream expansion
module or basic unit BU2.
Right: Exclusively for the outgoing connecting cable to the current/
voltage measuring module.
Operator panels have two system interfaces:
Front: For PC cables, memory modules and addressing plugs.
Rear side: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream expansion
module or basic unit.
System interfaces not in use are closed with the cover.
Warning
Applies to system interfaces on operator panels and on door adapters (IP54
degree of protection):
When using for the first time, press the cover firmly against its stop in the
socket!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-37
Fig. 13-23: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the door adapter
Fig. 13-24: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the operator panel
Fig. 13-25: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the operator panel
with display
0
0
SIMOCODE pro
13-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Example
The following figure shows an example of a SIMOCODE pro V installation:
Fig. 13-26: Example of system interfaces
U
F
-
0
1
1
3
0
SIMOCODE pro V
Basic unit (BU2)
Current measuring
module (IM)
Operator panel (OP)
Expansion modules
Expansion modules (DM, AM, EM, TM)
Incoming, from
Expansion module
Basic unit BU2
Outgoing, to
Expansion module
Operator panel
Incoming, from
Basic unit
U
F
-
0
1
1
3
0
Operator panel (OP)
Incoming, from
Upstream expansion module
Basic unit
Cover
Basic units (BU)
Outgoing, to
Current measuring module
Outgoing, to
Expansion module
Operator panel
Decoupling module
Digital module DM-F Local,
DM-F PROFIsafe
Outgoing, to
Expansion module
Operator panel
Incoming, from
Expansion module
Basic unit BU2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-39
13.4.2 System interfaces on basic units, expansion modules, decoupling module,
current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules
The system interfaces are located on the front and bottom of the basic
units. Other system components can be connected here:
Via a connecting cable, e.g. digital modules, current measuring modules
By plugging them in directly, e.g. addressing plugs and memory modules.
System interfaces not in use can be closed using the system interface
cover.
Notice
Only connect system interfaces when disconnected from voltage!
Fig. 13-27: Connecting system components to the system interface
Memory module,
Connecting cable
Expansion modules/ Basic units
Current measuring modules
2 system
interfaces
System
interface
Connecting cable
System
interfaces
addressing plug,
System interface cover
System
interface
Connecting cable
Removable terminals
Removable terminals
Decoupling module
SIMOCODE pro
13-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface
Proceed as follows:
Table 13-16: Connecting to the system interface
Fig. 13-28: Procedure for connecting to the system interfaces
Safety guidelines
Notice
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be
used for the current measuring module!
Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure
that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into
place.
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be
used for the current measuring module!
2 Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use
Connecting
cable
Cover
System interfaces on the
1
2
3
front side and bottom
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
Catches
Catches
Color coding
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-41
Notice
Only a current/voltage measuring module may be connected to the system
interface on the right of the decoupling module. Memory modules,
addressing plugs or PC cables will not be recognized there.
Notice
Observe the color coding for the connecting cable (see diagram)!
13.4.3 System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
SIMOCODE pro
13-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.4.4 System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with
display
The operator panel has two system interfaces:
Rear side system interface. This is not normally accessible on an integrated
operator panel. The incoming cable from the basic unit or expansion module
is always connected here.
Front system interface. This is normally accessible on an integrated operator
panel. Components are only connected directly when needed, and removed
again after use.
These can be:
Memory module
Addressing plug
PC cable for connecting a PC/programming device
Cover (if the system interface is not in use).
Fig. 13-29: System interfaces on the operator panel
Fig. 13-30: System interfaces on the operator panel with display
Front system interface
e.g. memory module
Rear system interface
Connecting cable
Rear system interface Front system interface
e.g. memory module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-43
Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel and the
operator panel with display
Proceed as follows:
Table 13-17: Connecting system components to the system interface
Notice
In order to ensure IP54 degree of protection, press the cover firmly against
its stop in the socket when using for the first time (see figure!).
When mounting the operator panel using the screws provided, ensure the
tightening torque is not set too high.
Note
Throughout connection, you can place the cover on one of the two "park
positions" (see Figure 13-31).
Notice
Observe the color coding for the connecting cable (see diagram)!
Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure
that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into
place.
The incoming connecting cable is connected to the rear side.
2 Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use
SIMOCODE pro
13-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Fig. 13-31: Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel
Connecting cable
2
1
1
Catches
Catches
Color coding
Cover
Park pos.
Front
Rear
0
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-45
Fig. 13-32: Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel with
display
Front
Rear
Cover
Park position
SIMOCODE pro
13-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.5 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket
The PROFIBUS DP can only be connected to the basic unit.
Notice
The 9-pole SUB-D connection is an alternative to the A/B terminals!
Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the basic unit
Proceed as follows:
Table 13-18: Wiring the removable terminals of the digital module
Fig. 13-33: Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-pole SUB-D socket
Step Description
1 Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the
PROFIBUS DP interface.
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
PROFIBUS DP cable
PROFIBUS DP interface
9-pole
SUB-D plug
9-pole SUB-D socket
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 13-47
13.6 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP
Specifications
The key data contained in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and
cables.
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines
For electrical PROFIBUS networks, please also adhere to the
PROFIBUS DP/FMS installation guidelines of the PROFIBUS User
Organization. They contain important information about the cable routing
and commissioning of
PROFIBUS networks.
Publisher:
PROFIBUS User Organization
Haid-und-Neu-Strasse 7
76131 Karlsruhe, Germany
Tel.: +49 721 96 58 590
Fax: +49 721 96 58 589
Internet: http://www.profibus.com
Guidelines, Order No. 2.111
See also the "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks" manual at
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1971286.
Application of bus termination modules
The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily intended for use in
MCC motor feeders. It provides correct bus termination, even for removed
MCC plug-in units. The bus termination module can also be utilized when a
standard SUB-D plug cannot be used for the last device on a bus line.
The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module may also be connected to 220/
230 V, 380/400 V, 115/120 V or 24 V AC. The 3UF1900-1KB00 version can be
used for 24 V DC.
Fig. 13-34: Bus termination module
SIMOCODE pro
13-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 14-1
Commissioning and service 14
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about how SIMOCODE pro is
commissioned, how components are replaced and how statistics are read.
Target groups
Commissioners
Technicians
Necessary knowledge
General basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro, e.g. from Chapter 1
SIMOCODE ES software.
Commissioning and service
SIMOCODE pro
14-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14.1 General information about commissioning and service
Safety guidelines
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electric shock and burning. Ensure
the system and the device are disconnected from voltage before beginning
work.
Notice
Please also observe the following SIMOCODE pro operating instructions
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and
servicing:
SIMOCODE pro is already mounted and wired
The motor is switched off.
Device Order No.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 14-3
Notes on parameterizing
You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:
With the memory module in which the parameters have already been saved
from a basic unit. The memory module is plugged into the system interface.
If the memory module is connected to the system interface and the supply
voltage returns to the basic unit, the basic unit will be automatically
parameterized by the memory module. The parameters can also be loaded
into the basic unit from the memory module by briefly pressing the Test/
Reset button.
With the SIMOCODE ES software via the serial interface:
The PC/programming device is connected to the system interface with the
PC cable.
With an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via
PROFIBUS DP. For this, the PROFIBUS DP cable should be connected to the
PROFIBUS DP interface of the basic unit.
Commissioning options
There are two commissioning options:
1. Normal case: SIMOCODE pro has not yet been parameterized and still has
the factory settings:
When connected to PROFIBUS DP, the "Bus" LED flashes green when a DP
master is connected.
2. SIMOCODE pro has already been parameterized:
The parameters have already been loaded into the basic unit.
The parameters from a previous application still exist. Check whether
the parameters (e.g. the set current) apply to the new application.
Change these accordingly, if necessary.
SIMOCODE pro
14-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14.2 Commissioning
14.2.1 Sequence
Please observe the information in the previous Chapter "General information
about commissioning and service" on Page 14-2.
To commission SIMOCODE pro, proceed as follows:
Table 14-1: Commissioning the basic unit
Fig. 14-1: Connecting a PC to the basic unit
Step Description
1 Switch on the supply voltage. In a fault-free state, the following LEDS should
light up or flash green:
"Device" (lights up)
"Bus" if PROFIBUS DP is connected (lights up or flashes).
Continue with step 2.
Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display.
You will find further information in Chapter 14.2.3 "Diagnostics via LED display
on the basic unit and on the operator panel". Try to rectify the fault.
2 If you wish to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP, set the
PROFIBUS DP address. You will find further information about this in Chapter
"Setting the PROFIBUS DP address" on Page 14-5.
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the existing parameterization e.g. with
a PC via SIMOCODE ES software.
For this, connect the PC/programming device to the system interface with the
PC cable (see the figure below).
Notice
For basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C), only use the front system interface!
PC cable,
Order No. 3UF7940-0AA00-0
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 14-5
14.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Note
This setting cannot be carried out if the Test/Reset button has been blocked.
Proceed as follows:
Table 14-2: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Proceed as follows:
Table 14-3: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIsafe address on DM-F PROFIsafe
Step Description
1 Set desired valid address on the DIP switch.
The switches are numbered.
For example address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.
2 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights
up yellow.
3 Briefly press the Test/Reset button. The set address is accepted. The
"Device" LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
4 Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.
Step Description
3 Open the menu Switchgear > Open Online.
4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Confirm with OK.
5 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Bus Parameters.
6 Select the DP address.
7 Save the data in the basic unit with
Target System > Load to Switchgear. The address is set.
SIMOCODE pro
14-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14.2.3 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel
The basic units and the operating panel have three LEDs for displaying
specific device states:
Table 14-4: Diagnostics via LED display
LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for
faults
Device Device
status
Green Device is ready for
operation
Green
flickering
Internal fault Send back the basic unit
Yellow Memory module or
addressing plug
recognized, Test/Reset
buttons control the
memory module or
addressing plug
Yellow
flashing
Memory module/
addressing plug read in;
factory settings
configured (duration: 3s)
Yellow
flickering
Memory module
programmed (duration:
3s)
Red Parameterization
incorrect (also Gen.
Fault on)
Parameterize again and
switch the control
voltage off and on again
Basic unit defective
(also Gen. Fault on)
Replace basic unit!
Red
flashing
Memory module,
addressing plug,
expansion modules
defective (also Gen.
Fault on - flashing)
Reprogram/replace the
memory module,
replace the expansion
modules
Off Supply voltage too low Check whether the
supply voltage is
connected/switched on
Bus Bus
status
Off Bus not connected or
bus fault
Connect the bus or
check bus parameters
Green
flashing
Baud rate recognized/
communication with
PC/programming device
Green Communication with

PLC/PCS
Gen.
Fault
Fault
status
Red Fault pending; reset has
been saved
Rectify fault, e.g.
overload
Red
flashing
Fault pending; reset has
not been saved
Rectify fault, e.g.
overload
Off No fault
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 14-7
14.2.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the digital modules DM-F Local or
DM-F PROFIsafe
See Chapter D.5.2 "Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
digital modules" or system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro
SAFETY"
SIMOCODE pro
14-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14.3 Service
14.3.1 Preventive maintenance
Preventive maintenance is an important step towards avoiding faults and
unforeseen costs. Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance
so that e.g. production losses due to plant downtimes are avoided.
Preventive maintenance ensures that all components are always kept in
perfect working order.
Reading out statistical data
SIMOCODE pro provides statistical data that can be read out, for example
with
SIMOCODE ES under Target System > Service Data/Statistical Data. For
example, via "Motor Operating Hours" and "Number of Starts", you can
decide whether motor and/or motor contactors should be replaced.
Fig. 14-2: Reading out statistical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 14-9
14.3.2 Securing and saving parameters
Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a SIMOCODE ES
file. This particularly applies if you replace a basic unit, or if you wish to
transfer data from one basic unit to another.
Saving parameters from the basic unit into the memory module
Note
This function will not be available if the Test/Reset button has been blocked.
Proceed as follows:
Table 14-5: Saving the parameters into the memory module
Saving parameters from the basic unit into a SIMOCODE ES file
Note
Proceed as follows:
Table 14-6: Saving parameters into a SIMOCODE ES file
Step Description
1 Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up
yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "TEST/RESET"
button for approx. 3 seconds. The parameters will be saved in the memory
module. After successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for
approx. 3 seconds.
2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Step Description
3 Open the menu Target System > Load into PC. The parameters are loaded
into the main memory from the basic unit.
4 Click on the menu Switchgear > Save copy as .... The parameters are saved
from the main memory into a SIMOCODE ES file.
SIMOCODE pro
14-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit
Note
Proceed as follows:
Table 14-7: Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit
Notice
If the memory module is plugged in, the parameters will be transferred from
the memory module to the basic unit when the supply voltage is switched
on.
Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the basic unit
Proceed as follows:
Table 14-8: Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit
Step Description
1 Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up
yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, briefly press the "TEST/
RESET" button. The parameters will be transferred to the basic unit. After
successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx.
3 seconds.
2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Step Description
3 Click on the menu Switchgear > Open. The parameters from the
SIMOCODE ES file will be transferred to the main memory.
4 Click on the menu Target system > Load into switchgear. The parameters
will be saved into the basic unit from the main memory.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 14-11
14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components
Safety guidelines
Warning
The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit
must be switched off before replacing current measuring modules and
current/voltage measuring modules.
Notice
Please observe the information contained in the operating instructions!
Notice
It is not necessary to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to
replace the components!
Replacing a basic unit
Proceed as follows:
Table 14-9: Replacing a basic unit
Step Description
1 Save the parameters. See Chapter "Securing and saving parameters" on Page
14-9.
2 Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic
unit.
3 If necessary, pull the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable out of the
system interface.
4 Remove the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
5 Demount the basic unit.
6 Remove the removable terminals of the new basic unit.
7 Mount the new basic unit.
8 Plug in the wired removable terminals.
9 Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.
10 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
11 Save the parameters into the basic unit. See Chapter "Securing and saving
parameters" on Page 14-9.
12 Switch on the main power for the feeder.
SIMOCODE pro
14-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module
Proceed as follows:
Table 14-10: Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module
Replacing a DM-F
Proceed as follows:
Table 14-11: Replacing a DM-F
Step Description
unit.
system interface.
4 Demount the expansion module or the decoupling module.
5 Remove the removable terminals of the new expansion or decoupling module.
6 Mount the new expansion module or decoupling module.
Step Description
1 First, switch off the main power for the feeder and then the supply voltage for
the basic unit and the DM-F.
system interface.
4 Demount the DM-F.
5 Remove the removable terminals of the new DM-F.
6 Mount the new DM-F.
9 Only DM-F PROFIsafe:
Set the DIP switch setting for the PROFIsafe address according to the
configuration in the F-controller (see "Configuring the DM-F PROFIsafe and
integrating it into the failsafe automation system" in the system manual
"Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY").
10 Switch on the supply voltage for the DM-F and the basic unit.
11 Only DM-F Local:
Configure the DM-F Local correctly (see chapter "Configuring the DM-F Local"
in the system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY")
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 14-13
Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module
Proceed as follows:
Table 14-12: Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module
Fig. 14-3: Replacing current/voltage measuring modules
Step Description
unit.
2 Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.
3 Pull out the removable terminal from the module as illustrated below
(Current/voltage measuring modules only).
4 Disconnect the three cables of the three phases of the main circuit.
5 Replace the module (see Chapter 13.2.3 "Current measuring modules" and
Chapter 13.2.4 "Current/voltage measuring modules").
6 Connect the three cables of the main circuit, leading them through the
through-hole openings.
7 Plug the removable terminals onto the module (current/voltage measuring
modules only).
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
SIMOCODE pro
14-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14.3.4 Resetting the factory settings
With the factory settings, all parameters are reset to the factory values.
Resetting the factory settings with the Test/Reset button on the basic unit
Proceed as follows (also deletes any previous password setting!):
Table 14-13: Resetting factory settings with the Test/Reset button on the basic unit
Notice
If any one of the steps is not carried out correctly, the basic unit will revert
to normal operation.
Notice
This function is always active, independent of the "Test/Reset - Button
blocked" parameter.
Resetting the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software
Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC/programming device
via PROFIBUS DP or via the system interface and SIMOCODE ES is started.
Proceed as follows (resets to factory settings, excluding the password):
Table 14-14: Resetting the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software
Step Description
1 Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.
2 Press the Test/Reset button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.
3 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The Device LED lights up
yellow.
4 Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.
5 Press the Test/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.
6 Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.
7 Press the Test/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.
9 Factory settings are reset.
Step Description
1 Click on the menu Switchgear > Open Online.
2 In the menu, select Target System > Command > Factory Settings.
3 Confirm with "Yes".
4 Factory settings are reset.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 14-15
14.4 Error buffer/reading out error protocol
Timestamping in the error buffer is based on the operating hours
(resolution: 1 s) of SIMOCODE pro.
The "Error/Fault" and "Power - On" events are logged. Each of these events is
given a timestamp.
Error/Fault:
The last 21 errors are stored in a ring buffer, whereby the incoming error
(rising edge) is always logged. An outgoing error (falling edge) will not be
logged.
Power - On:
If the most recent entry is "Power - On", this is not logged multiple times.
Instead, the error number is used as a power on counter. Thus, the error
buffer cannot be deleted by frequent on/off operations.
Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.
The data will be displayed via the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
Example:
Fig. 14-4: Example of event logging using the "SIMOCODE ES" software
SIMOCODE pro has an error buffer, in which the 21 most recent errors/
faults, "Power - On" events" are recorded with a timestamp. Timestamps are
based upon the operating hours of the device (resolution 1 s), i.e. the
amount of time that the device is supplied with control supply voltage.
SIMOCODE pro
14-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Example:
The most recent "Power - On" event was logged at a device operating time
of 17 days, 21 hours and 31 minutes. Therefore, at the moment of "Power -
On", the device was operating (supplied with voltage) for 17d 21h 31min.
The "No. of Starts >" fault was logged at a device operating time of 18 days,
22 hours, 17 minutes, i.e. 24 h 46 min after the most recent "Power - On".
When using a DM-F, the events "Enabling circuit closed" and "Enabling circuit
open" are logged for the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F PROFIsafe in a
separate window:
Time
Event: "Enabling circuit closed" or "Enabling circuit open"
Number:
Line 1: 200 or 202
Line 2: 201 or 203
Text:
Line 1: "DM-F Local enabling circuit 0 -> 1" or DM-F PROFIsafe enabling
circuit 0 -> 1"
Line 2: "DM-F Local enabling circuit 1 -> 0" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling
circuit 1 -> 0".
The current DIP switch position of the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F
PROFIsafe is displayed under "DIP switch position DM-F during the last
event"
See also Chapter B.6 "Data record 72 - Error buffer".
14.5 Event buffer
In addition to the error buffer, various events can be stored in the event
buffer
Note:
From firmware version 3.0, the event buffer will be supported with the
following content from basic unit 2:
Entry 1 contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed"
Entry 2 contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit open"
See also Chapter B.7 "Data record 73 - Event memory".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 15-1
Alarms, faults and system events 15
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about troubleshooting.
Target groups
Commissioners
Configurators
PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
Knowledge about SIMOCODE ES software
Alarms, faults and system events
SIMOCODE pro
15-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Event
(alphabetical)
Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg
ement/fault
rectification
Contactor
control
Error
no.*)
Analog module
open circuit
The analog value measuring
circuit is open.
Check the transducer
and the measuring
circuit.
Reset 64
Antivalence Only for positioner 5 control
function: The change-over
contacts of the limit switch do
not issue an antivalent signal.
Limit switch defect, limit
switch open circuit
Tripped
Configuration
fault
The configured device
configuration does not match
the existing configuration.
Please check whether
all configured
components are
present.
Check the actual
configuration using
"Configuration".
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped 3
DM-F feedback
circuit
DM-F Local or
DM-F PROFIsafe has detected a
fault in the feedback circuit
(when the enabling circuit is
being switched on, the feedback
circuit must be closed.);
The "GF" (Gen. Fault) LED on the
front of the DM-F Local or DM-
F PROFIsafe flashes red
Check the wiring of
the feedback circuit
Check the contact
blocks in the feedback
circuit.
Rectify fault
so that the
feedback
circuit is
closed.
Tripped
DM-F safety-
oriented tripping
The DM-F has tripped the
enabling circuit for safety
reasons.
The motor can only be
switched on again after
the DM-F module
enabling circuits have
been closed.
Acknowledg
e with
"Reset", if
auto-reset is
not active.
Tripped
DM-F - Test
requirement
The DM-F Local or DM-F
PROFIsafe
enabling circuits have not been
opened and closed again within
the configured time period.
The function of the
enabling circuit relay
contacts can only be
tested when they are
switched.
Carry out a function test.
Please adopt
the
measures
intended for
this case.
DM-F wiring DM-F module wiring fault (short-
circuit to ground in the sensor
circuit/feedback circuit);
front of the DM-F Local is lit red.
Check the wiring of
the sensor circuit/
feedback circuit
Rectify the fault.
Reset Tripped
DM-FL -
Configuration
deviation
The effective configuration of
the DM-F Local does not
correspond to the parameterized
set configuration.
Check whether the
effective configuration of
the DM-F Local
corresponds to the
parameterized set
configuration. Correct
the effective
configuration by
changing the DIP switch
settings or adjusting the
set configuration by
means of
parameterization if
required.
Table 15-1: Alarms, faults and system events
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 15-3
DM-FL -
Configuration
mode
The DM-F Local is in
"Configuration mode";
The "DEVICE" LED on the front
of the DM-F Local is lit yellow.
Complete the
configuration (see
system manual "Failsafe
Digital Module
SIMOCODE
pro Safety", Chapter 7.4)
DM-FL - Cross
circuit
DM-F Local sensor circuit cross
circuit.
front of the DM-F Local is lit red.
Check the wiring of
both sensor circuits for
cross circuiting
Rectify the fault.
Reset Tripped
DM-FL -
Simultaneity
The DM-F Local has detected a
discrepancy fault in the two-
channel sensor circuit.
Please check the contact
blocks in the sensor
circuit.
Rectify the
fault by
opening or
closing the
sensor
inputs
Tripped
DM-FL waiting
for start-up test
The DM-F Local is in the
"Waiting for start-up test" state.
Carry out the start-up
test by actuating the
sensor in the sensor
circuit.
DM-FP F PRM
error
The specified PROFIsafe profile
parameters are erroneous or the
specified
PROFIsafe address does not
correspond to the configuration.
Please check the
PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe
parameters of
SIMOCODE pro, which
were set on the DP
Master system.
Double 0 Both torque switches have
activated simultaneously. The
motor feeder has been turned
off.
Open circuit torque
switch.
Torque switch is
defective.
Tripped 13
Double 1 Both limit switches have
activated simultaneously.
Limit switch is defective. Tripped 14
End position Except positioner 5 control
function: The state of the limit
switch has changed without a
command (positioner has left
the end position without a
command)
"OPEN/
CLOSED"
counter
command.
Tripped 15
Execution
ON command
The motor feeder could not be
turned on after an ON command
is issued.
Main circuit is
interrupted (fuse,
circuit breaker)
The motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective
Parameter execution
time is too short.
Reset or
OFF
command/
counter-
command
Tripped
Event
(alphabetical)
ement/fault
rectification
Contactor
control
Error
no.*)
Table 15-1: Alarms, faults and system events (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
15-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Execution
STOP command
The motor feeder could not be
turned off after a STOP
command was issued.
The contactor contact
is welded
Parameter execution
time is too short
The "open" end
position has not been
reached during the
parameterized runtime
(only for the
"Positioner" and
"Solenoid valve" control
functions).
Rectify the
fault;
reset
Tripped 9
External earth
fault
External earth-fault monitoring
has activated. An impermissibly
high fault current is flowing.
Please check the motor
connection cable for
damage.
Reset Tripped 29
External fault
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
A signal is pending at the input
(socket) of the "External fault 1,
2, 3, 4, 5 or 6" standard function.
Check the motor feeder. Tripped 56, 57,
58,
59,
60, 61
Feedback (FB)
OFF
The current flow in the motor
feeder has been interrupted
without the motor feeder being
turned off.
The main circuit has
been interrupted (fuse,
circuit breaker, main
switch).
The motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective
Reset or
OFF
command
Tripped 11
Feedback (FB)
ON
Current is flowing in the motor
feeder without the motor feeder
being switched on
Contactor contacts
have been manually
activated
Contactor has not
been switched on via
SIMOCODE
Rectify the
fault;
Reset or
OFF
command
Tripped 10
Hardware fault The SIMOCODE pro basic unit
hardware is defective.
Please replace the basic
unit.
See Chapter 13
"Mounting, wiring,
interfaces".
Rectify the
fault
Tripped 0
Internal earth
fault
Internal earth-fault monitoring
response. An impermissibly high
fault current is flowing.
connection cable for
damage.
Reset Tripped 28
Just one start
possible
The start after the next one
should not be carried out until
the interlocking time has
expired.
Module fault At least one SIMOCODE pro
module is not ready for use.
The connecting cable
is defective or has not
been plugged in
correctly.
Module is defective.
Please replace the
module.
For this, see
Chapter 13 "Mounting,
wiring, interfaces".
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped 1
Event
(alphabetical)
ement/fault
rectification
Contactor
control
Error
no.*)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 15-5
Module supply
voltage is not
present
Supply voltage on the DM-
F Local is too low or not present.
The terminals are not
wired properly
Module is defective.
Please replace the
module.
For this, see
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped
Motor operating
hours >
The configured limit value for
the motor operating hours has
been exceeded.
Please adopt the
maintenance measures
intended for the feeder.
Motor stop
time >
The configured limit value for
motor stop time monitoring has
been exceeded.
Please adopt the
maintenance measures
intended for the feeder.
If possible, switch on the
feeder.
No start possible The permissible number of
starts in the monitoring
timeframe has been attained.
The next start should not be
carried out until the interlocking
time has expired.
Reset Tripped
Operational
protection OFF
(OPO)
An "Operational protection OFF
(OPO)" signal is pending.
A switched-on motor feeder has
been switched off.
Switching on is not possible
while the OPO signal is pending.
Reset Tripped; for
positioners:
QE1 or QE2
switched on
until end
position is
reached -
depending
upon
configuration
19
Overload The motor feeder has been
overloaded.
and the application that
is being driven by the
motor.
the cooling down period
has expired or after an
emergency start.
Reset, auto-
reset
Tripped
Overload and
unbalance
The motor feeder has been
asymmetrically overloaded.
Possible causes:
Phase failure
Fault in the motor windings.
Check the motor feeder
and the motor.
has expired or after an
emergency start.
Reset or
auto-reset
Tripped 25,26,
27
Event
(alphabetical)
ement/fault
rectification
Contactor
control
Error
no.*)
SIMOCODE pro
15-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Parameter
changes not
allowed in the
current
operating state
It is not possible to change at
least one parameter in the
current operating state
Many parameters can
only be changed if the
motor feeder is switched
off and is not in the
"Remote" operating
mode.
For an overview of
parameters that can
always be changed,
see: Chapter "Data
formats and data
records" on Page B-1.
Parameter is
incorrect
("Event"
category)
There is an error in the
parameter data transmitted to
the device.
Errors in the parameter data can
occur, for example, if device
parameterization was not carried
out with SIMOCODE ES or
SIMATIC PDM.
Check the parameter
data (data records 130 -
133) that has been
transmitted to the device
for the correct content.
4
Parameter is
incorrect
("General fault"
category)
The parameter data is incorrect. The designation of the
faulty parameter can be
found via the number
(byte No.) in the system
manual, Chapter A
"Tables".
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped
Permissible
number of starts
exceeded
The permissible number of
starts in the monitoring
timeframe has already been
exceeded. The next start should
not be carried out until the
interlocking time has expired.
Reset Tripped 52
Phase unbalance The limit value for phase
unbalance has been exceeded.
Phase unbalance can cause an
overload.
Possible causes:
Phase failure
Fault in the motor windings.
Check the motor feeder
and the motor.
Reset Tripped
Power failure
(UVO)
The power failure lasted longer
than the set power failure time.
Rectify the
fault;
Reset or
OFF
command
Tripped 18
Pre-warning
overload
(I > 115%)
The motor feeder is in overload
operation.
If this condition continues to
persist, the motor feeder will
trip within a short period of time
due to overload.
motor.
Event
(alphabetical)
ement/fault
rectification
Contactor
control
Error
no.*)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 15-7
Required
function is not
supported
At least one parameterized
function is not supported by the
version of the basic unit.
Activate only the
functions that are
supported by the version
of the basic unit.
For example,
SIMOCODE pro V basic
units with the version
*E01* do not support
voltage measurement,
the temperature module
or the analog module.
Stalled
positioner
The torque switch has activated
before or without the respective
limit switch.
The positioner may be
blocked.
Acknowledge the fault
by releasing with the
"OPEN/CLOSED"
counter command.
Please check the
positioner application
and the limit switches
"OPEN/
CLOSED"
counter
command.
Tripped 12
Stalled rotor The maximum motor current has
exceeded the threshold for
stalled rotor protection.
Possible cause: The motor is
blocked.
Please check the
application that is being
driven by the motor.
Reset Tripped 48
Start-up
parameter block
active
The start-up parameter block
prevents adoption of
SIMOCODE pro parameters that
can be saved in the DP Master.
The block must be set when:
SIMOCODE ES
or
SIMATIC PDM
is used for parameterizing.
The block may not be set if:
SIMOCODE pro C/V is
integrated in STEP7 via the
SIMOCODE pro object
manager (OM)
or
SIMOCODE pro C has been
parameterized via GSD.
Status - Cooling
down period
active
The motor feeder has been
switched off due to overload.
has expired.
Event
(alphabetical)
ement/fault
rectification
Contactor
control
Error
no.*)
Notice
The parameter block is not active
in the case of devices that are st
set to the factory settings or
devices that have been reset to
the factory settings!
SIMOCODE pro
15-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Status - DM-F
enabling circuit
Shows the status of the
enabling circuit:
closed
or
tripped
Status -
Emergency start
executed
The thermal memory has been
deleted with the function
"Emergency start".
The motor can be
switched on again
immediately after an
overload trip.
Status - Test
position (TPF)
The motor feeder is in the test
position (TPF).
The main current circuit has
been interrupted and "cold
starting" of the feeder can be
carried out.
17
Temperature
module -
Warning level
exceeded
The temperature warning level
has been exceeded.
Check the temperature
measuring station.
35
Temperature
module out of
range
Temperature sensor is delivering
impermissible values.
sensor.
Reset Tripped 37
Temperature
module sensor
fault
Either a short circuit or an open
circuit has occurred in the
temperature sensor circuit.
sensor and the sensor
cable.
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped 36
Test position
feedback (TPF)
Current is flowing in the motor
feeder although the motor
feeder is in the test position
(TPF).
The main circuit is not
interrupted in test
operation.
Reset or
OFF
command
Tripped
Test trip The motor feeder has been
checked and switched off by a
test trip.
Reset Tripped 65
Thermistor open
circuit
An open circuit has occurred in
the thermistor sensor cable.
Check the thermistor
sensor cable and the
thermistor.
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped 33
Thermistor short
circuit
A short circuit has occurred in
the thermistor sensor cable.
Check the thermistor
sensor cable and the
thermistor.
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped 32
Thermistor trip
level
Thermistor protection response.
The temperature of the motor is
too high.
motor.
The motor cannot be
switched on again until
the temperature has
reached the switch-back
point of the thermistor.
Reset, auto-
reset
Tripped 31
Trip antivalence The limit switches are not
reporting any antivalent signals.
Limit switch open
circuit
Please check the
positioner application
and the limit switches
Counter
command
"OPEN/
CLOSED"
Tripped 16
Event
(alphabetical)
ement/fault
rectification
Contactor
control
Error
no.*)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 15-9
Trip - Bus PROFIBUS DP communication
has been interrupted or is
interrupted
Check the PROFIBUS
connection (plugs,
cables, etc.)
Reset, auto-
reset
Tripped 5
Trip end position Positioner/solenoid valve has left
the end position without a
command being issued. The
motor feeder has been switched
off.
Acknowledge the fault
by releasing with the
counter command
"OPEN/CLOSED".
Reset;
counter
command
Tripped
Trip - PLC/PCS The PLC controlling the feeder
was or is in the STOP state.
Please check the
operating state of the
PLC.
Reset, auto-
reset
Tripped 6
Trip temporary
components
(e.g. memory
module)
One of the following
components is defective:
Addressing plug
Memory module
PC cable.
Please replace the
defective components.
For this, see
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped 2
Warning level 0/
4 - 20 mA<
undershot
The measured value at the
analog input has undershot the
warning level.
Check the measuring
station.
47
Warning level 0/
4 - 20 mA >
overshot
The measured value at the
analog input has overshot the
warning level.
Check the measuring
station.
46
Warning level
cos phi <
The power factor cos phi has
undershot the warning level.
Possible cause: The motor is
being operated without a load.
Please check the
44
Warning level I>
overshot
The maximum current has
overshot the warning level.
Please check the
40
Warning level I<
undershot
The maximum current has
undershot the warning level.
Please check the
41
Warning level P>
overshot
The active power of the motor
has overshot the warning level.
Please check the
42
Warning level P<
undershot
The active power of the motor
has undershot the warning level.
Please check the
43
Warning level U<
undershot
The voltage in the motor feeder
has undershot the warning level.
Possible causes:
Undervoltage in the network
Fuse has tripped.
Check the motor feeder. 45
Event
(alphabetical)
ement/fault
rectification
Contactor
control
Error
no.*)
SIMOCODE pro
15-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
*) See "Error number" in Chapter B.6 "Data record 72 - Error buffer"
Wrong password SIMOCODE pro parameters are
protected by a password.
An attempt has been made to
change the parameters without
entering the password.
Please use the correct
password for changing
the parameters.
If you do not know the
password, new
parameters can only be
entered after the factory
settings have been
restored.
For a description of
factory settings, please
refer to Chapter 14.3.4
"Resetting the factory
settings".
Event
(alphabetical)
ement/fault
rectification
Contactor
control
Error
no.*)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 A-1
Tables A
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find various tables which can help you when working
with SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
Configurators.
Necessary knowledge
Thorough knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
A.1 Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and
status information for the control functions
Table A-1: Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status information for control functions
D
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n
/
c
o
n
t
r
o
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
t
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
L
a
m
p

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
Q
L
E
<
<
(
O
N
<
<
)
Q
L
E
<
(
O
N
<
)
Q
L
A
(
O
F
F
)
Q
L
E
>
(
O
N
>
)
Q
L
E
>
>
(
O
N
>
>
)
S
t
a
t
u
s

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
O
N
<
<
O
N
<
O
F
F
O
N
>
O
N
>
>
Q
E
1
Q
E
2
Q
E
3
Q
E
4
Q
E
5
O
N
<
<
O
N
<
O
F
F
O
N
>
O
N
>
>
O
v
e
r
l
o
a
d

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
c
t
i
v
e
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
D
i
r
e
c
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
-
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
R
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
R
i
g
h
t
L
e
f
t
-
-
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

b
r
e
a
k
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
p
u
l
s
e
-
O
F
F
p
u
l
s
e
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
-
d
e
l
t
a
s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
l
t
a
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
N
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
-
d
e
l
t
a
r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
S
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
l
t
a
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
R
i
g
h
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
D
a
h
l
a
n
d
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
F
a
s
t
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
s
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
D
a
h
l
a
n
d
e
r
r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
s
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
P
o
l
e
-
c
h
a
n
g
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
F
a
s
t
S
l
o
w
-
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
P
o
l
e

c
h
a
n
g
i
n
g
r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
-
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

v
a
l
v
e

2
)
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
-
-
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
O
P
E
N
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

1

2
)
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

2

2
)
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

3

2
)
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

4

2
)
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

5

2
)
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
O
P
E
N
C
L
O
S
E
D
-
-
-
-
C
L
O
S
E
D
S
T
O
P
O
P
E
N
-
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
R
e
s
e
t
O
N
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

w
i
t
h
r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

2
)
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
R
i
g
h
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
R
e
s
e
t
O
N
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
1
)

B
a
s
i
c

u
n
i
t

1
,

S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
C
2
)

B
a
s
i
c

u
n
i
t

2
,

S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 A-3
A.2 Abbreviations and specifications
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviation Meaning
BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)
BU2 Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
IM Current measuring module
UM Current/voltage measuring module
DM1 Digital module 1
DM-FL Failsafe digital module DM-F Local
DM-FP Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe
OP Operator panel
OPD Operator panel with display
AM Analog module
EM Earth-fault module
TM Temperature module
Th Thermistor
GF General fault, control function
Cyclic Cyclic
Acyclic Acyclic
F Fault
M Status information
W Warning
Table A-2: Abbreviations
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Fig. A-1: Table specifications
Event - PRM error number (bytes):
If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group
(PRM group) which caused the error is transmitted here.
Fig. A-2: Example for parameter group
Designation Type Range Unit Information
Reserved Byte[4]
Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1 % BU2
Reserved Byte[5]
Max. current I_max Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / I
s
BU1 BU2
Entry relevant for basic unit
and basic unit 2
Example
Entries in italics are
not relevant (reserved)
and, when writing,
should be filled with "0"
Parameters can be changed while running.
Byte.Bit Designation
(PRM group)
0.0 Reserved
4.0 Device configuration (12) Parameter group 12
. . .
.

.

.
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 A-5
A.3 Socket assignment table - digital
This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (digital). You
only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user
program to fill data records and write these back.
No. Designation Designation Information
0 Static level Not connected BU1 BU2
1 Fixed level 0 BU1 BU2
2 Fixed level 1 BU1 BU2
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Basic unit (BU) BU Test/Reset button BU1 BU2
9 BU Input 1 BU1 BU2
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Digital module DM DM1 - Input 1 DM1
17 DM1 - Input 2 DM1
24 DM-FL sensor channel 1 Y12 DM-FL
25 DM-FL sensor channel 2 Y22 DM-FL
26 Reserved
27 Reserved
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved
32 Operator panel OP/OPD OP Test/Reset button OP OPD
33 OP Button 1 OP OPD
37 Reserved
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
38 Reserved
39 Reserved
40 DPV1/RS-232 interface
(acyclic data)
Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.0 BU1 BU2
41 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.1 BU1 BU2
56 PLC/PCS interface PLC [DPV0]
(cyclic data)
Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.0 BU1 BU2
57 Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.1 BU1 BU2
72 Enabled control command Enabled control command - ON <<
Dependent on the control
function
73 Enabled control command - ON <
74 Enabled control command - OFF
75 Enabled control command - ON >
76 Enabled control command - ON >>
77 Reserved
78 Reserved
79 Reserved
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (Cont.)
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 A-7
80 Contactor controls Contactor control 1 QE1
function
81 Contactor control 2 QE2
85 Reserved
86 Reserved
87 Reserved
88 Lamp controls Display - QLE<< (ON <<)
function
89 Display - QLE< (ON <)
90 Display - QLA (OFF)
91 Display - QLE> (ON >)
92 Display - QLE>> (ON >>)
93 Display - QLS (fault) BU1 BU2
94 Reserved
95 Reserved
96 Status information - General Status - General fault BU1 BU2
97 Status - General warning BU1 BU2
98 Status - Device BU1 BU2
99 Status - Bus BU1 BU2
100 Status - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2
101 Status - Motor current flowing IM UM
102 Reserved
103 Reserved
104 Status information - Receive Status - ON <<
function
105 Status - ON <
106 Status - OFF
107 Status - ON >
108 Status - ON >>
109 Status - Start active BU1 BU2
110 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters and
positioners
111 Status - Change-over pause active Star-delta,
Dahlander,
Pole changing starter
112 Status - Runs in open direction
function
113 Status - Runs in close direction
114 Status - FC
115 Status - FO
116 Status - TC
117 Status - TO
118 Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1 BU2
119 Status - OPO BU2
120 Status - Remote mode BU1 BU2
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
121 Status information - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM UM
122 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM
123 Status - Pause time active IM UM
124 Status information - Miscellaneous Status - Device test active BU1 BU2
125 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM
126 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM
127 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F
128 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM UM
129 Event - Unbalance IM UM
130 Event - Overload IM UM
131 Event - Overload + phase failure IM UM
132 Event - Internal earth fault IM UM
133 Event - External earth fault EM
134 Event - Warning ext. earth fault EM
135 Event - Thermistor overload Th
136 Event - Thermistor short circuit Th
137 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
138 Event - TM warning T> TM
139 Event - TM Trip T> TM
140 Event - TM sensor fault TM
141 Event - TM out of range TM
142 Reserved
143 Reserved
144 Events - Level monitoring Event - Warning I> IM UM
145 Event - Warning I< IM UM
146 Event - Warning P> UM
147 Event - Warning P< UM
148 Event - Warning cos phi< UM
149 Event - Warning U< UM
150 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM
151 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM
152 Event - Trip I> IM UM
153 Event - Trip I< IM UM
154 Event - Trip P> UM
155 Event - Trip P< UM
156 Event - Trip cos phi< UM
157 Event - Trip U< UM
158 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM
159 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM
160 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM
161 Reserved
162 Reserved
163 Event - No start possible BU1 BU2
164 Event - No. of starts > BU1 BU2
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 A-9
165 Event - Just one start possible BU1 BU2
166 Event - Motor operating hours > BU1 BU2
167 Event - Motor stop time > BU1 BU2
168 Event - Limit 1 BU2
172 Events - Miscellaneous Event - External fault 1 BU1 BU2
173 Event - External fault 2 BU1 BU2
176 Event - External fault 5 BU2
177 Event - External fault 6 BU2
178 Reserved
179 Reserved
180 Event - Analog module open circuit AM
181 Event - DM-F safety-oriented tripping DM-F
182 Event - DM-F - Test requirement DM-F
183 Reserved
184 Events - Time stamp function Event - Timestamping function active + OK BU2
185 Reserved
186 Events - Miscellaneous Event - DM-FL safety o.k DM-FL
187 Event - PROFIsafe active DM-FP
188 Events - System interface Event - Configured operator panel missing BU1 BU2
189 Reserved
190 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-F
191 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL
192 Trip - General Trip - HW fault basic unit BU1 BU2
193 Trip - Module fault (e.g. IM, DM) BU1 BU2
194 Trip - Temporary components (e.g. memory
module)
BU1 BU2
195 Trip - Configuration fault BU1 BU2
196 Trip - Parameterization BU1 BU2
197 Trip - Bus BU1 BU2
198 Trip - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2
199 Reserved
200 Trip - Controlling Trip - Execution Time ON
Not for overload relays
201 Trip - Execution time OFF
202 Trip - FB ON
203 Trip - FB OFF
204 Trip - Stalled positioner Positioner
205 Trip - Double 0 Solenoid valve/positioner
206 Trip - Double 1 Solenoid valve/positioner
207 Trip - End position Solenoid valve/positioner
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
208 Trip - Antivalence Positioner
209 Trip - Cold starting (TPF) error BU1 BU2
210 Trip - UVO fault BU2
211 Trip - OPO fault BU2
212 Reserved
213 Reserved
214 Reserved
215 Reserved
216 Freely-programmable elements Truth Table 1 3I/1O output BU1 BU2
217 Truth Table 2 3I/1O output BU1 BU2
218 Truth Table 3 3I/1O output BU1 BU2
219 Truth Table 4 3I/1O output BU2
224 Truth Table 9 5I/2O output 1 BU2
225 Truth Table 9 5I/2O output 2 BU2
226 Reserved
227 Reserved
228 Reserved
229 Reserved
230 Reserved
231 Reserved
232 Timer 1 output BU1 BU2
233 Timer 2 output BU1 BU2
234 Timer 3 output BU2
235 Timer 4 output BU2
236 Counter 1 output BU1 BU2
237 Counter 2 output BU1 BU2
238 Counter 3 output BU2
239 Counter 4 output BU2
240 Signal Conditioner 1 output BU1 BU2
241 Signal Conditioner 2 output BU1 BU2
242 Signal Conditioner 3 output BU2
243 Signal Conditioner 4 output BU2
244 Non-volatile Element 1 output BU1 BU2
245 Non-volatile Element 2 output BU1 BU2
246 Non-volatile Element 3 output BU2
247 Non-volatile Element 4 output BU2
248 Flashing 1 output BU1 BU2
251 Flickering 1 output BU1 BU2
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 A-11
254 Reserved
255 Reserved
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
A.4 Socket assignment table - analog
This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (analog).
You only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user
program to fill data records and write these back.
All inputs for analog data can only process values of type "Word" (2 bytes). In
order to also be able to process values of type "Byte", the following applies:
The byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0.
No. Designation Unit Information
0 Not connected BU1 BU2
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Timer 1 - Actual value 100 ms BU1 BU2
5 Timer 2 - Actual value 100 ms BU1 BU2
6 Timer 3 - Actual value 100 ms BU2
7 Timer 4 - Actual value 100 ms BU2
8 Counter 1 - Actual value BU1 BU2
9 Counter 2 - Actual value BU1 BU2
10 Counter 3 - Actual value BU2
11 Counter 4 - Actual value BU2
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Max. current I_max 1 % / Is IM UM
17 Current I_L1 1 % / Is IM UM
20 Phase unbalance 1 % IM UM
21 Reserved
22 Reserved
23 Reserved
24 Voltage U_L1 1V UM
27 Cos phi 1% UM
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved
32 Thermal motor model 2 % IM UM
33 Time to trip 100 ms IM UM
34 Recovery time 100 ms IM UM
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 A-13
1) S7 format: 0/4 mA=0
20 mA=27648
35 Last trip current 1 % / Is IM UM
36 TM - Max. temperature 1K TM
37 TM - Temperature 1 1K TM
40 Permissible starts - Actual value BU1 BU2
41 Motor stop time 1h BU1 BU2
42 DM-F - Time until test required 1 week DM-F
43 Reserved
44 AM - Input 1 See 1) AM
45 AM - Input 2 See 1) AM
46 Reserved
47 Reserved
48 Acyclic Receive - Analog value BU1 BU2
49 Cyclic Receive - Analog value BU2
50 Reserved
51 Reserved
52 Motor operating hours - H word
1s
BU1 BU2
53 Motor operating hours - L word BU1 BU2
54 Int. motor operating hours - H word BU1 BU2
55 Int. motor operating hours - L word BU1 BU2
56 Device operating hours - H word BU1 BU2
57 Device operating hours - L word BU1 BU2
58 Number of starts - H word BU1 BU2
59 Number of starts - L word BU1 BU2
60 Int. number of starts right - H word BU1 BU2
61 Int. number of starts right - L word BU1 BU2
62 Int. number of starts left - H word BU1 BU2
63 Int. number of starts left - L word BU1 BU2
64 Reserved
.. Reserved
69 Reserved
70 Active power P - H word
1W
BU2
71 Active power P - L word BU2
72 Apparent power S - H word
1VA
BU2
73 Apparent power S - L word BU2
75 Reserved
.. Reserved
255 Reserved
No. Designation Unit Information
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog (Cont.)
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
A.5 Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics
The following table contains the detailed messages of the slave diagnostics
for status information and the process alarm. This information is also
contained in data record 92.
Byte.Bit Status information Information
0.0 Trip - Controlling Trip - Execution ON command BU1 BU2
0.1 Trip - Execution STOP command BU1 BU2
0.2 Trip - FB ON BU1 BU2
0.3 Trip - FB OFF BU1 BU2
0.4 Trip - Stalled positioner BU1 BU2
0.5 Trip - Double 0 BU1 BU2
0.6 Trip - Double 1 BU1 BU2
0.7 Trip - End position BU1 BU2
1.0 Trip - Antivalence BU1 BU2
1.1 Trip - Cold starting (TPF) fault BU1 BU2
1.2 Trip - UVO fault BU2
1.3 Trip - OPO fault BU2
1.4 Reserved
2.0 Reserved
2.1 Trip - Protection Trip - Unbalance IM UM
2.2 Trip - Overload IM UM
2.3 Trip - Overload + phase failure IM UM
2.4 Trip - Int. earth fault IM UM
2.5 Trip - Ext. earth fault EM
2.6 Reserved
2.7 Trip - Thermistor overload Th
3.0 Trip - Thermistor short circuit Th
3.1 Trip - Thermistor open circuit Th
3.2 Reserved
3.3 Trip - TM tripping T> TM
3.4 Trip - TM sensor fault TM
3.5 Trip - TM out of range TM
3.6 Reserved
4.0 Trips -
Level monitoring
Trip - Trip I> IM UM
4.1 Trip - Trip I< IM UM
4.2 Trip - Trip P> UM
4.3 Trip - Trip P< UM
4.4 Trip - Trip cos phi< UM
4.5 Trip - Trip U< UM
4.6 Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM
4.7 Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM
5.0 Trip - Stalled rotor IM UM
5.1 Reserved
Table A-5: Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 A-15
5.4 Trip - Number of starts > BU1 BU2
5.5 Reserved
6.0 Trips -
Miscellaneous
Trip - Ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2
6.1 Trip - Ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2
6.4 Trip - Ext. fault 5 BU2
6.5 Trip - Ext. fault 6 BU2
6.6 Reserved
6.7 Reserved
7.0 Trip - Analog module open circuit AM
7.1 Trip - Test trip BU1 BU2
7.2 DM-F safety-oriented tripping DM-FL DM-FP
7.3 Trip - DM-F wiring DM-FL DM-FP
7.4 Trip - DM-F cross circuit DM-FL
8.0 Warnings - Protection Warning - Overload operation IM UM
8.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM
8.2 Warning - Overload IM UM
8.3 Warning - Overload + phase failure IM UM
8.4 Warning - Internal earth fault IM UM
8.5 Warning - External earth fault EM
8.6 Reserved
8.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th
9.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th
9.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th
9.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM
9.3 Reserved
9.4 Warning - M sensor fault TM
9.5 Warning - TM out of range TM
9.6 Reserved
10.0 Warnings -
Level monitoring
Warning - Warning I> IM UM
10.1 Warning - Warning I< IM UM
10.2 Warning - Warning P> UM
10.3 Warning - Warning P< UM
10.4 Warning - Warning cos phi < UM
10.5 Warning - Warning U< UM
10.6 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM
10.7 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM
11.0 Warning - Stalled rotor IM UM
11.1 Reserved
11.3 Warning - No start possible BU1 BU2
11.4 Warning - Number of motor starts> BU1 BU2
11.5 Warning - Just one start possible BU1 BU2
11.6 Warning - Motor operating hours > BU1 BU2
Table A-5: Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics (Cont.)
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU1 BU2
12.0 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - Ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2
12.1 Warning - Ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2
12.4 Warning - Ext. fault 5 BU2
12.5 Warning - Ext. fault 6 BU2
12.6 Reserved
12.7 Reserved
13.0 Warning - Analog module open circuit BU2
13.1 Warning - DM-F safety-oriented tripping
13.2 Warning - Test requirement DM-FL DM-FP
13.3 Reserved
13.4 Reserved
13.5 Reserved
13.6 Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-FL DM-FP
13.7 Warning - DM-FL DM-FL
14.0 Reserved
14.1 Status information - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM UM
14.2 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM
14.3 Status - Pause time active IM UM
14.4 Reserved
14.5 Reserved
14.6 Status information - Receive Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1 BU2
14.7 Reserved
15.0 Events -
Parameterization
Event - Start-up parameter block active BU1 BU2
15.1 Event - Parameter changes not allowed in the
current operating state
BU1 BU2
15.2 Event - Device does not support the required
functions
BU1 BU2
15.3 Event - Wrong parameter BU1 BU2
15.4 Event - Wrong password BU1 BU2
15.5 Event - Password protection active BU1 BU2
15.6 Event - Factory settings BU1 BU2
15.7 Event - Parameterization active BU1 BU2
17.0 Event - DM-FL - Configuration mode DM-FL
17.1 Event - DM FL - Configuration deviation DM-FL
17.2 Event - DM-FL waiting for start-up test DM-FL
17.3 Event - DM FP F PRM error DM-FP
17.4 Reserved
Table A-5: Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-1
Data formats and data records B
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the data records of
SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
Configurators
PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
Thorough knowledge of writing and reading data records
Data formats and data records
SIMOCODE pro
B-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Data records - overview
Table B-1: Data records - overview
Data record No. Description Read/write
1 S7 system diagnostics Read
63 Analog value recording Read
67 Process image of the outputs Read
69 Process image of the inputs Read
72 Error buffer Read
73 Event memory Read
92 Device diagnostics
(faults, warnings, status information)
Read
94 Measured values Read
95 Service/statistical data Read/write
130 Basic device parameters 1 (BU1 BU2) Read/write
131 Basic device parameters 2 (BU1 BU2) Read/write
132 Extended device parameters 1 (BU2) Read/write
133 Extended device parameters 2 (BU2) Read/write
139 Marking Read/write
160 Communication parameters Read/write
165 Identification Read/write
202 Acyclic receive Read/write
203 Acyclic send Read
224 Password protection Write
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-3
B.1 Handling data records
This section contains helpful information about how best to handle data
records.
B.1.1 Writing/reading data records
Access to data records via slot and index
Slot: Access via slot 1
Index: Data record number
Writing/reading data records with STEP 7
You can access the data records from the user program.
Writing data records:
S7 DPV1 master: By calling SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58
S7 master: By calling SFC 58
Reading data records:
S7 DPV1 master: By calling SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59
S7 master: By calling SFC 59"
Further information
You will find further information on the SFBs:
In the "System Software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions"
reference manual
In the STEP7 online help.
Byte arrangements
When data which is longer than one byte is saved, the bytes are arranged as
follows ("big endian"):
Fig. B-1: Byte arrangement in "big endian" format
Byte 0
Byte 1
High byte
Low byte
High byte
Low byte
High byte
Low byte
High word
Low word
Data type
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte arrangement
Byte
Word
Double word (D-word)
SIMOCODE pro
B-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.1.2 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)
BU2 Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
DM-FL Failsafe digital module DM-F Local
DM-FP Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe
OP Operator panel
AM Analog module
Th Thermistor
CF Control function
Cyclic Cyclic
Acycl. Acyclic
F Fault
M Status information
W Warning
Table B-2: Abbreviations
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-5
B.1.3 Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Fig. B-2: Specifications
Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system
components are used.
Designation Type Range Unit Information
Reserved Byte[4]
Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1 % BU2
Reserved Byte[5]
Max. current I_max Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / I
s
BU1 BU2
Entry relevant for basic unit
and basic unit 2
Example
Entries in italics are
not relevant (reserved)
and, when writing,
should be filled with "0"
Parameters can be changed while running.
SIMOCODE pro
B-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.2 Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics
Byte
Bit
DR0 DR1 Designation Type No error Error Information
0.0 X X Module fault/OK Bit 0 1
0.1 X X Internal fault Bit 0 0
0.2 X X External fault Bit 0 1
0.3 X X Channel fault Bit 0 1
0.4 X X External auxiliary voltage missing Bit 0 0
0.5 X X Front panel plug missing Bit 0 0
0.6 X X Module not parameterized Bit 0 0
0.7 X X Wrong parameters on module Bit 0 0
1.0 X X Module type Bit[4] 3 3
1.4 X X Channel information available Bit 1 1
1.5 X X Application information available Bit 0 0
1.6 X X Substitute diagnostic alarm Bit 0 0
1.7 X X Reserved = 0 Bit 0 0
2.0 X X Application module wrong/
missing
Bit 0 0
2.1 X X Communication fault Bit 0 0
2.2 X X Operating status (0=RUN,
1=STOP)
Bit 0 0
2.3 X X Time monitoring activated Bit 0 0
2.4 X X Supply voltage within module
failed
Bit 0 0
2.5 X X Battery flat (BATTF) Bit 0 0
2.6 X X Total backup power failed Bit 0 0
3.0 X X Rack failure (detected by IM/UM) Bit 0 0
3.1 X X Processor failure Bit 0 0
3.2 X X EPROM error Bit 0 0
3.3 X X RAM error Bit 0 0
3.4 X X ADC/DAC error Bit 0 0
3.5 X X Blown fuse Bit 0 0
3.6 X X PRAL missing Bit 0 0
4.0 X Channel type Byte 0x7D 0x7D
5.0 X Length of the channel specific
diagnostics
Byte 0x20 0x20
6.0 X Number of channels Byte 0x01 0x01
7.0 X Channel fault vector (one bit per
channel)
Byte 0x00 0x01
8.0 X Reserved Bit 0 0
8.1 X Short circuit Bit 0 0
8.2 X Undervoltage Bit 0 0
8.3 X Overvoltage Bit 0 0
Table B-3: Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-7
Byte
Bit
DR0 DR1 Designation Type No error Error Information
8.4 X Overload Bit 0 0
8.5 X Overtemperature Bit 0 0
8.6 X Open circuit Bit 0 0
8.7 X Upper limit overshot Bit 0 0
9.0 X Lower limit undershot Bit 0 0
9.1 X Error Bit 0 X Error F9
10.0 X Parameterization error Bit 0 X Error F16
10.1 X Sensor or load voltage missing Bit 0 0
10.2 X Fuse defective Bit 0 0
10.4 X Earth fault Bit 0 0
10.5 X Reference channel fault Bit 0 0
10.6 X Process alarm missing Bit 0 0
10.7 X Actuator warning Bit 0 0
11.0 X Actuator trip Bit 0 0
11.1 X Safety-oriented tripping Bit 0 0
11.2 X External fault Bit 0 0
11.3 X Non-specific error Bit 0 0
12.0 X Reserved Byte[4] 0 0
Table B-3: Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.3 Data record 63 - Analog value recording
Table B-4: Data record 63 - Analog value recording
The unit of the measured value is dependent on the assigned analog value.
You will find all the available analog values with their units in Chapter A.4
"Socket assignment table - analog".
B.4 Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs
Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Information
0.0 StartPos Word 0 BU2
2.0 Channel No. Byte 1 BU2
3.0 Analog value record currently running Bit 0, 1 BU2
3.1 Trigger event occurred Bit 0, 1 BU2
3.2 Reserved Bit[6] 0
4.0 Measured value (0) Word 0 ... 65535 BU2
...
124.0 Reserved Byte[76] 0
Byte.Bit Designation Default
(also see parameters)
Type Information
0.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON< Bit
BU1 BU2
0.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.1 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] OFF Bit
0.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.2 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON> Bit
0.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.3 Test 1 Bit
0.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.4 Motor protection - Emergency start Bit
0.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.5 Mode selector S1 Bit
0.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.6 Reset 1 Bit
0.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.7 Not assigned Bit
2.0 to 3.7 Cyclic receive - Analog value Not assigned Word BU2
Table B-5: Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-9
B.5 Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs
Byte.Bit Designation Default
(also see parameters)
Type Information
0.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Status - ON < Bit
BU1 BU2
0.1 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Status - OFF Bit
0.2 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Status - ON > Bit
0.3 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Event - Overload operation Bit
0.4 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active Bit
0.5 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode Bit
0.6 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Status - General fault Bit
0.7 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Status - General warning Bit
1.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit
2.0 PLC/PCS analog input 1 Max. current I_max Word
4.0 PLC/PCS analog input 2 Not assigned Word BU2
Table B-6: Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs
SIMOCODE pro
B-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.6 Data record 72 - Error buffer
Table B-7: Data record 72 - Error buffer
Time stamp
The operating hours of the device are used as a time stamp (resolution: 1 s).
Type/error number
If the type has the value 71, the entry contains an error: Refer to the error
numbers for detailed information. You will find the meaning in the "Error
number" column of "Data record 92 - Diagnostics" in Chapter B.8 "Data
record 92 - Device diagnostics".
If the type has the value 255, the entry displays "Power - On". In this case,
the error number contains the number of power on operations, reduced by 1
(0 = 1x power on, ...).
Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information
0.0
1
Time stamp D-word BU1 BU2
4.0 Type Byte BU1 BU2
5.0 Error number Byte BU1 BU2
6.0
2
...
120.0
21
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-11
B.7 Data record 73 - Event memory
Table B-8: Data record 73 - Event memory
Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information
0.0
1
Time stamp D-word BU2
4.0 Type Byte BU2
5.0 Information Byte BU2
8.0
2
Time stamp D-word BU2
12.0 Type Byte BU2
13.0 Information Byte BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.8 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics
Byte.Bit Designation Information DP
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
0.0 Reserved
1.0 Status information
- General
Status - General fault BU1 BU2
1.1 Status - General warning BU1 BU2
1.2 Status - Device BU1 BU2
1.3 Status - Bus BU1 BU2
1.4 Status - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2
1.5 Status - Motor current flowing IM UM
1.6 Reserved
- Receive
Status - ON <<
Dependent on the
control function
2.1 Status - ON <
2.2 Status - OFF
2.3 Status - ON >
2.4 Status - ON >>
2.5 Status - Start active BU1 BU2
2.6 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters
and positioners
2.7 Status - Change-over pause active Star-delta, Dahlander,
pole-changing
starters
3.0 Status - Runs in open direction
Dependent on the
control function
3.1 Status - Runs in close direction
3.2 Status - FC
3.3 Status - FO
3.4 Status - TC
3.5 Status - TO
3.6 Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1 BU2 M
3.7 Status - OPO BU2
4.0 Status - Remote mode BU1 BU2
- Protection
Status - Emergency start executed IM UM M
4.2 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM M
4.3 Status - Pause time active IM UM
- Miscellaneous
Status - Device test active BU1 BU2
4.5 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM
4.6 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM
4.7 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-13
5.0 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation
IM UM
5.1 Event - Unbalance IM UM
5.2 Event - Overload IM UM
5.3 Event - Overload + phase failure IM UM
5.4 Event - Internal earth fault IM UM
5.5 Event - External earth fault EM
5.6 Event - Warning ext. earth fault EM
5.7 Event - Thermistor overload Th
6.0 Event - Thermistor short circuit Th
6.1 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
6.2 Event - TM warning T> TM
6.3 Event - TM Trip T> TM
6.4 Event - TM sensor fault TM
6.5 Event - TM out of range TM
6.6 Reserved
7.0 Events - Level
monitoring
Event - Warning I> IM UM
7.1 Event - Warning I< IM UM
7.2 Event - Warning P> UM
7.3 Event - Warning P< UM
7.4 Event - Warning cos phi< UM
7.5 Event - Warning U< UM
7.6 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM
7.7 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM
8.0 Event - Trip I> IM UM
8.1 Event - Trip I< IM UM
8.2 Event - Trip P> UM
8.3 Event - Trip P< UM
8.4 Event - Trip cos phi< UM
8.5 Event - Trip U< UM
8.6 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM
8.7 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM
9.0 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM
9.1 Reserved
9.3 Event - No start possible BU1 BU2
9.4 Event - No. of starts > BU1 BU2
9.5 Event - Just one start possible BU1 BU2
9.6 Event - Motor operating hours > BU1 BU2
9.7 Event - Motor stop time > BU1 BU2
10.0 Event - Limit 1 BU2
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
Table B-9: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10.4 Events -
Miscellaneous
Event - Ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2
10.5 Event - Ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2
11.0 Event - Ext. fault 5 BU2
11.1 Event - Ext. fault 6 BU2
11.2 Reserved
11.3 Reserved
11.4 Event - Analog module open circuit AM
11.5 Event - DM-F safety-oriented
tripping
DM-F
11.6 Event - DM-F - Test requirement DM-F
11.7 Reserved
12.0 Events - Time
stamp function
Event - Timestamping function
active + ok
BU2
12.1 Reserved
12.2 Events -
Miscellaneous
Event - DM-FL safety ok DM-FL
12.3 Event - DM-F PROFIsafe active DM-FP
12.4 Events - System
interface
Event - Configured operator panel
missing
BU1 BU2
12.5 Event - Module not supported BU1 BU2
12.6 Event - No module voltage BU2
13.0 Events - Memory
module
Event - Memory module read in BU1 BU2
13.1 Event - Memory module
programmed
BU1 BU2
13.2 Event - Memory module erased BU1 BU2
13.3 Reserved
13.7 Event - Addressing
plug
Event - Addressing plug read in BU1 BU2
14.0 Events -
Parameterization
Event - Start-up parameter block
active
BU1 BU2 M
14.1 Event - Parameter changes not
allowed in the current operating
state
BU1 BU2 M
14.2 Event - Device does not support the
required functions
BU1 BU2 M
14.3 Event - Wrong parameter BU1 BU2 M
14.4 Event - Wrong password BU1 BU2 M
14.5 Event - Password protection active BU1 BU2
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-15
14.6 Event - Factory settings BU1 BU2
14.7 Event - Parameterization active BU1 BU2
15.0 Event - PRM error number (bytes)
**)
BU1 BU2
16.0 Event - DM-FL configuration mode DM-FL
16.1 Event - DM-FL configuration
deviation
DM-FL
16.2 Event - DM-FL waiting for start-up
test
DM-FL
16.3 Event - DM FP PRM error DM-FP
16.4 Reserved
17.0 Warnings -
Protection
Warning - Overload operation IM UM W
17.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM W
17.2 Warning - Overload IM UM W
17.3 Warning - Overload + phase failure IM UM W
17.4 Warning - Internal earth fault IM UM W
17.5 Warning - External earth fault EM W
17.6 Reserved
17.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th W
18.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th W
18.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th W
18.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM W
18.3 Reserved
18.4 Warning - TM sensor fault TM W
18.5 Warning - TM out of range TM W
18.6 Reserved
19.0 Warnings -
Level monitoring
Warning - Warning I> IM UM W
19.1 Warning - Warning I< IM UM W
19.2 Warning - Warning P> UM W
19.3 Warning - Warning P< UM W
19.4 Warning - Warning cos phi < UM W
19.5 Warning - Warning U< UM W
19.6 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM W
19.7 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM W
20.0 Warning - Stalled rotor IM UM W
20.1 Reserved
20.3 Warning - No start possible BU1 BU2 W
20.4 Warning - Number of motor starts> BU1 BU2 W
20.5 Warning - Just one start possible BU1 BU2 W
20.6 Warning - Motor operating hours > BU1 BU2 W
20.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU1 BU2 W
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
SIMOCODE pro
B-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
21.0 Warnings -
Miscellaneous
Warning - Ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2 W
21.1 Warning - Ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2 W
21.4 Warning - Ext. fault 5 BU2 W
21.5 Warning - Ext. fault 6 BU2 W
21.6 Reserved
21.7 Reserved
22.0 Warning - Analog module open
circuit
AM W
22.1 Warning - DM-F safety-oriented
tripping
DM-F W
22.2 Warning - DM-F test requirement DM-F W
22.3 Reserved
22.6 Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-F W
22.7 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL W
23.0 Trips -
General
Trip - HW fault basic unit BU1 BU2 F9 0
23.1 Trip - Module fault
(e.g. IM, UM, DM module)
BU1 BU2 F9 1
23.2 Trip - Temporary components (e.g.
memory module)
BU1 BU2 F9 2
23.3 Trip - Configuration fault BU1 BU2 F16 3
23.4 Trip - Parameterization BU1 BU2 F16 4
23.5 Trip - Bus BU1 BU2 5
23.6 Trip - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2 6
23.7 Reserved
24.0 Trips -
Receive
Trip - Runtime ON CF = positioner F 8
24.1 Trip - Execution STOP command CF = positioner F 9
24.2 Trip - FB ON CF = positioner F 10
24.3 Trip - FB OFF CF = Positioner F 11
24.4 Trip - Stalled positioner CF = positioner F 12
24.5 Trip - Double 0 CF = positioner F 13
24.6 Trip - Double 1 CF = positioner F 14
24.7 Trip - End position CF = positioner F 15
25.0 Trip - Antivalence CF = positioner F 16
25.1 Trip - Cold starting (TPF) fault BU1 BU2 F 17
25.2 Trip - UVO fault BU2 F 18
25.3 Trip - OPO fault BU2 F 19
25.4 Reserved
26.0 Reserved
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-17
26.1 Trip - Protection Trip - Unbalance IM UM F 25
26.2 Trip - Overload IM UM F 26
26.3 Trip - Overload + phase failure IM UM F 27
26.4 Trip - Int. earth fault IM UM F 28
26.5 Trip - Ext. earth fault EM F 29
26.6 Reserved
26.7 Trip - Thermistor overload Th F 31
27.0 Trip - Thermistor short circuit Th F 32
27.1 Trip - Thermistor open circuit Th F 33
27.2 Reserved
27.3 Trip - TM trip T> TM F 35
27.4 Trip - TM sensor fault TM F 36
27.5 Trip - TM out of range TM F 37
27.6 Reserved
28.0 Trips - Level
monitoring
Trip - Trip I> IM UM F 40
28.1 Trip - Trip I< IM UM F 41
28.2 Trip - Trip P> UM F 42
28.3 Trip - Trip P< UM F 43
28.4 Trip - Trip cos phi< UM F 44
28.5 Trip - Trip U< UM F 45
28.6 Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM F 46
28.7 Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM F 47
29.0 Trip - Stalled rotor IM UM F 48
29.1 Reserved
29.4 Trip - Number of starts > BU1 BU2 F 52
29.5 Reserved
30.0 Trips -
Miscellaneous
Trip - External fault 1 BU1 BU2 F 56
30.1 Trip - External fault 2 BU1 BU2 F 57
30.4 Trip - External fault 5 BU2 F 60
30.5 Trip - External fault 6 BU2 F 61
30.6 Reserved
30.7 Reserved
31.0 Trip - Analog module open circuit AM F 64
31.1 Trip - Test trip BU1 BU2 F 65
31.2 Trip - DM-F safety-oriented tripping DM-F F
31.3 Trip - DM-F wiring DM-FL F
31.4 Trip - DM-FL cross circuit DM-FL F
31.5 Reserved
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
SIMOCODE pro
B-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
*) The "DP Diagn." column contains the bits which are additionally available
in the diagnostics using PROFIBUS DP:
F: Fault
M: Status information
W: Warning
F9, F16:Error types
See also Chapter A.5 "Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics".
**) Event - PRM error number (bytes):
If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group
(PRM group) which caused the error is transmitted here. You will find the
parameter groups in the parameter data records 130 to 133.
Fig. B-3: Example for parameter group
***) See "Error number" in Chapter B.6 "Data record 72 - Error buffer".
Byte.Bit Designation
(PRM group)
0.0 Reserved
4.0 Device configuration
(see above)(12) Parameter group 12
.

.

.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-19
B.9 Data record 94 - Measured values
1) S7 format:
0/4 mA = 0
20 mA = 27648
2) Representation of the "Thermal motor model":
Value always refers to symm. trip level,
representation in 2% increments in bits 6 - 0 (range 0 to 254%),
bit 7 shows unbalance (fixed level 50%).
3) Representation in Kelvin.
Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Informa-
tion
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Thermal motor model Byte 0 .. 255 See
2
) IM UM
5.0 Phase unbalance Byte 0 .. 100 1 % IM UM
6.0 Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1 % UM
12.0 Max. current I_max Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / I
s
IM UM
14.0 Current I
L1
Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / I
s
IM UM
16.0 Current I
L2
Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / I
s
IM UM
18.0 Current I
L3
Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / I
s
IM UM
20.0 Last trip current Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / I
s
IM UM
22.0 Time to trip Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms IM UM
24.0 Cooling down period Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms IM UM
26.0 Voltage U
L1
Word 0 .. 65535 1 V UM
28.0 Voltage U
L2
Word 0 .. 65535 1 V UM
30.0 Voltage U
L3
Word 0 .. 65535 1 V UM
32.0 AM - Output Word 0 .. 32767
See
1)
AM
34.0 AM - Input 1 Word 0 .. 32767 AM
36.0 AM - Input 2 Word 0 .. 32767 AM
38.0 AM - Input 3 Word 0 .. 32767 AM
40.0 TM - Max. temperature Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see
3)
TM
42.0 TM - Temperature 1 Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see
3)
TM
3)
TM
3)
TM
52.0 Active power P D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W UM
56.0 Apparent power S D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 VA UM
Table B-10: Data record 94 - Measured values
SIMOCODE pro
B-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.10 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data
Writing the service data/statistical data
Writing is only possible if password protection is not active.
Additional abbreviations
r/w: value can be written/changed
r: value can only be read
1) Can only be written when the start monitoring function is active!
Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Informa-
tion
0.0 Coordination Byte[4] BU1 BU2
4.0 Permissible starts - Actual value Byte 0 .. 255 r
1)
BU1 BU2
5.0 DM-F - Time until test required Byte 0 .. 255 1 week r BU2
8.0 Number of parameterizations Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU2
10.0 Number of overload trips Word 0 .. 65535 r/w BU1 BU2
12.0 Number of internal overload trips Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU2
14.0 Motor stop time Word 0 .. 65535 1 h r/w BU1 BU2
16.0 Timer 1 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU1 BU2
18.0 Timer 2 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU1 BU2
20.0 Timer 3 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU2
22.0 Timer 4 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU2
24.0 Counter 1 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU2
26.0 Counter 2 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU2
28.0 Counter 3 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU2
30.0 Counter 4 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU2
32.0 Calculation module 1 - Output Word 0 .. 65535 r BU2
34.0 Calculation module 2 - Output Word 0 .. 65535 r BU2
36.0 Reserved Byte[4] 0
40.0 Motor operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r/w BU1 BU2
44.0 Int. motor operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r BU1 BU2
48.0 Device operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r BU1 BU2
52.0 Number of starts D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r/w BU1 BU2
56.0 Internal number of starts right D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r BU1 BU2
60.0 Internal number of starts left D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r BU1 BU2
64.0 Energy consumed D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 kWh r/w UM
Table B-11: Data record 95 - Diagnostics - Statistical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-21
B.11 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1
Byte
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
4.0 Device configuration (12) Byte[8] BU1 BU2
4.0 Device class Byte 5, 9 5 = BU1
9 = BU2
BU1 BU2
BU2
5.0 Thermistor (Th) Bit 0, 1 1 = active; thermistor in the BU BU1 BU2
5.1 Reserved Bit[7]
6.0 Operator panel (OP or OPD) Bit 0, 1 BU1 BU2
6.1 Analog module (AM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
6.2 Temperature module (TM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
6.3 Earth-fault module (EM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
6.4 Digital module 1 (DM1) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 0 = no digital module
1 = monostable
2 = bistable
BU2
6.6 Digital module 2 (DM2) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 BU2
7.0 Reserved Bit[8]
8.0 Current measuring module
(IM/UM)
Bit[7] 0 .. 5 0 = no current measurement
1 = 0.3 A - 3 A
2 = 2.4 A - 25 A
3 = 10 A - 100 A
4 = 20 A - 200 A
5 = 63 A - 630 A
BU1 BU2
8.7 Voltage measuring module
(UM)
Bit 0, 1 BU2
9.0 Reserved
10.0 Control function (CF) 0x00
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x20
0x21
0x30
0x31
0x40
0x41
0x50
0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
0x70
0x71
0x00 = Overload
0x10 = Direct starter
0x11 = Reversing starter
0x12 = Linked device
0x20 = Star-delta starter
0x21 = Star-delta
reversing starter
0x30 = Dahlander
0x31 = Dahlander
reversing starter
0x40 = Pole-changing starter
0x41 = Pole-changing
reversing starter
0x50 = Solenoid valve
0x60 = Positioner 1
0x61 = Positioner 2
0x62 = Positioner 3
0x63 = Positioner 4
0x64 = Positioner 5
0x70 = Soft starter
0x71 = Soft starter with
reversing contactor
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
11.0 Reserved Bit[8]
Table B-12: Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1
SIMOCODE pro
B-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12.0 Bit parameters (16)
12.0 No configuration fault due to
OP
Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
12.1 Start-up parameter block
active
Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
12.2 Test/Reset buttons blocked Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
12.3 Bus and PLC/PCS - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual, 1 = Auto BU1 BU2
12.4 Reserved Bit 0
12.5 Reserved Bit 0
12.6 Reserved Bit 0
12.7 Reserved Bit 0
13.0 Diagnostics for process events Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
13.1 Diagnostics for process
warnings
Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
13.2 Diagnostics for process faults Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
13.3 Diagnostics for device faults Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
13.4 Reserved Bit 0
13.5 Reserved Bit 0
13.6 Bus monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
13.7 PLC/PCS monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
14.0 Overload protection - Type of
load
Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase, 1 = 1-phase IM UM
14.1 Overload protection - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual, 1 = Automatic IM UM
14.2 Reserved Bit 0
14.3 Saving change-over command Bit 0, 1 0
14.4 Non-maintained command
mode
Bit 0, 1 0
14.5 Cold starting level (TPF) Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact BU1 BU2
14.6 Load type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Motor, 1 = Resistive load BU1 BU2
14.7 Reserved Bit 0
15.0 External fault 1 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact BU1 BU2
15.1 External fault 2 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
15.4 External fault 1 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always, 1 = Only motor ON BU1 BU2
15.5 External fault 2 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
Byte
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
Table B-12: Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1 (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-23
16.0 Bit[2] - Parameters (20)
16.0 Thermistor -
Overload response
Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 3
0 = Deactivated
1 = Signaling
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
Th
16.2 Thermistor - Response
to sensor error
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 Th
16.4 Internal earth fault - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
16.6 Motor protection -
Overload response
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 3
17.0 Motor protection - Overload
response
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2
17.2 Motor protection - Unbalance
response
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2
17.4 Trip response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0
17.6 Warning response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
18.0 Trip response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0
18.2 Warning response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
18.4 Stalled rotor - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
19.0 Monitoring the number of
starts - Response at overshoot
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2
starts - Response at pre-
warning
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2
19.4 Motor operating hours
monitoring - Response
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2
19.6 Motor stop time monitoring -
Response
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2
20.0 Ext. fault 1 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU1 BU2
21.2 Basic unit - Delay inputs Bit[2] 0 - 3 1 Offset 6 ms BU1 BU2
21.4 Timer 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing delay
1 = Closing delay with memory
2 = With opening delay
3 = With fleeting closing
BU1 BU2
21.6 Timer 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2
22.0 Signal conditioner 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-inverting
1 = Inverting
2 = Edge rising with memory
3 = Edge falling with memory
BU1 BU2
22.2 Signal conditioner 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2
22.4 Non-volatile
element 1 - Type
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2
22.6 Non-volatile
element 2 - Type
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2
23.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0 BU1 BU2
Byte
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
SIMOCODE pro
B-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
24.0 External fault 1 -
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = Panel reset
Bit[1] = Auto-reset
Bit[2] = Remote reset
Bit[3] = OFF command reset
BU1 BU2
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1 BU2
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1 BU2
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1 BU2
26.0 Limit monitor - Hysteresis for
limit monitors
Bit[4] 0 .. 15 5 BU1 BU2
28.0 Byte parameters (28)
28.0 Internal earth fault - Delay Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
29.0 Overload protection - Class Byte 5, 10 .. 35,
40
10 BU1
BU2
30.0 Motor protection - Delay
with overload operation
Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
31.0 Motor protection - Unbalance
level
Byte 0 .. 100 40 IM/UM
32.0 Unbalance protection - Delay
with unbalance
Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
33.0 Interlocking time Byte 0 .. 255 0
34.0 FB time Byte 0 .. 255 5 0 = Deactivated
35.0 Trip level I> Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM
36.0 Warning level I> Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM
37.0 Trip level I< Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM
38.0 Warning level I< Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM
39.0 Stalled rotor level Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM
40.0 Trip delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
41.0 Warning delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
42.0 Trip delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
43.0 Warning delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
44.0 Blocking delay Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
starts - Permissible starts
Byte 1 .. 255 1 BU1
BU2
46.0 Reserved Byte 0
48.0 Truth table 1 type 3I/1O Byte 0 .. 11111111B 0 BU1 BU2
Byte
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-25
1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM/UM and the conversion factor
52.0 Word parameters (32)
52.0 Motor protection - Cooling
down period
Word 600 .. 65535 3000 IM/UM
54.0 Motor protection - Pause time Word 0 .. 65535 0 0 = Deactivated IM/UM
56.0 Execution time Word 0 .. 65535 10 0 = Deactivated
starts - Time range for starts
Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
starts - Interlocking time
Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
62.0 Stop time level > Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
64.0 Timer 1 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
66.0 Timer 2 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
68.0 Counter 1 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
BU2
72.0 Reserved Word 0
74.0 Reserved Word 0
76.0 D-word parameters (36)
76.0 Enabled commands Bit[32] 0 .. 1..1B 0..0B
80.0 Motor protection - Set current
I
s
1
D-word
1)
30 IM/UM
84.0 Motor operating hours level > D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 0 BU1
BU2
88.0 Reserved D-word 0
Byte
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
SIMOCODE pro
B-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.12 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug )
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
4.0 BU - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
7.0 Reserved Byte 0
8.0 OP - LED green 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP OPD
12.0 OP - LED yellow 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP
16.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 105 Default: Status -
ON<
BU1 BU2
OFF
BU1 BU2
ON>
BU1 BU2
19.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 .. 255 128 Default: Event -
Overload
operation
BU1 BU2
Interlocking time
active
BU1 BU2
Remote mode
BU1 BU2
General fault
BU1 BU2
General warning
BU1 BU2
24.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
32.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
Table B-13: Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-27
48.0 Monitoring PLC/PCS input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
49.0 Motor protection - Emergency start Byte 0 .. 255 60 Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.4
IM UM
52.0 Mode selector S1 Byte 0 .. 255 61 Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.5
BU1 BU2
53.0 Mode selector S2 Byte 0 .. 255 2 Default: Fixed
level value "1"
BU1 BU2
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
SIMOCODE pro
B-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
54.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0 Dependen
t on the
control
function
55.0 Control station - Local control [LC] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0
56.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0
57.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 56 Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.0
58.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 57 Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.1
59.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 58 Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.2
60.0 Control Station - PC[DPV1] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0
61.0 Control Station - PC[DPV1] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0
62.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0
63.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0
64.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0
65.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0
66.0 Control function - ON < Byte 0 .. 255 73 Default: General
control station
ON <
67.0 Control function - OFF Byte 0 .. 255 74 Default: General
control station OFF
68.0 Control function - ON > Byte 0 .. 255 75 Default: General
control station
ON >
69.0 Control function - Feedback ON Byte 0 .. 255 101 Default: Status -
Motor current
flowing
70.0 External fault 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
74.0 External fault 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
78.0 Cold starting (TPF) Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
79.0 Test 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 59 Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.3
BU1 BU2
80.0 Test 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
81.0 Reset 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 62 Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.6
BU1 BU2
82.0 Reset 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
83.0 Reset 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-29
88.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
98.0 Timer 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
99.0 Timer 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
100.0 Timer 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
101.0 Timer 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
102.0 Counter 1 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
103.0 Counter 1 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
104.0 Counter 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
105.0 Counter 2 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
106.0 Counter 2 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
107.0 Counter 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
108.0 Signal conditioner 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
109.0 Signal conditioner 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
110.0 Signal conditioner 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
111.0 Signal conditioner 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
112.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
113.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
114.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
115.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
116.0 Flashing 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
119.0 Flickering 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
122.0 Analog parameters (44)
122.0 PLC/PCS analog input Byte 0 .. 255 16 Default: Max.
current I_max
BU1 BU2
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
SIMOCODE pro
B-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
4.0 Bit parameters (17)
4.0 3UF50 - Compatibility mode Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
4.1 3UF50 operating mode Bit 0, 1 0 0 = DPV0,
1 = DPV1
BU2
4.2 Reserved Bit 0
4.3 Reserved Bit 0
4.4 Reserved Bit 0
4.5 Reserved Bit 0
4.6 Reserved Bit 0
4.7 Reserved Bit 0
5.0 Reserved Bit 0
5.1 Reserved Bit 0
5.2 Reserved Bit 0
5.3 Reserved Bit 0
5.4 Analog module - Measuring range
Input
Bit 0, 1 0
0 = 0..20 mA
1 = 4-20 mA
AM
5.5 Analog module - Measuring range
Output
Bit 0, 1 0 AM
5.6 Reserved Bit 0
5.7 Reserved Bit 0
6.0 Overshooting/undershooting limit 1 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = ">"
(Overshooting)
1 = "<"
(Undershootin
g)
BU2
6.1 Overshooting/undershooting limit 2 Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
6.4 Line-to-line voltage Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No, 1 = Yes BU2
6.5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO
Contact,
1 = NC
Contact
BU2
6.6 Positioner response for OPO Bit 0, 1 0 0 = CLOSED, 1
= OPEN
BU2
6.7 Star-delta - Transformer mounting Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Delta
1 = In supply
cable
7.0 External fault 5 - Level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO
Contact
1 = NC
Contact
BU2
7.1 External fault 6 - Level Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
7.2 Reserved Bit 0
7.3 Reserved Bit 0
7.4 Monitoring external fault 5 Bit 0, 1 0
0 = Always
1= Motor ON
BU2
7.5 Monitoring external fault 6 Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
Table B-14: Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-31
7.6 Reserved Bit 0
7.7 Reserved Bit 0
8.0 Calculation module 2 - Operating
mode
Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Word
1= D-word
BU2
8.1 Reserved Bit 0
8.2 DM-F - Safe tripping function Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No
1 = Yes
DM-F
8.3 DM-F - Safety-oriented tripping
reset
Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual,
1 = Auto
DM-F
8.4 Timestamping active Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
8.5 Reserved Bit 0
8.6 Reserved Bit 0
8.7 Reserved Bit 0
9.0 DM-FL - Configuration 1 Bit 0, 1 0 Configurable
parameters
comparable
with the
module
configuration
DM-FL
9.1 DM-FL - Configuration 2 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
10.0 3UF50 basic type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU2
10.6 UVO operating mode Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 =
Deactivated,
1 = Activated
BU2
11.0 Trip monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 0 = ON
(always)
1 = ON+
(always, not
TPF)
2 = RUN
(motor ON, not
TPF)
UM
11.2 Warning monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 UM
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
Table B-14: Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1 (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12.0 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = ON
(always)
1 = ON+
(always, not
TPF)
2 = RUN
(motor ON, not
TPF)
3 = RUN+
(motor ON, not
TPF,
start-up
override)
AM
12.2 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM
12.4 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM
12.6 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM
13.0 Monitoring limit 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
14.6 AM - Active inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = 1 input
1 = 2 inputs
2 = 3 inputs
AM
15.0 DM - Delay inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6ms DM1 DM2
15.2 AM - Response for open circuit Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 =
Deactivated
1 = Signaling
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
AM
15.4 EM - Response to an external earth
fault
Bit[2] 1, 3 1 EM
15.6 EM - Response to warning of an
external earth fault
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 EM
16.4 DM-F - Test requirement response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 =
Deactivated
1 = Signaling
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
DM-F
16.6 DM-F - Safety-oriented tripping
response
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 DM-F
17.0 TM - Trip response T> Bit[2] 1, 3 3 TM
17.2 TM - Warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 TM
17.4 TM - Response to a sensor fault/
out of range
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 TM
17.6 TM - Active sensors Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = 1 sensor
1 = 2 sensors
2= 3 sensors
TM
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-33
18.0 Trip response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 =
Deactivated
1 = Signaling
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
UM
18.2 Warning response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
18.4 Trip response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
18.6 Warning response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
19.0 Trip response cos phi< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
19.2 Warning response cos phi< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
19.4 Trip response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
19.6 Warning response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
20.0 Trip response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM
20.2 Warning response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM
20.4 Trip response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM
20.6 Warning response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM
22.0 Response - External fault 5 Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 0 =
Deactivated
1 = Signaling
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
BU2
22.2 Response - External fault 6 Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU2
23.0 Analog value recording - Trigger
edge
Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = Positive
1 = Negative
BU2
25.0 Timer 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With
closing
delay
1 = Closing
delay with
memory
2 = With
opening
delay
3 = With
fleeting
closing
BU2
25.2 Timer 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
SIMOCODE pro
B-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
25.4 Signal conditioner 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-
inverting
1 =
Inverting
2 = Edge rising
with memory
3 = Edge
falling with
memory
BU2
25.6 Signal conditioner 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
26.0 Non-volatile
element 3 - Type
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
26.2 Non-volatile
element 4 - Type
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
26.4 Calculation module 2 - Operator Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = +,
1 = -,
2 =
*
,
3 = /
28.0 TM - sensor type Bit[3]
+Bit
000B - 100B 000B 000B = PT100,
001B = PT1000
010B = KTY83
011B = KTY84
100B = NTC
TM
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] =
Panel reset,
Bit[1] =
Auto-reset,
Bit[2] =
Remote reset,
Bit[3] = OFF
command
reset
BU2
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU2
32.0 Truth table 7 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 .. 1111B 0 BU2
32.4 Truth table 8 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 .. 1111B 0 BU2
33.0 I
s
1 conversion factor - Denominator Bit[4] 0 .. 15 0 BU2
33.4 I
s
2 conversion factor - Denominator Bit[4] 0 .. 15 0 BU2
34.0 Hysteresis P - Cos phi - U Bit[4] 0 .. 15 5 1 % UM
34.4 Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA Bit[4] 0 .. 15 5 1 % AM
35.0 Hysteresis free limits Bit[4] 0 .. 15 5 1 % BU2
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-35
37.0 EM - Delay Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 EM
38.0 Trip level cos phi< Byte 0 .. 100 1 % 0 UM
39.0 Warning level cos phi< Byte 0 .. 100 1 % 0 UM
40.0 Trip level U< Byte 0 .. 255 8 V 0 UM
41.0 Warning level U< Byte 0 .. 255 8 V 0 UM
42.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM
43.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM
44.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM
45.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM
46.0 Trip delay P> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
47.0 Warning delay P> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
48.0 Trip delay P< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
49.0 Warning delay P< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
50.0 Trip delay cos phi< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
51.0 Warning delay cos phi< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
52.0 Trip delay U< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
53.0 Warning delay U< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM
54.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM
55.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM
56.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM
57.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM
58.0 Delay limit 1 Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 BU2
62.0 TM - Hysteresis Byte 0 .. 255 1 K 5 TM
63.0 Max. star time Byte 0 .. 255 1 s 20 Star-delta
starter
64.0 UVO time Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 0 BU2
65.0 Staggering time Byte 0 .. 255 1 s 0 BU2
66.0 Analog value recording -
Sampling rate
Byte 0 .. 20 5 % 0 BU2
67.0 Calculation module 2 -
Denominator 1
Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
68.0 Calculation module 2 - Counter 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
Denominator
Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
70.0 Truth table 4 type 3I/1O Byte 0 .. 11111111B 0 BU2
73.0 Calculation module 2 - Counter 1 Byte -128 .. 127 0 BU2
Denominator 2
Byte -128 .. 127 0 BU2
75.0 DM-F - Test requirement level Byte 0 .. 255 1 week 0 BU2
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
SIMOCODE pro
B-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM/UM and the conversion factor
76.0 Word parameters (33)
76.0 Analog module - Start value output Word 0 .. 65535 0 Value for
0/4mA
AM
78.0 Analog Module - End value output Word 0 .. 65535 27648 Value for 20
mA
AM
80.0 TM - Trip level T> Word 0 .. 65535 1 K 0 TM
82.0 TM - Warning level T> Word 0 .. 65535 1 K 0 TM
84.0 Limit monitor 1 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
92.0 Timer 3 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms 0 BU2
94.0 Timer 4 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms 0 BU2
100.0 Change-over pause Word 0 .. 65535 10 ms 0
102.0 Analog value recording -
Sampling rate
Word 1 .. 50000 1 ms 100 BU2
104.0 I
s
1 conversion factor - Counter Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
106.0 I
s
2 conversion factor - Counter Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
108.0 D-word parameters (37)
108.0 Motor protection - Set current I
s
2 D-Word
1)
10 mA 0
112.0 Trip level P> D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM
116.0 Warning level P> D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM
120.0 Trip level P< D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM
124.0 Warning level P< D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM
128.0 Truth table 9
type 5I/2O - Output 1
Bit [32] 0 .. 1..1B 0 BU2
132.0 Truth table 9
type 5I/2O - Output 2
Bit [32] 0 .. 1..1B 0 BU2
136.0 Calculation module 2, offset D-word -0x80000000 ..
0x7FFFFFFF
0 BU2
140.0 Calculation module 1, counter/
offset
D-word 2x
-32768..32767
0 BU2
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-37
(plug )
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
4.0 DM1 - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1
DM-F
5.0 DM1 - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1
FM-F
6.0 DM2 - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2
7.0 DM2 - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2
8.0 Reserved Byte 0
9.0 Reserved Byte 0
12.0 Timestamping - Input 0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
20.0 Analog value recording - Trigger input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
22.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0 Dependen
t on the
control
function
23.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0
24.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0
25.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0
26.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0
27.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0
28.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0
29.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP]<>/
<<>>
Byte 0 .. 255 0
30.0 Control function - ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0
31.0 Control function - ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0
32.0 Auxiliary control input - FC Byte 0 .. 255 0
33.0 Auxiliary control input - FO Byte 0 .. 255 0
34.0 Auxiliary control input - TC Byte 0 .. 255 0
35.0 Auxiliary control input - TO Byte 0 .. 255 0
36.0 External fault 5 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
37.0 External fault 6 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
Table B-15: Data record 133 - Extended device parameters
SIMOCODE pro
B-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
40.0 External fault 5 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
41.0 External fault 6 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
44.0 UVO fault Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
45.0 OPO error Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
46.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
64.0 Timer 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
65.0 Timer 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
66.0 Timer 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
67.0 Timer 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
68.0 Counter 3 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
69.0 Counter 3 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
70.0 Counter 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
71.0 Counter 4 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
72.0 Counter 4 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
73.0 Counter 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
74.0 Signal conditioner 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
75.0 Signal conditioner 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
76.0 Signal conditioner 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
77.0 Signal conditioner 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
78.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
79.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
80.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
Table B-15: Data record 133 - Extended device parameters (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-39
81.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
88.0 Analog parameters (45)
88.0 Analog module - Output Byte 0 .. 255 0 AM
89.0 Analog input limit 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
93.0 Calculation module 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
94.0 Analog value recording - Analog input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
95.0 PLC/PCS analog input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
98.0 Calculation module 2 - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
99.0 Calculation module 2 - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Informa-
tion
Table B-15: Data record 133 - Extended device parameters (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.15 Data record 139 - Marking
The diagnostics
External fault 1 to 6 (status information, warnings and faults)
Limit 1 to 4 (status information)
TM warning T>/tripping T> (status information, warnings and faults)
Warning/tripping 0/4 - 20 mA mA<> (status information, warnings and
faults)
can be parameterized to have various meanings e.g. fill level >, bearing hot,
etc. To simplify diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device. These
can be created, read out and displayed, for example, with SIMOCODE ES
The texts do not contain any functions.
Byte.Bit Designation Type Information
10.0 Marking - External fault 1 Byte[10] BU1 BU2
50.0 Marking - External fault 5 Byte[10] BU2
60.0 Marking - External fault 6 Byte[10] BU2
90.0 Marking - Limit 1 Byte[10] BU2
100.0 Marking limit 2 Byte[10] BU2
130.0 Marking - TM warning T> Byte[10] BU2
140.0 Marking - TM trip T> Byte[10] BU2
150.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10] BU2
160.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2
170.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10] BU2
180.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2
Table B-16: Data record 139 - Marking
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-41
B.16 Data Record 160 - Communication parameters
Notice
Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is recognized
automatically. The current baud rate is read.
B.17 Data record 165 - Identification
BU1 BU2
4.0 Station address Byte
5.0 Baud rate Byte
6.0 to 9.0 Reserved Byte[6]
10.0 PROFIsafe address (read only) Word BU2
Table B-17: Data record 160 - Communication parameters
BU1 BU2
4.0 Plant identifier Byte[32]
36.0 Location designation Byte[22]
58.0 Date Byte[16]
112.0 Comment Byte[54]
Table B-18: Data record 165 - Identification
SIMOCODE pro
B-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.18 Data record 202 - Acyclic receive
Description
The acyclic receive data can be used for any functions. The receive data is
available as device-internal outputs (sockets).
BU1 BU2
4.0 Acyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Bit
6.0 Acyclic receive - Analog value Word
Table B-19: Data record 202 - Acyclic receive
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-43
B.19 Data record 203 - Acyclic send
Description
Any data can be transmitted via the acyclic send data. The send data is
available as device-internal inputs (plugs).
0.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Bit
BU1 BU2
Table B-20: Data record 203 - Acyclic send
SIMOCODE pro
B-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.20 Data record 224 - Password protection
Description
Password protection ON
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is
activated and the password is accepted. If, at the time of receiving,
"Password protection ON" and the password are not the same, the event
"Event - Wrong password" is set and no change is carried out.
Password protection OFF
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection
is deactivated. If the password is false, the event "Event - Wrong password" is
set and no change is carried out.
Table B-21: Data record 224 - Password protection
BU1 BU2
4.0 Control flag: 0 = password protection OFF
1 = password protection ON
Bit
4.1 Reserved Bit[31]
8.0 Password Byte[8] BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-45
B.21 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for
predefined control functions
B.21.1 Overload relay
Table B-22: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, overload relay
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - Input
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.3 Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
SIMOCODE pro
B-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.2 Direct starter
Table B-23: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, direct starter
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.1 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions - Test/Reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> Mode selector S1
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-47
B.21.3 Reversing starter
Table B-24: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, reversing starter
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <
Bit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON <
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active
SIMOCODE pro
B-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.4 Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Table B-25: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Cyclic receive data
Cyclic send data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-49
B.21.5 Star-delta starter

Table B-26: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, star-delta starter
Cyclic receive data
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.2 Status - ON
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
SIMOCODE pro
B-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.6 Star-delta reversing starter

Table B-27: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, star-delta reversing starter
Cyclic receive data
Cyclic send data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-51
B.21.7 Dahlander
Table B-28: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, Dahlander
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >>
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>
SIMOCODE pro
B-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.8 Dahlander reversing starter
Table B-29: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, Dahlander reversing starter
Cyclic receive data
Bit 1.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <<
Cyclic send data
Bit 1.0 Status - ON <<
Bit 1.2 Status ON <
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-53
B.21.9 Pole changing starter
Table B-30: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, pole-changing starter
Cyclic receive data
Cyclic send data
SIMOCODE pro
B-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.10 Pole-changing reversing starter
Table B-31: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, pole-changing reversing starter
Cyclic receive data
Bit 1.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <<
Cyclic send data
Bit 1.0 Status - ON <<
Bit 1.2 Status ON <
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-55
B.21.11 Solenoid valve
Table B-32: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, solenoid valve
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.1 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> CLOSED
Bit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OPEN
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (Closed)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (Open)
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Not connected
SIMOCODE pro
B-56 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.12 Positioner
Table B-33: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, positioner
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> CLOSED
Bit 0.1 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> STOP
Bit 0.2 Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OPEN
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON < (Closed)
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (Stop)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (Open)
Bit 1.0 Status - Positioner runs in open direction
Bit 1.2 Status - Positioner runs in close direction
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 B-57
B.21.13 Soft starter
Table B-34: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, soft starter
Cyclic receive data
Cyclic send data
SIMOCODE pro
B-58 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.14 Soft starter with reversing contactor
Table B-35: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, soft starter with reversing contactor
Cyclic receive data
Cyclic send data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 C-1
Dimension drawings C
In this chapter
This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the
SIMOCODE pro system components.
Target groups
Configurators
Technicians.
Necessary knowledge
Thorough knowledge of switchgear configuration.
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C.1 3UF70 basic unit
C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit
Fig. C-1: SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit
C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit
Fig. C-2: SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit
86
5 36
8
0 1
0
6
1
2
5
4
45
8
0 1
0
6
1
2
5
45
115
5 65
4
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 C-3
C.2 3UF710 current measuring module
3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A
Fig. C-3: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A
45 40 5
8
4
3
8
T1 T3
7,5
T2
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A
Fig. C-4: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A
55 67
9
4
6
5
14
5
T1
T2
T3
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 C-5
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A
120
95
7
9
9
5
5 140
7
8
25
7
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A
Fig. C-6: Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A
120
95
37 17
9
7
9
9
5
1
1
9
7 47
140
5
8
4
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 C-7
3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A
145
5
7
25 50
11
9
8
5
1
2
2
1
4
7
125
6
148
60,5
6
0
,
5
6
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C.3 Current/voltage measuring modules
3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A
Fig. C-8: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A
3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A
7
1
1
21
4
5
85
5
3
1
6
6
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 C-9
3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A
20
2
3
1
2
94
5
5
9
2
6
0
5
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A
Fig. C-10: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A
l20
95
7
9
9
5
5
l40
7
8
25
7
36
73
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 C-11
3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A
Fig. C-11: Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A
3
79
140
47 5
120
95
1
1
9
9
5
7
9
9
17 37
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A
145
6
149
67
8
8
3
2 125
1
4
7
1
2
2
1
1
25 48
1
1
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 C-13
C.4 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels
C.4.1 3UF7200 operator panel
Fig. C-13: 3UF7200 operator panel
C.4.2 3UF7210 operator panel with display
Fig. C-14: 3UF7210 operator panel with display
29 8 7
2
9
3
6
89
96
5
5
6
0
29
33
91,5
96
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C.5 Expansion modules/decoupling module
Fig. C-15: Expansion modules/decoupling module
Versions:
3UF73 digital modules
3UF7500 earth-fault module
3UF7700 temperature module
3UF7400 analog module
3UF715 decoupling module
115 5 4
1
0
6
8
9
2
22,5
1
1
0
15
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 C-15
C.6 Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-F PROFIsafe
Fig. C-16: Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe
Dimension drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C.7 Accessories
C.7.1 Door adapter
Fig. C-17: Door adapter
C.7.2 Operator panel adapter
Fig. C-18: Operator panel adapter
3
9
46
1
7
37
3
24,5
+0,5
1
3
.
5
+
0
.
5
R
2
3
.
4
0
.
1
37
0,1
IP54
IP54
26.5
+0.5
1
3
.
5
+
0
.
5
R
2
3
.
4
37
l00
62
38
6
3
5
l
37
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-1
Technical data D
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about SIMOCODE pro technical data.
Target groups
Configurators.
Necessary knowledge
Thorough knowledge of switchgear configuration
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D.1 Common technical data
Specifications EN 60204-1, EN 1760-1, DIN EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 61508
Test verification documents
Certificates:
Permiss. ambient temperature
In operation -25 C - +60 C
1)
For storage and transport -40 C - +80 C
2)
Site altitude above sea level
< 2000 m
< 3000 m Max. +50 C (no safe isolation)
< 4000 m Max. +40 C (no safe isolation)
Degree of protection
(according to IEC 60529)
All components (except current
measuring module with bus
connection, operator panel and door
adapter)
IP20
Current measuring module with
bus connection
IP00
Operator panel (front) and door
adapter (front) with cover
IP54
Shock resistance (sine pulse)
according to DIN EN 60068-2-27
15 g / 11 ms
Mounting position Any
Frequencies 50/60 Hz 5 %
EMC stability according to
IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1,
SN 27095, NE21
DM-F: IEC 61326-3-1
Corresponds to Degree of Severity 3
Conducted interference, burst
according to IEC 61000-4-4
2 kV (power ports) overvoltage limiter is required
for inductive loads.
1 kV (signal ports)
Conducted interference, high
frequency according to
IEC 61000-4-6
10 V
Conducted interference, surge
according to IEC 61000-4-5
2 kV (line to earth)
1 kV (line to line)
Electrostatic discharging,
ESD according to IEC 61000-4-2
8 kV (air discharge)
6 kV (contact discharge)
3)
Field-related interference according
to IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-3
1)
For 3UF721 operator panel with display 0 C - 60 C
2)
For 3UF721 operator panel with display -20 C - 70 C
3)
For 3UF721 operator panel with display 4 kV
Table D-1: Common technical data
This is a Class A product. This product can
cause radio interference if used in a
domestic environment. Therefore, the user
may need to implement suitable
countermeasures.
Conducted and emitted
interference
DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)
(corresponds to Degree of Severity A)
Safe isolation
according to IEC 60947-1
All SIMOCODE pro circuits are isolated from each other
according to IEC 60947-1, i.e. dimensioned with double
creepage distance and air clearance.
Notice
Please observe the information in the "Safe Isolation" test
report, No. 2668.
Connecting cable 3UF73
Rated voltage
Rated operating voltage
300 V
24 V
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D.2 Technical data of the basic units
Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED Red: "Function test was negative, device is blocked"
Green: "Ready for operation"
Yellow: "Memory module or addressing plug detected"
OFF: "No control supply voltage"
Green "BUS" LED Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/
programming device"
Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
"TEST/RESET" button Resetting the device after tripping
Function test (system self-test)
Operation of memory module, addressing plug
System interfaces
Front For connecting an operator panel or expansion modules. The
memory module, addressing plug or a PC cable can also be
connected to the system interface for parameterization
purposes.
Bottom For connecting a current measuring module or current/
voltage measuring module
Interface design
Connection system
RS485
9-pole SUB-D socket (12 MBit)
Terminals (1.5 MBit), connection cross section as per control
circuit
Connection of a PROFIBUS DP cable via terminal connection or
9-pole SUB-D socket.
Rated control supply voltage U
s

(according to DIN EN 61131-2)
110 V - 240 V AC/DC 50/60 Hz 24 V DC
Operating range 0.85 x Us - 1.1 x Us - 0.8 x Us - 1.2 x Us -
Power consumption
Basic unit 1 (3UF7000) 7 VA/5 W 5 W
Basic unit 2 (3UF7010)
(including two expansion modules
connected to basic unit 2)
10 VA 7 W 7 W
Rated insulation
voltage U
i
300 V (for Degree of Pollution 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage
U
imp
4 kV
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-5
Mains buffering time
(longer power failures lead to
shutdown of the relay outputs
(monostable))
SIMOCODE pro C -
24 V DC
110 V - 240 V AC/DC
SIMOCODE pro V -
24 V DC
SIMOCODE pro V -
110 V - 240 V AC/DC
Type 50 ms
Type 50 ms
Type 200 ms
Relay outputs:
Number 3 monostable relay outputs
Function Isolated NO contacts (NO contact response parameterizable
via internal signal conditioning), 2 relay outputs with common
ground, one separate relay output, freely-assignable to control
functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or operating
state status information.)
Mandatory short-circuit protection
for auxiliary contacts (relay
outputs)
Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A
(IEC 60947-5-1)
Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic
(IEC 60947-5-1)
Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (I
k
< 500 A)
Rated uninterrupted current 5 A
6 A at max. +50 C
Rated switching capacity AC-15 6 A/24 V AC 6 A/120 V AC 3 A / 230 V AC
DC-13 2 A/24 V DC 0.55 A/60 V DC 0.25 A/125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 inputs with a common ground that are supplied via the device
electronics (24 V DC) for measuring process signals (e.g. local
control station, key-operated switch, limit switch, etc.), freely-
assignable to control functions.
24 V DC
Cable lengths (single)
Input characteristic
300 m
Type 1 according to EN 61131-2
Thermistor motor protection
(PTC binary)
Total cold resistance < 1.5 kOhm
Response value 3.4 kOhm - 3.8 kOhm
Return value 1.5 kOhm - 1.65 kOhm
Cable lengths Cross section: 2.5 mm
2
1.5 mm
2
0.5 mm
2
Length: 2 x 250 m
2 x 150 m
2 x 50 m
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Table D-2: Technical data of the basic units
Connection removable terminal block with screw connection
Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN - 10.3 LB.IN
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections:
- Solid 2x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm - 4 mm
2
2x AWG 20 to 14/1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve 2x 0.5 mm
2
-

1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
-

2.5 mm
2
2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-7
D.3 Technical data of the current measuring modules or
current/voltage measuring modules
Mounting
Set current I
s
= 0.3 A - 3 A;
2.4 A - 25 A; 10 A - 100 A
(3UF71.0, 3UF71.1, 3UF71.2)
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
Set current I
s
= 20 A - 200 A
(3UF7103, 3UF7 113)
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails, screw
attachment onto the mounting plate or direct mounting onto
the contactor
Set current I
s
= 63 A - 630 A
(3UF7104, 3UF7 114)
Screw attachment to the mounting plate or direct mounting
onto the contactor
System interface For connection to a basic unit or decoupling module
Main circuit
Set current I
s
3UF71.0: 0.3 A - 3 A 3UF71.3: 20 A - 200 A
3UF71.1: 2.4 A - 25 A 3UF71.4: 63 A - 630 A
3UF71.2: 10 A - 100 A
Rated insulation voltage U
i
(at
Degree of Pollution 3)
690 V
1)
Rated operational voltage U
e
690 V
U
imp
6 kV
2)
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Type of current Three-phase current
Short circuit Additional short-circuit protection in main circuit
required
3)
Accuracy of current measuring
(ranging from 1 times the
minimum set current I
u
to 8 times
the maximum set current I
o
)
+/- 3 %
Typical measuring range of the
voltage measuring
Line-to-line voltage/voltage
between lines (e.g. U
L1L2
)
Phase voltage (e.g. U
L1
)
110 V - 690 V (only the phase voltages are available in the
system as measured values)
65 V - 400 V
Accuracy
Voltage measuring in the range
230 V - 400 V
Cos phi measurement (in the
nominal load range cos phi = 0.4 -
0.8)
Apparent power measurement (in
the nominal load range)
+/- 3 % (typical)
+/- 5 % (typical)
+/- 5 % (typical)
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1) for 3UF7103 and 3UF7104 up to 1000 V
2) for 3UF7103 and 3UF7104 up to 8 kV
3) More information can be found at http://www.siemens.com/simocode and D.7 "Short-
circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and
690 V" on Page D-24.
4) Screw connection is possible with an appropriate 3RT19... box terminal.
5) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section
larger than 95 mm
2
, the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain phase
separation.
6) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section
larger than 240 mm
2
and when connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables
with a cross section larger than 185 mm
2
, the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover
is required to maintain phase separation.
Table D-3: Technical data of the current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules
Notes on voltage measuring:
must be used with a decoupling
module for certain network types.
See table 1-35 in Chapter 1.7.6
"Decoupling module (DCM) for
current/voltage measuring modules,
SIMOCODE pro V device series.".
Caution
Note that the supply cables for voltage measurement may
require additional cable protection.
Through-hole opening Diameter
Set current 0.3 A - 3 A;
2.4 A - 25 A
7.5 mm
Set current 10 A - 100 A 14.0 mm
Set current 20 A - 200 A 25.0 mm
Bus connection
4)
Set current I
s
20 A - 200 A 63 A - 630 A
Connection screw M8x25 M10x30
Tightening torque 10 Nm - 14 Nm 14 Nm - 24 Nm
Solid with cable lug 16 mm
2
- 95 mm
2 4)5)
50 mm
2
- 240 mm
2

4)6)
Stranded with cable lug 25 mm
2
- 120 mm
2 4)5)
70 mm
2
- 240 mm
2

4)6)
AWG cable 6 kcmil - 300 kcmil 1/0 kcmil - 500 kcmil
Connection for voltage measurement
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
- Solid 2x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
-

2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-9
D.4 Technical data of the decoupling module
Table D-4: Technical data of the decoupling module
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs.
Display
Green "READY" LED
System interfaces The left interface is for connection to a basic unit or an
expansion module, the right interface is exclusively for
connection to a current/voltage measuring module.
Connection cross sections
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
- Solid 2x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm - 4 mm
2
2x AWG 20 to 14/1x AWG 20 to 12
2
-

1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
-

2.5 mm
2
2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D.5 Technical data of the expansion modules
D.5.1 Technical data of the digital modules
Display
Green "READY" LED Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion
module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module or the operator panel
Control circuit
Rated insulation
voltage U
i
300 V (for Degree of Pollution 3)
U
imp
4 kV
Relay outputs
Number
Function
Stipulated short-circuit protection
for auxiliary contacts (relay
outputs)
Rated uninterrupted current
Rated switching capacity
2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on version)
Isolated NO contacts (NC contact response parameterizable
via internal signal conditioning), relay outputs all with common
ground, freely-assignable to control functions (e.g. network,
star or delta contactor or operating state status information).
Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A
(IEC 60947-5-1)
Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic
(IEC 60947-5-1)
Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (I
k
< 500 A)
5 A
6 A at max. +50 C
AC-15 6 A/24 V AC 6 A/120 V AC 3 A/230 V AC
DC-13 2 A/24 V DC 0.55 A/60 V DC 0.25 A/125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 externally supplied, isolated inputs (24 V DC or 110 V - 240 V
AC/DC, depending on version), with common ground for
measuring process signals (e.g. local control station, key-
operated switches, limit switches, ...), freely-assignable to
control functions.
24 V DC
300 m
Type 2 according to EN 61131-2
110 V - 240 V AC/DC
200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF/km)
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-11
Table D-5: Technical data of the expansion modules
Connection removable terminal block with screw connection
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
- Solid 2x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D.5.2 Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules
Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or screw
attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Enclosure width 45 mm
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a cur-
rent measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module or the
operator panel
Rated control supply
voltage U
s
(according to
DIN EN 61131-2)
AC/DC 110 V - 240 V 50/60 Hz DC 24 V
Operating range 24 V DC: 0.8 up to 1.2 U
s
110 V - 240 V AC/DC: 0.85 up to 1.1 U
s
Power consumption
DM-F Local:
DC 24 V: 3 W
AC/DC 110 V - 240 V: 9.5 VA/4.5 W
DM-F PROFIsafe:
DC 24 V: 4 W
AC/DC 110 V - 240 V: 11,0 VA/5.5 W
Safe isolation according
to IEC 60947-1
Between relay enabling circuits/relay outputs
and electronics
Rated insulation
voltage U
i
300 V (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse with-
stand voltage U
imp
4 kV
Power loss ride-through
time
DC 24 V: typ. 20 ms at 0,8xU
s
AC/DC 110 V - 240 V: typ. 20 ms at 0,85xU
s
typ. 200 ms at 230 V
Relay outputs
Quantity
Function
2 monostable relay outputs
Common connection is internally disconnected in a fail-safe manner
by a relay enabling circuit
Normally open contact, freely assignable to the control functions
Electrical service life of
relay outputs
0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 230 V/3 A)
Relay enabling circuits
Quantity 2 common switching-type, fail-safe relay enabling circuits
Function Fail-safe normally open contacts
Prescribed short-circuit
protection for relay
enabling circuits/relay
outputs
Fuse links operating class gL/gG 4 A (IEC 60947-5-1), separate for
each relay enabling circuit
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-13
Table D-6: Technical data of the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
Rated uninterrupted cur-
rent of relay enabling
circuits
5 A
Rated switching
capacity of relay
enabling circuits
AC-15: 3 A / AC 24 V; 3 A / AC 120 V; 1,5 A / AC 230 V
DC-13: 4 A / DC 24 V; 0,55 A / DC 60 V; 0,22 A / DC 125 V; 0,11 A / DC 250 V
Electrical service life of
relay enabling circuits
0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 240 V/ 2 A)
Switching rate of the
relay enabling circuits
2000/h
Connection Removable terminal block with screw connection
Tightening torque Torque: 7 lb.in to 10.3 lb.in
0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
Connection cross-sec-
tions:
- solid 2x 0.5 mm
2
... 2.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
... 4 mm
2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded with
end sleeve
2x 0.5 mm
2
... 1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
... 2.5 mm
2
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D.5.3 Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module
LED display
DM-F Local
Color Meaning
"READY" OFF System interface disconnected/supply voltage too
low/device defective
Green Device is ready for operation/system interface OK
Flashing
green
Device is ready for operation/system interface is
inactive or faulty
"DEVICE" OFF Supply voltage too low
Green Device is ready for operation
Flashing
green
Self-test
Yellow Configuration mode
Flashing
yellow
Configuration fault
Red Device is defective or interrupted
"OUT" OFF Safety-oriented output inactive
Green Safety-oriented output active
Flashing
green
Feedback circuit not closed when starting condition
has been fulfilled
"IN" OFF Input inactive
Green Input active
Flashing
green
Fault recognized (e.g. cross circuit at the input, sensor
simultaneity not fulfilled)
"GF" OFF No general fault
Red General fault (wiring fault, cross circuit, configuration
fault)
Flashing red General fault (enabling circuit fault, simultaneity not
fulfilled)
"1" OFF Cross-circuit detection OFF
Yellow Cross-circuit detection ON
Flashing
yellow
Configuration mode awaits confirmation
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-15
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
"2" OFF NC contact/NO contact
Yellow NC contact/NC contact
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
"3" OFF 2 x 1-channel
Yellow 1 x 2-channel
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
"4" OFF Delay time Y12, Y22, Y34 50 ms
Yellow Delay time Y12, Y22, Y34 10 ms
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
"5" OFF Sensor circuit, automatic start
Yellow Sensor circuit, monitored start
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
"6" OFF Cascade input 1, automatic start
Yellow Cascade input 1, monitored start
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
"7" OFF With start-up testing
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Table D-7: Technical data of the digital module DM-F Loca
Yellow Without start-up testing
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
"8" OFF Automatic starting after power failure
Yellow No automatic starting after power failure
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
DIP switch Setting of the safety functions
SET/RESETbutton
Application of parameters set via DIP switch
Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" on basic unit)
Inputs with safety relay
function
2 sensor inputs 24 V DC (Y12, Y22)
Supply via terminal T1 or T2 with cross-circuit monitoring or external
supply without cross-circuit monitoring
Functions parameterizable via DIP switch
1 start signal input 24 V DC (Y33)
For monitored reconnection of the relay enabling circuits after a
safety-oriented disconnection
Supply via terminal T2 or T3
1 cascading input 24 V DC (1)
For use in connection with a higher-level safety relay
Supply via terminal T2 or T3
1 feedback circuit input 24 V DC (Y34)
For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply
contactors via seriesconnected auxiliary switch normally-closed
contacts
Supply via terminal T3
Cable length sensor
input and start signal
input (single)
1500 m
Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-17
D.5.4 Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module
LED display
DM-F PROFIsafe
Color Meaning
"READY" OFF System interface disconnected/supply voltage too
low/device defective
Green Device is ready for operation/system interface OK
Flashing
green
Device is ready for operation/system interface is
inactive or faulty
"DEVICE" OFF Supply voltage too low
Green Device is ready for operation
Red Device is defective or interrupted
"OUT" OFF Safety-oriented output inactive
Green Safety-oriented output active
Flashing
green
Feedback circuit not closed when starting condition
has been fulfilled
"GF" OFF No general fault
Red General fault (PROFIsafe inactive, incorrect PROFIsafe
address, wiring fault, device defective)
"1" Yellow PROFIsafe address 1
DIP switch Setting of the safety functions
SET/RESET button
Application of parameters set via DIP switch
Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" onbasic unit)
Inputs (binary)
3 inputs 24 V DC (83, 85, 89)
Supply via terminal 84 or external supply
Common connected, electrically isolated inputs for acquiring process-
signals (e.g., local control station, keyswitch, limit switch, etc.), fre-
elassignable to control functions
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Table D-8: Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
Safety-related technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules:
See chapter "Technical Data" in the system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules
SIMOCODE pro Safety".
Input with safety relay
function
1 feedback circuit input 24 V DC (91/FBC)
For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply
contactors via series-connected auxiliary switch normally-closed
contacts
Supply via terminal 90/T
Cable length (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-19
D.5.5 Technical data of the analog module
Display
Control circuit
Type of connection: 2-wire connection
Inputs:
Channels 2 (passive)
Parameterizable measuring
ranges
0/4 mA - 20 mA
Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the switchgear
cabinet; shielding mandatory for cables over 30 m
Max. input current
(destruction limit)
40 mA
Accuracy 1 %
Input resistance 50 Ohm
Conversion time 150 ms
Resolution 12 bit
Open circuit detection For measuring range 4 mA - 20 mA
Isolation of the inputs to the
device electronics
No
Output:
Channels 1
Parameterizable output range 0/4 mA - 20 mA
Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the switchgear
cabinet; shielding mandatory for cables over 30 m
Max. output voltage 30 V DC
Accuracy 1 %
Max. output load 500 Ohm
Resolution 12 bit
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Table D-9: Technical data of the analog module
D.5.6 Technical data of the earth-fault module
Table D-10: Technical data of the earth-fault module
Short-circuit proof Yes
Isolation of the output to the
device electronics
No
Connection:
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
- Solid 2x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
-

2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14
Display
Control circuit
Connectable 3UL22 summation
current transformer with rated
fault currents I
N
I
Earth fault
< 50 % I
N
I
Earth fault
> 100 % I
N
0.3 / 0.5 / 1 A
No tripping
Tripping
Response delay (conversion time) 300 ms - 500 ms, additionally delayable
Connection:
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
- Solid 2x 0.5 mm
2
-

2.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-21
D.5.7 Technical data of the temperature module
Table D-11: Technical data of the temperature module
Display
Sensor circuit
Type of connection 2 or 3-wire connection
Typical sensor current:
PT100 1 mA (typical)
PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC 0.2 mA (typical)
Open circuit detection/short-circuit
detection/measuring range:
PT100/PT1000 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 C - +500 C
KTY83-110 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 C - +175 C
KTY84 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -40 C - +300 C
NTC Short circuit; measuring range: +80 C - +160 C
Measuring accuracy at an ambient
temperature of 20 C (T20)
<+ 2 K
Deviation due to ambient
temperature (as % of measuring
range)
0.05 per K deviation from T20
Isolation of the inputs to the
device electronics
No
Connection:
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
- Solid 2x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D.6 Technical data of the operator panels
D.6.1 Technical data of the operator panel
Table D-12: Technical data of the operator panels
Mounting Installation in a switchgear cabinet door or in a front panel, with
IP54 system interface cover.
Display
Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED Red: Blocked
Green:
Flashing green:
Yellow:
OFF:
"Function test was negative, device is
blocked"
"Ready for operation"
"No connection to basic unit"
"Memory module or addressing plug
detected"
"No control supply voltage"
Green "BUS" LED Continuous light:
Flashing:
"Communication with PLC/PCS"
"Baud rate recognized/communication
with PC/programming device"
Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/
flashing:
"Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
3 yellow LEDs / 4 green LEDs For freely assigning any status signals
Buttons
Test/Reset Resetting the device after tripping
Function test (system self-test)
Operation of memory module, addressing plug
Control buttons Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable
System interfaces
Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a PC
cable for parameterization purposes
Rear For connecting a cable to the basic unit or the expansion
module
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-23
D.6.2 Technical data of the operator panel with display
Table D-13: Technical data of the operator panel with display
Mounting Installation in a switchgear cabinet door or in a front panel,
with IP54 system interface cover.
Display
Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED Red: Blocked
Green:
Flashing green:
Yellow:
OFF:
"Function test was negative, device is
blocked"
"Ready for operation"
"No connection to basic unit"
"Memory module or addressing plug
detected"
"No control supply voltage"
Green "BUS" LED Continuous light:
Flashing:
"Communication with PLC/PCS"
"Baud rate recognized/communication
with PC/programming device"
Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/
flashing:
"Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
4 green LEDs For freely-assigning any status signals (preferably for feedback
on the switching state, e.g. ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT)
Display Graphic display of current measured values, operating and
diagnostics data or status information.
Buttons
Control buttons Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable
Arrow keys Navigation in the display menu
Softkeys Various functions, depending upon the menu, e.g. test,
reset, operation of memory module and addressing plug
System interfaces
Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a PC
cable for parameterization purposes.
Rear Connection to the basic unit or expansion module
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D.7 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for
short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V
6
9
0
V
/
5
0
k
A
6
9
0
V
/
1
0
0
k
A
6
9
0
V
/
5
0
k
A
4
1
5
V
/
5
0
k
A
6
0
0
V
S
ta
n
d
a
r
d
s
h
o
r
t-
c
ir
c
u
it
B
r
itis
h
R
a
tin
g
s
L
V
H
R
C
T
y
p
e
3
N
A
T
y
p
e
3
N
D
s
ta
n
d
a
rd
s
U
L
lis
te
d
D
IA
Z
E
D
T
y
p
e
5
S
B
a
M
F
u
s
e
s
F
u
s
e
s
O
v
e
r
lo
a
d
r
e
la
y
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
l
a
s
s
O
v
e
r
lo
a
d
r
e
la
y
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
l
a
s
s
O
v
e
r
lo
a
d
r
e
la
y
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
8
8
S
B
E
S
5
e
p
y
T
D
E
Z
O
E
N
R
K
5
/C
L
A
S
S
L
S
e
ttin
g
r
a
n
g
e
1
5
S
e
ttin
g
r
a
n
g
e
3
0
3
5
4
0
S
e
ttin
g
r
a
n
g
e
O
p
e
r
a
tin
g
c
la
s
s

g
L
(
g
G
)
(
T
y
p
e
)
(
T
y
p
e
)
R
a
te
d
o
p
e
r
a
tin
g
c
u
r
r
e
n
t Is
/A
C
-
3
in
A
a
t
(
T
y
p
e
)
V
0
9
6
/
V
0
0
5
/
V
0
0
4
V
0
9
6
/
V
0
0
5
/
V
0
0
4
V
0
9
6
/
V
0
0
5
/
V
0
0
4
V
0
9
6
/
V
0
0
5
/
V
0
0
4
V
0
9
6
/
V
0
0
5
/
V
0
0
4
V
0
9
6
/
V
0
0
5
/
V
0
0
4
V
0
9
6
/
V
0
0
5
/
V
0
0
4
1
2
1
2
2
2
S
i
z
e

S
0
0
S
i
z
e

S
0
0
S
i
z
e

S
0
0
0
.
3

-

3
.
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
1
5
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
0
.
3

-

3
.
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
1
5
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
0
.
3

-

3
.
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
1
5
3
5
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
1
0
3
R
T
1
0
1
6
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
R
T
1
0
1
6
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
.0
/
3
.0
/
3
.0
3
R
T
1
0
1
6
3
5
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
1
0
S
i
z
e

S
0
S
i
z
e

S
0
S
i
z
e

S
0
2
.
4

-

2
5
A
3
R
T
1
0
1
5
7
.0
/
5
.0
/
4
.0
7
.0
/
5
.0
/
4
.0
7
.0
/
5
.0
/
4
.0
7
.0
/
5
.0
/
4
.0
2
.
4

-

2
5
A
3
R
T
1
0
1
5
7
.0
/
5
.0
/
4
.0
7
.0
/
5
.0
/
4
.0
7
.0
/
5
.0
/
4
.0
2
.
4

-

2
5
A
3
R
T
1
0
1
5
3
5
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
6
0
3
R
T
1
0
1
6
9
.0
/
6
.5
5
.2
9
.0
/
6
.5
5
.2
9
.0
/
6
.5
5
.2
9
.0
/
6
.5
5
.2
3
R
T
1
0
1
6
9
.0
/
6
.5
5
.2
9
.0
/
6
.5
/
5
.2
8
.5
/
6
.5
5
.2
3
R
T
1
0
1
6
3
5
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
6
0
3
R
T
1
0
1
7
1
2
.0
/
9
.0
/
6
.3
1
1
.0
/
9
.0
/
6
.3
1
0
.0
/
9
.0
/
6
.3
9
.5
/
9
.0
/
6
.3
3
R
T
1
0
1
7
9
.0
/
9
.0
/
6
.3
9
.0
/
9
.0
/
6
.3
8
.5
/
8
.5
/
6
.3
3
R
T
1
0
1
7
3
5
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
6
0
3
R
T
1
0
2
3
9
.0
/
6
.5
/
5
.2
9
.0
/
6
.5
/
5
.2
9
.0
/
6
.5
/
5
.2
3
R
T
1
0
2
3
3
R
T
1
0
2
3
6
3
2
5
2
5
2
5
2
5
7
0
3
R
T
1
0
2
4
1
2
.0
/
1
2
.0
/
9
.0
1
2
.0
/
1
2
.0
/
9
.0
1
2
.0
/
1
2
.0
/
9
.0
1
2
.0
/
1
2
.0
/
9
.0
3
R
T
1
0
2
4
1
2
.0
/
1
2
.0
/
9
.0
1
2
.0
/
1
2
.0
/
9
.0
1
2
.0
/
1
2
.0
/
9
.0
3
R
T
1
0
2
4
6
3
2
5
2
5
2
5
2
0
2
5
7
0
3
R
T
1
0
2
5
1
7
.0
/
1
7
.0
/
1
3
.0
1
7
.0
/
1
7
.0
/
1
3
.0
1
6
.0
/
1
6
.0
/
1
3
.0
1
5
.0
/
1
5
.0
/
1
3
.0
3
R
T
1
0
2
5
1
4
.0
/
1
4
.0
/
1
3
.0
1
3
.0
/
1
3
.0
/
1
3
.0
1
2
.0
/
1
2
.0
/
1
2
.0
3
R
T
1
0
2
5
6
3
2
5
2
5
2
5
2
0
2
5
7
0
3
R
T
1
0
2
6
2
5
.0
/
1
8
.0
/
1
3
.0
1
8
.0
/
1
8
.0
/
1
3
.0
1
6
.0
/
1
6
.0
/
1
3
.0
1
5
.0
/
1
5
.0
/
1
3
.0
3
R
T
1
0
2
6
1
4
.0
/
1
4
.0
/
1
3
.0
1
3
.0
/
1
3
.0
/
1
3
.0
1
2
.0
/
1
2
.0
/
1
2
.0
3
R
T
1
0
2
6
1
0
0
3
5
2
5
2
5
2
0
2
5
1
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
3
4
2
5
.0
/
2
5
.0
/
2
0
.0
2
5
.0
/
2
5
.0
/
2
0
.0
2
2
.
3
/
2
2
.3
/
2
0
.0
2
0
.3
/
2
0
.3
/
2
0
.3
3
R
T
1
0
3
4
1
9
.1
/
1
9
.1
/
1
9
.1
1
7
.6
/
1
7
.6
/
1
7
.6
1
6
.1
/
1
6
.1
/
1
6
.1
3
R
T
1
0
3
4
1
2
5
6
3
6
3
6
3
5
0
6
3
1
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
3
5
2
5
.0
/
2
5
.0
/
2
4
.0
2
5
.0
/
2
5
.0
/
2
4
.0
2
5
.0
/
2
5
.0
/
2
4
.0
2
5
.0
/
2
5
.0
/
2
4
.0
3
R
T
1
0
3
5
2
5
.0
/
2
5
.0
/
2
4
.0
2
5
.0
/
2
5
.0
/
2
4
.0
2
3
.5
/
2
3
.5
/
2
3
.5
3
R
T
1
0
3
5
1
2
5
6
3
6
3
6
3
5
0
6
3
1
0
0
S
i
z
e

S
2
/
S
3
S
i
z
e

S
2
/
S
3
S
i
z
e

S
2
/
S
3
1
0
-
1
0
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
3
4
3
2
.0
/
3
2
.0
/
2
0
.0
2
5
.5
/
2
5
.5
/
2
0
.0
2
2
.3
/
2
2
.3
/
2
0
.0
2
0
.3
/
2
0
.3
/
2
0
.0
1
0
-
1
0
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
3
4
1
9
.1
/
1
9
.1
/
1
9
.1
1
7
.6
/
1
7
.6
/
1
7
.6
1
6
.1
/
1
6
.1
/
1
6
.1
1
0
-
1
0
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
3
4
1
2
5
6
3
6
3
6
3
5
0
6
3
1
2
5
3
R
T
1
0
3
5
4
0
.0
/
4
0
.0
/
2
4
.0
3
3
.0
/
3
3
.0
/
2
4
.0
2
9
.4
/
2
9
.4
/
2
4
.0
2
8
.0
/
2
8
.0
/
2
4
.0
3
R
T
1
0
3
5
2
6
.5
/
2
6
.5
/
2
4
.0
2
5
.0
/
2
5
.0
/
2
4
.0
2
3
.5
/
2
3
.5
/
2
3
.5
3
R
T
1
0
3
5
1
2
5
6
3
6
3
6
3
5
0
8
0
1
5
0
3
R
T
1
0
3
6
5
0
.0
/
5
0
.0
/
2
4
.0
3
8
.5
/
3
8
.5
/
2
4
.0
3
2
.7
/
3
2
.7
/
2
4
.0
2
9
.4
/
2
9
.4
/
2
4
.0
3
R
T
1
0
3
6
2
6
.5
/
2
6
.5
/
2
4
.0
2
5
.0
/
2
5
.0
/
2
4
.0
2
3
.5
/
2
3
.5
/
2
3
.5
3
R
T
1
0
3
6
1
6
0
8
0
8
0
8
0
5
0
8
0
2
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
4
4
6
5
.0
/
6
5
.0
/
4
7
.0
5
6
.0
/
5
6
.0
/
4
7
.0
4
9
.0
/
4
9
.0
/
4
7
.0
4
5
.0
/
4
5
.0
/
4
5
.0
3
R
T
1
0
4
4
4
1
.7
/
4
1
.7
/
4
1
.7
3
8
.2
/
3
8
.2
/
3
8
.2
3
4
.5
/
3
4
.5
/
3
4
.5
3
R
T
1
0
4
4
2
0
0
1
2
5
1
2
5
1
2
5
6
3
1
2
5
2
5
0
3
R
T
1
0
4
5
8
0
.0
/
8
0
.0
/
5
8
.0
6
1
.0
/
6
1
.0
/
5
8
.0
5
3
.0
/
5
3
.0
/
5
3
.0
4
7
.0
/
4
7
.0
/
4
7
.0
3
R
T
1
0
4
5
4
5
.0
/
4
5
.0
/
4
5
.0
4
3
.0
/
4
3
.0
/
4
3
.0
4
0
.0
/
4
0
.0
/
4
0
.0
3
R
T
1
0
4
5
2
0
0
1
6
0
1
6
0
1
6
0
8
0
1
6
0
3
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
4
6
9
5
.0
/
9
5
.0
/
5
8
.0
6
9
.0
/
6
9
.0
/
5
8
.0
5
9
.0
/
5
9
.0
/
5
8
.0
5
3
.0
/
5
3
.0
/
5
3
.0
3
R
T
1
0
4
6
5
0
.0
/
5
0
.0
/
5
0
.0
4
7
.0
/
4
7
.0
/
4
7
.0
4
4
.0
/
4
4
.0
/
4
4
.0
3
R
T
1
0
4
6
2
0
0
1
6
0
1
6
0
1
6
0
1
0
0
1
6
0
3
5
0
3
R
T
1
0
5
4
1
0
0
.0
/
1
0
0
.0
/
1
0
0
.0
9
3
.2
/
9
3
.2
/
9
3
.2
8
1
.7
/
8
1
.7
/
8
1
.7
7
4
.8
/
7
4
.8
/
7
4
.8
3
R
T
1
0
5
4
6
9
.0
/
6
9
.0
/
6
9
.0
6
3
.0
/
6
3
.0
/
6
3
.0
5
7
.0
/
5
7
.0
/
5
7
.0
3
R
T
1
0
5
4
3
5
5
3
1
5
3
1
5
3
1
5
1
6
0
2
5
0
4
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
5
5
1
0
0
.0
/
1
0
0
.0
/
1
0
0
.0
1
0
0
.0
/
1
0
0
.0
/
1
0
0
.0
9
7
.5
/
9
7
.5
/
9
7
.5
3
R
T
1
0
5
5
9
0
.0
/
9
0
.0
/
9
0
.0
8
2
.0
/
8
2
.0
/
8
2
.0
7
4
.0
/
7
4
.0
/
7
4
.0
3
R
T
1
0
5
5
3
5
5
3
1
5
3
1
5
3
1
5
2
0
0
3
1
5
4
0
0
S
i
z
e

S
6
S
i
z
e

S
6
S
i
z
e

S
6
2
0
-
2
0
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
5
4
1
1
5
.0
/
1
1
5
.0
/
1
1
5
.0
9
3
.2
/
9
3
.2
/
9
3
.2
8
1
.7
/
8
1
.7
/
8
1
.7
7
4
.8
/
7
4
.8
/
7
4
.8
2
0
-
2
0
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
5
4
6
9
.0
/
6
9
.0
/
6
9
.0
6
4
.0
/
6
4
.0
/
6
4
.0
2
0
-
2
0
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
5
4
3
5
5
3
1
5
3
1
5
3
1
5
1
6
0
2
5
0
4
5
0
3
R
T
1
0
5
5
1
5
0
/
1
5
0
.0
/
1
5
0
.0
1
2
2
/
1
2
1
.5
/
1
2
1
.5
1
0
7
/
1
0
6
.5
/
1
0
6
.5
9
8
/
9
8
/
9
7
.5
3
R
T
1
0
5
5
9
0
/
9
0
.0
/
9
0
.0
8
2
/
8
2
.0
/
8
2
.0
7
4
/
7
4
.0
/
7
4
.0
3
R
T
1
0
5
5
3
5
5
3
1
5
3
1
5
3
1
5
2
0
0
3
1
5
5
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
5
6
1
8
5
/
1
8
5
.0
/
1
7
0
.0
1
5
0
/
1
4
9
.9
/
1
4
9
.9
1
3
1
/
1
3
1
.4
/
1
3
1
.4
1
2
0
/
1
2
0
/
1
2
0
.3
3
R
T
1
0
5
6
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
.0
/
1
1
1
.0
1
0
2
/
1
0
2
.0
/
1
0
2
.0
9
3
/
9
3
.0
/
9
3
.0
3
R
T
1
0
5
6
3
5
5
3
1
5
3
1
5
3
1
5
2
0
0
3
1
5
5
0
0
S
i
z
e

S
1
0
/
S
1
2
S
i
z
e

S
1
0
/
S
1
2
S
i
z
e

S
1
0
/
S
1
2
6
3
-
6
3
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
6
4
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
.0
/
2
2
5
.0
1
8
2
/
1
8
2
.3
/
1
8
2
.3
1
6
0
/
1
5
9
.8
/
1
5
9
.8
1
4
6
/
1
4
6
/
1
4
6
.3
6
3
-
6
3
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
6
4
1
3
5
.0
/
1
3
5
.0
/
1
3
5
.0
1
2
6
/
1
2
6
/
1
2
6
6
3
-
6
3
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
6
4
5
0
0
4
0
0
4
0
0
4
0
0
2
5
0
4
0
0
6
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
6
5
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
.0
/
2
6
5
.0
2
1
5
/
2
1
4
.7
/
2
1
4
.7
1
8
8
/
1
8
8
.2
/
1
8
8
.2
1
7
2
/
1
7
2
/
1
7
2
.3
3
R
T
1
0
6
5
1
5
9
.0
/
1
5
9
.0
/
1
5
9
.0
1
4
6
/
1
4
6
/
1
4
6
1
3
3
/
1
3
3
/
1
3
3
3
R
T
1
0
6
5
5
0
0
4
0
0
4
0
0
4
0
0
3
1
5
4
0
0
7
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
6
6
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
.0
/
2
8
0
.0
2
4
3
/
2
4
3
/
2
4
3
2
1
3
/
2
1
3
/
2
1
3
1
9
5
/
1
9
5
/
1
9
5
3
R
T
1
0
6
6
1
8
0
.0
/
1
8
0
.0
/
1
8
0
.0
1
6
5
/
1
6
5
/
1
6
5
1
5
0
/
1
5
0
/
1
5
0
3
R
T
1
0
6
6
5
0
0
4
0
0
4
0
0
4
0
0
3
1
5
4
0
0
8
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
7
5
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
.0
/
4
0
0
.0
3
2
4
/
3
2
4
/
3
2
4
2
8
4
/
2
8
4
/
2
8
4
2
6
0
/
2
6
0
/
2
6
0
3
R
T
1
0
7
5
2
4
0
.0
/
2
4
0
.0
/
2
4
0
.0
2
2
0
/
2
2
0
/
2
2
0
2
0
0
/
2
0
0
/
2
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
7
5
6
3
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
4
0
0
4
5
0
1
0
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
7
6
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
.0
/
4
5
0
.0
4
0
5
/
4
0
5
/
4
0
5
3
5
5
/
3
5
5
/
3
5
5
3
2
5
/
3
2
5
/
3
2
5
3
R
T
1
0
7
6
3
0
0
.0
/
3
0
0
.0
/
3
0
0
.0
2
7
5
/
2
7
5
/
2
7
5
2
5
0
/
2
5
0
/
2
5
0
3
R
T
1
0
7
6
6
3
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
1
2
0
0
3
R
T
1
2
6
4
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
1
9
4
/
1
9
4
/
1
9
4
3
R
T
1
2
6
4
1
7
3
.3
/
1
7
3
.3
/
1
7
3
.3
1
5
2
/
1
5
2
/
1
5
2
1
3
1
/
1
3
1
/
1
3
1
3
R
T
1
2
6
4
5
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
4
0
0
4
5
0
6
0
0
3
R
T
1
2
6
5
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
2
2
8
/
2
2
8
/
2
2
8
3
R
T
1
2
6
5
2
0
4
.1
/
2
0
4
.1
/
2
0
4
.1
1
8
0
/
1
8
0
/
1
8
0
1
5
6
/
1
5
6
/
1
5
6
3
R
T
1
2
6
5
5
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
4
0
0
4
5
0
7
0
0
3
R
T
1
2
6
6
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
2
5
8
/
2
5
8
/
2
5
8
3
R
T
1
2
6
6
2
3
1
/
2
3
1
/
2
3
1
2
0
4
/
2
0
4
/
2
0
4
1
7
7
/
1
7
7
/
1
7
7
3
R
T
1
2
6
6
5
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
0
4
0
0
4
5
0
8
0
0
3
R
T
1
2
7
5
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
3
4
4
/
3
4
4
/
3
4
4
3
R
T
1
2
7
5
3
1
6
/
3
1
6
/
3
1
6
3
R
T
1
2
7
5
8
0
0
8
0
0
8
0
0
6
3
0
8
0
0
1
0
0
0
3
R
T
1
2
7
6
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
4
3
0
/
4
3
0
/
4
3
0
3
R
T
1
2
7
6
3
8
5
/
3
8
5
/
3
8
5
3
4
0
/
3
4
0
/
3
4
0
3
1
6
/
3
1
6
/
3
1
6
3
R
T
1
2
7
6
8
0
0
8
0
0
8
0
0
6
3
0
8
0
0
1
2
0
0
3
T
F
6
8
2
)
6
3
0
/
6
3
0
/
6
3
0
5
0
2
/
5
0
2
/
5
0
2
4
4
0
/
4
4
0
/
4
4
0
4
0
8
/
4
0
8
/
4
0
8
3
T
F
6
8
2
)
3
7
6
/
3
7
6
/
3
7
6
3
4
4
/
3
4
4
/
3
4
4
3
1
7
/
3
1
7
/
3
1
7
3
T
F
6
8
2
)
8
0
0
5
0
0
4
)
5
0
0
4
)
5
0
0
4
)
6
3
0
5
0
0
1
6
0
0
3
T
F
6
9
2
)
6
3
0
/
6
3
0
/
6
3
0
6
3
0
/
6
3
0
/
6
3
0
5
7
2
/
5
7
2
/
5
7
2
5
3
1
/
5
3
1
/
5
3
1
3
T
F
6
9
2
)
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
4
6
9
/
4
6
9
/
4
6
9
4
3
8
/
4
3
8
/
4
3
8
3
T
F
6
9
2
)
8
0
0
6
3
0
4
)
6
3
0
4
)
6
3
0
6
3
0
1
6
0
0
S
i
z
e

1
4
S
i
z
e

1
4
S
i
z
e

1
4
0
.3
0
-
3
.0
A
w
ith
3
T
F
6
9
2
)
8
2
0
/
8
2
0
/
8
2
0
6
6
2
/
6
6
2
/
6
6
2
5
7
2
/
5
7
2
/
5
7
2
5
3
1
/
5
3
1
/
5
3
1
0
.3
0
-
3
.0
A
w
ith
3
T
F
6
9
2
)
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
4
6
9
/
4
6
9
/
4
6
9
4
3
8
/
4
3
8
/
4
3
8
0
.3
0
-
3
.0
A
w
ith
3
T
F
6
9
2
)
8
0
0
6
3
0
4
)
6
3
0
4
)
6
3
0
6
3
0
1
6
0
0
3
U
F
1
8
6
8
-
3
G
A
0
0
3
U
F
1
8
6
8
-
3
G
A
0
0
3
U
F
1
8
6
8
-
3
G
A
0
0
2
)

C
a
n
n
o
t

b
e

m
o
u
n
t
e
d

o
n

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
s

3
)

O
b
s
e
r
v
e

o
p
e
r
a
t
in
g

v
o
lt
a
g
e
4
)
E
n
s
u
r
e
th
a
t th
e
s
a
fe
ty
m
a
r
g
in
b
e
tw
e
e
n
th
e
m
a
x
im
u
m
A
C
-
3
o
p
e
r
a
tin
g
c
u
r
r
e
n
t a
n
d
th
e
fu
s
e
r
a
tin
g
is
s
u
ffic
ie
n
t.
5
)

A
s
s
ig
n
m
e
n
t

a
n
d

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

d
e
v
ic
e
s

a
c
c
o
r
d
in
g

t
o

I
E
C
6
0
9
4
7
-
4
-
1
ti
u
c
ri
c t
r
o
h
s
a f
o t
n
e
v
e
e
ht
ni
s
m
et
s
y
s
r
o
s
n
o
s
r
e
p
r
e
hti
e
r
e
g
n
a
d
n
e t
o
n
y
a
m
s
r
et
r
at
s
d
n
a
s
r
ot
c
at
n
o
c ,
1 t
n
e
m
n
gi
s
s
a f
o
e
p
yt
hti
W
.
d
e
c
al
p
e
r
n
e
e
b
e
v
a
h
st
r
a
p
e
vit
c
e
p
s
e
r
e
ht
r
o
d
e
ri
a
p
e
r
n
e
e
b
e
v
a
h
y
e
ht lit
n
u
n
oit
a
r
e
p
o
r
e
ht
r
uf
r
of
el
b
ati
u
s
e
b t
o
n t
s
u
m
d
n
a
ti
u
c
ri
c t
r
o
h
s
a f
o t
n
e
v
e
e
ht
ni
s
m
et
s
y
s
r
o
s
n
o
s
r
e
p
r
e
hti
e
r
e
g
n
a
d
n
e t
o
n
y
a
m
s
r
et
r
at
s
d
n
a
s
r
ot
c
at
n
o
c ,
2 t
n
e
m
n
gi
s
s
a f
o
e
p
yt
hti
W a
n
d
m
u
s
t b
e
s
u
ita
b
le
fo
r
fu
r
th
e
r
o
p
e
r
a
tio
n
. T
h
e
r
e
is
a
d
a
n
g
e
r
o
f c
o
n
ta
c
t w
e
ld
in
g
.
T
y
p
e
o
f a
s
s
ig
n
m
e
n
t
5
)
F
u
s
e
lin
k
s

3
)
5

a
n
d

1
0
R
a
te
d
o
p
e
r
a
tin
g
c
u
r
r
e
n
t Is
/A
C
-
3
in
A
a
t
2
0
2
5
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-25
Table D-14: Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V
for 3UF7
6
9
0
V
/
1
0
0
k
A
6
9
0
V
/
1
0
0
k
A
4
1
5
V
/
8
0
k
A
6
0
0
V
S
ic
h
e
r
u
n
g
s
e
in
s
t
z
e

3
)
B
r
it
is
h

S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
N
H
D
IA
Z
E
D
, N
E
O
Z
E
D
S
ic
h
e
r
u
n
g
e
n
b
e
r
la
s
t
r
e
la
is
S
c
h
t
z
C
L
A
S
S
T
Y
P
3
N
A
, 5
S
B
, 5
S
E
T
y
p
3
N
D
B
S
8
8
E
in
s
t
e
llb
e
r
e
ic
h
5

u
.
1
0
1
5
2
0
2
5
3
0
3
5
4
0
B
e
t
r
ie
b
s
k
la
s
s
e

g
G
B
e
t
r
ie
b
s
k
la
s
s
e

a
M
(
T
y
p
)
B
e
m
e
s
s
u
n
g
s
b
e
t
r
ie
b
s
s
t
r
o
m

I
e
/
A
C
-
3

in

A

b
e
i
Z
u
o
r
d
n
u
n
g
s
a
r
t

5
)
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
1
2
1
2
1
2
B
a
u
g
r
e

S
0
0

2
)
0
.
3

-

3
.
0
A
o
h
n
e

S
c
h
t
z
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
2
0
A
1
6
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
1
0
A
1
0
A
3
R
T
2
0
1
5
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
2
0
A
1
6
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
3
R
T
2
0
1
6
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
2
0
A
1
6
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
3
R
T
2
0
1
7
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
2
0
A
1
6
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
3
R
T
2
0
1
8
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
A
/
3
A
/
3
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
2
0
A
1
6
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
2
.
4

-

2
5
A
3
R
T
2
0
1
5
7
,
0
A
/
6
,
0
A
/
4
,
9
A
7
,
0
A
/
6
,
0
A
/
4
,
9
A
7
,
0
A
/
6
,
0
A
/
4
,
9
A
7
,
0
A
/
6
,
0
A
/
4
,
9
A
7
,
0
A
/
6
,
0
A
/
4
,
9
A
7
,
0
A
/
6
,
0
A
/
4
,
9
A
7
,
0
A
/
6
,
0
A
/
4
,
9
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
2
0
A
1
6
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
3
R
T
2
0
1
6
9
,
0
A
/
7
,
7
A
6
,
7
A
9
,
0
A
/
7
,
7
A
6
,
7
A
9
,
0
A
/
7
,
7
A
6
,
7
A
9
,
0
A
/
7
,
7
A
/
6
,
7
A
9
,
0
A
/
7
,
7
A
/
6
,
7
A
8
,
5
A
/
7
,
7
A
/
6
,
7
A
8
,
0
A
/
7
,
7
A
/
6
,
7
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
2
0
A
1
6
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
3
R
T
2
0
1
7
1
2
,
0
A
/
9
,
2
A
/
6
,
7
A
1
0
,
7
A
/
9
,
2
A
/
6
,
7
A
1
0
,
0
A
/
9
,
2
A
/
6
,
7
A
9
,
5
A
/
9
,
2
A
/
6
,
7
A
9
,
0
A
/
9
,
0
A
/
6
,
7
A
8
,
5
A
/
8
,
5
A
/
6
,
7
A
8
,
0
A
/
8
,
0
A
/
6
,
7
A
5
0
A
2
5
A
2
0
A
1
6
A
3
5
A
2
0
A
3
R
T
2
0
1
8
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
4
A
/
8
,
9
A
1
3
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
4
A
/
8
,
9
A
1
1
,
5
A
/
1
1
,
5
A
/
8
,
9
A
1
0
,
3
A
/
1
0
,
3
A
/
8
,
9
A
9
,
5
A
/
9
,
5
A
/
8
,
9
A
8
,
8
A
/
8
,
8
A
/
8
,
8
A
8
,
3
A
/
8
,
3
A
/
8
,
3
A
5
0
A
2
5
A
2
5
A
2
0
A
5
0
A
2
5
A
B
a
u
g
r
e

S
0

2
)
2
.
4

-

2
5
A
o
h
n
e

S
c
h
t
z
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
/
2
5
A
1
2
5
A
5
0
A
5
0
A
2
5
A
1
2
5
A
5
0
A
1
0
0
A
1
0
0
A
3
R
T
2
0
2
4
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
9
,
0
A
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
9
,
0
A
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
9
,
0
A
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
9
,
0
A
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
9
,
0
A
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
9
,
0
A
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
9
,
0
A
6
3
A
2
5
A
3
2
A
2
0
A
6
3
A
2
5
A
3
R
T
2
0
2
5
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
4
,
8
A
/
1
4
,
8
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
4
,
0
A
/
1
4
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
3
,
4
A
/
1
3
,
4
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
3
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
6
3
A
2
5
A
3
2
A
2
0
A
6
3
A
2
5
A
3
R
T
2
0
2
6
2
5
,
0
A
/
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
4
,
8
A
/
1
4
,
8
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
4
,
0
A
/
1
4
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
3
,
4
A
/
1
3
,
4
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
3
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
0
0
A
3
5
A
5
0
A
2
0
A
1
0
0
A
3
5
A
3
R
T
2
0
2
7
2
5
,
0
A
/
2
5
,
0
A
/
2
1
,
0
A
2
3
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
2
0
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
5
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
2
5
A
5
0
A
5
0
A
2
5
A
1
2
5
A
5
0
A
3
R
T
2
0
2
8
2
5
,
0
A
/
2
5
,
0
A
/
2
1
,
0
A
2
3
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
2
0
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
5
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
2
5
A
5
0
A
5
0
A
2
5
A
1
2
5
A
5
0
A
1
0

-

1
0
0
A
o
h
n
e

S
c
h
t
z
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
/
1
0
0
A
3
1
5
A
3
1
5
A
3
1
5
A
3
1
5
A
4
0
0
A
4
0
0
A
3
R
T
2
0
2
4
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
1
2
,
0
A
/
6
3
A
2
5
A
3
2
A
2
0
A
6
3
A
2
5
A
3
R
T
2
0
2
5
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
4
,
8
A
/
1
4
,
8
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
4
,
0
A
/
1
4
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
3
,
4
A
/
1
3
,
4
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
3
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
6
3
A
2
5
A
3
2
A
2
0
A
6
3
A
2
5
A
3
R
T
2
0
2
6
2
5
,
0
A
/
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
4
,
8
A
/
1
4
,
8
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
4
,
0
A
/
1
4
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
3
,
4
A
/
1
3
,
4
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
3
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
/
1
3
,
0
A
1
0
0
A
3
5
A
5
0
A
2
0
A
1
0
0
A
3
5
A
3
R
T
2
0
2
7
3
2
,
0
A
/
3
2
,
0
A
/
2
1
,
0
A
2
3
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
2
0
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
5
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
2
5
A
5
0
A
5
0
A
2
5
A
1
2
5
A
5
0
A
3
R
T
2
0
2
8
3
8
,
0
A
/
3
2
,
0
A
/
2
1
,
0
A
2
3
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
2
0
,
0
A
/
2
0
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
8
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
7
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
6
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
5
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
/
1
5
,
0
A
1
2
5
A
5
0
A
5
0
A
2
5
A
1
2
5
A
5
0
A
2
)

k
e
in

S
c
h
t
z
a
n
b
a
u

m
g
lic
h

3
)

B
e
t
r
ie
b
s
s
p
a
n
n
u
n
g

b
e
a
c
h
t
e
n
4
)

B
e
a
c
h
t
e
n

S
ie
,

d
a

d
e
r

m
a
x
im
a
le

A
C
-
3

B
e
t
r
ie
b
s
s
t
r
o
m

e
in
e
n

g
e
n
g
e
n
d
e
n

S
ic
h
e
r
h
e
it
s
a
b
s
t
a
n
d

v
o
m

S
ic
h
e
r
u
n
g
s
n
e
n
n
s
t
r
o
m

b
e
s
it
z
t
.
5
)

Z
u
o
r
d
n
u
n
g

u
n
d

K
u
r
z
s
c
h
lu
e
in
r
ic
h
t
u
n
g
e
n

g
e
m

I
E
C
6
0
9
4
7
-
4
-
1
B
e
i
Z
u
o
r
d
n
u
n
g
s
a
r
t

d
a
r
f

d
a
s

S
c
h
t
z

o
d
e
r

d
e
r

S
t
a
r
t
e
r

im

K
u
r
z
s
c
h
lu
s
s
f
a
ll
P
e
r
s
o
n
e
n

u
n
d

A
n
la
g
e

n
ic
h
t

g
e
f
h
r
d
e
n
u
n
d

b
r
a
u
c
h
t

f
r

d
e
n

w
e
it
e
r
e
n

B
e
t
r
ie
b

o
h
n
e

R
e
p
a
r
a
t
u
r

u
n
d

T
e
ile
e
r
n
e
u
e
r
u
n
g

n
ic
h
t

g
e
e
ig
n
e
t

z
u

s
e
in
.
B
e
i
Z
u
o
r
d
n
u
n
g
s
a
r
t

d
a
r
f

d
a
s

S
c
h
t
z

o
d
e
r

d
e
r

S
t
a
r
t
e
r

im

K
u
r
z
s
c
h
lu
s
s
f
a
ll
P
e
r
s
o
n
e
n

u
n
d

A
n
la
g
e

n
ic
h
t

g
e
f
h
r
d
e
n
u
n
d

m
u
s
s

f
r

d
e
n

w
e
it
e
r
e
n

G
e
b
r
a
u
c
h

g
e
e
ig
n
e
t

s
e
in
.

D
ie

G
e
f
a
h
r

d
e
r

K
o
n
t
a
k
t
v
e
r
s
c
h
w
e
i
u
n
g

is
t

g
e
g
e
b
e
n
.
3
U
F
7
1
0
2
-
1
A
A
0
0
-
0
/
3
R
B
2
9
0
6
-
2
J
G
1
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

S
h
o
r
t
-
C
ir
c
u
it
-
R
a
t
in
g
H
ig
h

S
h
o
r
t
-
C
ir
c
u
it
-
R
a
t
in
g
U
L
-
g
e
lis
t
e
t
e
t
e
S
ic
h
e
r
u
n
g
e
n
R
K
5
/
C
L
A
S
S

L
3
U
F
7
1
0
1
-
1
A
A
0
0
-
0
/
3
R
B
2
9
0
6
-
2
D
G
1
3
U
F
7
1
0
0
-
1
A
A
0
0
-
0
/
3
R
B
2
9
0
6
-
2
B
G
1
3
U
F
7
1
0
1
-
1
A
A
0
0
-
0
/
3
R
B
2
9
0
6
-
2
D
G
1
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
The selection tables for fuseless motor feeders can be found in the manuals
"Configuring SIRIUS Innovations - Selection Data for Fuseless and Fused Load
Feeders"
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188 and
"Configuration Manual SIRIUS Configuration - Selection data for Fuseless Load
Feeders"
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/40625241.
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 D-27
D.8 Typical reaction times
D.8.1 SIMOCODE pro C device series
Table D-15: Typical reaction times for SIMOCODE pro C device series
D.8.2 SIMOCODE pro V
1)
device series
1) Based upon a typical hardware set-up: Basic unit + current measuring module
+ 2 expansion modules
Table D-16: Typical reaction times for SIMOCODE pro V device series
Reaction time = inputs conversion time + internal processing time + outputs
conversion time
Example:
You wish to switch a relay output of the basic unit via PROFIBUS when the
"remote" bit is set:
SIMOCODE pro C:
Reaction time = 30 ms + 30 ms + 10 ms = 70 ms
SIMOCODE pro V:
Reaction time = 5 ms + 5 ms + 10 ms = 20 ms
Time: Inputs Time: Processing Time: Outputs
Basic unit Set delay time
30 ms
10 ms
Thermistor 400 ms
PROFIBUS 30 ms 30 ms
Current measuring 200 ms
Internal earth fault 300 ms - 600 ms +
Set delay
Time: Inputs Time: Processing Time: Outputs
Basic unit Set delay time
5 ms
10 ms
Thermistor 400 ms
PROFIBUS 5 ms 5 ms
Current measuring 300 ms
Voltage measurement 300 ms
Active power/cos phi 1000 ms
Internal earth fault 300 ms - 600 ms +
Set delay
Earth-fault module/
external earth fault
300 ms - 500 ms +
Set delay
Digital module (24 V) 15 ms + delay 25 ms
Digital module
(110 V - 240 V)
50 ms + delay 25 ms
Analog module 150 ms 25 ms
Temperature module 500 ms
DM-F Local 75 ms + delay time 30 ms
DM-F PROFIsafe 15 ms + delay 30 ms
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-1
Example circuits E
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find example circuits for the following
parameterizable control functions:
Overload relay
Direct starter
Reversing starter
Star-delta starter
Star-delta reversing starter
Dahlander
Dahlander reversing starter
Solenoid valve
Positioner
Soft starter
Direct starter for 1-phase loads
Target groups
This manual is addressed to the following target groups:
Planners
Configurators
Technicians
Electricians
Commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter 1)
Basic knowledge of SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.1 General
Aim of the example circuits
The examples should:
Show you how to implement a circuit for a specific control function
using SIMOCODE pro
Help you modify these examples for your application
Help you implement other applications easily.
Fundamental steps
Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main circuit
devices and control and signaling devices) (see circuit diagrams)
Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions, with control
and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal
SIMOCODE pro wiring) (see function circuit diagrams with the function
blocks of the graphical editor of the "SIMOCODE ES" configuration software).
Setting up the cyclic receive and send data for the communication of
SIMOCODE pro with a PLC (see function circuit diagrams and the
"Assignment of cyclic receive and send data" tables)
Prerequisites
Load feeder/motor is present
PLC/PCS with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
The main circuit is already connected
PC/programming device is present
SIMOCODE ES software is installed
The basic unit has the factory settings. More information about how to apply
the factory settings can be found in the "Resetting the factory settings"
section of the SIMOCODE pro manual.
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-3
E.2 "Overload relay" example circuit
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.2.1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram
Fig. E-1: "Overload relay" circuit diagram
1
1
7
1
N
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
5
6
-
X
2
-
X
1
9
2
N
B
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
7
S P E / P E
B
4
4
-
K
1
T 2 2
B
/.5
A 1
2
L
1
I
>
4 3
9
1
-
M
1
6
N
-
T
1
0
1
L
1
C
1
A
-
Q
1
5
1 8
-
X
1
9
2
T 1
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
L 1
P
E
1
T 2
T 3
2
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
P E
2
6
6
L
2
-
X
1
1
C
1
,6
A
P
E
A 1
2
3
0
V
A
C
-
F
1
1
1
3
2 4 V
-
A
1
0
B
U
1 9
V
6
A IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
L
1
2
P E
B
U
S
I
>
U
M
a
in
s
c
o
n
ta
c
to
r
T 1
5
L 3
C u r r e n t m e a s u r e m e n t
8
-
F
1
2
1
/ . 2
2
3
>
>
>
I
I
I
2 0
X 9
L
3
W
L 2
D
e
v
ic
e
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
/ . 2
1
4
2
3
A 2
-
K
1
S Y S
1 0
A
3
A
C
M
1 5
1
2
3
A
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

C
/
V
-
X
1
3
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
4
C T
5
A 2
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-5
E.2.2 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-2: "Overload relay" function circuit diagram
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.3 "Direct starter" example circuit
E.3.1 "Direct starter" circuit diagram
Fig. E-3: "Direct starter" circuit diagram
1 3
S P E / P E
/ . 2
C
1
,6
A
-
Q
2
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
B
-
M
1
1
6
4
1 4
/.4
A 1
8
1 9
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
-
X
2
S Y S
1 2
=
D
O
L
3
L 1
9
3 2
P E
5
-
A
1
2
1
N
3
A 2
2
3
0
V
A
C
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
L 2
2
L
1
-
F
1
2
7
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
6
5
2
N
U
1 8
S Y S
1
1 0
5
2 4 V
-
Q
2
C
1
A
B
U
5
A
A
4
2
P
E
T 1
3
9
A 2
2 0
B
U
S
W
I
>
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

C
/
V
-
A
1
0
A 1
1
L
1
1
4
6
B
4
C T
P
E
-
X
1
-
S
1
2
3
8
X 9
2 2
L
2
T 1
2 1
1
N
V
3
3
A
C
M 2
B
U
S
5
6
-
X
1
>
>
>
I
I
I
T 3
-
X
1
9
L 3
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
T 2
T 2
/ . 2
1
P E
-
S
1
1
-
T
1
0
L
1
1 0
L
3
2
I
>
2
2
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P A
1 1
B
2
2
-
F
1
1
4
6 7
-
X
1
9
1
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
T
E
S
T
/
D
E
V
IC
E
R
E
S
E
T
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
O
F
F
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
D
e
v
ic
e
O
N
M
o
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
o
c
a
l
O
n
L
o
c
a
l
O
f
f
1 2 3
1
2
3
1
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-7
E.3.2 "Direct starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-4: "Direct starter" function circuit diagram
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.4 "Direct starter" example circuit
E.4.1 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram
Fig. E-5: "Reversing starter" circuit diagram
1 2 3 4 5
1
2
1
3
4
5
1
2
3
2
O
N
>
I
>
2
C T
6
S Y S
A
1 4
-
A
1
2
2
L
1
B
U
S
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
-
X
1
P E
I
>
-
T
1
0
-
F
1
1
9
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
U
5
1
T 1
1
C
1
,6
A
L 2
O
F
F
-
F
1
2
4
A 2
6
1 8
-
Q
3
A 2
B
1 4
X 9
-
M
1
-
S
1
2
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
1
3
5
1 1
A 1
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
2 2
5
1
B
V
P E
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
O
N
<
3
L
3
A 1
/ . 2
-
A
1
0
T 1
L
2
N
2
4
-
X
2
3
A
C
M
1 9
7
9
-
Q
2
P
E
5
>
>
>
I
I
I
W
-
Q
2
-
X
1
9
/.4
2
3
2
N
4 1 0
-
Q
3
A 2
1 3
L
1
-
S
1
3
-
X
1
1
1
L
1
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1 3
T 2
/.4
6
2 1
L 3 6
B
A
5
1
4
1
A 1
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

C
/
V
B
U
S
R
E
S
E
T
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
D
E
V
IC
E
T
E
S
T
/
2
T 3
6
8
1 0
3
4
4
7
B
U
2
3
0
V
A
C
2
1
/ . 2
P
E
2
2
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
2 4 V
3
8
1
S P E / P E
T 2
1
N
6
3
2 0
S Y S
-
S
1
1
-
X
1
9
C
1
A
1 2
A
2
L 1
M
o
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
R
u
n

s
ig
n
a
l
-

r
ig
h
t
M
o
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
R
u
n

s
in
g
a
l
-

le
f
t
L
o
c
a
l
O
f
f
L
o
c
a
l
R
u
n

s
ig
n
a
l
-

r
ig
h
t
L
o
c
a
l
R
u
n

s
ig
n
a
l
-

le
f
t
D
e
v
ic
e
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-9
E.4.2 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-6: "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.5 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" example
circuit
E.5.1 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" circuit diagram
Fig. E-7: "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" circuit diagram
C 1
1
L 3
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
I
>
/.6
S Y S
N
8
C
1
,6
A
/.6
-
X
2
A 5
X 2 0 . 2
3
3
B
D 4
-
A
1
0
A
M
T 3
A
1
L
1
-
Q
1
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
/.6
C
1
A
2
L
1
D 1
-
Q
1
A 3
2
T 2
1
A
A 2
C T
X 2 0 . 1
B
2
P
E
S Y S
X
2
0
.5
2
3
0
V
A
C
-
T
1
0
B
U
S
-
A
1
1
2
7
5
-
S
1
2
C 5
3
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
X 9
X 1 . 1
2 1
2 4 V
L 2
1
N
2 2
X 1 . 2
1 L 1
1
-
F
1
2
S P E / P E
X 1 . 4
-
X
1
9
T 1
X 2 0 . 3
X 1 . 3
1 0
T 1
4
/.6
1
2
1 4
-
X
1
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
L
1
B
U
S
-
F
1
1
T 2
5
D 3
A 1
-
Q
1
I
>
2
6
3
B
-
X
1
9
2
N
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
I
I
>
M
>
I
>
-
Q
1
4
C 4
-
S
1
1
1
B
U
1 3
L
2
X 2 0 . 4
L
3
6
9
A 1
D 2
2
X 1 . 6
/ . 4
X 1 . 2
/ . 4
1
-
Q
1
5
3
>
I
>
I
>
I
M
X 2 0 . 5
X 1 . 5
X 1 . 1
X 2 0 . 1
X 2 0 . 3
/ . 3
X 1 . 3
/ . 2
2
4
X 1 . 4
X 2 0 . 2
6
X 2 0 . 4
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
T
E
S
T
/
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
R
E
S
E
T
C
ir
c
u
it-
b
r
e
a
k
e
r
(
M
C
C
B
)
o
n
C
ir
c
u
it-
b
r
e
a
k
e
r
(
M
C
C
B
)
o
ff
C
h
e
c
k
b
a
c
k
s
ig
n
a
l
L
S
o
n
C
h
e
c
k
b
a
c
k
s
ig
n
a
l
L
S
tr
ig
g
e
r
e
d
L
o
c
a
l C
o
n
tr
o
l
O
N
L
o
c
a
l C
o
n
tr
o
l
D
e
v
ic
e
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
O
F
F
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
D
e
v
ic
e
O
N
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-11
E.5.2 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-8: "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" function circuit diagram
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.6 "Star-delta starter" circuit example
E.6.1 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)
Fig. E-9: "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)
1 2 3 4 5
4
5
1
2
3
N
A 2
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
P E
/ . 2
6
1
M
A
C
A 1
-
X
2
-
X
1
9
-
Q
2
-
M
1
S Y S
C 5 1 0
T 2
A
-
Q
3
A 2
1
L
1
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
U
2
-
Q
4
/.4
O
F
F
A 2
A 1
1
N
1
-
S
1
2
2
P
E
B
T 1
8
L
1
U
1
3
D 2
-
X
2
A 3
4
-
Q
2
3
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
-
F
1
2
C
1
A
1
1
2 2
B
U
S
T 3
P E
3
-
X
1
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
1
1 3
A 1
L
2
A
A 1
2
L 3
B
U
S
R
E
S
E
T
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
D
E
V
IC
E
T
E
S
T
/
S P E / P E
C 2
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
V
1
3
X 9
2
6
5
L 2
5
1
/.4
B
U
1
S Y S
2
3
B
3
/ . 2
6
W
2
4
3
A 2
-
A
1
1
-
A
1
0
6
A
2
T 2
4
-
F
1
1
P E
2
-
Q
4
-
S
1
1
-
Q
3
*
)
5
T 1
C 3
C 4
/.5
4
I
> 2
2
5
6
I
>
O
N
V
2
2
1
5
L
3
2 1
L 1
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
D 4
2
3
0
V
A
C
4
I
>
I
I
>
>
9
C T
4
D 3
A 5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
C
1
,6
A
2
L
1
B
3
5
1
2 4 V
W
1
C 1
7 A 1
2
N
D 1
6
-
X
1
9
1 4
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
lt
a

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
t
a
r

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
o
c
a
l
O
n
L
o
c
a
l
O
f
f
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
D
e
v
ic
e
*
)
A
n

e
le
c
t
r
o
n
ic
/
m
e
c
h
a
n
ic
a
l
in
t
e
r
lo
c
k

is

r
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
d
e
d

f
o
r

Q
3
/
Q
4
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-13
E.6.2 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)
Fig. E-10: "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.6.3 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)
Fig. E-11: "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)
1 2 3 4 5
4
5
1
2
3
N
A 2
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
P E
/ . 2
6
1
M
A
C
A 1
-
X
2
-
X
1
9
-
Q
2
-
M
1
S Y S
C 5 1 0
T 2
A
-
Q
3
A 2
1
L
1
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
U
2
-
Q
4
/.4
O
F
F
A 2
A 1
1
N
1
-
S
1
2
2
P
E
B
T 1
8
L
1
U
1
3
D 2
-
X
2
A 3
4
-
Q
2
3
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
-
F
1
2
C
1
A
1
1
2 2
B
U
S
T 3
P E
3
-
X
1
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
1
1 3
A 1
L
2
A
A 1
2
L 3
B
U
S
R
E
S
E
T
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
D
E
V
IC
E
T
E
S
T
/
S P E / P E
C 2
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
V
1
3
X 9
2
6
5
L 2
5
-
T
1
0
1
/.4
B
U
1
S Y S
2
3
B
3
/ . 2
6
W
2
4
3
A 2
-
A
1
1
-
A
1
0
6
A
2
T 2
4
-
F
1
1
P E
2
-
Q
4
-
S
1
1
-
Q
3
*
)
5
T 1
C 3
C 4
/.5
4
I
> 2
2
5
6
I
>
O
N
V
2
2
1
5
L
3
2 1
L 1
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
D 4
2
3
0
V
A
C
4
I
>
I
I
>
>
9
C T
4
D 3
A 5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
C
1
,6
A
2
L
1
B
3
5
1
2 4 V
W
1
C 1
7 A 1
2
N
D 1
6
-
X
1
9
1 4
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
lt
a

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
t
a
r

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
o
c
a
l
O
n
L
o
c
a
l
O
f
f
D
e
v
ic
e
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
*
)
A
n

e
le
c
t
r
o
n
ic
/
m
e
c
h
a
n
ic
a
l
in
t
e
r
lo
c
k

is

r
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
d
e
d

f
o
r

Q
3
/
Q
4
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-15
E.6.4 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply
cable)
Fig. E-12: "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.7 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example
E.7.1 "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram
Fig. E-13: "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram
2 3 4 5 6 7
1
2
3
5
6
7
1
4
T
e
s
t
/
r
e
s
e
t
D
e
v
ic
e
O
F
F
O
p
e
r
a
t
o
r

P
a
n
e
l
B
U
S
G
e
n
.
f
a
u
lt
O
N
>
B
a
s
ic

U
n
it
B
U
S
R
E
S
E
T
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
D
E
V
lC
E
T
E
S
T
/
D
ig
it
a
l
M
o
d
u
le
O
N
<
2
3
0
V

A
C
M
a
i
n
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
R
i
g
h
t
M
a
i
n
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
D
e
l
t
a

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
t
a
r

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
o
c
a
l
R
i
g
h
t
L
o
c
a
l
L
e
f
t
L
o
c
a
l
O
f
f
*
)

A
n

e
l
e
c
t
r
o
n
i
c
/
m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

i
n
t
e
r
l
o
c
k

i
s

r
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
d
e
d

f
o
r

Q
3
/
Q
4
2
N
1
2 2
S Y S
A 1
2 6
1
L
1
A 2 2
-
F
1
2
A 5
D 4
T 1
P
r
o
f
ib
u
s

D
P
A
2 7
3
7
/
.
5
P E
4
1
B
-
Q
4
-
Q
4
2
3
0
V

A
C
2
-
X
1
9
A 1
2
L
1
-
X
2
P
R
O
F
l
B
U
S
-
Q
3
2 5
6
S P E / P E
N
2
l
N
2
l
N
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
l
N
4
P
T
C
l
N
1
O
U
T
3
1
-
A
1
2
1
N
D 1
6
C 5
X 9
/
.
4
6
1
/
N

A
C

5
0
H
z

2
3
0
V
1
B
C

1
,
6
A
S Y S 1
2 2
A
A 2
6
4
1
2 0
-
S
1
3
C 1
O
U
T
1
l
N
1
l
N
4
l
N
3
N
/
M
O
U
T
2
l
N
2
2 1
-
T
1
0
P E
C 3
S Y S 2
C 2
A 3
A 1
-
X
1
D 2
6
A 2
-
S
1
2
A
1 3
1
S Y S
P E
l
>
l
l
>
>
B
C

1
A
/ . 2
l
>
2
4
S
l
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
-
Q
2
2
P
E
3
-
A
1
0
D 3
1 4
-
Q
3
3
/
N
/
P
E

A
C
5
0
H
z

4
0
0
V
-
S
1
1
A 2
-
X
1
9
3
2
A 1
9
l
>
1
A 2
1
/
N

A
C

5
0
H
z

2
3
0
V
4
V
2
-
M
1
U
1
W
2
V
1
M A
C
P E
W
1
3
U
2
T 2
1 4
3
5
5
1 3
2
/ . 2
1 0
5
L
1
L
2
3
2
1
-
X
2
-
Q
2
1
2
R e a d y
A 1
-
F
1
1
-
A
1
1
5
A 1
C 4
4
8
C T
5
3
S
l
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
L
3
2 3
2 4 V
2 4
L 1
B
U
T 3
L 2
L 3
T 2
T 1
2 1
1
6
-
Q
2
2
/
.
6
5
6
4
/
.
6
5
2
3
3
2
-
Q
2
1
*
)
1
4
A 4
A 2
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-17
E.7.2 "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-14: "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.8 "Dahlander" circuit diagram
E.8.1 "Dahlander" circuit diagram
Fig. E-15: "Dahlander" circuit diagram
1
2
N
1
6
2 2
1
L
1
A 2 2
V
1
D 4
T 1
5
2
L
1
U
2
3
7
/.4
-
F
1
2
P E
4
1
B
-
Q
2
*
)
-
M
1
-
Q
2
2
3
0
V
A
C
2
S Y S
4
/.4
-
X
2
A 1
-
Q
3
L 1
5
1 4
X 9
N
2
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
B
U
1
-
A
1
1
1
N
D 1
A 2
6
C 5
/.5
E
IN
>
2
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
V
2
C
1
,6
A
W
1
6
4
1
M
A
C
P E
C 1
1 3
2 1
-
T
1
0
1
P E
C 3
C 2
1
W
2
A 1
3
-
X
1
D 2
6
-
S
1
2
A
1 3
S Y S
3
I
>
I
I
>
>
C
1
A
/ . 2
I
>
6
4
D 3
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
-
Q
4
3
P
E
2
3
-
A
1
0
-
Q
3
-
Q
4
-
S
1
3
2
E
IN
>
>
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
-
X
1
9
-
S
1
1
A 2
3
L
2
9
I
>
T 3
5
A 2
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
4
U
1
T 2
1 4
3
5
/ . 2
2
1 0
6
L 2
5
L
1
2
-
X
2
2
L 3
A 1
L
3
1
4
A 1
C 4
T 2
8
C T
5
3
S P E / P E
2 4 V
T 1
-
F
1
1
A 5
A
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
B
A
A 3
B
A 1
A 4
A 2
-
X
1
9
D
E
V
IC
E
T
E
S
T
/
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
R
E
S
E
T
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
B
U
S
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
F
a
s
t
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
lo
w
S
t
a
r

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
F
a
s
t
L
o
c
a
l
F
a
s
t
L
o
c
a
l
S
lo
w
L
o
c
a
l
O
f
f
D
e
v
ic
e
O
F
F
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
*
)
A
n

e
le
c
t
r
o
n
ic
/
m
e
c
h
a
n
ic
a
l
in
t
e
r
lo
c
k

is

r
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
d
e
d

f
o
r

Q
3
/
Q
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
5
5
6
6
4
4
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-19
E.8.2 "Dahlander" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-16: "Dahlander" function circuit diagram
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.9 "Dahlander reversing starter" example circuit
E.9.1 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram
Fig. E-17: "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
0
1
0
9
8
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
B 2
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
2
/.6
3
/.7
I
>
I
I
>
>
T
e
s
t/re
s
e
t
2
-
X
1
9
I
>
C
1
,6
A
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
5
V
1
A 1
-
M
1
D 4
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
U
1
L 1
/ . 5
A 1
1
/.6
T 2
P E
U
2
A 1
3
-
X
1
9
1
M
A
C
T 2
2 1
6
-
S
1
4
-
Q
2
2
-
X
2
B
2
O
U
T
1
IN
1
IN
4
IN
3
N
/M
O
U
T
2
IN
2
-
A
1
2
6
C
1
A
D 3
1
-
A
1
0
3
C 5
C 3
1
4
-
S
1
3
9
L 3
3
5
/.5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
C 4
B 5
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
B
U
S
1 3
A 1
5
1
L
1
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
2 5
P E
1
1
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
8
S Y S 2
3
W
2
6
-
Q
4
2

A 2
-
S
1
5
A 2
I
>
2 2
2
B 3
4
-
Q
2
1
5
-
Q
4
1
2
L
1
6
2 0
1 3
R e a d y
4
A 2
3
N
A 1
T 3
/ . 2
O
N
>
/.5
-
X
2
2
-
A
1
1
-
X
1
O
F
F
-
F
1
2
-
Q
2
2
2
3
0
V
A
C
O
N
<
A 1
-
Q
2
1
-
S
1
2
6
B 4
5
2
W
1
/ . 2
1
N
1
S P E / P E
5
6
A 2
S Y S
1 3
P
E
3
1 3
5
-
F
1
1
2 2
5
B
U
S
R
E
S
E
T
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
D
E
V
IC
E
T
E
S
T
/
2 7
1
4
P E
-
Q
4
2
C T
X 9
1 4
4 3
A 2
2
1
T 1
L 2
/.7
2
N
4
C 1
<>/<<>>
1
-
Q
3
V
2
1 4
3
-
T
1
0
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
6
D 2
S Y S
2
L
1
-
Q
3
P E
A
2 3
-
Q
4
1
6
B 1
2
2 4 V
2 1
L
2
1
D 1
B
U
4
2 6
4
1 0
C 2
1 4
3 -
S
1
1
1 4
2
T 1
S Y S 1
L
3
1
1
A 2
2
7
2 4
A 5
A
-
X
1
9
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
B
A
A 3
B
A 1
A 4
A 2
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
F
a
s
t
R
ig
h
t
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
lo
w
R
ig
h
t
S
t
a
r

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
F
a
s
t
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
lo
w
L
e
f
t
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
F
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
L
o
c
a
l
O
f
f
L
o
c
a
l
S
lo
w
R
ig
h
t
L
o
c
a
l
F
a
s
t
R
ig
h
t
L
o
c
a
l
S
lo
w
L
e
f
t
L
o
c
a
l
F
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
D
ig
ita
l M
o
d
u
le
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
D
e
v
ic
e
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-21
E.9.2 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-18: "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Fig. E-19: "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram (2/2)
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-23
E.10 "Pole-changing starter" example circuit
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.10.1 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram
Fig. E-20: "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram
I
>
I
I
>
>
B
A 5
2
3
0
V
A
C
T 1
6
2
C
1
A
5
-
M
1
1
V
1
-
F
1
2
A 2
B
U
S
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
9
-
X
1
L
2
6
1
X 9
U
2
/.4
-
X
2
2 1
N
5
U
1
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
A
M
A
C
1 3
-
T
1
0
1 3
1
C
1
,6
A
B
U
D 1
A
1
4
-
F
1
1
T 2
3
3
A
2
C 1
A 3
-
Q
2
P E
6
B
L 2
1 0
6
W
2
A 2
T 1
P
E
P E
2 2
3
4
C 3
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
2
L
1
1
3
A 1
B
S Y S
S Y S
-
S
1
1
2
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
1 4
L 3
/ . 2
I
>
W
1
L 1
2
6
1
A 1
-
S
1
2
2
N
4 -
Q
3
7
L
1
3
4
1
/.4
5
-
X
2
1 4
S P E / P E
-
Q
2
A 1
5
-
X
1
9
P E
-
A
1
1
C 5
A 1
-
A
1
0
V
2
/ . 2
C 4
T 2
2
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
D 2
L
3
3
1
L
1
C 2
2 4 V
B
U
S
D 3
1
N
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
-
S
1
3
3
4
-
Q
3
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
-
X
1
9
T 3
8
D 4
C T
2
2
2
A 2
5
I
>
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
T
E
S
T
/
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
R
E
S
E
T
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
O
N
>
O
F
F
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
D
e
v
ic
e
D
e
v
ic
e
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
F
a
s
t
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
lo
w
L
o
c
a
l
F
a
s
t
L
o
c
a
l
S
lo
w
L
o
c
a
l
O
f
f
O
N
>
>
1 2 3 4 5 6
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-25
E.10.2 "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-21: "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.11 "Pole-changing reversing starter" example circuit
E.11.1 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram
Fig. E-22: "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
0
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
9
1
0
4
5
-
F
1
1
1 4
5
2 1
-
F
1
2
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
7
1 4
/.5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
/.5
L
3
U
1
B
U
S
R
E
S
E
T
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
D
E
V
IC
E
T
E
S
T
/
1
4
-
S
1
4
-
S
1
2
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E

p
r
o

V
9
2
2 5
C 4
A 1
/ . 2
3
4
P E
R e a d y
2 2
D 3
O
N
<
1
S P E / P E
3
1 4
C
1
,6
A
-
A
1
2
B 5
C T
5
-
Q
2
1
C 5
-
Q
3
1
B
O
U
T
1
IN
1
IN
4
IN
3
N
/M
O
U
T
2
IN
2
-
T
1
0
T 2
8
A
<>/<<>>
2 2
A
1
6
1
N
5
-
Q
2
2
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E

p
r
o

V
W
1
C 3
M
A
C
T 3
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
2 6
/.7
B 3
V
1
6
1
4
2 2
A 1
6
A 1
A 2
1
N
2
A 2
D 2
B
U
T 1
5
S Y S 2
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
2
L
1
3
5
1 4
/ . 2
2
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
1 3
A 1
3
2
3
-
Q
2
1
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
5
3
C 2
X 9
2 0
4
1
2
W
2
P E
S Y S
-
M
1
-
Q
3
2
1
L
1
4
A 3
A 5
I
>
I
I
>
>
1 0
5
A 1
2
3
0
V
A
C
P E
6
D 4
P
E
1
6
4
-
Q
3
1
4
/.7
L 2
-
X
1
9
2 7
2
O
N
>
1
-
X
1
9
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
L
2
V
2
C
1
A
A 2
-
S
1
5
L 1
3
-
A
1
1
2
A 1
1 3
A 2
B 2
T 2
2 1
-
Q
3
2
B
2 4
S Y S 1
I
>
-
X
1
9
6
/.6
2 4 V
-
X
1
1
-
X
2
1
L 3
-
Q
2
2
B
B 4
P E
-
S
1
3
6
2 3
/ . 5
B
U
S
T 1
A
1
-
S
1
1
2
L
1
2
N
A 2
I
>
S Y S
C 1
3
U
2
1 3
1 3
-
A
1
0
D 1
B 1
O
F
F
-
X
2
3
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
F
a
s
t
R
ig
h
t
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
lo
w
R
ig
h
t
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
lo
w
L
e
f
t
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
F
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
L
o
c
a
l
O
f
f
L
o
c
a
l
S
lo
w
R
ig
h
t
L
o
c
a
l
F
a
s
t
R
ig
h
t
L
o
c
a
l
S
lo
w
L
e
f
t
L
o
c
a
l
F
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
D
ig
ita
l M
o
d
u
le
D
e
v
ic
e
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-27
E.11.2 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-23: "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Fig. E-24: "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram (2/2)
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-29
E.12 "Solenoid valve" example circuit
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.12.1 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram
Fig. E-25: "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
2
3
7
8
1
9
S Y S
C
L
O
S
E
-
X
1
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
2
1
L
1
-
Y
1
C
1
,6
A
1 3
-
X
2
3
C
1
A
4
A
B
L
2
2
1 4
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
-
Q
2
4
1 4
-
A
1
0
2
1 9
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
-
R
M
A
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
P E
6
I
I
>
I
>
>
3
S Y S
8
1
-
S
1
2
2 4 V
7
1
B
U
S
R
E
S
E
T
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
D
E
V
IC
E
T
E
S
T
/
P E
C T
B
2
3
0
V
A
C
3
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
1
I
>
1
6
-
F
1
2
1
2 0
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
2
5
9
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E

p
r
o

V
1
L
1
2
1
6 5
A 1
N
2
A 2
-
Q
2
7
6
1 1
P
E
T 1
2
/ . 2
2 2
A 1
1 3
7
2
N
5
-
X
1
9
5
-
F
1
1
8
A 2
3
6
-
X
1
9
-
X
1
-
A
1
2
S P E / P E
5
A
-
R
M
Z
O
P
E
N
1
B 1 2
1
B
U
S
I
>
2 1
1 4
/.4
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
2
T 2
/ . 2
3
1
N
1 0
X 9
4
1 3 2
L
1
2
4
4
L
3
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
N
1 0
P E
-
S
1
1
1 8
A
8
3
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
o
c
a
l
O
n
L
o
c
a
l
O
f
f
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
L
im
it

s
w
it
c
h
C
lo
s
e
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
lim
it

s
w
it
c
h
O
p
e
n
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
D
e
v
ic
e
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-31
E.12.2 "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-26: "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.13 "Positioner" example circuit
E.13.1 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram
Fig. E-27: "Positioner 1" circuit diagram
D
e
v
ic
e
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
D
ig
ita
l M
o
d
u
le
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
O
p
e
n
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
lo
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
l
S
t
o
p
L
o
c
a
l
C
lo
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
l
O
p
e
n
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
L
im
it

s
w
it
c
h
C
lo
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
L
im
it

s
w
it
c
h
O
p
e
n
C
L
O
S
E
O
P
E
N
S
T
O
P
T
E
S
T
-/
R
E
S
E
T
-
A
1
0
S Y S 1
-
X
1
T 2
2
1 6
3
1 3
A
2 0
2
3
0
V
A
C
2 7
-
M
1
5
2
N
1
2
A 2
2 1
L
3
2 3
1 3
1
L
1
1 4
4
2
3
0
V
A
C
L 3
1 1
L 2
2
B
/ . 2
9
A 1
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
>
>
>
I
I
I
2
2
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
7
2 4
-
X
1
9
1 3
6
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
3
8
X 9
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
2 4 V
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
-
X
1
9
2
L
1
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
3
A
C
M
-
R
M
Z
-
S
1
1
-
Q
3
T 3
-
X
1
1 8
I
> 1
1 0
1 2
1
A 2
A 1
1 3
1
B
U
S
-
F
1
2
3
-
S
1
3
/.4
L
1
A 1
C T
2
2 6
-
Q
3
S Y S
4
6
2
1 4
U
4
N
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
1
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
4
-
T
1
0
1 0
B
U
S
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
D
E
V
IC
E
6
1 3 2 5
2 0
1
B
-
X
1
9
-
Q
2
6
B
1
-
R
M
A
P E
3
1 7
/ . 2
C
1
,6
A
I
>
/ . 4
-
S
1
2
-
X
2
-
F
1
1
7
P E
T 1
4
3
T 1
/.7
9
2 2
-
Q
2
L 1
1 4
W
-
A
1
2
8
1
N
-
Q
1
4
2 2
C
1
,6
A
6
1
1
1 5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1 9
2
A
3
T 2
A
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
1
1 4
3
1
A 2
6
P E
L
2
5
/.4
-
A
1
1
1 4
P
E
P
E
V
5
O
U
T
1
IN
1
IN
4
IN
3
N
/M
O
U
T
2
IN
2
S P E / P E
2 1
B
U
S Y S
5
2
5
S Y S 2
R e a d y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
2
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
1
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-33
E.13.2 "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-28: "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D
e
v
ic
e
O
P
E
N
D
ig
ita
l M
o
d
u
le
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
O
p
e
n
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
lo
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
l
S
t
o
p
L
o
c
a
l
C
lo
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
l
O
p
e
n
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
T
o
r
q
u
e

s
w
it
c
h
C
lo
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
L
im
it

s
w
it
c
h
C
lo
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
L
im
it

s
w
it
c
h
O
p
e
n
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
T
o
r
q
u
e

s
w
it
c
h
O
p
e
n
C
L
O
S
E
S
T
O
P
T
E
S
T
/
R
E
S
E
T
4
-
R
M
Z
1
L
1
L 1
L
3
1 0
T 2
-
R
M
A
-
S
1
3
2 1
-
X
2
1
>
>
>
I
I
I
5
1 3
L 2
-
S
1
2
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
I
>
-
D
M
A
2 4 V
5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1 1
2 1
3
A
C
M
9
1
P E
-
X
1
9
2 5
3
B
U
1 3
/.7
S Y S 2
1 6
3
2 0
-
T
1
0
2 1
1
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
3
X 9
3
B
-
A
1
2
1
1
N
3
-
Q
3
2
-
Q
3
2 7
-
Q
1
2 4
-
X
1
9
-
X
1
1 7
6 U
1 8
2
C
1
,6
A
9
2
L
1
6
B
S Y S 1
-
F
1
2
2
N
/ . 4
1 3
1 0
-
Q
2
P E
L
1
1 9
O
U
T
1
IN
1
IN
4
IN
3
N
/M
O
U
T
2
IN
2
A
4
2 2
A 1
1
T 2
A 2
A
P E
B
U
S
W
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
2
-
X
1
4
2 2
B
U
S
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
D
E
V
IC
E
2 1
6
8
I
>
B
T 1
1
/.4
1 4
-
A
1
1
A
2 0
2
3
/ . 2
S Y S
-
F
1
1
2
3
0
V
A
C
1 4
P
E
2
1 3
A 2
/ . 2
2
1 4
7
2
5
1 2
6
2 6
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
P
E
S P E / P E
2
3
1
4
T 3
A 1
6
A 1
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
2 2
T 1
7
4
5
1
-
X
1
9
2
-
S
1
1
C
1
,6
A
8
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
N
S Y S
1 4
1 3
2 2
L 3
4
2 3
C T
1
-
Q
2
V
-
D
M
Z
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
1
/.4
-
M
1
1 5
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
-
A
1
0
6
1 4
1
5
A 2
L
2
2
3
0
V
A
C
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
R e a d y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
0
1
2
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
1
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-35
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C
L
O
S
E
D
ig
ita
l M
o
d
u
le
O
P
E
N
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
D
e
v
ic
e
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
O
p
e
n
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
lo
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
l
S
t
o
p
L
o
c
a
l
C
lo
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
l
O
p
e
n
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
T
o
r
q
u
e

s
w
it
c
h
C
lo
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
L
im
it

s
w
it
c
h
C
lo
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
L
im
it

s
w
it
c
h
O
p
e
n
S
T
O
P
T
E
S
T
/
R
E
S
E
T
1
-
X
1
9
2 3
3
5
1 3
L 3
2 1
S P E / P E
5
-
M
1 N
1 0
-
A
1
1
>
>
>
I
I
I
2 5
W
A 2
3
2 4 V
B
1
B
U
S
2 1
2
3
0
V
A
C
1 4
2 3
2 2
5
L
3
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
9
-
X
1
9
6
3
-
A
1
0
2 0
O
U
T
1
IN
1
IN
4
IN
3
N
/M
O
U
T
2
IN
2
/ . 2
4
P E
A
V
T 3
1 3
6
-
Q
2
1 9
1
L
1
S Y S
2
L
1
T 2
B
U
2 6
P E
A 2
-
Q
2
3
A
C
M
/.4
6
C
1
,6
A
-
F
1
1
7
2
N
1 3
4 1 4
2
9
-
S
1
2
2
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
B
2 2
I
>
6
1
-
S
1
1
/ . 2
1 3
-
Q
3
S Y S 1
C
1
,6
A
-
R
M
Z
A 1
B
U
S
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
D
E
V
IC
E
1
A
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
1
8
2
3
0
V
A
C
3
-
X
1
9
1 2
1 1
-
A
1
2
L
1
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
2
4
-
X
2
-
T
1
0
1 4
1 4
4
1
1 3
L 2
7
5
S Y S
-
Q
3
X 9
2 0
4
S Y S 2
1 5
1 8
1
N
1
-
R
M
A
1 3
3
1 0
U
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
2 1
A 2
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
2
L 1
-
X
1
A 1
/.4
4
2 7
-
F
1
2
1 7
6
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
P E
2 4
8
I
>
C T
2
2
-
D
M
Z
-
S
1
3
/ . 4
T 1
1 6
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
L
2
P
E
P
E
T 2
5
6
T 1
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
1
B
1
A 1
/.7
A
1 4
1
-
X
1
2
2 2
2
R e a d y
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
2
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-37
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
O
p
e
n
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
lo
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
l
S
t
o
p
L
o
c
a
l
C
lo
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
l
O
p
e
n
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
L
im
it

s
w
it
c
h
C
lo
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
l
L
im
it

s
w
it
c
h
O
p
e
n
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
T
o
r
q
u
e

s
w
it
c
h
O
p
e
n
C
L
O
S
E
D
ig
ita
l M
o
d
u
le
O
P
E
N
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
D
e
v
ic
e
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
S
T
O
P
T
E
S
T
/
R
E
S
E
T
1
-
X
1
9
2 3
3
5
1 3
L 3
2 1
S P E / P E
5
-
M
1 N
1 0
-
A
1
1
>
>
>
I
I
I
2 5
W
A 2
3
2 4 V
B
1
B
U
S
2
3
0
V
A
C
1 4
2 1
2 3
2 2
5
L
3
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
9
-
X
1
9
-
D
M
A
6
3
-
A
1
0
2 0
O
U
T
1
IN
1
IN
4
IN
3
N
/M
O
U
T
2
IN
2
/ . 2
4
P E
A
V
T 3
1 3
6
-
Q
2
1 9
1
L
1
S Y S
2
L
1
T 2
B
U
2 6
2 2
A 2
-
Q
2
3
A
C
M
/.4
6
C
1
,6
A
-
F
1
1
7
2
N
1 3
4 1 4
2
9
-
S
1
2
2
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
B
2 2
P E
I
>
6
1
-
S
1
1
/ . 2
1 3
-
Q
3
S Y S 1
C
1
,6
A
-
R
M
Z
A 1
B
U
S
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
D
E
V
IC
E
1
A
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
1
8
2
3
0
V
A
C
3
-
X
1
9
1 2
1 1
-
A
1
2
L
1
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
2
4
-
X
2
-
T
1
0
1 4
1 4
4
1
1 3
L 2
7
5
S Y S
-
Q
3
X 9
2 0
4
S Y S 2
1 5
1 8
1
N
1
-
R
M
A
1 3
3
1 0
U
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
2 1
A 2
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
L 1
-
X
1
A 1
2
/.4
4
2 7
-
F
1
2
1 7
6
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
P E
2 4
8
I
>
C T
2
2
-
S
1
3
/ . 4
T 1
1 6
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
L
2
P
E
P
E
T 2
5
6
T 1
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
1
B
1
A 1
/.7
A
1 4
1
-
X
1
2
2
R e a d y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
2
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-39
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1
1 7 3 6 8 9
6
2
8
9
1
2
7
1
3
4
5
5 4 2
4
1
L
1
L 1
L
3
1 0
T 2
-
S
1
3
2 1
-
X
2
1
>
>
>
I
I
I
5
1 3
L 2
-
S
1
2
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
I
>
-
D
M
A
/R
M
A
2 4 V
5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1 1
2 1
3
A
C
M
9
1
P E
-
X
1
9
2 5
3
B
U
1 3
/.7
S Y S 2
1 6
3
2 0
-
T
1
0
2 1
1
T
e
s
t/r
e
s
e
t
3
X 9
3
B
-
A
1
2
1
1
N
3
-
Q
3
2
-
Q
3
2 7
2 4
-
X
1
9
-
X
1
1 7
6 U
1 8
2
C
1
,6
A
9
2
L
1
6
B
S Y S 1
-
F
1
2
2
N
/ . 4
1 3
1 0
-
Q
2
P E
L
1
1 9
O
U
T
1
IN
1
IN
4
IN
3
N
/M
O
U
T
2
IN
2
A
4
2 2
A 1
1
T 2
A 2
A
P E
B
U
S
W
1
/N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
2
-
X
1
4
2 2
B
U
S
G
E
N
.F
A
U
L
T
2 1
6
8
I
>
B
T 1
1
/.4
1 4
-
A
1
1
A
2 0
2
3
/ . 2
S Y S
-
F
1
1
2
3
0
V
A
C
1 4
P
E
2
1 3
A 2
/ . 2
2
1 4
7
2
5
1 2
6
2 6
IN
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
O
U
T
2
IN
4
P
T
C
IN
1
O
U
T
3
P
E
S P E / P E
2
3
1
4
T 3
A 1
6
A 1
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
2 2
T 1
7
4
5
1
-
X
1
9
2
-
S
1
1
C
1
,6
A
8
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
N
S Y S
1 4
1 3
2 2
L 3
4
2 3
C T
1
-
Q
2
V
-
D
M
Z
/ R
M
Z
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
1
/.4
-
M
1
1 5
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
-
A
1
0
6
1 4
1
5
A 2
L
2
2
3
0
V
A
C
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o

V
R e a d y
M
a
in
s

C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
O
p
e
n
M
a
in
s

C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
lo
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
l
S
t
o
p
L
o
c
a
l
C
lo
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
l
O
p
e
n
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
T
o
r
q
u
e

s
w
it
c
h
/
L
im
it

s
w
it
c
h
C
lo
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
T
o
r
q
u
e

s
w
it
c
h
/
L
im
it

s
w
it
c
h
O
p
e
n
D
e
v
ic
e
O
P
E
N
D
ig
ita
l M
o
d
u
le
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
C
L
O
S
E
S
T
O
P
T
E
S
T
/
R
E
S
E
T
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-41
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.14 "Soft starter" example circuit
E.14.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)
Fig. E-37: Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)
R
e
s
e
t
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
L
o
c
a
l
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
F
a
u
lt
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
S
t
a
r
t
O
n
L
o
c
a
l
O
f
f
O
N
>
O
F
F
D
e
v
ic
e
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
B u s c o n n e c t o r a t S u b - D
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
>
I
>
I
>
I
-
Q
1
4
6 5
2
3
1
-
3
R
W
4
0 2
3
0
V
A
C
2
4
v
d
c
+
B Y P A S
O
V
E
R
L
O
A
D
I N
+
o n
-
A
1
9 6
A 1
9 5
3
1
4 T 2
1 4 / 2 4
5 L 3
2 3
2 T 1
1 3
9 8
6 T 3
1 L 1
3 L 2
2
A 2
IN
4
IN
2
O
U
T
1
IN
1
P
T
C
O
U
T
3
O
U
T
2
IN
3
-
A
1
0
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
2
3
0
V
A
C
2 4 V
B
U
S
P
r
o
f
ib
u
s
D
P
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
T
e
s
t
/
re
s
e
t
2
X 9
A
1 0
A 1
1
B
7
C T
S Y S
T 1
8
6
9
A 2
3
5
S P E / P E
T 2
4
-
T
1
0
T 2
L 3 B
U
L 2
L 1 T 1
T 3
G
E
N
.FA
U
LT
TEST/
D
E
V
IC
E
R
ESET
B
U
S
-
A
1
1 S Y S
3
/ . 2 / . 2
P E
/ . 2 / . 2
2
/ . 2 / . 2
P E
/ . 2 / . 2
3
/ . 6 / . 6
2
/ . 5 / . 5
2
7
-
X
1
0
8
9
5
4
-
X
1
0
1
6
3
M
3
A
C
-
M
1
W
P
E
V
U
I
>
-
F
1
3
C
3
A
2 1
I
>
-
F
1
1
C
1
A
1 2
I
>
-
F
1
2
C
1
,6
A
2 1
-
Q
1
1
/
.4
1 1 1 2
-
S
1
2
2 1 2 2
-
X
9
o
f
f
B ' B
A ' A
-
Q
1
1
A 1 A 2
-
Q
1
A 1 A 2
1
/
N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
L
1
1
N
2
N
1
/
N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
2
L
1
-
Q
1
/
.4
2 1
-
S
1
1
1 4 1 3
4 3
6 5
3
/
N
/
P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
P
E
L
1
N L
2
L
3
3
R
W
4
0
2
/
B
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
3
R
W
4
0
3
/
C
o
n
t
r
o
l V
o
lt
a
g
e
:2
4
V
D
C
o
r
1
1
0
-
2
4
0
V
A
C
/
D
C
A
A
3
R
W
4
0
4
B
1
1
3
2
4
5
6
1 2 3 4 5 6
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-43
E.14.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404)
Fig. E-38: Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.14.3 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)
Fig. E-39: Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
O
n
O
f
f
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
L
o
c
a
l
R
e
s
e
t
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
S
t
a
r
t
L
o
c
a
l
F
a
u
lt
O
N
>
O
F
F
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
D
e
v
ic
e
>
I
>
I
>
I
-
Q
1
1
5
4 3
2
6
-
3
R
W
4
0 2
3
0
V
A
C
2
4
v
d
c
+
B Y P A S
O
V
E
R
L
O
A
D
I N
+
o n
-
A
1
9 6
3 L 2
9 5
3
6 T 3
2
A 1
A 2
4 T 2
1
1 4 / 2 4
2 T 1
1 3
1 L 1
5 L 3
2 3
9 8
IN
4
IN
2
O
U
T
1
IN
1
P
T
C
O
U
T
3
O
U
T
2
IN
3
-
A
1
0
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
2
3
0
V
A
C
T
e
s
t/
re
s
e
t
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
2 4 V
B
U
S
1
S Y S
A
T 1
3
1 0
C T
A 1
7
5
A 2
X 9
2
T 2
4
S P E / P E
8
9
6
B
-
T
1
0
T 1
T 2 L 2
L 1
L 3 T 3 B
U
G
E
N
.FA
U
LT
TEST/
D
E
V
IC
E
R
ESET
B
U
S
-
A
1
1 S Y S 2
/ . 2 / . 2
3
/ . 2 / . 2
P E
/ . 2 / . 2
3
/ . 6 / . 6
P E
/ . 2 / . 2
2
/ . 5 / . 5
2
4
7
6
-
X
1
0
1
-
X
1
0
8
3
5
9
M
3
A
C
-
M
1
V
P
E
W
U
I
>
-
F
1
2
C
1
,6
A
1 2
I
>
-
F
1
1
C
1
A
2 1
I
>
-
F
1
3
C
3
A
1 2
-
S
1
2
2 2 2 1
-
X
9
o
ff
B
A
' B
' A
-
A
1
R
E 2 E 1
-
Q
1
A 1 A 2
2
N
1
/
N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
2
L
1
1
N
1
/
N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
L
1
-
Q
1
/
.4
1 2
-
S
1
1
1 4 1 3
3 4
5 6
3
/
N
/
P
E
A
C
5
0
H
z
4
0
0
V
N L
3
L
1
P
E
L
2
3
R
W
4
0
5
/
C
o
n
t
r
o
l V
o
lt
a
g
e
:2
4
V
D
C
o
r
1
1
0
-
2
4
0
V
A
C
/
D
C
A
3
R
W
4
0
7
B
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
A
B
R
e
s
e
t
F
e
r
n
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
3
5
6
2
1
4
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-45
E.14.4 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)
Fig. E-40: Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.15 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" example circuit
E.15.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404)
Fig. E-41: Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)
S
o
ft s
ta
r
te
r
L
o
c
a
l
S
ta
r
t
O
ff
L
e
ft
M
a
in
s
c
o
n
ta
c
to
r
S
o
ft s
ta
r
te
r
R
ig
h
t
R
ig
h
t
L
o
c
a
l
R
e
s
e
t
F
a
u
lt
M
a
in
s
c
o
n
ta
c
to
r
S
o
ft s
ta
r
te
r
L
e
ft
L
o
c
a
l
D
e
v
ic
e
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
D
ig
ita
l M
o
d
u
le
O
F
F
O
N
>
O
N
>
>
O
p
e
ra
to
r P
a
n
e
l
>
I
>
I
>
I
-
Q
1
2
6 5
3
1
4
-
3
R
W
4
0 2
3
0
V
A
C
2
4
v
d
c
+
B Y P A S
O
V
E
R
LO
A
D
I N
+
o n
-
A
1
3 L 2
2 9 6
9 5
A 2
A 1
2 T 1
3 9 8
2 3
1 4 / 2 4
1 3
5 L 3
4 T 2
6 T 3
1
1 L 1
IN
4
IN
2
O
U
T
1
IN
1
P
T
C
O
U
T
3
O
U
T
2
IN
3
-
A
1
0
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
2
3
0
V
A
C
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
2 4 V
P
ro
fib
u
s
D
P
T
e
s
t/re
s
e
t
B
U
S
4
S P E / P E
2
X 9
A
7
C T
9
A 1
B
A 2
3 1
8
T 2
6
T 1
5
1 0
S Y S
-
T
1
0
T 2
T 1
T 3 L 3 B
U
L 1
L 2
G
E
N
.FA
U
LT
TEST/
D
E
V
IC
E
RESET
B
U
S
-
A
1
2 S Y S
IN
4
O
U
T
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
N
/
M
IN
1
IN
2
-
A
1
1
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
2
3
0
V
A
C
R e a d y
2 5
P E
2 3
S Y S 1
2 0
S Y S 2
2 2 2 7
2 6
2 4
2 1
P E .
/ . 2 / . 2
3
/ . 2 / . 2
2
/ . 2 / . 2
P E .
/ . 2 / . 2
2
/ . 6 / . 6
3
/ . 6 / . 6
7
6
9
3
-
X
1
0
1
2
-
X
1
0
8
4
5
M
3
A
C
-
M
1
W
V
U
P
E
I
>
-
F
1
2
C
1
,6
A
1 2
I
>
-
F
1
1
C
1
A
1 2
I
>
-
F
1
3
C
3
A
1 2
-
Q
1
1
/
.6
1 1 1 2
-
S
1
2
2 2 2 1
-
X
9
o
ff
' A
B
A
' B
-Q
1
1
A 2 A 1
-
Q
1
A 2 A 1
-
Q
2
A 2 A 1
1
/
N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
2
L
1
1
N
1
/
N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
L
1
2
N
-
Q
2
/
.5
1 2
-
Q
1
/
.4
2 1
-
S
1
3
1 4 1 3
-
S
1
1
1 3 1 4
3 4
6 5
3 4
6 5
L
3
N P
E
L
1
L
2
A
B
A
B
3
R
W
4
0
3
/
3
R
W
4
0
2
/
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
3
R
W
4
0
4
C
o
n
t
r
o
l V
o
lt
a
g
e
:2
4
V
D
C
o
r
1
1
0
-
2
4
0
V
A
C
/
D
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
6
2
7
8
5
2
3
4
1
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-47
E.15.2 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404)
Fig. E-42: "Soft starter with reversing contactor" function circuit diagram
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.15.3 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)
Fig. E-43: Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
o
c
a
l
S
t
a
r
t
O
f
f
R
ig
h
t
L
e
f
t
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
L
o
c
a
l
R
ig
h
t
R
e
s
e
t
F
a
u
lt
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
L
o
c
a
l
L
e
f
t
M
a
in
s

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
O
F
F
O
N
>
O
N
>
>
O
p
e
ra
to
r P
a
n
e
l
D
ig
ita
l M
o
d
u
le
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
D
e
v
ic
e
>
I
>
I
>
I
-
Q
1
4 3
6
1 2
5
-
3
R
W
4
0 2
3
0
V
A
C
2
4
v
d
c
+
B Y P A S
O
V
E
R
LO
A
D
I N
+
o n
-
A
1
1 L 1
9 5
A 1
3
1
2 9 6
2 T 1
5 L 3
2 3
9 8
4 T 2
6 T 3
3 L 2
1 4 / 2 4
1 3
A 2
IN
4
IN
2
O
U
T
1
IN
1
P
T
C
O
U
T
3
O
U
T
2
IN
3
-
A
1
0
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
2
3
0
V
A
C
2 4 V
T
e
s
t/re
s
e
t
B
U
S
P
ro
fib
u
s
D
P
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
4
A 2
S P E / P E
1
8
A 1
9
7
5
6
B
S Y S
X 9
2
T 2
C T
1 0
A
T 1
3
-
T
1
0
T 2
L 1
B
U
T 3
T 1
L 2
L 3
G
E
N
.FA
U
LT
TEST/
D
E
V
IC
E
RESET
B
U
S
-
A
1
2 S Y S
IN
4
O
U
T
2
IN
3
O
U
T
1
N
/
M
IN
1
IN
2
-
A
1
1
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
2
3
0
V
A
C
R e a d y
2 4
S Y S 2
2 7
2 1
2 6
2 5
P E
2 2
S Y S 1
2 0
2 3
3
/ . 2 / . 2
P E .
/ . 2 / . 2
2
/ . 2 / . 2
3
/ . 5 / . 5
2
/ . 5 / . 5
P E .
/ . 2 / . 2
2
5
7
6
4
-
X
1
0
1
9
-
X
1
0
8
3
M
3
A
C
-
M
1
W
V
P
E
U
I
>
-
F
1
3
C
3
A
1 2
I
>
-
F
1
1
C
1
A
2 1
I
>
-
F
1
2
C
1
,6
A
1 2
-
S
1
2
2 2 2 1
-
X
9
o
ff
' A A
' B B
-A
1
R
R
e
s
e
t
F
e
rn
E 2 E 1
-
Q
2
A 1 A 2
-
Q
1
A 2 A 1
1
N
2
N
1
/
N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
L
1
1
/
N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
2
L
1
-
Q
1
/
.4
2 1
-
Q
2
/
.5
1 2
-
S
1
1
1 3 1 4
-
S
1
3
1 3 1 4
6 5
4 3
3 4
5 6
P
E
N L
1
L
3
L
2
B
3
R
W
4
0
5
/
A
B
A
3
R
W
4
0
7
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
C
o
n
t
r
o
l V
o
lt
a
g
e
:2
4
V
D
C
o
r
1
1
0
-
2
4
0
V
A
C
/
D
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
2
3
6
7
8
5
2
1
4
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-49
E.15.4 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)
Fig. E-44: Function circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E.16 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example
E.16.1 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example
Fig. E-45: "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example
O
F
F
O
N
O
p
e
r
a
to
r
P
a
n
e
l
B
a
s
ic
U
n
it
O
f
f
O
n
L
o
c
a
l
L
o
c
a
l
M
a
in

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
v
ic
e
m e a s u r e m e n t u n i t
C u r r e n t - / v o l t a g e -
d e c o u p l i n g m o d u l
S I M O C O D E p r o V
>
I
I
>
I
>
-
Q
1
1
3
2
6
4
5
IN
4
IN
2
O
U
T
1
IN
1
P
T
C
O
U
T
3
O
U
T
2
IN
3
-
A
1
0
S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
2
3
0
V
A
C
P
r
o
fib
u
s
D
P
G
e
n
.fa
u
lt
B
U
S
2 4 V
T
e
s
t/re
s
e
t
T 1
A
1
2
T 2
A 1
5
8
3
B
6
C T
S Y S
X 9
A 2
7
1 0
4
9
S P E / P E
-
T
4
T 2
L 3
L 2
U
L
2
B
U
T 1
U
L
1
T 3
U
L
3
L 1
-
A
1
3
R e a d y
S Y S 2 P E
S Y S 1
G
E
N
.FA
U
LT
TEST/
D
E
V
IC
E
RESET
B
U
S
-
A
1
2 S Y S
P E
/ . 2 / . 2
P E
/ . 2 / . 2
#
2
,5
m
m
#
2
,5
m
m
3
-
X
2
1
2
N
M 1
~
-
M
1
L
N
P E
I
>
-
F
1
1
C
1
A
1 2
I
>
-
F
1
2
C
1
,6
A
2 1
-
S
1
2
2 2 2 1
2
1 9
1
2 0
-
X
1
9
1 8
1
-
X
1
3
2
4
3
7
5
-
X
1
6
1 0
6
5
8
1 2
8
9
7
4
-
X
1
9
1 1
-
Q
1
A 1 A 2
1
N
2
N
1
/
N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
1
L
1
1
/
N
A
C
5
0
H
z
2
3
0
V
2
L
1
-
Q
1
/
.4
1 2
-
S
1
1
1 4 1 3
4 3
6 5
P
E
L
2
L
1
N L
3
P
R
O
F
IB
U
S
2
A
2
A
B
C
o
n
t
r
o
l V
o
lt
a
g
e
:2
4
V
D
C
o
r
1
1
0
-
2
4
0
V
A
C
/
D
C
B
1
1
2 3
2
3
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 E-51
E.16.2 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit example
Fig. E-46: "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit diagram
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 F-1
Safety and commissioning information
for EEx areas F
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find safety and commissioning information for
hazardous areas. It is imperative that you observe this information for the
protection of any motors in hazardous areas.
Target groups
Commissioners
Necessary knowledge
Explosion protection
IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other
than mines)
IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence
of combustible dust - Selection and installation
IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the
presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines
Betriebssicherheitsverordnung - BetrSichV (Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health).
Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
SIMOCODE pro
F-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F.1 General
Information and standards
Type of protection EEx e and EEx d:
The overload protection and thermistor motor protection of the
SIMOCODE pro system meets the requirements for overload protection of
explosion proof motors for the following types of protection:
EExd "explosion proof enclosure", e.g. according to DIN EN 50018 or
DIN EN 60079
EExe "increased safety", e.g. according to DIN EN 50019 or
DIN EN 60079-7.
Increased danger in hazardous areas means it is necessary to carefully
observe the following notes and standards:
IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other
than mines)
IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence
of combustible dust - Selection and installation
IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the
presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines
Betriebssicherheitsverordnung - BetrSichV (Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health).
All 3UF7 devices are approved under Device Group I, Category "M2" (mining)
and Device Group II, Category 2 in the area "GD" (areas in which explosive
gas, steam, fog, air mixtures and inflammable dust are present):
*) Note:
This safety and commissioning information is also valid for devices with the
certificate number BVS 04 ATEX F 003.
These devices are suitable for the protection of motors in hazardous areas
and comply with the standards listed above.
Tests other than those legally stipulated (Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health) are not required.
Warning
All installation, commissioning and maintenance work is to be carried out by
responsible, qualified personnel only. Unprofessional behavior can cause
serious damage to persons and goods.
BVS 06 ATEX F 001 II (2) GD *)
BVS 06 ATEX F 001 I (M2) *)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 F-3
F.2 Set-up and commissioning
Notice
Please observe the following SIMOCODE pro operating instructions
Device Order No.
SIMOCODE pro
F-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F.2.1 Setting the rated motor current
Set the 3UF7 to the rated motor current (according to the type plate or
design test certificate of the motor).
Notice
Note the trip class/tripping characteristic of the 3UF7.
Select the trip class so that the motor is thermally protected, even when the
rotor is stalled.
Motors, cables and contactors must be suitable for the selected trip class.
Notice
Set the response of the overload protection to "Tripping"!
Example
Motor 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time T
E
= 11 s,
I
A
/I
s
= 5.5:
Fig. F-1: Tripping conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10
I
A
/I
s
= 5.5
T
E
= 11 s
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 F-5
F.2.2 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input
For the 3UF70, you can use type A temperature sensors with a
characteristic curve according to IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, Part 303), DIN
44081 and DIN 44082.
Depending on the number of sensors, this will result in the following
tripping and restart temperatures:
Fig. F-2: Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)
Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart
temperatures will result based on the TNF (rated response temperature of
the sensor):
Table F-1: Tripping and restart temperatures
The temperatures listed are limit values.
Notice
Set the response for the activated thermistor to "Tripping"!
Tripping temperature Restart temperature
3 sensors TNF + 4 K TNF - 7 K
6 sensors TNF - 5 K TNF - 20 K
SIMOCODE pro
F-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F.2.3 Sensor circuit wiring
Caution
Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables.
The use of motor feeder wires or other main current cables is not permitted.
Shielded control cables must be used if extremely inductive or capacitive
interferences are to be expected because of parallel high-voltage cables.
Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables:
Table F-2: Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables
We recommend evaluation of the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable.
If the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable is not evaluated, the sensor
resistance must be measured with a suitable measuring device during
commissioning or after modifications/maintenance work has been carried
out (mounting, demounting the system).
F.2.4 Short-circuit protection for type of assignment 2 according to
IEC 60947-4-1
Short-circuit protection must be carried out by separately arranged
overcurrent protection devices.
Caution
When combining with other contactors, observe the respective maximum
fuse protection of the contactor for type of assignment 2.
F.2.5 Cable protection
Caution
Avoid impermissibly high cable surface temperatures by correctly
dimensioning the cross sections!
Select a sufficient cross section - especially with heavy starting CLASS 20
to CLASS 40 (see Chapter D.7 "Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor
feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V").
Cable
cross section
Cable lengths at the thermistor input
Without short-circuit detection With short-circuit detection
1)
2.5 mm
2
2 x 2800 m 2 x 250 m
1.5 mm
2
2 x 1500 m 2 x 150 m
0.5 mm
2
2 x 500 m 2 x 50 m
1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to this maximum cable length.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 F-7
F.2.6 Test
SIMOCODE pro offers users the convenient option of checking the
complete motor protection chain (incl. actuators and sensors such as
contactors, thermistors). This can, for example, be used to carry out tests
according to IEC 60079-17.
This test includes a complete function test. For this purpose, all three test
phases are to be carried out (hardware test, current feedback, motor
protection tripping, see below). The test can be carried out using the "TEST/
RESET" buttons provided, or automatically via the bus. Due to existing self-
test routines, tripping currents do not need to be started in order to carry
out testing.
Test phases
Phase 1: Hardware test/lamp test (0 to 2 s):
The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays
are activated, including lamp controls. Contactor controls remain unchanged.
Phase 2: Hardware test results (2 to 5 s):
If there is a fault, the "HW fault basic unit" fault is triggered.
If there is no fault:
The "GEN. FAULT" LED flashes when no main current is flowing
The "GEN. FAULT" LED flickers if main current is flowing in all three
phases (special case: for "1-phase load" in one phase).
Phase 3: Relay test (> 5 s):
If testing is carried out with tripping, the contactor controls are deactivated.
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the "TEST/
RESET" button is pressed for the required length of time:
Test phase Status Without main current With main current
O.K. Fault *) O.K. Fault
Hardware test/lamp test
< 2 s
"DEVICE" LED Orange Green Orange Green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL*
Results of the hardware test/lamp test
2 s - 5 s
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay test
> 5 s
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED off
*) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s
Table F-3: The states of the status LEDs/contactor controls during testing
SIMOCODE pro
F-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F.2.7 Further safety guidelines
Caution
Only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit or the 3UF730 monostable
digital module may be used for the protection function!
Warning
The 3UF7 is not suitable for installation in hazardous areas.
The device may only be used in a switchgear cabinet with at least degree of
protection IP 4x.
When setting up the equipment in hazardous areas, ensure the 3UF7 does
not present a fire hazard. Appropriate measures must be taken (e.g.
encapsulation).
Warning:
For SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC supply, galvanic isolation must
be ensured with a battery or a safety isolating transformer according to
DIN EN 61558-2-6.
Notice
The 3UF7 is not suitable for load-side operation on frequency converters.
F.2.8 Ambient conditions
Permissible ambient temperature range:
Storage/transport: -40 C to +80 C
Operation: -25 C to +60 C; OPD: 0 C to +60 C
F.2.9 Safety data
SIL (IEC 61508): SIL 1
PFDavg (IEC 61508) < 3.0 * 10
-2
Repeat test: DIN EN 60079-17, Section 4.4.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 F-9
F.3 Maintenance and repairs
These devices are maintenance-free.
Warning
Repairs may only be carried out by the manufacturer.
F.4 Warranty
Notice
For this warranty to be considered valid, the safety and commissioning
information of the following operating instructions must be observed:
Device Order No.
SIMOCODE pro
F-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F.5 Further information
You will find further information on the Internet:
Internet:
Service and support:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance.
ATEX:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/atex.
Certificates:
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Index-1
Index
Symbols
IL1, IL2, IL3 1-54
Imax 1-54
Numerics
0/4 A - 20 mA monitoring 5-1, 5-15
1NC contact + 1NO contact evaluation/
2NC contact evaluation 10-20
2x 1-channel/1x 2-channel 10-20
3UF50 basic type 1-74
3UF50 compatibility mode 1-20, 9-1, 9-2
3UF50 operating mode 1-74
3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator
panels C-13
9-pole SUB-D connection 13-46
A
I_max 1-54
IL1, IL2, IL3 1-54
A/B terminals 13-46
Abbreviations A-3, B-4
Abbreviations and specifications A-3
About SIMOCODE 1-53
Access to data records in STEP7 12-24
Accessories 1-27, 1-107, C-16
Acknowledgement of faults 10-7
Active control stations 4-65, A-2
Active control stations, contactor controls,
lamp controls and status information for
the control functions 4-65
Active power 1-22
Active power monitoring 1-16, 5-1, 5-13
Actual analog signal values 1-22
Acyclic Receive 7-3, 7-17
Acyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3) 1-115
Acyclic Send 6-18
Acyclic Send Byte 0 (1) 1-115
Acyclic Send Data 6-18, 12-1
Acyclic services 1-20, 6-18, 7-17
Acyclic writing and reading of DPV1 data
records 12-17
Adapt display settings 1-75, 1-81
Addressing plug 1-27, 1-32, 1-107, 13-36,
13-42, Glossary-1
Adopt address 1-85
Alarms 12-7
Alarms - diagnostic alarm 12-15
Alarms - process alarm 12-16
Alarms according to DPV1 1-20
Alarms, faults and system events 15-1
AM Inputs 1-114
AM inputs function block 7-14
AM Output 1-114, 6-11
Ambient conditions F-8
Analog input 1, 2 1-61
Analog module 1-7, 1-17, 1-26, 1-79, 1-99,
5-16
Analog module (AM) 1-104, Glossary-1
Analog module connection example 13-
13-23
Analog module inputs 7-1, 7-3, 7-14
Analog module open circuit 15-2
Analog module output 6-1, 6-11
Analog module pin assignment 13-22
Analog signals 1-22
Analog temperature monitoring with NTC,
PT100, PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor
types 1-14
Analog terminal block 1-112
Analog value recording 1-114, 8-1, 8-2,
8-3
Antivalence 15-2
Apparent power 1-22
Areas of application 1-6
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data
for predefined control functions B-45
ATEX Glossary-1
Automatic acknowledgement of faults
reset 10-7
Automatic baud rate recognition 1-20
Automatic starting after power failure
10-21
Auto-Reset 10-11
Acyclic Receive function blocks 7-17
B
Basic unit 1-15, 1-75, 1-90, 13-2, 14-2, F-3,
F-9, Glossary-1
Basic unit 1 1-29
Basic unit 2 1-30
SIMOCODE pro
Index-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Basic unit connection example 13-15
Basic unit inputs 7-3, 7-4
Basic unit outputs 6-4
Basic unit pin assignment 13-14
Basic units 1-29, C-2
Baud rate 1-72, Glossary-2
Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s 1-20
Binary inputs for 110 - 240 V AC/DC 1-14
Binary inputs on the basic units and digital
modules 7-1
Binary terminal block 1-112
Bistable outputs 1, 2 1-77
Bistable relay outputs 1-14
BU input settings 7-5
BU inputs 1-121
BU outputs 1-121, 6-5
Bus Glossary-2
Bus connection D-8
Bus connection system 1-24, 13-30,
13-31
Bus connection system from 20 A to
630 A 13-30, 13-31
Bus fault/PLC/PCS fault response 10-25
Bus monitoring 1-72, 10-24, 10-25
Bus o.k. 1-72
Bus ok, PLC/PCS in run 1-63
Bus parameters 12-1
Bus segment Glossary-2
Bus termination module 13-47
Bus/PLC fault - reset 1-73, 10-25
Buttons, operator panel D-22
Buttons, operator panel with display D-23
C
Cable cross sections 13-12
Cable length of the sensor circuit
cables F-6
Cable protection F-6
Calculation modules 1-21, 11-2
Calculator 1-21
Calculator 1 1-59, 1-70, 1-117
Calculator 2 1-59, 1-71, 1-117, 11-28
Calculator examples 11-30
Calculator formulae 11-29
Calculator settings 11-29
Calculators 1-70
Cascade input Glossary-2
Cascade input automatic start/monitored
start 10-21
Catalogs and information material xiii,
F-10
Change-over pause 4-16, 4-18, 4-31, 4-
4-32, 4-34, 4-36, 4-37, 4-39, 4-41, 4-43,
4-44, 4-46, 4-48, 4-50
Change-over pause active 1-64
Channel-related diagnostics 12-7, 12-14
Characteristic curve of a type A sensor
F-5
Check list for selecting a device series
1-13
Circuit breaker 1-19, 4-14, 4-29
Circuit breaker control (MCCB) 1-30
Class 3-8, Glossary-2
Class 1 master 12-2, 12-17, Glossary-2
Class 2 master 12-2, Glossary-2
Class time 3-14
Clear 1-85
Clockwise rotation 4-33
Cold starting 10-9
Color coding for the connecting cable
13-41, 13-43
Commands 1-52
Commands (OPD) 1-48
Comment 1-89
Commissioning 2-9, 14-1, 14-3, 14-4, F-3
Communication 1-5, 1-20, 1-51, 12-1
Communication principle 12-4
Compatibility mode 1-73
Compatibility mode 1 1-74
Conductor cross section 13-30, 13-31
Configuration fault 15-2
Configuration information for using an ope-
rator panel with display and/or a decou-
pling module 1-106
Configure diagnostic response 12-7
Configuring a reversing starter 2-1
Configuring the DM-F DIP switch 1-101
Connecting cable 1-27, 1-108, 13-36,
Glossary-3
Connecting cables to the system interface
of the operator panel 13-44, 13-45
Connecting plugs with sockets 1-113
Connecting system components to the
system interface 13-39, 13-43
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the
9-pole SUB-D socket 13-46
Connection cross sections, decoupling
module D-9
Connection for voltage measurement
D-8
Connection, analog module D-20
Connection, basic units D-6
Connection, digital modules D-11
Connection, DM-F D-13
Connection, earth-fault module D-20
Connection, temperature module D-21
Contactor Glossary-3
Contactor control 4-33
Contactor controls 4-12, 4-65, A-2
Contrast 1-81
Control circuit, analog module D-19
Control circuit, digital modules D-10
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Index-3
Index
Control circuit, earth-fault module D-20
Control commands 4-1, 4-7, 4-24, 4-27,
4-30, 4-33, 4-37, 4-40, 4-44, 4-47, 4-54,
4-59, 4-62
Control function 4-1, 4-2
Control functions 4-10, 4-65, Glossary-3
Control of the main contactor in the motor
feeder 6-4
Control station - local control 4-3
Control station - operator panel 4-4
Control station - PC 4-4
Control station - PLC/PCS 4-3
Control station Local Control 2-2
Control station operator panel 4-2
Control station PC 4-2
Control station PLC/PCS 4-2
Control station settings 4-9
Control stations 1-124, 4-1, Glossary-3
Cooling down period 1-62, 3-10,
Glossary-4
Cooling down period active 1-65
Cooling down period of the motor 1-22
Cos phi 1-94, Glossary-4
Cos phi monitoring 1-16, 1-126, 5-1, 5-11,
11-25, Glossary-4
Cos phi, P, S 1-61
Cold starting function test 10-9
Counter 11-2, 11-8, 11-9
Counter - actual value 1-70
Counter - output 1-70
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-131
Counter-clockwise rotation 4-33
Counter logic modules 11-8
Counters 1-21, 1-70
Cover 1-32
Cross-circuit detection 10-20
Current flowing, device ok 1-63
Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-22
Current limit 1-15, 3-14
Current limit monitoring 1-13, 1-15, 5-1,
5-5, 5-6, Glossary-4
Current limits 1-124, 5-5
Current measuring 1-13, 1-76
Current measuring module 1-24, 1-93,
4-32, 13-2, 13-30, 14-2, 5-5, C-3, C-4,
C-5, C-6, C-7, F-3, F-9, Glossary-4
Current measuring module installed 4-36
Current measuring module installed in
delta circuit/supply line 4-18
Current measuring with the current mea-
suring modules and current/voltage me-
asuring modules 13-30
Current/voltage measuring module 1-7,
5-13, 13-2, 14-2, C-9, C-10, C-11, C-12,
F-3, F-9, Glossary-4
1-24, 1-25, 1-94, 5-5, 5-8, 13-31, C-8
Cyclic data 12-6
Cyclic data exchange 12-17
Cyclic Receive 7-3, 7-16, 12-6
Cyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3) 1-132
Cyclic Receive function blocks 7-16
Cyclic Send 6-16, 12-6
Cyclic Send Byte 0 (1, 2/3) 1-132
Cyclic Send data 2-12, 6-17, 12-1
Cyclic services 1-20, 6-17, 7-16
D
Dahlander 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 4-14, 4-39,
B-51, E-18, E-19
Dahlander reversing starter 4-14, 4-43,
B-52, E-20, E-21, E-22
Dahlander reversing starter control
function 4-40
Data access 12-6
Data formats B-1
Data record 130 - Basic device parame-
ters 1 B-21
Data record 131 - Basic device parame-
ters 2 B-26
Data record 132 - Extended device parame-
ters 1 B-30
Data record 133 - Extended device parame-
ters 2 B-37
Data record 139 - Marking B-40
Data record 160 - Communication
parameters B-41
Data record 165 - Identification B-41
Data record 202 - Acyclic receive B-42
Data record 203 - Acyclic send B-43
Data record 224 - Password protection
B-44
Data record 67 - Process image of the
outputs B-8
Data record 69 - Process image of the
inputs B-9
Data record 72 - Error buffer B-10
Data record 73 - Event memory B-11
Data record 92 - Device diagnostics B-12
Data record 94 - Measured values B-19
Data record 95 - Service data/statistical
data B-20
Data records 12-24, B-1, B-2, B-3
Data transfer 12-4
Date 1-89
Decoupling module 1-25, 1-96, 13-2,
14-2, F-9, Glossary-4
Decoupling module connection
example 13-24
Decoupling module in different
networks 1-95, 1-96
SIMOCODE pro
Index-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Decoupling module pin assignment
13-24
Degree of protection (according to
IEC 60529) D-2
Delay xii, 3-12
Delay time 1-100, 7-11
Delay time for sensor inputs
50ms/10ms 10-20
Delta networks 1-98
Device class 1-91
Device data 12-2
Device data (GSD file) Glossary-5
Device family 1-90
Device I/Os 1-52
Device I/Os (OPD) 1-46
Device parameters 12-1
Device replacement 1-107
Device series 1-7
Device subfamily 1-90
Device test active 1-65
Diagnostic alarms 12-7
Diagnostic data 1-5, 1-23
Diagnostic device fault 1-74
Diagnostic message "Local" and
"PROFIsafe" 1-23
Diagnostic warning 1-74
Diagnostics data 12-7
Diagnostics for device faults 12-7
Diagnostics for process events 12-7
Diagnostics for process warnings 12-7
Digital module 1-77, 1-100, 13-2, 14-2, F-3,
F-9, Glossary-5
Digital module 1 as DM-F Local 1-78
Digital module 1 inputs 7-3
Digital module 1 is DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78
Digital module 2 inputs 7-3
Digital module connection example 13-17
Digital module DM-F Local 1-102, 13-2,
14-2, F-3, F-9
Digital module DM-F Local connection
example 13-28
Digital module DM-F Local pin
assignment 13-26
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe 1-102,
13-2, 14-2, F-3, F-9
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe connec-
tion examples 13-29
Digital module inputs 7-9
Digital module outputs 6-9
Digital module pin assignment 13-16
Digital modules 1-25, 1-99
Digital modules DM-F Local and
DM-F PROFIsafe 13-5, 13-25, C-15,
Glossary-5
Dimension drawings C-1
DIP positions, enabling circuit 0>1, digital
module DM-F Local 1-88
DIP switch Glossary-5
DIP switch, DM-F Local D-16
DIP switch, DM-F PROFIsafe D-17
DIP switches, DM-F PROFIsafe 10-22
DIP switches, DM-F Local 1-66, 10-19,
10-20
Direct starter 1-9, 1-10, 1-13, 1-19, 1-30,
4-14, 4-23, B-46, E-6, E-7
Direct starter for 1-phase loads E-50,
E-51
Direct starter control function 4-22
Direction of rotation 4-24
Display 1-92
Display of all pending faults 1-86
Display of all pending status
information 1-86
Display of all pending warnings 1-86
Display of measured values in the measu-
red values display 1-60
Display of statistical and maintenance-rele-
vant information on the statistics/main-
tenance display 1-67
Display settings 1-52
Display settings (OPD) 1-47
Display, operator panel with display D-23
Displays (lamp control) 4-12
Displays of the operator panel with
display 1-38, 1-51
Displays the current status of all
device I/Os 1-75
DM Inputs 7-11
DM Outputs 6-9
DM1(2) Inputs 1-118
DM1(2) Inputs, DM-F = DM-F Local or DM-
F PROFIsafe 1-118
DM1(2) Outputs 1-118
DM-F Abbreviations-1
DM-F - Test requirement 15-2
DM-F DIP switch
1-101
DM-F feedback circuit 15-2
DM-F Local 1-18
DM-F PROFIsafe 1-18
DM-F PROFIsafe, inputs 1,2,3, feedback
circuit 1-78
DM-F safety-oriented tripping 15-2
DM-F system interfaces 1-101
DM-F wiring 15-2
DM-FL - Configuration deviation 15-2
DM-FL - Configuration mode 15-3
DM-FL - Cross circuit 15-3
DM-FL - Simultaneity 15-3
DM-FL waiting for start-up test 15-3
DM-FP F PRM error 15-3
DM Inputs function blocks 7-9
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Index-5
Index
Documentation for safety-oriented func-
tions and failsafe digital modules 1-102
Door adapter 1-27, 1-108, 13-2, 14-2,
C-16, F-9, Glossary-5
Double 0 15-3
Double 1 15-3
DP master 12-2, Glossary-5
DP master with DPV1 alarm support (DPV1
alarm mode) 12-21
DP master without DPV1 alarm support
(DPV0 alarm mode) 12-21
DP masters which are operated in "DPV1"
DP mode 12-22
DP masters which are operated in "S7
compatible" DP mode 12-23
DP slave/DP standard slave Glossary-6
DPV0 1-74
DPV1 1-74
PC 4-9
DPV1 slave 12-2
DPV1 slave via GSD 12-17
E
Early warning and fault messages 1-23
Earth fault 5-2
Earth-fault detection 1-7
Earth-fault module 1-26, 1-99, 1-105,
Glossary-6
Earth-fault module connection
example 13-19
Earth-fault module pin assignment 13-18
Earth-fault monitoring 1-15, 1-26, 1-127,
5-1, 5-2, Glossary-6
Earth-fault monitoring via the current mea-
suring module (internal) 1-13
Earth-fault monitoring with external
summation current transformer via the
earth-fault module 1-14
EEx e applications 3-10, 3-15, 5-23
Electrical service life of relay outputs,
DM-F D-12
EMC stability according to
IEC 60947-1 D-2
EMERGENCY OFF Glossary-7
Emergency start 1-20, 1-121, 10-2, 10-17,
Glossary-6
Emergency start executed 1-65
EMERGENCY STOP Glossary-7
EMERGENCY STOP command
device Glossary-7
EMERGENCY STOP device Glossary-7
Enabled control command 4-7
Enabled control command - OFF 4-35,
4-53, 4-57, 4-64
Enabled control command - ON < 4-57
Enabled control command - ON > 4-53,
4-57
Enabling circuit Glossary-7
Enabling circuit 1>0, digital module
DM-F Local 1-88
Enclosure width, DM-F D-12
End position 4-53, 15-3
Energy consumed 1-59, 1-68
Error buffer 1-53
Error buffer (OPD) 1-49
Error buffer/reading out error protocol
14-15
Error protocolling with time stamp 1-23
Error types 12-14
European norm EXplosion safe (EEx)
Glossary-7
Evaluating diagnostics data 12-21
Event memory 1-53, 1-88, 14-16
Event memory, OPD 1-49
Example circuits E-1
Execution ON command 15-3
Execution STOP command 15-4
Execution time 4-17, 4-19, 4-23, 4-26,
4-29, 4-32, 4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50,
4-53, 4-58, 4-61, 4-64
Expansion modules 13-2, 14-2, F-9,
Glossary-7
Expansion modules for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series 1-99
Expansion modules/decoupling
module C-14
Explosion protection F-1
Extended control 1-120
Extended protection 1-119
External current transformer 13-33
External earth fault 15-4
External earth-fault monitoring 1-15, 5-2
External earth-fault monitoring (with
summation current transformer) 5-4
External fault 1-20, 10-2, 10-10, 10-11,
15-4
External fault 1 (and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) 1-120
External fault function blocks 10-10
External fault response 10-11
F
Factory settings 1-85, 2-2, 14-3, E-2,
Glossary-7
Factory settings display 1-84
Failsafe data transfer via PROFIBUS/
PROFIsafe 12-5
Failsafe digital module DM-F 1-101
Failsafe digital module DM-F Local 1-25,
13-2, 14-2, F-3, F-9
Failsafe digital module DM-F
PROFIsafe 13-2, 14-2, F-3, F-9
SIMOCODE pro
Index-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Fault current 5-2
Fault feedback 4-17
Fault message xii
Faults 1-53, 1-83
Faults (OPD) 1-49
FB ON 4-16, 4-17, 4-50
FC, FO, TC, TO 1-64
Features 1-4
Feedback (FB) OFF 15-4
Feedback (FB) ON 15-4
Feedback circuit Glossary-8
Feedback faults 1-23
Feedback ON 4-16, 4-44, 4-47
Feedback time 4-17, 4-19, 4-23, 4-26,
4-29, 4-32, 4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50,
4-58, 4-61, 4-64
Feeder power consumption 1-22
Field/field level Glossary-8
Fieldbus Glossary-8
Flashing 1-21, 11-2, 11-21
Flashing 1 (2, 3) 1-116
Flashing logic modules 11-21
Flashing settings 11-21
Flickering 1-21, 11-2, 11-22
Flickering 1 (2, 3) 1-120
Flickering logic modules 11-22
Flickering settings 11-22
Frequencies D-2
Full motor protection 1-4
Function block Glossary-8
Function blocks 1-111, 10-2
Function blocks (alphabetical) 1-114
FW version 1-91, 1-92
G
General fault, general warning 1-63
General representation of the input
types 7-2
GSD 12-2
GSD file 1-110, 12-18
H
Hardware fault 15-4
Hardware test 10-6, F-7
HW version 1-91, 1-92
Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA 5-17
Hysteresis for monitoring functions 5-25
5-6, 5-7, 5-10
I
I L1, I L2, I L3 1-76
I_max 1-60
I_max, Cos 1-55
I_max, UL1-L2, C 1-58
I_max, UL1-L2, F 1-58
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos 1-58
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos_Phi, S 1-55, 1-57,
1-58
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, P 1-55
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, S 1-55
I_max, UL1-N, C 1-58
I_max, UL1-N, F 1-58
I_max, UL1-N, Cos 1-57
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, P 1-55
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, S 1-55
I/O devices Glossary-8
Identification 1-53, 1-89
Identification (OPD) 1-50
Identification number 1-91
Identification of the motor feeder and the
SIMOCODE pro components 1-89
Identification-related diagnostics 12-11
IL1, IL2, IL3 1-60
Illumination 1-81
Imax_A 1-54
Imax, cos phi 1-55
Independent operation 1-8, Glossary-8
Information about mounting and
wiring 13-2
Information and Download Center xiii,
F-10
Information and standards F-2
Input 1, analog module 1-79
Input 2, analog module 1-79
Input characterictic, DM-F PROFIsafe
D-18
Input characteristic, DM-F Local D-16
Input with safety relay function,
DM-FPROFIsafe D-18
Inputs 1-75, 1-77, 7-1, 7-3
Inputs (binary), basic units D-5
Inputs (binary), digital modules D-10
Inputs (binary), DM-F PROFIsafe D-17
Inputs DM-F Local 1-78
Inputs DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78
Inputs with safety relay function D-16
Inputs, analog module D-19
Installation guidelines for the
PROFIBUS DP 13-47
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1
slave via GSD in the configuration
software 12-18
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave
via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-20
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as
SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via
GSD) in STEP7 HW Config 12-19
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in
SIMATIC S7 with
OM SIMOCODE ES 12-22
Interfaces 13-1
Interlocking time 4-16, 4-18, 4-24, 4-26,
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Index-7
Index
4-36, 4-43, 4-50, 4-58, 4-64, 5-21
Interlocking time active 1-64
Internal comments 1-22
Internal earth fault 15-4
Internal earth-fault monitoring 1-15, 5-2,
5-3
IT Abbreviations-1
IT system Glossary-8
J
Just one start possible 15-4
K
Key-operated switch operation 4-5
KTY83 1-80
KTY85 1-80
L
Labeling strips 1-32, 1-33, 1-36
Lamp control for displaying operating
states 6-4
Lamp controls 4-12, 4-65, A-2
Lamp test 10-6, F-7
Languages 1-81
DM-F Local 1-88
DM-F PROFIsafe 1-88
Last event "Enabling circuit opened" 1-88
Last trip current 1-62
LC 4-9
LED display D-4
LED display, analog module D-19
LED display, decoupling module D-9
LED display, digital modules D-10
LED display, DM-F Local D-14
LED display, DM-F PROFIsafe D-17
LED display, earth-fault module D-20
LED display, operator panel D-22
LED display, operator panel with
display D-23
LED display, temperature module D-21
LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics 1-101
LEDs of the operator panel with
display 6-7
Limit Monitor 1-21, 11-2, 11-23, 11-24,
11-25
Limit Monitor 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-121
Limit Monitor logic modules 11-23
Limit overshooting 11-23
Limit undershooting 11-23
List of abbreviations Abbreviations-1
Load feeder 1-10
Load type 4-17, 4-20, 4-23, 4-26, 4-29,
4-32, 4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-57,
4-61, 4-64
Local 4-5, 4-6
Local control 4-5
Local control station 1-11, 2-3, 2-9, 4-2,
7-9
Location designation 1-89
Locking the contactor 4-16
Logic module Glossary-8
Logic modules 1-21, 11-1, 11-2
Low voltage Glossary-9
M
Main circuit, current measuring modules,
D-7
Main display 1-51
Main display (OPD) 1-41
Main menu (OPD) 1-40
Mains buffering time, basic units D-5
Maintenance F-9
Manual operation 4-5
Manufacturer 1-90
Manufacturer's identification 12-10
Master Glossary-9
Master PROFIBUS address 12-10
Max. star time 4-32, 4-36
Max. temp. C 1-56
Max. temp. F 1-57
Max. temperature 1-61, 1-80
Maximum expansion with expansion
modules 1-106
Measured curves 1-4
Measured values display 1-51
Measured values display (OPD) 1-42
Measuring current and voltage with cur-
rent/voltage measuring modules 13-31
Measuring current with an external current
transformer (interposing transformer)
13-33
Measuring current with current measuring
modules 13-30, 13-31
Measuring, processing and outputting
analog values 1-13
Memory module 1-27, 1-32, 1-107, 13-36,
13-42, Glossary-9
Memory module "park position" 1-34,
1-37
Menu of the operator panel with display
1-40
Messages (OPD) 1-48
MFLB 1-90, 1-92
Mode selector 4-5, 4-6, 4-9
Module fault 15-4
Module supply voltage is not present
15-5
B-48, E-11
SIMOCODE pro
Index-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3LV
E-10
Monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA 1-126, Glossary-9
Monitoring for further availability 1-16
Monitoring for undervoltage 1-16
Monitoring functions 1-15, 5-1,
Glossary-9
Monitoring interval for mandatory
testing 5-1, 5-24
Monitoring interval for testing 1-127
Monitoring of current limits I< 5-7
Monitoring of current limits I> 5-6
Monitoring the number of starts 5-20,
Glossary-9
Monitoring voltage Glossary-9
Motor control 1-4, 4-1
Motor control functions 1-29
Motor current monitoring 5-5
Motor feeder 1-9, 2-3
Motor model 10-17
Motor operating hours 1-22, 1-67
Motor operating hours > 15-5
Motor protection 3-1, Glossary-10
Motor protection and motor control
status 1-63
Motor protection functions 3-2
Motor stop time 1-16, 1-68
Motor stop time > 1-68, 15-5
Motor stop time monitoring 5-19,
Glossary-10
Motor stop times 1-22, 5-18, 5-19
Motor switching state 1-22
Motor temperature 1-15
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
control function 4-27
Mounting 13-1
Mounting basic units D-4
Mounting lugs 13-3, 13-4, 13-6, 13-7
Mounting lugs for screw attachment 13-3
Mounting position D-2
Mounting the basic units, expansion mo-
dules and the decoupling module 13-4
Mounting, analog module D-19
Mounting, current measuring modules,
13-6, 13-7, D-7
Mounting, decoupling module D-9
Mounting, digital modules D-10
Mounting, DM-F module D-12
Mounting, earth-fault module D-20
Mounting, operator panel D-22
Mounting, operator panel with display
D-23
Mounting, temperature module D-21
N
Navigating the menu of the operator panel
with display 1-40
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES 11-1, 12-1
Network contactor 4-33
No start 1-68
No start possible 15-5
Non-maintained command mode 1-64,
4-16, 4-23, 4-26, 4-29, 4-32, 4-36, 4-39,
4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-53, 4-57, 4-60, 4-64
Non-safety functions (failsafe digital
modules) 7-11
Non-volatile element 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-122
Non-volatile element logic modules 11-18
Non-volatile element settings 11-20
Non-volatile elements 1-21, 11-2, 11-18,
11-19, 11-20
NOR function 11-17, 11-20
Notes on parameterizing 14-3
NTC 1-80
Number of motor starts 1-22
Number of overload trips 1-22, 1-67
Number of parameterizations 1-69
Number of permissible starts
remaining 1-22
Number of starts 1-16, 5-20
Number of starts - actual value 1-67
Number of starts - overshoot 5-19
Number of starts - pre-warning 5-19
O
Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro
1-110
OFF command-reset 10-11
OM SIMOCODE pro 12-2
ON control command 4-53
ON, ON>>, Start active 1-63
Operator Panel 4-9
OP Buttons 1-116, 7-8
OP LED 1-115
Open circuit, analog module 1-79
Operating data 1-5, 1-22
Operating hours 1-16, 5-18
Operating hours BU 1-69
Operating hours monitoring 5-19,
Glossary-10
Operating manual failsafe digital module
DM-F Local 1-18, 1-102
Operating manual failsafe digital module
DM-F PROFIsafe 1-18, 1-102
Operating modes 4-1, 4-5, 4-6
Operating modes for calculator 2 11-28
Operating range, basic units D-4
Operating range, DM-F D-12
Operating, service and diagnostic data
1-22
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Index-9
Index
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream
from the Y link 1-20
Operation monitoring 1-116, 5-1, 5-18,
Glossary-10
Operational Protection OFF 1-20, 10-2,
10-12, 10-13, 15-5, Glossary-10
Operational Protection OFF (OPO) function
block 10-12
Operator controls of the operator panel
with display 1-39
Operator panel 1-24, 1-32, 13-2, 14-2,
F-9, 7-7, Glossary-10
Operator panel adapter 1-27, 1-108, 13-2,
14-2, C-16, F-9
Operator panel buttons 7-1, 7-3, 7-6
Operator panel LEDs 6-1, 6-6
Operator panel with display 1-7, 1-24, 1-
1-34, 13-2, 14-2, F-9
Operator panel, "Test/Reset" button 7-6
Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4 7-6
OPO 1-117, 10-12
OPO, Remote, TPF 1-64
Organization blocks Glossary-11
Output of an analog value 6-15
Output of the effective motor current
6-13, 6-14
Output response of the timer 11-12, 11-13
Output, analog module 1-79, D-19
Outputs 1-75, 6-1, 6-3
Outputs 1,2 "monostable" 1-77
Outputs 1,2, feedback circuit DM-F
Local 1-78
Outputs 1,2, feedback circuit
DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78
Outputs DM-F Local 1-78
Outputs DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78
Overload 3-10, 15-5
Overload operation 15-5
Overload protection 1-13, 1-15, 3-1, 3-2,
3-5, 3-14, Glossary-11
Overload relay 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 4-14, 4-
4-20, B-45, E-4, E-5
Overload relay control function 4-20
Overtemperature 5-23, 5-24
P
Panel reset 10-11
Parameter 4-16, 15-6
Parameter changes not allowed in the cur-
rent operating state 15-6
Parameter incorrect 15-6
Parameterization 2-6
Parameterization during startup 12-17
Parameterization via PROFIBUS 12-25
2-8
Password 15-10
Pause time 3-10, Glossary-11
Pause time active 1-65
PC cable 1-27, 1-107, 13-36, 13-42,
Glossary-11
PCS 7 SIMOCODE pro function block
library 1-28
Performance Level (PL) 1-18, 1-101,
Glossary-11
Permissible ambient temperature D-2
Permissible number of starts
exceeded 15-6
Permissible starts 5-20
Permissible starts - actual value 1-68
PFD Abbreviations-2
PFDavg (IEC 61508) F-8
PFHD Abbreviations-2
Phase failure monitoring 1-13
Phase sequence 1-22, 1-94
Phase sequence 1-2-3 1-65
Phase sequence 3-2-1 1-65
Phase sequence identification 1-17
Phase unbalance 1-22, 1-60, 3-13, 15-6
Pin assignment of the removable
terminals 13-18, 13-20, 13-22, 13-24,
13-27, 13-32
Pin assignment of the removable terminals
of the basic unit 13-14
of the digital module 13-16
of the digital module DM-F Local 13-26
Pin assignments for digital module
DM-F PROFIsafe, 24 V DC version
13-27
Plant downtimes 5-18
Plant identifier 1-89
PLC/PCS 4-5, 4-9
PLC/PCS in Run 1-73
PLC/PCS monitoring 1-20, 1-73, 10-2,
10-24, 10-25
Plugs (analog) 1-111
Plugs (binary) 1-111
Pole-changing reversing starter 4-14,
4-50, B-54, E-26, E-27, E-28
Pole-changing reversing starter control
function 4-47
Pole-changing starter 1-13, 1-19, 1-30,
4-14, 4-46, B-53, E-24, E-25
Pole changing starter control function
4-44
Positioner 1-13, 1-19, 4-14, 4-57, 10-12,
10-13, B-56, E-32, E-33, E-34, E-35, E-36,
E-37, E-38, E-39, E-40, E-41
Positioner closes 1-64
Positioner control 1-30, 4-56
SIMOCODE pro
Index-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Positioner control function 4-54, 10-12
Positioner opens 1-64
Power considerations 1-13
Power consumption, basic units D-4
Power consumption, DM-F D-12
Power factor 1-22
Power failure (UVO) 15-6
Power failure monitoring 1-20, 10-2,
10-15, 10-16
Power failure monitoring settings 10-16
Power failure time 10-16
Power loss ride-through time, DM-F D-12
Power management 1-13
Power monitoring 1-13, 1-127
Power-up behavior 3-5
Pre-alarm delay 3-12
Preparing the data transfer 12-17
Prerequisites for commissioning and
servicing 14-2
Preventive maintenance 14-8
Pre-warning level 3-12
Pre-warning overload (I >115%) 15-6
Process alarms 12-7
Process and diagnostic alarm 12-17
Process automation Glossary-11
Process monitoring 1-15
Product Information System (ProdIS) ii-
xiii, F-10, Abbreviations-2
PROFIBUS Glossary-12
PROFIBUS address 1-72
PROFIBUS communication (OPD) 1-45
PROFIBUS DP 1-20, 1-28, 2-2, 4-4, 4-59,
4-62, 6-2, 6-3, 6-5, 6-16, 6-18, 7-17, 10-7,
12-2, Glossary-12
PROFIBUS DP interface 1-20,
Glossary-12
PROFIBUS DP interface, basic units D-4
PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket
13-46
PROFIBUS DPV1 6-18, 7-17, 12-2,
Glossary-12
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) in-
stallation guidelines 13-47, Glossary-12
PROFINET Glossary-12
PROFIsafe 12-3, Glossary-12
PROFIsafe address 1-72
Programmable logic controller (PLC)
Glossary-13
Programming device Glossary-13
Protection functions 1-15
Protection/Control 1-122
Protective extra low voltage (PELV)
Glossary-13
Pt100 1-80
Pt1000 1-80
PTC 3-15
PTC high resistance/not present 1-75
PTC ok 1-75
PTC short circuit 1-75
Pump 1-11, 1-15
R
Rated control supply voltage Us D-4
Rated control supply voltage Us,
DM-F D-12
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp,
basic units D-4
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp,
DM-F D-12
Rated insulation voltage Ui, basic units
D-4
Rated insulation voltage Ui, DM-F D-12
Rated motor current F-4
Reaction times, typical D-27
Read and adapt main display 1-54
Reading data 12-3
Reading out statistical data 14-8
Reading out the device-internal error
buffer 1-87
Reading out the device-internal event
memory 1-88
Receive data from PROFIBUS DP 1-111,
7-1
Relay enabling circuits, DM-F D-12
Relay outputs 6-1
Relay outputs, basic units D-5
Relay outputs, digital modules D-10
Relay outputs, DM-F D-12
Relay test 10-6, F-7
Releases 4-1, 4-7
Remote operation 4-5
Remote reset 10-11
Remote/Automatic 4-5, 4-6
Removable terminals 13-3, 14-13
Repairs F-9
Replacing a basic unit 14-11
Replacing a DM-F 14-12
Replacing an expansion module or a
decoupling module 14-12
Required function is not supported 15-7
Reset 1-20, 3-12, 10-2
Reset 1 (2, 3) 1-125
Reset display settings 1-84
Reset function 10-4, 10-5
Reset settings 10-7
Resetting, testing and parameterizing via
commands 1-85
Resistive load 4-17
Response xii, 3-4, 3-14
Restart 1-85
Restart temperature F-5
Restart time delay 10-15
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Index-11
Index
Restart time delay (staggered) 10-16
Return to main display 1-84
Reversing starter 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 2-1,
2-2, 2-7, 2-9, 4-14, 4-26, B-47, E-8, E-9
Reversing starter control function 4-24
Routing function 12-20, 12-25
S
S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-17
Safe isolation according to
IEC 60947-1 D-3
Safe isolation according to IEC 60947-1,
DM-F D-12
Safe Tripping 10-3
Safe Tripping reset 10-23
Safe Tripping response 10-23
Safe Tripping, DM-F Local 1-123
Safe Tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe 1-123
Safety and commissioning information for
EEx areas F-1
Safety data F-8
Safety DM-F Local 1-66
Safety DM-F PROFIsafe 1-66
Safety extra low voltage Glossary-13
Safety guidelines F-8
Safety Integrity Level 1-18, 1-101,
Glossary-14
Safety/PROFIsafe - separate function from
Safety-oriented tripping 1-14, 1-18, 10-18
Safety-oriented tripping "Local" 1-20
Safety-oriented tripping "PROFIsafe" 1-20
Safety-oriented tripping monitoring 1-22
Saving change-over command 4-16, 4-26,
4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-64
Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES
file into the basic unit 14-10
Saving parameters from the basic unit into
a SIMOCODE ES file 14-9
Saving parameters from the basic unit into
the memory module 14-9
Saving parameters from the memory mo-
dule into the basic unit 14-10
Schematic of the "OP Buttons" function
block 7-8
Screw attachment 13-3, 13-4, 13-6, 13-7
Screw terminals 1-111, 1-112
SELV Glossary-13
Send data on the PROFIBUS DP 6-1
Sensor channels 1,2, DM-F Local 1-78
Sensor channels DM-F Local 1-78
Sensor circuit fault 3-16
Sensor circuit wiring F-6
Sensor circuit, temperature module D-21
Sensor fault 1-80, 3-16
Sensor input automatic start/monitored
start 10-21
Sensor measuring circuit 1-16, 1-22
Sensor out of range 1-80
Sensor type 1-80
Sensor types 1-105
Sensors 1-26
Separate failsafe function from control
function 4-20, 4-23, 4-26, 4-29, 4-32,
4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-53, 4-57,
4-60, 4-64
Sequence for connecting cables to the sys-
tem interface 13-40
Sequence for connecting cables to the sys-
tem interface of the operator panel
13-43
Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to
the basic unit 13-46
Service 14-1
Service and support xiii, F-10
Service data 1-5, 1-22
Set current 3-5
Set current Is2 3-6
SET/RESET button, DM-F Local 10-19, D-
D-16
SET-RESET button, DM-F PROFIsafe
D-17
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address 2-10
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via
SIMOCODE ES 2-11, 14-5
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the
addressing plug 2-11, 14-5
Setting the PROFIsafe address on
DM-F PROFIsafe 14-5
Setting the rated motor current F-4
Setting up in hazardous areas F-8
Settings of the DIP switches
(DM-F Local) 10-19, 10-20
Settings of the DIP switches
(DM-F PROFIsafe) 10-22
Set-up F-3
SFB Glossary-13
SFC Glossary-13
Shock resistance (sine pulse) D-2
Short code 1-90
Short-circuit protection for type of as-
signment 2 according to
IEC 60947-4-1 F-6
Short-circuit protection with fuses for mo-
tor feeders for short-circuit currents up
to 100 kA and 690 V D-24
Signal conditioner 11-15, 11-16, 11-17
Signal conditioner logic modules 11-15
Signal conditioner 1 (and 2, 3, 4) 1-123
Signal conditioner settings 11-17
Signal conditioners 1-21, 11-2
SIMOCODE pro
Index-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Signal types/output responses of non-vola-
tile elements 11-19
SIL (IEC 61508) F-8
SIL (Safety Integrity Level) Glossary-14
SIMATIC Glossary-14
SIMATIC PCS 7 1-28
SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system
1-28
SIMATIC PDM 4-4, 12-3, Glossary-14
SIMATIC PDM (PCS7) 12-2
SIMATIC powercontrol 12-2
SIMATIC S7 1-110, 12-18
SIMOCODE ES 1-109, 2-2, 3-1, 4-1, 4-4,
6-1, 7-1, 8-1, 9-1, 10-1, 10-11, 11-1, 12-1,
12-2, 14-3, 14-9, B-40, Glossary-14
SIMOCODE ES 2007 + SP2 1-28
SIMOCODE ES parameter files 1-110
SIMOCODE ES Premium 12-25
SIMOCODE pro basic unit 1-113
SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD
12-21
SIMOCODE pro object manager
(OM) Glossary-14
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library 1-110,
Glossary-14
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave 12-3,
Glossary-15
SIMOCODE pro V installation
(example) 13-38
Single-phase networks 1-98
Slave Glossary-15
Slave diagnostics 12-10
Slave operating modes 12-17
Smooth running down time 4-64
Snap-on mounting 13-4
Socket assignment table - analog A-12
Socket assignment table - digital A-5
Sockets (analog) 1-112
Sockets (binary) 1-111
Soft starter 1-13, 1-19, 4-14, 4-60, 4-62,
B-57, E-42, E-43, E-45
Soft starter control 1-30
Soft starter control function 4-59
4-14, 4-64, B-58, E-46, E-47, E-48, E-49
Software 1-28, 1-109
Solenoid valve 1-13, 1-19, 4-14, 4-53,
B-55, E-30, E-31
Solenoid valve control 1-30
Solenoid valve control function 4-51
Specifications A-4, B-5, D-2
Stalled positioner 15-7
Stalled rotor 15-7
Stalled rotor level 3-14
Stalled rotor monitoring 1-13
Stalled rotor protection 1-15, 3-2, 3-14,
Glossary-15
Standard diagnostics 12-7, 12-17
Standard function Glossary-15
Standard functions 1-20, 10-1, 10-2
Standard motor feeders 1-13
Standard rail mounting 13-6, 13-7
Standards F-2
Star contactor 4-33
Star networks 1-97
Star time 4-32, 4-36
Star-delta connection 4-34, 5-2
Star-delta reversing starter 1-19, 4-14,
4-35, B-50, E-16, E-17
Star-delta starter 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 4-14, 4-
4-32, B-49, E-12, E-13, E-14, E-15
Star-delta starter control function 4-30
Star delta reversing starter control
function 4-33
Start-up override 4-17, 5-16
Start-up parameter block 1-73
Start-up parameter block active 15-7
Start-up testing 10-21
States of the status LEDs/contactor cont-
rols during testing 10-6, F-7
Station Glossary-15
Station status 1 12-9
Station status 1 to 3 12-9
Statistical data 14-8, Glossary-15
Statistics/maintenance 1-51
Statistics/maintenance (OPD) 1-44
Status - cooling down period active 15-7
Status - DM-F enabling circuit 15-8
Status - emergency start executed 15-8
Status display 1-51
Status display for PROFIBUS
communication 1-72
Status display motor protection/motor
control (OPD) 1-43
Status information 1-52, 4-12, 4-65, 12-7,
12-11, 12-17, A-2
STEP7 12-18, 12-19, 12-20, Glossary-15
Stop category 0 Glossary-15
Strip lengths 13-12, 13-32
Summation current evaluation 5-2
Summation current transformer 1-7, 1-26
Supplying the inputs 7-5, 7-11
Supplying the inputs of the basic unit
13-13
13-15
DM-F PROFIsafe 13-27
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Index-13
Index
Switch voltage display 1-83
Switching from star to delta 4-30, 4-33,
4-36
Switching the direction of rotation 4-24,
4-33, 4-40, 4-47, 4-62
Switching the direction of travel 4-54
Switching the speed 4-37, 4-40, 4-44,
4-47
System components 1-24, 1-29
System interface 1-24, 13-40
System interface cover 1-27, 1-108, 13-39,
13-42
System interface cover IP54 Glossary-16
System interface, current measuring mo-
dules, current/voltage measuring
modules D-7
System interface, digital modules D-10
System interfaces 13-36, 13-42
System interfaces on basic units, expan-
sion modules, decoupling module, cur-
rent measuring modules and current/
voltage measuring modules 13-39
System interfaces on the digital modules
DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe 13-41
System interfaces on the operator
panel 13-42
System interfaces on the operator panel
and the operator panel with display
13-42
System interfaces, analog module D-19
System interfaces, basic units D-4
System interfaces, decoupling module D-
D-9
System interfaces, DM-F D-12
System interfaces, earth-fault module D-
D-20
System interfaces, operator panel D-22
System interfaces, operator panel with
display D-23
System interfaces, temperature module
D-21
T
T1, T2, T3 1-61, 1-80
Table of contents i
Tables A-1
Target groups 4-1
Technical data D-1
Technical data of the DM-F Local digital
module D-14
Technical data of the DM-F Local and
DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules D-12
Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe
digital module D-17
Technical data of the earth-fault module
D-20
Technical data of the expansion modules
D-10
Technical data of the operator panel with
display D-23
Technical data of the temperature
module D-21
Technical data, analog module D-19
Technical data, decoupling module D-9
Technical data, digital modules D-10
Technical data, operator panel D-22
Telegram description 12-6
Temperature in the sensor measuring
circuits 1, 2 and 3 1-22
Temperature limit 3-15
Temperature module 1-7, 1-16, 1-26, 1-80,
1-99, 1-105, 15-8, Glossary-16
Temperature module - warning level
exceeded 15-8
Temperature module connection
example 13-21
Temperature module inputs 7-1, 7-12,
7-13
(TM inputs) 7-3
Temperature module out of range 15-8
Temperature module pin assignment
13-20
Temperature monitoring 1-16, 1-26,
1-105, 1-128, 3-15, 5-1, Glossary-16
Temperature monitoring (analog) 5-22
Temperature sensor 1-7, 5-22
Temperatures C 1-56
Temperatures F 1-57
Terminal block Glossary-16
Test 1-20, 10-2, F-7
Test 1 (2) 1-125
Test function 10-4, 10-5
Test interval for mandatory testing 5-24
Test phases 10-6, F-7
Test position 10-8
Test position feedback (TPF) 1-20, 10-2,
10-8, 10-9, 15-8, Glossary-16
Test Position Feedback function block
10-8
Test settings 10-6
Test trip 15-8
Test verification documents D-2
Test/Reset 1-85, 10-4
Test/Reset button DM-F 1-101
TEST/RESET button, basic units D-4
Test/Reset buttons 10-11
Thermal motor model 1-22, 1-61, 3-10,
10-5
Thermistor 1-125
Thermistor motor protection (PTC
SIMOCODE pro
Index-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
binary) D-5
Thermistor motor protection with PTC
(binary) 1-13, D-5
Thermistor open circuit 15-8
Thermistor protection 1-15, 3-1, 3-2,
Glossary-16
Thermistor sensor 1-15
Thermistor short circuit 15-8
Thermistor trip level 15-8
Thermistors 3-15
Through-hole opening, current measuring
modules, current/voltage measuring
modules D-8
Through-hole openings 13-30, 13-31
Through-hole technology 1-24, 13-30,
13-31
Through-hole technology up to 200 A
13-30, 13-31
Tightening torques 13-12, 13-32
Time range for permissible starts 5-20
Time range for starts 5-20
Time stamp 1-92, 1-131
Time synchronization 10-26
Time synchronization via
PROFIBUS DP 1-20
Time to trip 1-22, 1-62
Timer 1-21, 1-69, 11-2, 11-10, 11-14
Timer - output 1-69
Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-125
Timer actual value 1-69
Timer logic modules 11-10
Timestamping 1-20, 10-3, 10-26
Timestamping active 1-73
TM inputs 1-125
TN-C system Glossary-16
TN-S system Glossary-16
Torque 4-56
TPF 1-122
Transferring parameters to the basic
unit 2-9
Transformation ratio 13-33
Transformation ratio - active 3-5, 3-6
Transformation ratio - primary 3-6
Transformation ratio - secondary 3-6, 3-7
Trip - Bus 15-9
Trip - PLC/PCS 10-24, 15-9
Trip - Power failure (UVO) 10-16
Trip - Test position feedback (TPF) 10-9
Trip antivalence 15-8
Trip class 3-5, 3-8, F-4
Trip current 1-23
Trip end position 15-9
Trip temporary components 15-9
Tripping characteristic F-4
Tripping temperature F-5
Tripping time 3-5, 3-8
Truth table 2I/1O 1-129, 11-6
Truth table 3I/1O 1-129, 11-3, 11-5
Truth table 5I/2O 1-130, 11-7
Truth tables 1-21, 11-2, 11-4, 11-5
Type of load 3-11
Type of protection EEx e and EEx d F-2
Types of positioner control 4-56
Types of signals 11-16, 11-19
Types of signals/output responses of the
signal conditioners 11-16
U
U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1 1-57,1-60, 1-76
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N 1-57, 1-60, 1-76
Unbalance 15-5
Unbalance level 3-13
Unbalance monitoring 1-13
Unbalance protection 1-15, 3-1, 3-2, 3-13,
Glossary-17
Universal Current (UC) Glossary-17
USB to serial adapter 1-27, 1-107
UVO 1-128
UVO fault 10-15
V
Voltage display 1-83
Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-22
Voltage measurement 1-13, 1-76
Voltage monitoring 1-128
Voltage monitoring 1-16, 5-1, 5-8,
Glossary-17
Voltage monitoring for undervoltage 1-13
W
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA > overshot
15-9
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA< undershot
15-9
Warning level cos phi < 15-9
Warning level I< undershot 15-9
Warning level I> overshot 15-9
Warning level P< undershot 15-9
Warning level P> overshot 15-9
Warning level U< undershot 15-9
Warnings 1-52, 1-83
Warnings (OPD) 1-48
Warranty F-9
Watchdog 1-20, 1-131, 10-2, 10-24, 10-25
Watchdog function block 10-24
Win SIMOCODE DP Converter 1-110
Glossary-17
Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files
1-110
Wiring 13-1, 13-12
Wiring the basic units, expansion modules
and the decoupling module 13-12
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Index-15
Index
Wiring the removable terminals 13-24
Wiring the removable terminals for basic
units 13-14
Wiring the removable terminals of the
digital module 13-46
Writing data 12-3
SIMOCODE pro
Index-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Abbreviations-1
List of abbreviations
Acycl. Acyclic
AM Analog module
AS Alarm switch
AS Auxiliary switch
ATEX "Atmosphre explosible" (explosive atmospheres) according to the ATEX
equipment directive 94/9/EC
AWG American wire gauge
BU Basic unit
CPU Central processing unit
Cycl. Cyclic
DCM Decoupling module
DIP Dual in-line package
DM Digital module
DM-F Failsafe digital module (DM-FL or DM-FP)
DM-FL Digital module Failsafe Local
DM-FP Digital module Failsafe PROFIsafe
DP Distributed peripherals
EEx European norm EXplosion safe: Specifies the protection classes for
categorizing motors for use in potentially explosive areas.
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
ex Explosion proof
FB Feedback
FC Feedback CLOSE
F-CPU Failsafe CPU (controller)
FMS Fieldbus message specification
FO Feedback OFF
GF, CF General fault, control function
GSD Device data
IT Isolation Terre
LC Local control
MM Memory module
NTC Negative temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
OB Organization blocks
OM Object manager for integrating PROFIBUS DP slaves in STEP 7
OP Operator panel
OPO Operational protection OFF
List of Abbreviations
SIMOCODE pro
Abbreviations-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
OSSD Part of the electro-sensitive protective equipment (EPSE) that is connected to
the controller and switches to the OFF state when the sensor component
responds during the specified operation.
PCS Process control system
PD Programming device
PDM Process device manager
PELV Protective extra low voltage
PFD Probability of failure on demand: Probability of a dangerous failure of a safety
function when needed
PFHD Probability of dangerous failure per hour: Mean probability of a dangerous
failure per hour
PL Performance Level
PLC Programmable logic controller
ProdIS Product information system
PTC Positive temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
PZ Pozidriv
SELV Safety extra low voltage
SFB System function block
SFC System function
SIL Safety Integrity Level
TC Torque closed
Th Thermistor
TO Torque open
TPF Test position feedback
UC Universal current
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03 Glossary-1
Glossary
Addressing plug
The addressing plug is necessary to enable the hardware-
based allocation of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit
without a PC/PD.
Analog module (AM)
The analog module offers the option of extending BU2 by
adding optional analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA - 20 mA).
This makes it possible to measure and monitor any arbitrary
process variables which can be mapped onto a 0/4 mA to 20
mA signal. The automation system has free access to the
measured process variables.
ATEX
This is abbreviated from the French "Atmosphre explosible"
(explosive atmospheres).
ATEX is used as a synonym for both EC directives on
explosion protection, specifically the ATEX equipment
directive 94/9/EC and the ATEX workplace directive 1999/92/
EC.
Basic unit (BU)
The basic units are the fundamental components of the
SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are always necessary
when using SIMOCODE pro. They have the same enclosure
width of 45 mm and are equipped with removable terminals.
Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro C device series. It contains the important
motor control functions and motor protection functions.
Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all functions and
fulfills all requirements for motor protection, motor control,
diagnostics and monitoring.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Baud rate
The baud rate is the speed at which data is transferred and
indicates the number of transmitted bits per second (baud
rate = bit rate).
With PROFIBUS DP, baud rates from 9.6 kBaud to 12 MBaud
are possible.
Bus
A common transmission path with which all stations are
connected. It has two defined ends.
With PROFIBUS, the bus is a two-wire cable (copper cable) or
a fiber optic cable.
Bus segment
PROFIBUS DP consists of at least one bus segment. A bus
segment has at least two stations, one of which must be a
DP master. A maximum of 32 stations can be connected to a
bus segment.
Cascade input
Safe single-channel input of a safety relay, e.g. DM-F Local
and DM-F PROFIsafe. This input is evaluated internally as a
sensor signal. If no voltage is applied the safety relay trips the
enabling circuits (outputs) safely.
Class
Unit for the tripping class. Indicates the maximum tripping
time in which SIMOCODE must trip at a current that is 7.2
times the value of the set current I
s
in a cold state (motor
protection according to IEC 60947). If Class 10 is set for
SIMOCODE pro (for example), it is ensured that if a current
that is 7.2 times the set current occurs
the (cold) motor will switch off after 10 seconds. The tripping
class can be set to 8 different settings ranging from Class 5
to Class 40.
Class 1 master
Active stations on PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data exchange
with other stations is characteristic for this type of master.
Typical class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a
PROFIBUS DP connection.
Class 2 master
Optional stations on PROFIBUS DP.
Typical class 2 masters are, for example,
PC/PD devices with the "SIMOCODE ES" software
PDM (PCS7)
PC with "SIMARIS manager" software (power
management).
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Connecting cable
Connecting cables are necessary for connecting the
individual basic units with their current measuring modules
and, if required, with their expansion modules or operator
panels. They are available in various versions and lengths
(ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.5 m; round cable 2.0 m). The
total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m per
system!
Contactor
Electromagnetically actuated low voltage switch with only
one rest position, which is not manually operated and can
make, carry or break currents under normal circuit conditions
including operating overload conditions.
A contact system comprises main and auxiliary contacts (NC
contacts and NO contacts). Main contacts can switch
currents of several hundred amps (depending on the size of
the contactor), while auxiliary contacts are only suitable for
low currents.
Control functions
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are
used for controlling load feeders. They are characterized by
the following important features:
Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process (no current
flows in the main circuit without the ON command)
Monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main
circuit without the ON command)
Monitoring the ON status
Tripping if a fault occurs.
Control stations
Control stations are places from which control commands are
issued to the motor. The "Control Stations" function block is
used for administration, switching and prioritization of these
different control stations. SIMOCODE pro allows the parallel
administration of up to four different control stations.
Dependent on the control function, up to 5 different control
commands can be transmitted from every control station to
SIMOCODE pro.
Local control, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control
commands via pushbuttons.
PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the
automation system (remote).
PC, control commands are issued via an operator control
station or via PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES
software.
Operator panel/operator panel with display, control
commands are issued via the buttons of the operator
panel/operator panel with display in the switchgear cabinet
door.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Cooling down period
The cooling down period is the amount of time that must
elapse before an overload trip can be reset. This is usually
5 minutes.
Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time
extend the specified time correspondingly.
Cos phi monitoring
Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive
loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous
motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that
fluctuate significantly. The measuring principle for the power
factor (cos phi) is based on the evaluation of the phase
displacement between voltage and current in one phase.
Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring.
Thus, impending irregularities in the system can be detected
in good time: If a current limit is exceeded but still below the
overload limit, it can, for example, indicate a dirty filter on a
pump, or an increasingly sluggish motor bearing. If the
current limit is undershot, it can be the first sign of a worn-
out drive motor belt.
Current measuring modules are used together with the basic
units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device
series.
The current measuring module must be selected according to
the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of
the motor). The current measuring modules cover current
ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with intermediate
transformers up to 820 A.
The SIMOCODE pro V device series allows a current/voltage
measuring module to be used instead of a current measuring
module.
In addition to measuring the motor current, current/voltage
measuring modules also enable:
Monitoring voltages up to 690 V
Calculation and monitoring of power and cos phi
Monitoring of the phase sequence.
Decoupling module
A module for connection in series upstream from a current/
voltage measuring module to the system interface when
voltage and power measurements are implemented in non-
earthed networks.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Device data (GSD file)
Information on the input and output range, as well as the
consistency of the cyclically transmitted data is defined in the
device data file (GSD file), tested with the configuration
telegram from the device and, if appropriate, declared to be
valid. It is used for integrating the device into SIMATIC S7 or
any standard DP master system (automation system).
Digital module (DM)
Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the
types and number of binary inputs and outputs on basic unit
2 as applicable.
A maximum of 2 digital modules can be connected to one
basic unit 2. All versions can be combined with each other.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of
twelve binary inputs and seven binary outputs.
Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
The failsafe digital modules DM-F Local and
DM-F PROFIsafe are used as safety relays in EMERGENCY
STOP mechanisms according to EN 418 and in safety circuits
according to EN 60204 (11.98):
Digital module DM-F Local:
For applications that require local safety-oriented tripping
with EMERGENCY OFF buttons.
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:
For applications that require decentralized, safety-oriented
tripping with EMERGENCY OFF buttons. A failsafe SIMATIC
controller adopts the logical connection between the
EMERGENCY OFF button and the failsafe digital module
PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe).
DIP switch
Small switch that allows basic settings to be carried out. DIP
stands for dual in-line package i.e. a design with two parallel
terminal rows.
Door adapter
The door adaptor is necessary for making the system
interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessible
location (e.g. front panel), thus enabling fast
parameterization.
DP master
A master which works with the DP protocol according to the
EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Cyclic send data is exchanged between the DP master and
the DP slave once in every DP cycle. The DP master sends
the cyclic receive data to SIMOCODE pro. In response,
SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to the DP master.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
DP slave/DP standard slave
A slave which is operated on the PROFIBUS with the
PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50
170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
The earth-fault module offers the option of implementing
powerful external earth-fault monitoring in connection with
the 3UL22 summation current transformer (making it
possible to evaluate rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and 1
A). In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring function
which is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V
can be extended by an additional and more precise external
earth-fault monitoring system.
SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase
currents. By evaluating the summation current of the three
current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a
possible fault current or earth fault.
There is a difference between internal and external earth-fault
monitoring:
Internal earth-fault monitoring:
Internal earth-fault monitoring via current measuring modules
or current/voltage measuring modules is only possible for
motors with a 3-phase connection in networks that are either
grounded directly or with low impedance.
The basic unit uses the total current to detect a possible fault
current/earth-fault current.
External earth-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V:
External earth-fault monitoring via a summation current
transformer and an earth-fault module is normally used for
networks that are grounded with high impedance.
The earth-fault module (EM) evaluates rated fault currents
using an externally connected summation current
transformer (e.g 3UL22).
Emergency start
Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from
SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This allows the
motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This
function can be used to:
Enable an immediate restart/reset after an overload trip
Control the operation of the thermal memory (motor
model) during operation, if required.
Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, this function
cannot permanently affect the thermal motor model.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
EMERGENCY STOP
Stop in an emergency according EN 418 (ISO 13850).
Operation intended to stop a dangerous process or
movement as quickly as possible in an emergency.
EMERGENCY-STOP command device
Contact block (EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton
according to EN 418 (ISO 13850), cable-operated switch with
positive opening contacts according to EN 60204-1) that
causes the process, machine or plant to be stopped when
actuated in hazardous situations. This must have positively-
opening contacts, be easy to reach and be tamper-proof.
EMERGENCY-STOP device
A protective device for initiating the appropriate procedure in
an emergency according to EN 418 (ISO 13850) and
EN 60204-1
Enabling circuit
An enabling circuit generates a safety-oriented output signal.
To the outside enabling circuits function as NO contacts
(from the functional perspective safety-oriented opening is
always considered). A single enabling circuit that is designed
to be internally redundant in the safety relay (two-channel)
can be implemented for Category 3/4 according to EN_954-
1 (EN ISO 13849-1:2006).
European norm EXplosion safe (EEx)
European norm EXplosion safe: Specifies the protection
classes for categorizing motors for use in hazardous areas.
Expansion modules
Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion
modules are available:
Digital module (DM)
Analog module (AM)
Temperature module (TM).
All expansion modules have the same design with an
enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2
system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable
terminals.
Factory settings
The factory settings are used to reset all parameters of a
device to the default settings to which they were set at the
factory.
The factory settings can be restored using the "TEST/RESET"
button on the basic unit or via the SIMOCODE ES software.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Feedback circuit
Monitors activated actuators (e.g. relays or contactors with
positively-driven contacts). The evaluation unit can only be
activated if the feedback circuit is closed. Note: NC contacts
of the monitored relays that are connected in series are
integrated in the feedback circuit of the safety relay. If a
contact welds in the enabling current path, it is no longer
possible to re-activate the safety relay because the feedback
circuit remains open.
Fieldbus
Industrial communication system that connects a multitude
of field devices such as probes (sensors), actuators and
drives with a control device.
Field/field level
The field level or field is separate to the higher-level control
level in automation and the individual sensors and actuators
can be found here.
Function block
Defined group of functions that can be freely-parameterized
by the user and connected to other function blocks in order to
create a complete branched logic system. This means
conventional wired control circuits containing auxiliary relays
and time relays can be completely replaced.
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor
feeder independently of the automation system. Even if the
automation system (PLC) fails, or if communication is
disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and
controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being
connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can easily be connected
later, if required.
I/O devices
The term I/O devices is used in automation to refer to
peripheral devices, for example, devices that are connected
to centralized controls.
IT system
The IT system (FR Isol Terre) is a specific type of ground
connection for increased failsafe protection in case of
isolation faults.
Logic module
Logical operations, time relay functions and counter functions
are implemented using logic modules.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Low voltage
All voltage levels used for the distribution of electricity which
are located in a range whose upper limit in AC networks is
generally 1000 V.
Master
PROFIBUS DP is based on a master slave architecture.
Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station
(slave) and are answered by it in return.
Memory module
The memory module is plugged into the system interface and
is used for fast reading in or out of the entire SIMOCODE pro
parameterization, e.g. if a unit is exchanged.
Monitoring 0/4-20 mA
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog
signals of a transducer (standard 0/4 - 20 mA output signal).
The analog signals are fed to the "0/4 - 20 mA" function block
via the analog module.
The following monitoring functions
Voltage monitoring
Cos phi monitoring
Monitoring 0/4 A - 20 mA
Temperature monitoring (analog)
Operate "in the background" in the same way as motor
protection and motor control. They can be active or not,
according to the control function selected.
Monitoring the number of starts
Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts
(motors and switching devices such as soft starters and
converters) from too many start processes within a
parameterizable time frame and, thus, prevent damage. This
is particularly useful for commissioning or manual control.
Monitoring voltage
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage
monitoring of either a three-phase network or a one-phase
network for freely selectable limits, direction of rotation (for
AC) or readiness to start.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning
level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage measuring is carried out using current/voltage
measuring modules.
Motor protection
The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-
dependent motor protection:
Overload protection
Thermistor protection.
Motor stop time monitoring
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the stop times of a motor in
order to avoid plant down times due to failed motors caused
by either running too long (wearing out) or being stopped for
too long.
Operating hours monitoring
The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the
operating hours (service life) of a motor to be recorded so
that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good
time as applicable.
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop
times of a motor and restrict the number of start-ups in a
defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to
failed motors caused by running or being stopped for too
long.
Operational Protection OFF (OPO)
The "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block puts
the positioner into a safe position and switches the motor off.
Operator panel (OP)
The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the
switchgear cabinet. It contains all the status LEDs which are
on the basic units, the "TEST/RESET" button and the external
system interface.
It can be used with both the SIMOCODE pro C device series
and the SIMOCODE pro V device series.
Operator panel (OPD)
The operator panel with display can be used as an alternative
to the standard operator panel (OP).
It displays the current measured values, operating and
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
diagnostic data, status information for the motor feeder at
the switchgear cabinet and the device-internal error protocol.
It also contains all the status LEDs that are present on the
basic unit and facilitates access to the system interface from
outside the switchgear cabinet. Its keys can be used to
control the motor and to navigate the display menu.
The operator panel with display can only be used in
combination with basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from
version *E03* onwards.
Organization blocks
Organization blocks form the interface between the CPU
operating system and the user program. The order that the
user program is processed in is specified in the organization
blocks.
Overload protection
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors
according to IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8
different settings, ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.
Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response
of the motor when tripped under normal operating conditions
(not in the case of an overload trip). After this interval, the
thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold
start is possible. This makes frequent start-ups possible
within a short period of time.
Performance Level (PL)
According to the standard EN ISO 13849-1 "a distinct level
specifying the capability of safety-relevant parts of a control to
execute a safety function under predictable conditions". Five
Performance Levels are specified (a to e) with defined ranges of
the probability of a dangerous failure per hour.
PL "e" corresponds to SIL 3 and is specified as the highest level.
PC cable
The PC cable is used to connect the serial interface of the PC
to the system interface of a basic unit for device
parameterization.
Pozidriv (PZ)
Type of fixing screws and cross-tip screwdrivers.
Process automation
Automation of continuous production processes.
Controls manufacturing processes e.g. in the chemical
processing or water industry.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
PROFIBUS
Process field bus, European process and fieldbus standard as
defined in the PROFIBUS standard (EN 50 170, Volume 2,
PROFIBUS).
It lays down the functional, electrical and mechanical
properties for a bit-serial fieldbus system.
PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks PROFIBUS-
compatible automation systems and field devices at the cell
and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the DP
(decentralized peripherals), FMS (fieldbus message
specification), PA (process automation) or TF (technological
functions) protocol.
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized
peripherals).
The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange
between the central DP devices and the I/O devices.
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface
(SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the basic units).
PROFIBUS DPV1
Expansion of the DP protocol.
This enables acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic,
receive and test data.
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines
For PROFIBUS networks, the PROFIBUS DP/FMS installation
guidelines from the PROFIBUS User Organization must be
adhered to. They contain important information about the
cable routing and commissioning of PROFIBUS networks.
PROFINET
Automation standard for Industrial Ethernet.
PROFIsafe
The PROFIBUS safety profile (PROFIsafe) specifies the
communication between failsafe I/O devices and failsafe
controllers. It is based on the standard for safety-oriented
applications and the experiences of PLC users and
manufacturers in the PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO).
The PROFIsafe profile is certified by the TV and the IFA
(Institute for Occupational Safety and Health of the German
Social Accident Insurance). The newest version of the
PROFIsafe specification is the Profile for Safe Technology
V1.11 from July 2001.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Programmable logic controller (PLC)
A controller whose functions are stored as a program on the
control device. The PLC consists of a CPU, memory, input/
output modules and an internal bus system. The I/O devices
and the programming language are based on the needs of the
control engineering.
Programming device
A compact and transportable PC, suitable for industrial
purposes. It is characterized by a special hardware and
software configuration for SIMATIC programmable logic
controllers.
Protective extra low voltage (PELV)
Protective measure against electric shock (previously
"protective extra low voltage with safe isolation").
Active components and exposed conductive parts may be
grounded and connected to the protective conductor in
contrast to SELV. Safe isolation means that the primary circuit
of the transformer must be isolated from the secondary
circuit by means of double or reinforced insulation. PELV is
used where active low voltage conductors or exposed
conductive parts must be grounded. This is the case, for
example, if equipotential bonding is required to prevent
sparks in containers and hazardous areas. However
dangerous leakage currents can flow over the exposed
conductive parts through the enclosure ground (independent
of the low voltage), if faults occur in the higher-level network.
SELV
Safety extra low voltage
Low electric voltage (up to 50 V AC or 120 V DC), that offers
significant protection against electric shock due to its low
value and insulation.
Devices that are operated with SELV and do not generate
high voltages are categorized as Class III according to DIN EN
61140 (VDE 0140-1).
SFB
System function block
A block integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that can
be called like a function block (FB) in the user program if
required.
SFC
System function:
A function integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that
can be called like a function (FC) in the user program if
required.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
SIL (Safety Integrity Level)
A measure of the safety-related performance of electric and
electronic control equipment defined in IEC 61508.
The IEC standard details four SIL levels (SIL1 to SIL4) that
define safety requirements for electric and electronic
devices. The specified safety-related function in the event of
a fault is expressed by the SIL value.
SIMATIC
Term for industrial automation products and systems from
Siemens AG.
SIMATIC PDM
You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMATIC PDM
(Process Device Manager) software.
The following options are available:
SIMATIC PDM as a stand-alone program
PDM integrated into STEP 7.
SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for
SIMOCODE pro, and runs on a PC/PD with Windows XP or
Windows 7 Ultimate and Professional.
SIMOCODE pro object manager (OM)
Part of SIMOCODE ES. When SIMOCODE ES and
SIMOCODE pro object manager are installed on a PC/PD,
SIMOCODE ES can be called directly from STEP 7 HW
Config. This enables simple and complete SIMATIC S7
configuration.
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library is used to connect
SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control
system. It contains:
The corresponding diagnostics and driver modules
containing the respective diagnostics and driver concept of
SIMATIC PCS 7
The elements (symbols and faceplates) necessary for
operating and monitoring.
Note
The PCS 7 libraries are subject to continual maintenance and
improvement.
Current service packs and hotfixes can be downloaded at
http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software
Downloads.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro S7 Slave
The SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a special slave that has the
following characteristics:
It supports the S7 model (diagnostic alarms, process
alarms)
It can be parameterized.
Slave
PROFIBUS DP is based on a master slave architecture.
Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station
(slave) and are answered by it in return.
After the motor current overshoots an adjustable blocking
limit (current limit), a definable and delayable response can
be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor
can be set to switch off quickly independently of the overload
protection. The stalled rotor protection is only active after the
parameterized class time has elapsed, e.g. for Class 10 after
10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and
mechanical loads as well as premature aging of the motor.
Standard function
Standard functions are typical motor functions that can be
activated according to need and, as applicable, individually
set for each motor feeder.
They are already available, work independently of the
selected control function and can be used/activated as
optional additions.
Station
A device which can send, receive or amplify data via the bus,
e.g. master, slave.
Statistical data
SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available which can be
read out with SIMOCODE ES under Target System >
Service Data/Statistical Data (for example).
STEP7
Engineering system Contains programming languages for
creating user programs for SIMATIC S7 controls.
Stop category 0
Non-controlled shutdown by immediately switching off the
power to the machine's drive elements.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
System interface cover IP54
Cover to protect the system interface on the door adaptor or
on the operator panel/operator panel with display from soiling
or to seal it.
The temperature module offers the option of expanding the
SIMOCODE pro V device series using an analog temperature
monitoring system. With this, up to three analog sensor
measuring circuits (two-wire or three-wire systems) can be
connected. The temperatures recorded can be fully
integrated into the process, can be monitored and are also
available for a higher-level automation system. You can, for
example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the
motor windings, bearings, coolant or gear box oil.
SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor types (NTC,
KTY83/84, PT100 and PT1000) for use with hard, fluid or
gaseous media.
See temperature module (TM).
Terminal block
Insulating component with one or more insulated terminals
for fixing to a support.
Test position feedback (TPF)
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is
isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is
connected.
The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this state.
This means the motor feeder is tested without a current in
the main circuit.
Thermistor protection
The basic units (BU1 and BU2) also make it possible to
connect thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the
motor temperature.
TN-C system
In a TN-C system (FR Terre Neutre Combin) 1 wire is used
simultaneously as a protective earth (PE) and neutral wire (N).
TN-S system
In a TN-S system (FR Terre Neutre Spar) the neutral wire
and the protective earth are led separately from the
transformer up to the appliance.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and
transmitted to the control system. A definable and delayable
response can be tripped when an adjustable limit has been
overshot. If phase unbalance is greater than 50%, a reduction
in the tripping time according to the overload characteristic
curve takes place automatically, since the heat development
in motors increases under asymmetrical conditions.
Universal current (UC)
Universal current Feature of devices that can be operated
with both AC and DC current.
Voltage monitoring
See monitoring voltage
Software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP
parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES
parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
To
SIEMENS AG
I IA CE MK&ST 3
92220 Amberg, Germany
Fax: ++49 9621/ 80-3337
SIMOCODE pro Manual
Did you notice any mistakes while reading this manual?
Please use this reply sheet to inform us about them.
We are grateful for your comments and suggestions.
From (please complete)
Name
Company/Department
Address
Telephone
Fax

www.siemens.com/automation
Subject to change without prior notice
Order No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0

Siemens AG 2011
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 23 55
90713 FRTH
GERMANY
Service & Support
Internet:
Newsletter always up to date:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/newsletter
E-Business in the Industry Mall:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/mall
ATEX:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/atex
Certificates:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/approvals
Contact for all technical information:
Technical Assistance
Tel.: +49 (911) 895-5900
E-Mail: technical-assistance@siemens.com
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance

System Manual SIMOCODE Pro en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

System Manual SIMOCODE Pro en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Motor Management and

Can only be mounted

Can only be mounted

Current/voltage measuring module

Decoupling module (DCM)

Additional analog value

Green Communication with

You might also like